HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual

LASERJET ENTERPRISE M855
LASERJET ENTERPRISE FLOW MFP M880
Troubleshooting Manual
M855dn M855xh M855x+
M880z M880z+
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and
flow MFP M880
Troubleshooting Manual
Copyright and License Trademark Credits
2013 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Adobe, Adobe Photoshop, Acrobat, and

Development Company, L.P. PostScript are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
prohibited, except as allowed under the Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.
copyright laws. and other countries. iPod is a trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc. iPod is for legal or
The information contained herein is subject rightholder-authorized copying only. Don't
to change without notice. steal music.
The only warranties for HP products and Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, and
services are set forth in the express Windows Vista are U.S. registered
warranty statements accompanying such trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an PANTONE is Pantone, Inc's check-
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable standard trademark for color.
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein. UNIX is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Part number: A2W77-90998
Edition 1, 11/2013
Conventions used in this guide
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging
the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal
injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
1 Theory of operation ........................................................................................................................................... 1

Basic operation ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Sequence of operation ......................................................................................................... 3
Normal sequence of operation ............................................................................ 3
Formatter-control system ..................................................................................................................... 4
Formatter hardware ............................................................................................................. 4
Sleep mode ......................................................................................................... 4
Input/output ......................................................................................................... 5
CPU ..................................................................................................................... 5
Memory ............................................................................................................... 5
Firmware ............................................................................................................. 5
Nonvolatile memory ............................................................................................ 5
PJL overview ....................................................................................................... 6
PML ..................................................................................................................... 6
Control panel ....................................................................................................................... 6
Engine-control system .......................................................................................................................... 7
DC controller ........................................................................................................................ 8
Motors ............................................................................................................... 12
Fans .................................................................................................................. 14
Automatic damp paper detection ...................................................................... 14
Low-voltage power supply ................................................................................................. 15
Over-current/over-voltage protection ................................................................ 17
Sleep mode operation ....................................................................................... 18
High-voltage power supply ................................................................................................ 19
Fuser bias ......................................................................................................... 20
Fuser-control circuit ........................................................................................................... 21
Fuser heater protection ..................................................................................... 23
Fuser identification ............................................................................................ 25
Fuser-life detection ............................................................................................ 25
Laser/scanner system ........................................................................................................................ 26
Image-formation system ..................................................................................................................... 27
Image-formation process ................................................................................................... 28
ENWW v
Step 1: Pre-exposure ........................................................................................ 29
Step 2: Primary charging ................................................................................... 29
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure ........................................................................... 30
Step 4: Development ......................................................................................... 30
Step 5: Primary transfer .................................................................................... 31
Step 6: Secondary transfer ............................................................................... 31
Step 7: Separation ............................................................................................ 32
Step 8: Fusing ................................................................................................... 32
Step 9: ITB cleaning .......................................................................................... 33
Step 10: Drum cleaning ..................................................................................... 33
Toner cartridge .................................................................................................................. 34
Imaging drum ..................................................................................................................... 36
Developing roller engagement and disengagement .......................................... 38
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit ................................................................................... 39
Primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement .................................. 40
ITB unit detection .............................................................................................. 42
Secondary-transfer roller unit ............................................................................................ 43
Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 44
Calibration overview .......................................................................................... 45
Color-misregistration control ............................................................................. 46
Image stabilization control ................................................................................. 46
Color sensor and color-sensor sensor control (M855 only) ............................................... 48
Gray-axis correction .......................................................................................... 49
Scanning/image capture system ........................................................................................................ 50
Scanner ............................................................................................................................. 50
Document feeder system ................................................................................................... 51
Document feeder sensors ................................................................................. 52
Document feeder simplex operation ................................................................. 53
Document feeder duplex operation ................................................................... 55
Document feeder paper control and deskew .................................................... 57
Document feeder paper pick and separation .................................................... 58
Document feeder paper stopper and fins .......................................................... 59
Document feeder simplex selector .................................................................... 60
Document feeder white backing ........................................................................ 60
Document feeder duplex selector ..................................................................... 61
Document feeder hinge ..................................................................................... 63
Pickup, feed, and delivery system ...................................................................................................... 65
Photo sensors and switches .............................................................................................. 65
Motors and solenoids ......................................................................................................... 68
Pickup-and-feed system .................................................................................................... 70
Cassette pickup ................................................................................................. 71
vi ENWW
Cassette paper-size and cassette-presence detection ..................... 71
Cassette lift operation ....................................................................... 74
Cassette paper-level and paper-presence detection ........................ 75
Multifeed prevention ......................................................................... 76
Multipurpose tray pickup ................................................................................... 76
Multipurpose tray last-paper detection ............................................. 77
Paper feed ......................................................................................................... 78
Skew-feed prevention ....................................................................... 80
Paper-type detection ........................................................................ 80
Feed-speed control ........................................................................... 81
Media width detection ....................................................................................... 82
Fusing and delivery unit ..................................................................................................... 83
Loop control ...................................................................................................... 83
Fuser depressurize control ................................................................................ 85
Duplexing unit .................................................................................................................... 87
Duplexing reverse and feed control .................................................................. 88
Jam detection .................................................................................................................... 89
1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder ............................................. 92
1x500- and 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-
presence detection ............................................................................................................ 92
Paper feeder electrical components .................................................................................. 94
Paper-feeder pickup-and-feed operation ........................................................................... 97
Paper feeder jam detection ................................................................................................ 98
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder ................................................................................... 101
HCI electrical components ............................................................................................... 102
HCI motor control ............................................................................................................. 103
HCI motor failure detection ............................................................................. 104
HCI pickup-and-feed operation ........................................................................................ 105
HCI electrical components .............................................................................. 105
HCI lift-up operation ........................................................................................ 107
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ............. 107
HCI jam detection ............................................................................................................ 108
Intermediate paper transportation unit ............................................................................................. 110
IPTU electrical components ............................................................................................. 110
IPTU motor control ........................................................................................................... 111
Feed operation ................................................................................................ 111
IPTU motor failure detection ........................................................................... 112
IPTU fan control ............................................................................................................... 112
IPTU fan failure detection ................................................................................ 112
IPTU jam detection .......................................................................................................... 113
Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch ........................................................................ 114
ENWW vii
Stapler/stacker electrical components ............................................................................. 116
Stapler/stacker motor control ........................................................................................... 121
Stapler/stacker motor failure detection ............................................................ 121
Stapler/stacker feed-and-delivery operation .................................................................... 122
Stapler/stacker basic operation ....................................................................... 124
Stapler/stacker electrical circuitry ................................................... 124
Stapler/stacker feed drive system ................................................................... 126
Paper delivery path (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) ............... 127
Stack operation ............................................................................................... 130
Output bin operation ....................................................................... 130
Process output bin paper-stacking operation ................................. 133
Shutter operation ............................................................................ 133
Stack delivery operation .................................................................................. 134
Offset operation ............................................................................................... 134
Stack trailing-edge assist operation ................................................................ 136
Intermediate-process output-bin assembly ..................................................... 136
Stack job offset ............................................................................... 136
Stapler/stacker delivery modes ....................................................................... 137
Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes .......................... 138
Staple operation .............................................................................................. 138
Shift the staple unit .......................................................................................... 143
Hole puncher assembly ................................................................................... 145
Side registration operation .............................................................. 146
Hole punching operation (2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly) .......... 147
Hole punching operation (2-hole/4-hole hole puncher assembly) . . 149
Stapler/stacker additional functions ................................................................ 151
Stapler/stacker jam detection .......................................................................................... 152
Hole puncher assembly jam detection ............................................................ 153
Stapler/stacker assembly jam detection .......................................................... 154
Stapler/stacker assembly inlet delay jam ....................................... 155
Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch .......................................................................... 156
Booklet maker power supply ............................................................................................ 158
Stacker unit power supply route ...................................................................... 158
Stacker unit protective function ....................................................................... 158
Booklet maker unit power-supply route ........................................................... 158
Booklet maker unit protective function ............................................................ 159
Booklet maker electrical components .............................................................................. 160
Booklet maker motor control ............................................................................................ 164
Booklet maker motor failure detection ............................................................. 164
Booklet maker feed-and-delivery operation ..................................................................... 165
Basic operation ............................................................................................... 165
viii ENWW
Stacker unit basic operation ........................................................... 165
Stacker unit electrical security ........................................................ 165
Booklet maker unit basic operation ................................................ 167
Booklet maker unit electrical circuitry ............................................. 168
Feed drive system .......................................................................... 168
Booklet maker paper delivery path .................................................................. 174
Booklet maker basic operation ........................................................................ 175
Booklet maker control of the inlet flappers ...................................................... 178
Booklet maker control of paper movement ..................................................... 181
Booklet maker alignment of paper .................................................................. 183
Booklet maker control of the crescent roller .................................................... 186
Booklet maker folding ...................................................................................... 187
Booklet maker fold the stack .......................................................... 188
Booklet maker double folding a stack ............................................. 190
Booklet maker intermediate-process-tray assembly ....................................... 192
Stack job offset ............................................................................... 192
Booklet maker staple operation ....................................................................... 194
Stapler unit ..................................................................................... 194
Stapling operation ........................................................................... 196
Stitcher (stapler) unit ...................................................................... 200
Booklet maker stack operation ........................................................................ 201
Output bin operation ....................................................................... 201
Shutter operation ............................................................................ 204
Booklet maker paper-delivery path ................................................................. 205
Booklet maker delivery modes ........................................................................ 205
Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes ........................... 206
Booklet maker jam detection ........................................................................................... 206
2 Solve problems ............................................................................................................................................. 207

Solve problems checklist .................................................................................................................. 208
Menu map ........................................................................................................................................ 211
Preboot menu options ...................................................................................................................... 212
Current settings pages ..................................................................................................................... 219
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................. 220
Determine the problem source ........................................................................................ 220
Troubleshooting flowchart ............................................................................... 220
Power subsystem ............................................................................................................ 221
Power-on checks ............................................................................................. 221
Power-on troubleshooting overview ............................................... 221
Scanning subsystem (M880) ........................................................................................... 222
Control panel checks ....................................................................................................... 222
ENWW ix
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts ................................................................ 226
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) ................................. 227
Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to
respond ........................................................................................... 228
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ........................................ 229
No control panel sound ................................................................... 230
Home button is unresponsive ......................................................... 231
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control
panel functional) ............................................................................. 232
Tools for troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 233
Individual component diagnostics .................................................................................... 233
LED diagnostics .............................................................................................. 233
Understand lights on the formatter ................................................. 233
Engine diagnostics .......................................................................................... 238
Defeating interlocks ........................................................................ 238
Disable cartridge check .................................................................. 239
Engine test button ........................................................................... 240
Paper path test ................................................................................................ 240
Paper path sensors test .................................................................................. 241
Manual sensor and tray/bin manual sensor tests ............................................ 243
Manual sensor test ......................................................................... 243
Tray/bin manual sensor test ........................................................... 247
Print/stop test .................................................................................................. 250
Component tests ............................................................................................. 250
Control panel tests .......................................................................... 250
Component test (special-mode test) ............................................... 250
Finishing accessory component test .............................................. 254
Scanner tests M880 ........................................................................................ 287
Scanner tests .................................................................................. 287
Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 289
Block diagrams ................................................................................................ 289
Location of connectors .................................................................................... 303
DC controller PCA connectors ........................................................ 303
High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors ......... 307
1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA
connectors ...................................................................................... 309
Finishing accessories PCA connectors .......................................... 311
Plug/jack locations .......................................................................................... 316
Locations of major components ...................................................................... 318
Base product .................................................................................. 318
High-capacity input (HCI) feeder .................................................... 321
x ENWW
Finishing accessories ..................................................................... 327
General timing chart ........................................................................................ 333
Circuit diagrams .............................................................................................. 335
Internal print-quality test pages ........................................................................................ 349
Print-quality troubleshooting pages ................................................................. 349
Fuser test page ............................................................................................... 352
Cleaning page ................................................................................................. 353
Enable and configure auto cleaning ............................................... 353
Print configuration page .................................................................................. 354
Configuration page ......................................................................... 354
HP embedded Jetdirect page ......................................................... 356
Finding important information on the configuration pages .............. 358
Color band test ............................................................................... 359
Print-quality troubleshooting tools .................................................................................... 360
Repetitive defects ruler ................................................................................... 360
Calibrate the product to align the colors .......................................................... 360
Control-panel menus ....................................................................................................... 361
Administration menu ....................................................................................... 361
Reports menu ................................................................................. 361
General Settings menu ................................................................... 363
Copy Settings menu (M880 only) ................................................... 378
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M880) ....................................... 384
Fax Settings menu (M880) ............................................................. 395
General Print Settings menu .......................................................... 408
Default Print Options menu ............................................................ 411
Display Settings menu .................................................................... 413
Manage Supplies menu .................................................................. 415
Manage Trays menu ....................................................................... 420
Network Settings menu .................................................................. 422
Troubleshooting menu .................................................................... 434
Device Maintenance menu .............................................................................. 438
Backup/Restore menu .................................................................... 438
Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880) ................................................. 438
Calibration/Cleaning menu (M855) ................................................. 441
USB Firmware Upgrade menu ....................................................... 442
Service menu .................................................................................. 442
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries .................................................. 442
10.XX.YZ Error Messages .............................................................................. 442
10.0X.00 e-Label Memory Error ..................................................... 442
10.0X.10 e-Label Missing Memory Error ........................................ 443
10.0X.15 Install <supply> (Event Code) ......................................... 444
ENWW xi
10.0X.25 Wrong cartridge in <color> slot ....................................... 444
10.0X.34 Used Supply in use ......................................................... 444
10.0X.35 Incompatible <supply> .................................................... 445
10.0X.40 Genuine HP supplies installed ........................................ 445
10.0X.41 Unsupported Supply in use ............................................. 445
10.0X.70 Printing past very low (EVENT CODE) ........................... 446
10.0X.90 Replace <Color> cartridge .............................................. 446
10.0X.91 Cartridge Error ................................................................ 447
10.0X.92 Cartridge Error ................................................................ 447
10.22.60 (Control Panel Message: Transfer Kit Low) 10.22.69
(Control panel Message: Transfer Kit Very Low) ............................ 447
10.22.70 Printing Past Very Low (Event Code) Transfer Kit .......... 448
10.23.35 Incompatible Supply (event code) Fuser Kit .................... 448
10.23.60 (Control panel Message: Fuser Kit Low) 10.22.69
(Control panel Message: Fuser Kit Very Low) ................................ 448
10.23.70 Printing Past Very Low (Event Code) Fuser Kit ............... 449
10.39.50 New Document Feeder Kit .............................................. 449
10.39.53 ADF kit clean rollers recommended ................................ 449
10.39.55 Clean Document Feeder Rollers ..................................... 449
10.39.56 .......................................................................................... 449
10.39.60 Document Feeder Kit low ................................................ 450
10.39.69 Document Feeder Kit very low ........................................ 450
10.39.70 Scanning past very low .................................................... 450
10.39.71 Document Feeder has stopped ....................................... 450
10.99.91 Cartridge motor stall, no particular cartridge ................... 450
11.00.01 or 11.00.02 Internal clock error ........................................ 451
13.60.Az ......................................................................................... 451
13.60.Dz ......................................................................................... 452
13.60.FF ......................................................................................... 453
13.64.Az ......................................................................................... 454
13.64.Dz ......................................................................................... 454
13.67.Az ......................................................................................... 455
13.67.Dz ......................................................................................... 456
13.67.FF ......................................................................................... 457
13.68.Az ......................................................................................... 457
13.68.Dz ......................................................................................... 458
13.69.Az ......................................................................................... 458
13.69.Dz ......................................................................................... 459
13.84.Az ......................................................................................... 460
xii ENWW
13.89.3z .......................................................................................... 460
13.90.Az ......................................................................................... 461
13.90.Dz ......................................................................................... 461
13.92.FF ......................................................................................... 463
13.94.Az ......................................................................................... 463
13.94.Dz ......................................................................................... 464
13.96.33 .......................................................................................... 464
13.97.33 .......................................................................................... 465
13.98.A3 ......................................................................................... 465
13.98.D3 ......................................................................................... 466
13.A1.A1 ......................................................................................... 466
13.A1.D1 ......................................................................................... 467
13.A1.FF ......................................................................................... 467
13.A2.A2 ......................................................................................... 468
13.A2.D2 ......................................................................................... 468
13.A2.FF ......................................................................................... 469
13.A3.A3 ......................................................................................... 470
13.A3.A3 ......................................................................................... 470
13.A3.D3 ......................................................................................... 471
13.A3.D3 ......................................................................................... 472
13.A3.FF ......................................................................................... 473
13.A3.FF ......................................................................................... 473
13.A4.D4 ......................................................................................... 474
13.A4.D4 ......................................................................................... 475
13.A4.FF ......................................................................................... 475
13.A4.FF ......................................................................................... 476
13.A5.D5 ......................................................................................... 477
13.A5.FF ......................................................................................... 477
13.A7.D3 ......................................................................................... 478
13.A7.D4 ......................................................................................... 479
13.A7.FF ......................................................................................... 479
13.A8.D3 or 13.A8.D4 .................................................................... 480
13.A8.D3 or 13.A8.D4 or 13.A8.D5 ................................................ 481
13.AA.EE ........................................................................................ 482
13.AA.EE ........................................................................................ 482
13.AB.EE ........................................................................................ 483
13.B2.Az ......................................................................................... 483
13.B2.Dz ......................................................................................... 484
13.B2.FF ......................................................................................... 487
13.B4.FF ......................................................................................... 487
13.B9.Az ......................................................................................... 488
ENWW xiii
13.B9.Bz Jam in RIGHT Door. ....................................................... 489
13.B9.Cz ......................................................................................... 490
13.B9.Dz ......................................................................................... 491
13.B9.FF ......................................................................................... 492
13.BA.EE ........................................................................................ 493
13.BB.EE ........................................................................................ 493
13.D1.Az ......................................................................................... 493
13.D1.Dz ......................................................................................... 495
13.D1.FF ......................................................................................... 497
13.D3.Az ......................................................................................... 497
13.D3.Dz ......................................................................................... 498
13.D3.FF ......................................................................................... 500
13.DF.Dz ........................................................................................ 500
13.E1.Dz ......................................................................................... 502
13.E1.FF ......................................................................................... 503
13.E2.Az ......................................................................................... 504
13.E2.Dz ......................................................................................... 505
13.E3.Az ......................................................................................... 507
13.E3.Dz ......................................................................................... 508
13.E34Az ........................................................................................ 510
13.E4.Dz ......................................................................................... 511
13.E6.Dz ......................................................................................... 512
13.E6.FF ......................................................................................... 514
13.EA.EE ........................................................................................ 515
13.FF.FF ......................................................................................... 515
30.01.01 .......................................................................................... 515
30.01.06 .......................................................................................... 516
30.01.08 .......................................................................................... 516
30.01.14 .......................................................................................... 517
30.01.15 .......................................................................................... 517
30.01.18 .......................................................................................... 517
30.01.19 .......................................................................................... 518
30.01.23 Scanner calibration failure ............................................... 518
30.01.30 or 30.01.32 ...................................................................... 518
30.01.36 .......................................................................................... 518
30.01.41 .......................................................................................... 519
30.01.42 .......................................................................................... 519
30.01.43 .......................................................................................... 519
30.01.44 .......................................................................................... 519
30.01.45 .......................................................................................... 520
xiv ENWW
30.01.46 .......................................................................................... 520
30.01.47 .......................................................................................... 520
30.01.48 .......................................................................................... 521
30.01.49 .......................................................................................... 521
30.01.50 .......................................................................................... 521
30.03.14 .......................................................................................... 521
30.03.20 .......................................................................................... 522
30.03.22 .......................................................................................... 522
30.03.23 .......................................................................................... 522
30.03.30 .......................................................................................... 522
30.03.45 .......................................................................................... 523
31.03.14 .......................................................................................... 523
31.03.20 .......................................................................................... 523
31.03.22 .......................................................................................... 524
31.03.30 .......................................................................................... 524
31.03.31 .......................................................................................... 524
31.03.32 .......................................................................................... 525
31.03.34 .......................................................................................... 525
31.13.01 .......................................................................................... 525
31.13.02 .......................................................................................... 526
31.13.13 .......................................................................................... 526
31.13.14 .......................................................................................... 527
31.13.15 .......................................................................................... 527
32.08.XX Error Messages ............................................................................... 528
32.08.A1, 32.08.A2, 32.08.A3 ........................................................ 528
32.1C.XX ........................................................................................ 528
40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch OK ............ 533
40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch OK .. 533
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch OK ........... 534
40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch OK ....... 534
40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch
OK ................................................................................................ 534
40.08.0X USB storage accessory removed .................................... 534
40.0X.05 USB storage accessory removed .................................... 534
41.01.YZ ......................................................................................... 535
41.02.00 .......................................................................................... 536
41.03.FZ Unknown Misprint Error ................................................... 536
ENWW xv
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another
tray, touch "Options " ...................................................................... 537
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in tray <X> ........................................... 538
41.04.YZ Printer Error .................................................................... 539
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in tray <X> ........................................... 540
41.06.YZ Error To continue, touch OK ......................................... 541
41.07.YZ Error To continue, touch OK ......................................... 542
41.XX.YZ Error To continue, touch OK ........................................ 543
42.XX.YY Error Messages .............................................................................. 545
42.XX.YY Error Event Log message .............................................. 545
44.XX.XX Error Messages .............................................................................. 545
44.01.XX Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 545
44.11.0E Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 547
44.16.01 Error Event log message (MFP Only) .............................. 548
44.16.0A Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 550
44.16.0B Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 550
44.16.0D Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 551
44.16.0F Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 551
44.16.FF Error Event log message (MFP Only) ............................. 552
xvi ENWW
44.90.XX Error Event log message - 44.91.XX Error Event log
message - 44.92.XX Error Event log message (MFP Only) ........... 552
47.XX.XX Error Messages .............................................................................. 552
47.00.XX ......................................................................................... 552
47.01.XX ......................................................................................... 553
47.02.XX ......................................................................................... 553
47.03.XX ......................................................................................... 553
47.04.XX ......................................................................................... 553
47.05.00 .......................................................................................... 554
47.06.XX ......................................................................................... 554
47.WX.YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue, touch OK ....... 554
48.XX.YY ........................................................................................ 555
49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on .................................. 556
50.WX.YZ Error Messages ............................................................................. 556
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on ....................... 556
51.XX.YZ, 52.XX.YZ Error Messages ............................................................. 562
51.00.YZ ......................................................................................... 562
52.00.00/52.00.20 Scanner Startup/Rotation error ......................... 562
54.00.01 (EVENT LOG ONLY) ....................................................... 563
54.00.18 .......................................................................................... 563
54.00.19 .......................................................................................... 563
54.01.05 (EVENT LOG ONLY) ....................................................... 563
54.02.05 (EVENT LOG ONLY) ....................................................... 564
54.03.05 (EVENT LOG ONLY) ....................................................... 564
54.06.21 or 54.07.21 (EVENT LOG ONLY) .................................... 564
54.0X.0B or 54.0X.0C or 54.0X.0B or 54.0X.0C: (EVENT LOG
ONLY) ............................................................................................. 565
54.14.00 (EVENT LOG ONLY) ....................................................... 565
55.XX.YZ, 56.XX.YZ Error Messages ............................................................. 565
55.00.01, 55.00.03, 55.00.04 DC controller error ........................... 565
55.01.06, 55.02.06 DC controller error ........................................... 566
56.00.YY Error ................................................................................ 566
57.00.01 Error To continue turn off then on .................................... 566
ENWW xvii
57.00.11 .......................................................................................... 569
57.00.12 .......................................................................................... 570
59.00.90 or 59.00.A0 ...................................................................... 570
59.00.C0 ......................................................................................... 570
59.00.F0 ......................................................................................... 571
59.0X.50 ......................................................................................... 571
59.0X.60 ......................................................................................... 572
59.0X.70 ......................................................................................... 573
59.0X.80 ......................................................................................... 574
59.A2.02 ......................................................................................... 574
59.A3.03 ......................................................................................... 575
59.A4.04 ......................................................................................... 575
59.A5.05 ......................................................................................... 576
60.00.0Y, 62.00.00 Error Messages ............................................................... 576
60.00.02 Tray 2 lifting error ............................................................ 576
62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on ........................... 577
65.X0.AZ Error Messages ............................................................................... 578
65.X0.AZ Output accessory Failure ................................................ 578
66.WX.YZ Error Messages ............................................................................. 579
66.00.20 .......................................................................................... 579
66.00.40 .......................................................................................... 579
66.00.50 .......................................................................................... 579
66.00.77 .......................................................................................... 580
66.00.79 .......................................................................................... 580
66.00.8Z ......................................................................................... 581
66.12.46 .......................................................................................... 581
66.40.YZ ......................................................................................... 582
66.50.00 .......................................................................................... 582
66.60.16 .......................................................................................... 582
66.60.25 .......................................................................................... 583
66.60.27 .......................................................................................... 583
66.60.28 .......................................................................................... 584
xviii ENWW
66.60.31 .......................................................................................... 584
66.60.32 .......................................................................................... 585
66.60.33 .......................................................................................... 586
66.60.34 .......................................................................................... 587
66.60.48 .......................................................................................... 588
66.60.50 .......................................................................................... 588
66.80.01 .......................................................................................... 588
66.80.02 .......................................................................................... 589
66.80.03 .......................................................................................... 589
66.80.21 .......................................................................................... 590
66.80.22 .......................................................................................... 590
66.80.23 .......................................................................................... 590
66.80.33 .......................................................................................... 591
66.80.35 .......................................................................................... 591
66.80.36 .......................................................................................... 591
66.80.38 .......................................................................................... 592
66.80.46 .......................................................................................... 593
66.80.51 .......................................................................................... 593
66.80.55 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.56 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.57 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.58 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.59 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.60 .......................................................................................... 594
66.80.61 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.62 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.63 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.64 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.65 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.70 .......................................................................................... 595
66.80.71 .......................................................................................... 596
66.80.72 .......................................................................................... 596
66.80.73 .......................................................................................... 596
66.80.74 .......................................................................................... 596
66.80.75 .......................................................................................... 596
66.80.76 .......................................................................................... 596
66.90.10 .......................................................................................... 597
66.90.29 .......................................................................................... 598
66.90.30 .......................................................................................... 599
66.90.41 .......................................................................................... 599
66.90.42 .......................................................................................... 600
ENWW xix
66.90.43 .......................................................................................... 601
66.90.44 .......................................................................................... 602
66.90.45 .......................................................................................... 603
66.90.49 .......................................................................................... 604
66.90.50 .......................................................................................... 604
69.11.YZ ......................................................................................... 605
80.XX.YY, 82.XX.YY Error Messages ............................................................. 605
80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error .............................................. 605
82.73.46, 82.73.47 .......................................................................... 606
98.0X.0Y Error Messages ............................................................................... 606
98.00.01 or 98.01.00 Corrupt data in firmware volume .................. 606
98.00.02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume ............................... 607
98.00.03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume ......................... 607
98.00.04 Corrupt data in the job data volume ................................ 607
99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt .............................. 607
99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ............... 608
99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk .................... 608
99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ................ 609
99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user ............................................... 609
99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid ......................... 610
99.00.2X ......................................................................................... 611
99.01.XX ......................................................................................... 612
99.02.01 .......................................................................................... 612
99.02.09 .......................................................................................... 612
99.09.60 Unsupported disk ............................................................. 612
99.09.61 Unsupported disk ............................................................. 612
99.09.62 Unknown disk .................................................................. 613
99.09.63 Incorrect disk ................................................................... 613
99.09.64 Disk malfunction .............................................................. 613
99.09.65 Disk data error ................................................................. 613
xx ENWW
99.09.66 No disk installed .............................................................. 613
99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware .............. 614
99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware .............. 614
99.XX.YY ........................................................................................ 614
Alpha Error Messages ..................................................................................... 615
<binname> full Remove all paper from bin ..................................... 615
<Supply> almost full ....................................................................... 615
<Supply> low OR Supplies low ...................................................... 615
<Supply> very low OR Supplies very low ....................................... 616
<Tray X> lifting ............................................................................... 616
[File System] device failure To clear touch OK ............................ 616
[File System] file operation failure To clear touch OK .................. 617
[File System] file system is full To clear touch OK ....................... 617
[File System] is not initialized ......................................................... 617
[File System] is write protected ....................................................... 617
Accept bad signature ...................................................................... 617
ADF not detected ............................................................................ 618
Bad duplexer connection ................................................................ 618
Bad optional tray connection .......................................................... 618
Calibration reset pending ................................................................ 618
Canceling ........................................................................................ 618
Canceling...<jobname> ................................................................... 619
Cartridge Low ................................................................................. 619
Cartridge Memory Abnormal .......................................................... 619
Cartridge Out .................................................................................. 619
Checking engine ............................................................................. 619
Checking paper path ...................................................................... 620
Chosen personality not available To continue, touch OK ............ 620
Clearing event log ........................................................................... 620
Clearing paper path ........................................................................ 620
Close Front door ............................................................................. 620
Close Fuser cover door .................................................................. 621
Close Left door Close Output Accessory Bridge ............................ 621
Close Lower Right door .................................................................. 621
Close output accessory bridge ....................................................... 622
Close Secondary Registration assembly cover .............................. 622
Close stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door .................................. 622
Close Upper Right Door ................................................................. 623
Cooling device ................................................................................ 623
Data received To print last page press OK .................................. 623
Different paper sizes in job ............................................................. 623
ENWW xxi
EIO <X> disk initializing .................................................................. 623
EIO <X> disk not functional ............................................................ 624
EIO <X> disk spinning up ............................................................... 624
Event log is empty .......................................................................... 624
Expected drive missing ................................................................... 624
External device initializing .............................................................. 624
Fax is disabled ignoring call ....................................................... 624
FIM Load Error Send full FIM on <X> port ..................................... 625
Flatbed cover open or Close Flatbed cover .................................... 625
Fuser Kit low ................................................................................... 625
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch OK .................................... 625
Gateways failed .............................................................................. 626
Gateways OK ................................................................................. 626
Genuine HP cartridge installed ....................................................... 626
Genuine HP supply installed .......................................................... 626
HP Secure hard drive disabled ....................................................... 626
Incompatible <Supply> ................................................................... 627
Incompatible supplies ..................................................................... 627
Initializing... ..................................................................................... 627
Install fuser unit .............................................................................. 627
Install supply ................................................................................... 628
Install Transfer Unit ........................................................................ 628
Internal disk device failure To clear touch OK .............................. 628
Internal disk file operation failed ..................................................... 629
Internal disk file system is full ......................................................... 629
Internal disk is write protected ........................................................ 629
Internal disk not found .................................................................... 629
Internal disk not functional .............................................................. 629
Internal disk not initialized .............................................................. 630
Internal disk spinning up ................................................................. 630
Jam in document feeder ................................................................. 630
Job not stapled due to mixed sizes ................................................ 630
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, press OK ..... 630
Loading program <XX> .................................................................. 631
Lower left booklet bin full ................................................................ 631
Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second
side ................................................................................................. 631
Manually feed: <Type><Size> To use another tray, press OK .... 631
Moving solenoid .............................................................................. 632
Moving solenoid and motor ............................................................ 632
No job to cancel .............................................................................. 632
xxii ENWW
Non HP Supply Installed ................................................................. 632
Output Bin Full ................................................................................ 633
Output Device detached ................................................................. 633
Paused... ........................................................................................ 633
Performing Paper Path Test ....................................................... 633
Please Wait... ................................................................................. 633
Printing Configuration... .................................................................. 634
Printing Event Log... ....................................................................... 634
Printing File Directory... .................................................................. 634
Printing Font List... .......................................................................... 634
Printing Fuser Test Page... ............................................................. 634
Printing Help Page... ....................................................................... 634
Printing Menu Map... ...................................................................... 635
Printing stopped .............................................................................. 635
Printing Supplies Status Page... ..................................................... 635
Printing Usage Page... .................................................................... 635
Printingengine test ...................................................................... 635
Processing job from tray <X>...Do not grab paper until job
completes ....................................................................................... 635
Processing... ................................................................................... 636
Processing...copy <X> of <Y> ........................................................ 636
RAM disk device failure To clear touch OK .................................. 636
RAM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK ......................... 636
RAM disk file system is full To clear touch OK ............................. 636
RAM disk is write protected To clear touch OK ............................ 636
RAM disk not initialized .................................................................. 637
Ready ............................................................................................. 637
Ready <IP Address> ...................................................................... 637
Receiving Upgrade ......................................................................... 637
Remove one print cartridge ............................................................ 637
Remove USB accessory ................................................................. 638
Replace <Supply> .......................................................................... 638
Resend external accessory firmware ............................................. 638
Resend Upgrade ............................................................................ 639
Restore Factory Settings ................................................................ 639
ROM disk device failed To clear touch OK .................................. 639
ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK ........................ 639
ROM disk file system is full To clear touch OK ............................ 639
ROM disk is write protected To clear touch OK ........................... 639
ROM disk not initialized To clear touch OK .................................. 640
Rotating Motor ................................................................................ 640
ENWW xxiii
Size mismatch in Tray <X> ............................................................. 640
Sleep mode on ............................................................................... 640
Staple Cartridge 2 and 3 very low (warning) .................................. 640
Staple Cartridge <X> low (warning) ................................................ 641
Staple Cartridge low ....................................................................... 641
Stapler/Stacker staple jam .............................................................. 641
Supplies low ................................................................................... 641
Supply Memory Warning ................................................................ 641
The unit has corrupt data ................................................................ 641
Too many pages in job to staple ..................................................... 642
Too many pages to make booklet .................................................. 642
Tray <X> [type] [size] ...................................................................... 642
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] ....................................................... 642
Tray <X> lifting ............................................................................... 643
Tray <X> open ................................................................................ 643
Tray <X> overfilled ......................................................................... 644
Type mismatch Tray <X> ............................................................... 644
Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch OK ..................... 644
Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To
continue, touch OK ....................................................................... 645
Unsupported tray configuration ...................................................... 645
Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB
accessory ....................................................................................... 645
Upgrade Error ................................................................................. 645
Upper left bin full ............................................................................. 645
USB accessory not functional ......................................................... 646
USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work
properly ........................................................................................... 646
USB is write protected To clear touch OK .................................... 646
USB needs too much power ........................................................... 646
USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off
then On ........................................................................................... 646
USB not initialized .......................................................................... 647
USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data .... 647
USB storage device failure To clear touch OK ............................. 647
USB storage file operation failed To clear touch OK .................... 647
USB storage file system is full To clear touch OK ........................ 647
Used supply installed To continue, touch OK OR Used supply
in use Description ........................................................................... 648
Verifying, Please Wait .................................................................... 648
Waiting for Tray <X> to lift .............................................................. 648
Windows Login Required to Use this Feature ................................ 648
xxiv ENWW
Wrong cartridge in <color> slot ....................................................... 648
Event log messages ........................................................................................................ 649
Print or view an event log ................................................................................ 649
Clear an event log ........................................................................................... 650
Clear jams ........................................................................................................................................ 651
Auto-navigation for clearing jams .................................................................................... 651
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? .............................................................. 651
Jam sensor locations ....................................................................................................... 651
Product base ................................................................................................... 652
Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) ........................................................ 653
1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) ........................................................... 654
3x500-sheet paper feeder ............................................................................... 655
3x500-sheet High-capacity input (HCI) feeder ................................................ 656
Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch ....................................... 657
Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch ......................................... 658
Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser .......................................................... 659
Clear jams in Tray 2 ......................................................................................................... 663
Clear jams in the 3x500-sheet feeder and the lower-right door ....................................... 666
Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity input tray and the lower-right door ............. 669
Clear jams in the document feeder (M880) ..................................................................... 673
Clear output jams in the output-accessory bridge ........................................................... 677
Clear jams in the stapler/stacker accessory or the stapler/stacker with hole punch
accessory ......................................................................................................................... 679
Clear top left door jams in the stapler/stacker ................................................. 679
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the stapler/stacker ..................................................... 682
Clear stapler/stacker connection jams (hole-punch models only) ................... 685
Clear jams in the booklet maker accessory or the booklet maker with hole punch
accessory ......................................................................................................................... 689
Clear top left door jams in the booklet maker .................................................. 689
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the booklet maker ...................................................... 692
Clear front left door jams in the booklet maker ............................................... 695
Clear stapler 2 or 3 jams in the booklet maker ................................................ 701
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed ................................................................................... 706
The product does not pick up paper ................................................................................ 706
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ................................................................ 706
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (M880) ........... 706
Prevent paper jams .......................................................................................................... 707
Use manual print modes .................................................................................................................. 708
Solve image quality problems .......................................................................................................... 712
Image defects table ......................................................................................................... 712
Clean the product ............................................................................................................................. 719
ENWW xxv
Print a cleaning page ....................................................................................................... 719
Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges (M880) ...................................................... 719
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (M880) ................. 721
Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the 1X500-sheet paper feeder ............ 723
Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the 3X500-sheet paper feeder ............ 724
Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the HCI feeder .................................... 725
Clean the rollers in the stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch ................... 726
Clean the rollers in the booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch ..................... 727
Clean the rollers in the IPTU ............................................................................................ 728
Solve performance problems ........................................................................................................... 729
Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................. 730
Solve USB connection problems ..................................................................................... 730
Solve wired network problems ......................................................................................... 730
Poor physical connection ................................................................................ 730
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ...................... 730
The computer is unable to communicate with the product .............................. 731
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network .......... 731
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ................. 731
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly ................................ 731
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect ..................... 731
Service mode functions .................................................................................................................... 732
Service menu ................................................................................................................... 732
Product resets .................................................................................................................. 736
Restore factory-set defaults ............................................................................ 736
Restore the service ID ..................................................................................... 736
Product cold reset ........................................................................................... 737
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ......................................................................... 738
Active and repository firmware locations ......................................................... 738
Partial Clean .................................................................................................... 738
Execute a Partial Clean .................................................................. 739
Format Disk ..................................................................................................... 739
Execute a Format Disk ................................................................... 740
Solve fax problems (M880) .............................................................................................................. 741
Checklist for solving fax problems ................................................................................... 741
What type of phone line are you using? .......................................................... 741
Are you using a surge-protection device? ....................................................... 741
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering
machine? ......................................................................................................... 741
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature? ......................................... 742
Check fax accessory status ............................................................................ 742
General fax problems ...................................................................................................... 743
xxvi ENWW
The fax failed to send ...................................................................................... 743
An Out of Memory status message displays on the product control panel ..... 743
Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box .................................... 743
You touched the Stop button to cancel a fax, but the fax was still sent .......... 743
No fax address book button displays .............................................................. 743
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin ................................ 743
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is
enabled ........................................................................................................... 743
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box ..................................... 743
A one-page fax prints as two pages ................................................................ 744
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing .................. 744
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too
low ................................................................................................................... 744
Product upgrades ............................................................................................................................. 745
Determine the installed revision of firmware .................................................................... 745
Perform a firmware upgrade ............................................................................................ 745
HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................. 745
USB flash drive (Preboot menu) ..................................................................... 746
USB flash drive (control-panel menu) ............................................................. 747
Appendix A Service and support ..................................................................................................................... 749

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 750
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ............... 752
HP policy on non-HP supplies .......................................................................................................... 753
HP anticounterfeit Web site .............................................................................................................. 754
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement ......................... 755
Data stored on the toner cartridge .................................................................................................... 756
End User License Agreement .......................................................................................................... 757
OpenSSL .......................................................................................................................................... 760
Customer self-repair warranty service .............................................................................................. 761
Customer support ............................................................................................................................. 762
Appendix B Product specifications .................................................................................................................. 763

Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 764
HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 .......................................................................................... 764
HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow M880 ................................................................................. 764
Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 765
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ............................................ 765
Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................ 766
Certificate of Volatility ....................................................................................................................... 767
ENWW xxvii
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 769
xxviii ENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1Sequence of operation (product base) ............................................................................................... 3

Table 1-2Formatter hardware components ....................................................................................................... 4
Table 1-3Motors ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Table 1-4Fans ................................................................................................................................................... 9
Table 1-5Solenoids ......................................................................................................................................... 10
Table 1-6Switches ........................................................................................................................................... 10
Table 1-7Photointerrupters .............................................................................................................................. 10
Table 1-8Sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 12
Table 1-9Motors .............................................................................................................................................. 13
Table 1-10Fans ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Table 1-11Low-voltage power supply voltages description ............................................................................. 16
Table 1-12Low-voltage power supply functions .............................................................................................. 18
Table 1-13Fuser components ......................................................................................................................... 21
Table 1-14Fuser control functions ................................................................................................................... 24
Table 1-15Primary-transfer roller engagement states ..................................................................................... 40
Table 1-16ITB unit detection ........................................................................................................................... 42
Table 1-17Calibration functions ....................................................................................................................... 44
Table 1-18Image stabilization controls ............................................................................................................ 46
Table 1-19Document feeder sensors .............................................................................................................. 52
Table 1-20Photo sensors and switches .......................................................................................................... 65
Table 1-21Motors and solenoids (paper path) ................................................................................................ 68
Table 1-22Main operations within the pickup-and-feed system ...................................................................... 70
Table 1-23Switch states for paper-size detection ........................................................................................... 72
Table 1-24Print mode and corresponding feed speed .................................................................................... 81
Table 1-25Media-width combination of the sensors (1 of 2) ........................................................................... 82
Table 1-26Media-width combination of the sensors (2 of 2) ........................................................................... 82
Table 1-27Loop control ................................................................................................................................... 85
Table 1-28Duplexing-unit components ........................................................................................................... 87
Table 1-29Jam detection ................................................................................................................................. 90
Table 1-303x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ........ 93
Table 1-31Paper feeder electrical components .............................................................................................. 95
Table 1-32Paper feeder jam detection ............................................................................................................ 99
ENWW xxix
Table 1-33HCI electrical components ........................................................................................................... 102
Table 1-35HCI motor failures ........................................................................................................................ 104
Table 1-37IPTU electrical components ......................................................................................................... 111
Table 1-38IPTU motor specifications ............................................................................................................ 111
Table 1-39IPTU fan specifications ................................................................................................................ 112
Table 1-40IPTU fan failure ............................................................................................................................ 112
Table 1-41IPTU jam detection ....................................................................................................................... 113
Table 1-42Stapler/stacker electrical components (1 of 2) ............................................................................. 117
Table 1-43Stapler/stacker electrical components (2 of 2) ............................................................................. 120
Table 1-44Stapler/stacker motor control ....................................................................................................... 121
Table 1-45Stapler/stacker motor failure detection ........................................................................................ 121
Table 1-46Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components ............... 122
Table 1-47Stapler/stacker output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA ..................................................................... 132
Table 1-48Stapler/stacker output bin 2shift area sensor PCA ...................................................................... 132
Table 1-49Motors for the stack job offset ...................................................................................................... 135
Table 1-51Sensors for the stack job offset .................................................................................................... 137
Table 1-52Stapler/stacker delivery modes .................................................................................................... 137
Table 1-53Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes ...................................................... 138
Table 1-54Sensors used in stapling .............................................................................................................. 139
Table 1-55Motors used in stapling ................................................................................................................ 139
Table 1-56Staple/stacker additional pickup, feed and delivery functions ...................................................... 151
Table 1-57Staple/stacker jam detection ........................................................................................................ 153
Table 1-58Saddle stitcher electrical components (1 of 2) ............................................................................. 161
Table 1-59Saddle stitcher electrical components (2 of 2) ............................................................................. 164
Table 1-60Booklet maker motor specifications ............................................................................................. 164
Table 1-61Booklet maker motor failures ....................................................................................................... 164
Table 1-62Sensors and paper sizes ............................................................................................................. 178
Table 1-63Solenoids and paper sizes ........................................................................................................... 179
Table 1-65Sensors used in stapling .............................................................................................................. 196
Table 1-66Motors used in stapling ................................................................................................................ 197
Table 1-69Booklet maker delivery modes ..................................................................................................... 205
Table 1-70Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes ....................................................... 206
Table 2-1Preboot menu options (1 of 6) ....................................................................................................... 212
xxx ENWW
Table 2-7Troubleshooting flowchart .............................................................................................................. 220
Table 2-8Control panel diagnostic functions ................................................................................................. 223
Table 2-9Product environment spacing ........................................................................................................ 233
Table 2-10Connectivity LED, product initialization ........................................................................................ 234
Table 2-11Connectivity LED, product operational ......................................................................................... 237
Table 2-12Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests ............................................................................................ 242
Table 2-13Manual sensor diagnostic tests .................................................................................................... 244
Table 2-14Tray/bin manual sensors .............................................................................................................. 247
Table 2-15Component test details ................................................................................................................ 251
Table 2-16Motors and solenoids (product base) ........................................................................................... 289
Table 2-17Switches and sensors (product base) .......................................................................................... 291
Table 2-18Document feeder sensors ............................................................................................................ 292
Table 2-19Jam sensors and switches (product base) ................................................................................... 294
Table 2-20High-capacity input (HCI) feeder jam sensors ............................................................................. 295
Table 2-21High-capacity input (HCI) feeder cross section ............................................................................ 296
Table 2-221x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder jam sensors and switch .......................................... 297
Table 2-23Stapler/stacker (SS) cross section ............................................................................................... 298
Table 2-24Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) cross section ................................................................ 299
Table 2-25Booklet maker (BM) cross section ............................................................................................... 300
Table 2-26Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) cross section ................................................................ 301
Table 2-27Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) cross section ............................................................... 302
Table 2-28DC controller PCA connectors ..................................................................................................... 303
Table 2-29Cartridge driver PCA connectors ................................................................................................. 305
Table 2-30Fuser PCA connectors ................................................................................................................. 306
Table 2-31High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors ....................................................... 307
Table 2-3211x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors ................................... 309
Table 2-33Intermediate paper transport unit (ITPU) driver PCA connectors ................................................ 310
Table 2-34Finishing accessories main controller PCA connectors ............................................................... 311
Table 2-35Common driver PCA connectors .................................................................................................. 313
Table 2-36Saddle stitcher controller PCA connectors (BM and BMHP) ....................................................... 314
Table 2-37Hole punch controller PCA connectors (SSHP and BMHP) ........................................................ 315
Table 2-38Plug/jack locations (M855) ........................................................................................................... 316
Table 2-39Plug/jack locations (M880) ........................................................................................................... 317
Table 2-40M880 product integrated scanner assembly (ISA) ....................................................................... 318
Table 2-41Base product covers M855 .......................................................................................................... 319
Table 2-42Base product covers M880 .......................................................................................................... 319
Table 2-43Base product main assemblies (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 320
Table 2-44Base product main assemblies (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 321
ENWW xxxi
Table 2-45High-capacity input (HCI) feeder covers ...................................................................................... 321
Table 2-46High-capacity input (HCI) feeder main assemblies (1 of 3) ......................................................... 322
Table 2-49Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) covers .......................................................................... 325
Table 2-50Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) main assemblies ......................................................... 326
Table 2-51Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) PCA ............................................................................. 326
Table 2-52Stapler/stacker (SS) covers ......................................................................................................... 327
Table 2-53Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) covers .......................................................................... 328
Table 2-54Booklet maker (BM) covers .......................................................................................................... 329
Table 2-55Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) covers ........................................................................... 330
Table 2-56Finishing accessories main assemblies ....................................................................................... 331
Table 2-57Finishing accessories PCA .......................................................................................................... 332
Table 2-58Important information on the configuration pages ........................................................................ 358
Table 2-59Reports menu ............................................................................................................................... 361
Table 2-60General Settings menu ................................................................................................................ 363
Table 2-61Copy Settings menu (M880) ........................................................................................................ 378
Table 2-62Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M880) .................................................................................... 384
Table 2-63Fax Settings menu (M880) ........................................................................................................... 395
Table 2-64General Print Settings menu ........................................................................................................ 408
Table 2-65Default Print Options menu .......................................................................................................... 411
Table 2-66Display Settings menu ................................................................................................................. 413
Table 2-67Manage Supplies menu ............................................................................................................... 415
Table 2-68Manage Trays menu .................................................................................................................... 420
Table 2-69Network Settings menu ................................................................................................................ 422
Table 2-70Jetdirect Menu .............................................................................................................................. 422
Table 2-71Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................................. 434
Table 2-72Backup/Restore menu .................................................................................................................. 438
Table 2-73Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880) .............................................................................................. 438
Table 2-74Calibration/Cleaning menu (M855) .............................................................................................. 441
Table 2-75Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types submenu ................................................................. 709
Table 2-76MP modes under the Optimize submenu ..................................................................................... 710
Table 2-77Image defects table ...................................................................................................................... 712
Table 2-78Solve performance problems ....................................................................................................... 729
Table 2-79Service menu ............................................................................................................................... 732
Table B-1Physical specifications, with toner cartridge .................................................................................. 764
Table B-2Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened ............................................................. 764
Table B-3Physical specifications, with toner cartridges and imaging drums ................................................. 764
Table B-4Product dimensions with all doors, trays, and document feeder fully opened ............................... 764
Table B-5Accessory dimensions ................................................................................................................... 765
Table B-6Operating-environment specifications ........................................................................................... 766
xxxii ENWW
List of figures
Figure 1-1Relationship between the main product systems ............................................................................. 2

Figure 1-2Engine-control system ...................................................................................................................... 7
Figure 1-3DC controller block diagram .............................................................................................................. 8
Figure 1-4Low-voltage power supply block diagram ....................................................................................... 15
Figure 1-5High-voltage power supply block diagram ...................................................................................... 19
Figure 1-6Fuser-control circuit ........................................................................................................................ 21
Figure 1-7Fuser system block diagram ........................................................................................................... 22
Figure 1-8Laser/scanner system ..................................................................................................................... 26
Figure 1-9Image-formation system ................................................................................................................. 27
Figure 1-10Image-formation process .............................................................................................................. 28
Figure 1-11Pre-exposure ................................................................................................................................ 29
Figure 1-12Primary charging ........................................................................................................................... 29
Figure 1-13Laser-beam exposure ................................................................................................................... 30
Figure 1-14Development ................................................................................................................................. 30
Figure 1-15Primary transfer ............................................................................................................................ 31
Figure 1-16Secondary transfer ........................................................................................................................ 31
Figure 1-17Separation ..................................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 1-18Fusing ........................................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 1-19ITB cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 33
Figure 1-20Drum cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 33
Figure 1-21Toner-cartridge system ................................................................................................................. 34
Figure 1-22Imaging-drum system ................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 1-23Developing roller engagement and disengagement control ......................................................... 38
Figure 1-24ITB unit .......................................................................................................................................... 39
Figure 1-25Three states of primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement ..................................... 41
Figure 1-26Secondary-transfer roller unit ........................................................................................................ 43
Figure 1-27Calibration mechanism ................................................................................................................. 44
Figure 1-28Color-sensor control ...................................................................................................................... 48
Figure 1-29Gray-axis correction ...................................................................................................................... 49
Figure 1-30Document feeder cross section .................................................................................................... 51
Figure 1-31Document feeder sensor positions ............................................................................................... 52
Figure 1-32Simplex operation paper path ....................................................................................................... 53
ENWW xxxiii
Figure 1-33Duplex operation paper path ........................................................................................................ 55
Figure 1-34Deskew rollers and width adjust ................................................................................................... 57
Figure 1-35Separation angled ramp, separation roller, and separation pad ................................................... 58
Figure 1-36Paper stopper ............................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 1-37White backing and simplex selector .............................................................................................. 60
Figure 1-38Duplex selector ............................................................................................................................. 61
Figure 1-39Document feeder closed (book mode) .......................................................................................... 63
Figure 1-40Document feeder open (maximum opening 70) .......................................................................... 64
Figure 1-41Photo sensors and switches electrical components ..................................................................... 65
Figure 1-42Motors and solenoids electrical components ................................................................................ 68
Figure 1-43Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system ........................................................... 70
Figure 1-44Cassette-pickup mechanism ......................................................................................................... 71
Figure 1-45Cassette paper-size detection switches ....................................................................................... 72
Figure 1-46Cassette lift mechanism ................................................................................................................ 74
Figure 1-47Paper-level-detection mechanism ................................................................................................. 75
Figure 1-48Multifeed prevention ...................................................................................................................... 76
Figure 1-49Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism ............................................................................................ 77
Figure 1-50Multipurpose tray last-paper detection .......................................................................................... 78
Figure 1-51Paper-feed mechanism ................................................................................................................. 79
Figure 1-52Skew-feed prevention ................................................................................................................... 80
Figure 1-53Media sensor unit .......................................................................................................................... 81
Figure 1-54Mechanism of the loop control ...................................................................................................... 84
Figure 1-55Mechanism of the fuser depressurize control ............................................................................... 86
Figure 1-56Duplexing unit ............................................................................................................................... 87
Figure 1-57Location of each jam sensor and switch ....................................................................................... 90
Figure 1-58Paper feeder installation and paper path ...................................................................................... 92
Figure 1-59Paper feeder electrical components ............................................................................................. 94
Figure 1-60Paper-feeder pickup-and-feed operation ...................................................................................... 97
Figure 1-61Paper feeder sensor and switch location ...................................................................................... 99
Figure 1-62HCI installation and paper path .................................................................................................. 101
Figure 1-63HCI electrical components .......................................................................................................... 102
Figure 1-64HCI electrical components .......................................................................................................... 105
Figure 1-65HCI lift-up operation mechanism ................................................................................................. 107
Figure 1-66HCI jam sensor locations ............................................................................................................ 108
Figure 1-67IPTU installation and paper path ................................................................................................ 110
Figure 1-68IPTU driver signal flow ................................................................................................................ 110
Figure 1-69Motors and sensors of the IPTU ................................................................................................. 111
Figure 1-70IPTU jam detection sensors ........................................................................................................ 113
Figure 1-71Staple/stacker installation and paper path .................................................................................. 114
Figure 1-72Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path ................................... 115
Figure 1-73Stapler/stacker controller signal flow .......................................................................................... 116
xxxiv ENWW
Figure 1-74Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components .............. 122
Figure 1-75Basic operation of the stapler/stacker ......................................................................................... 124
Figure 1-76Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker ...................................................................................... 125
Figure 1-77Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker ...................................................................................... 126
Figure 1-78Output bins of the stapler/stacker ............................................................................................... 126
Figure 1-79Paper path when set to non-sort ................................................................................................. 127
Figure 1-80Paper path for sizes other than A4, B5, or LTR .......................................................................... 128
Figure 1-81Paper path (1 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 129
Figure 1-86Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) .................................................... 131
Figure 1-87Output-bin components .............................................................................................................. 132
Figure 1-88Process output bin ...................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 1-89Shutter location ........................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 1-90Stack delivery .............................................................................................................................. 134
Figure 1-91Motors and sensors for stack job offset ...................................................................................... 134
Figure 1-92Stack job offset example ............................................................................................................. 135
Figure 1-93Job offset operation (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 135
Figure 1-94Job offset operation (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 135
Figure 1-95Stack trailing-edge assist operation ............................................................................................ 136
Figure 1-96Motors and sensors for stack job offset ...................................................................................... 136
Figure 1-97Stack job offset example ............................................................................................................. 137
Figure 1-98Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................. 138
Figure 1-99Staple location ............................................................................................................................ 139
Figure 1-100Paper path for stapling .............................................................................................................. 140
Figure 1-101Rollers and sensors for stapling ............................................................................................... 140
Figure 1-102Staple paper path ..................................................................................................................... 141
Figure 1-103Shift process for the staple unit ................................................................................................ 141
Figure 1-104Stapling operation (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 142
Figure 1-106Front 1-point stapling ................................................................................................................ 143
Figure 1-107Rear 1-point stapling ................................................................................................................. 143
Figure 1-1082-point stapling .......................................................................................................................... 144
Figure 1-109Hole puncher assembly ............................................................................................................ 145
Figure 1-110Operation of 4-hole punching ................................................................................................... 150
Figure 1-111Jam detection sensors .............................................................................................................. 152
Figure 1-112Hole puncher assembly sensor location ................................................................................... 153
Figure 1-113Stapler/stacker jam sensor location .......................................................................................... 154
Figure 1-114Booklet maker installation and paper path ................................................................................ 156
ENWW xxxv
Figure 1-115Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path .................................. 157
Figure 1-116Power-supply route for the stacker unit .................................................................................... 158
Figure 1-117Power supply route for the booklet maker unit ......................................................................... 159
Figure 1-118Booklet maker signal flow of the stacker, hole punch, and saddle stitcher controllers ............. 160
Figure 1-119Stacker unit basics .................................................................................................................... 165
Figure 1-120Electrical circuitry of the stacker unit ......................................................................................... 166
Figure 1-121Booklet maker unit basics ......................................................................................................... 167
Figure 1-122Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit ............................................................................ 168
Figure 1-123Feed drive for the stacker unit .................................................................................................. 168
Figure 1-124Feed drive for the booklet maker unit ....................................................................................... 169
Figure 1-125Components of the stacker unit control system (1 of 2) ........................................................... 170
Figure 1-126Components of the stacker unit control system (2 of 2) ........................................................... 171
Figure 1-127Components of the booklet-maker-unit control system ............................................................ 172
Figure 1-128Components of the booklet-maker control system ................................................................... 173
Figure 1-129Booklet-maker-unit paper path ................................................................................................. 174
Figure 1-130Paper delivery for booklet maker .............................................................................................. 175
Figure 1-131Alignment plates ....................................................................................................................... 175
Figure 1-132Stitching the stack ..................................................................................................................... 176
Figure 1-133Position the stack ...................................................................................................................... 177
Figure 1-134Fold and deliver the stack ......................................................................................................... 178
Figure 1-135A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) paper path (3 sheets) ........................................................ 179
Figure 1-136B4/LGL paper path (3 sheets) .................................................................................................. 180
Figure 1-137A4R/LTRR Paper Path (3 sheets) ............................................................................................ 181
Figure 1-138Paper movement (1 of 3) .......................................................................................................... 182
Figure 1-141Paper alignment (1 of 8) ........................................................................................................... 183
Figure 1-149Crescent-roller process (1 of 4) ................................................................................................ 186
Figure 1-153Folding position (1 of 5) ............................................................................................................ 188
Figure 1-154Folding process (2 of 5) ............................................................................................................ 188
Figure 1-155Folding start position (3 of 5) .................................................................................................... 189
xxxvi ENWW
Figure 1-156Folding start position (4 of 5) .................................................................................................... 189
Figure 1-157Folding stop position (5 of 5) .................................................................................................... 189
Figure 1-158Double-folding process (1 of 5) ................................................................................................. 190
Figure 1-163Motors and sensors for stack job offset .................................................................................... 192
Figure 1-164Stack job offset example ........................................................................................................... 192
Figure 1-165Job offset operation (1 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 193
Figure 1-166Job offset operation (2 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 193
Figure 1-167Location of the staplers ............................................................................................................. 194
Figure 1-170Stapler unit ................................................................................................................................ 196
Figure 1-171Staple location .......................................................................................................................... 196
Figure 1-172Paper path for stapling .............................................................................................................. 197
Figure 1-173Rollers and sensors for stapling ............................................................................................... 198
Figure 1-174Paper path ................................................................................................................................ 198
Figure 1-175Shift process for the staple unit ................................................................................................ 199
Figure 1-178Stitcher unit ............................................................................................................................... 200
Figure 1-179Sequence of stitching ............................................................................................................... 201
Figure 1-180Rotation of the cam ................................................................................................................... 201
Figure 1-181Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) .................................................. 202
Figure 1-182Output-bin components ............................................................................................................ 203
Figure 1-183Shutter location ......................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 1-184Booklet-maker-unit paper path ................................................................................................. 205
Figure 1-185Booklet maker jams .................................................................................................................. 206
Figure 2-1Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) ............................................................................... 227
Figure 2-2Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond .................................... 228
Figure 2-3Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone ...................................................................................... 229
Figure 2-4No control panel sound ................................................................................................................. 230
Figure 2-5Home button is unresponsive ....................................................................................................... 231
Figure 2-6Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) ........................... 232
Figure 2-7LEDs ............................................................................................................................................. 233
Figure 2-8Defeating interlocks ...................................................................................................................... 238
Figure 2-9Engine test button ......................................................................................................................... 240
Figure 2-10Paper path sensor locations (product base) ............................................................................... 241
Figure 2-11Finishing controller PCA switches ............................................................................................... 255
ENWW xxxvii
Figure 2-12Booklet maker (BM) saddle controller PCA switches .................................................................. 256
Figure 2-13Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) punch controller PCA switches ................................... 257
Figure 2-14Motors and solenoids (product base) ......................................................................................... 289
Figure 2-15Rollers and main assemblies (product base) .............................................................................. 290
Figure 2-16Switches and sensors (product base) ......................................................................................... 291
Figure 2-17Document feeder sensors (M880 only) ....................................................................................... 292
Figure 2-18Jam sensors and switches (product base) ................................................................................. 294
Figure 2-19High-capacity input (HCI) feeder jam sensors ............................................................................ 295
Figure 2-20High-capacity input (HCI) feeder cross section .......................................................................... 296
Figure 2-211x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder jam sensors and switch ........................................ 297
Figure 2-22Stapler/stacker (SS) cross section .............................................................................................. 298
Figure 2-23Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) cross section ............................................................... 299
Figure 2-24Booklet maker (BM) cross section .............................................................................................. 300
Figure 2-25Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) cross section ............................................................... 301
Figure 2-26Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) cross section .............................................................. 302
Figure 2-27DC controller PCA connectors .................................................................................................... 303
Figure 2-28Cartridge driver PCA connectors ................................................................................................ 305
Figure 2-29Fuser PCA connectors ................................................................................................................ 306
Figure 2-30High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors ...................................................... 307
Figure 2-311x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors .................................... 309
Figure 2-32Intermediate paper transport unit (ITPU) driver PCA connectors ............................................... 310
Figure 2-33Finishing accessories main controller PCA connectors .............................................................. 311
Figure 2-34Common driver PCA connectors ................................................................................................ 313
Figure 2-35Saddle stitcher controller PCA connectors (BM and BMHP) ...................................................... 314
Figure 2-36Hole punch controller PCA connectors (SSHP and BMHP) ....................................................... 315
Figure 2-37Plug/jack locations (M855) .......................................................................................................... 316
Figure 2-38Plug/jack locations (M880) .......................................................................................................... 317
Figure 2-39M880 product integrated scanner assembly (ISA) ...................................................................... 318
Figure 2-40Base product covers M855 ......................................................................................................... 319
Figure 2-41Base product covers M880 ......................................................................................................... 319
Figure 2-42Base product main assemblies (1 of 2) ...................................................................................... 320
Figure 2-43Base product main assemblies (2 of 2) ...................................................................................... 321
Figure 2-44High-capacity input (HCI) feeder covers ..................................................................................... 321
Figure 2-45High-capacity input (HCI) feeder main assemblies (1 of 3) ........................................................ 322
Figure 2-48Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) covers ........................................................................ 325
Figure 2-49Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) main assemblies ........................................................ 326
Figure 2-50Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) PCA ............................................................................ 326
Figure 2-51Stapler/stacker (SS) covers ........................................................................................................ 327
Figure 2-52Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) covers ......................................................................... 328
xxxviii ENWW
Figure 2-53Booklet maker (BM) covers ......................................................................................................... 329
Figure 2-54Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) covers ......................................................................... 330
Figure 2-55Finishing accessories main assemblies ...................................................................................... 331
Figure 2-56Finishing accessories PCA ......................................................................................................... 332
Figure 2-57General timing chart (1 of 2) ....................................................................................................... 333
Figure 2-58General timing chart (2 of 2) ....................................................................................................... 334
Figure 2-59General circuit diagram, product base M855 (1 of 4) ................................................................. 335
Figure 2-67General circuit diagram, high-capacity input (HCI) feeder .......................................................... 343
Figure 2-68General circuit diagram, finishing accessories (1 of 5) ............................................................... 344
Figure 2-73Print-quality troubleshooting procedure page ............................................................................. 349
Figure 2-74Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page ................................................................................... 350
Figure 2-75Yellow comparison page ............................................................................................................. 350
Figure 2-76Black print-quality troubleshooting page ..................................................................................... 351
Figure 2-77Configuration page ..................................................................................................................... 355
Figure 2-78HP embedded Jetdirect page ..................................................................................................... 356
Figure 2-79Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly (1 of 2) ..................................................................... 485
Figure 2-80Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly (2 of 2) ..................................................................... 486
Figure 2-81Entrance to upper guide white wheels ........................................................................................ 505
Figure 2-82Product base ............................................................................................................................... 652
Figure 2-83Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) .................................................................................... 653
Figure 2-841x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) ....................................................................................... 654
Figure 2-853x500-sheet paper feeder ........................................................................................................... 655
Figure 2-863x500-sheet High-capacity input (HCI) feeder ............................................................................ 656
Figure 2-87Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch .................................................................. 657
Figure 2-88Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch .................................................................... 658
Figure B-1Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2) ....................................................................................................... 767
Figure B-2Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2) ....................................................................................................... 768
ENWW xxxix
xl ENWW
1 Theory of operation
Basic operation
Formatter-control system
Engine-control system
Laser/scanner system
Image-formation system
Scanning/image capture system
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder
Intermediate paper transportation unit
Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch
Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch
ENWW 1
Basic operation
The product routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information,
processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer.
The basic product operation comprises the following systems:
The engine-control system, which includes the power supply and the DC controller PCA
The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum
The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper
The paper pickup-and-feed system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the
paper through the product
Scanner and document feeder functions and operations
Accessories
Figure 1-1 Relationship between the main product systems
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM
IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM

SYSTEM
OPTION
SCANNER (M855 only)
2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW

Sequence of operation
The DC controller in the engine-control system controls the operational sequences of the product.
The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from the
time the product is turned on until the motor stops rotating.
Normal sequence of operation

NOTE: The following sequence of operation applies to the engine portion of the product.
Table 1-1 Sequence of operation (product base)
Name Timing Purpose
Waiting From the time the power is turned on or Pressurizes the fuser pressure roller
when the product exits Sleep mode until
the product is ready for printing Detects the toner cartridges and imaging drums
Detects the home position for the intermediate-transfer

belt (ITB) and the developing unit
Cleans waste toner from the ITB
Standby From the end of the waiting sequence or The product is in the ready state
the last rotation until the formatter
receives a print command or until the Awaits print reservation command (await INTR sequence)
product is turned off
Enters Sleep mode after the specified length of time
Calibrates if it is time for an automatic calibration
Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a Activates the high-voltage power supply
print command until the paper enters the
paper path. Prepares each laser/scanner unit
Warms the fuser to the appropriate temperature
Printing From the time the first sheet of paper Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
enters the paper path until the last sheet
has passed through the fuser Transfers the toner to the paper
Fuses the toner image onto the paper
Performs calibration after a specified number of pages
Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper Moves the last printed sheet into the output bin
exits the fuser until the motors stop
rotating Stops each laser/scanner unit
Discharges the bias from the high-voltage power supply
ENWW Basic operation 3

Formatter-control system
The formatter performs the following functions:
Controlling sleep mode
Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces
Monitoring control panel functions and relaying product status information (through the control
panel and the network or bi-directional interface)
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA
Storing font information
Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface
The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into
image information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA
synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals
the formatter to send the print image data.
Formatter hardware
The formatter system includes the following components.
Table 1-2 Formatter hardware components
Component Function
Microprocessor Stores fonts and microprocessor control programs.
RAM Stores printing and font information and temporarily stores print-image data before it sent to
the print engine. RAM data is lost when the product is turned off.
NOTE: Upgrading RAM improves graphic-intense printing operations, but does not
increase the I/O buffer space or the printing speed.
NVRAM Stores configuration information. NVRAM is saved when the product is turned off.
USB Sends and receives data through USB type B interface connector (connected to the host
computer).
Hard disk drive (HDD) The firmware is contained in the HDD or SSD. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to
overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the HDD or SSM.
Solid state module (SSM)
NOTE: The SSM is for the M855dn model only.
Real time clock This clock is used for the Wake-up time feature. It includes a battery to supply power when
the product is turned off.
HP Jetdirect Inside (JDI) JDI is an Ethernet interface that is part of the formatter.
Sleep mode
NOTE: In the General Settings menu (a submenu of the Administration menu), this item is termed
Sleep Timer Settings.
This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When
the product is in Sleep Mode, the control panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all

settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep Mode to be enabled, and the
product enters Sleep Mode after a 30-minute idle time.
The product exits Sleep Mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occur:
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received
A control panel button is pressed
A cover is opened
A paper tray is opened
The engine-test switch is pressed
NOTE: Product error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep Mode at the
appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.
TIP: When the product is in Sleep Mode, the sub power supply is off and the low-voltage power
supply is on. The scanner can not be used when the product is in Sleep Mode.
Input/output
The product has three I/O interfaces:
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)
CPU
The formatter incorporates an 800 MHz processor.
Memory
The random access memory (RAM) on the formatter printed circuit assembly (PCA) contains the
page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the
host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is
sent to the print engine.
NOTE: If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning
message displays on the control panel display.
Firmware
The hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state module (SSM) store the firmware. A remote firmware
upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the HDD or SSM.
Nonvolatile memory
The product uses nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) to store device and user
configuration settings. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or
disconnected.
ENWW Formatter-control system 5

PJL overview
The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer
command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the product can use PJL to perform a variety of
functions:
Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB
connection. The product can inform the host about the control panel settings that can be
changed from the host.
Dynamic I/O switching. The product uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O.
The product can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.
This can occur even when the product is offline.
Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or
PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is
sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape mode only if
they are formatted for landscape printing.
PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status read-back through
the I/O ports.
Control panel
The control panel is an 20.3 cm (8 in) full-color SVGA (M880) or 10.9 cm (4.3 in) full-color SVGA
(M855) with capacitive touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle. It includes an easy-access USB
port for walk-up printing and a hardware integration pocket for third-party USB devices such as card
readers.
The control panel has a diagnostic mode to allow testing of the touchscreen, Home button, and
speaker. The control panel does not require calibration.
The M880 model has a QWERTY retractable keyboard beneath the control panel. The keys are
mapped to your language in the same way the virtual keyboard on the product control panel is
mapped. If you select a different keyboard layout for the virtual keyboard, the keys on the physical
keyboard are remapped to match the new settings.

Engine-control system
The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main
systems to coordinate all product functions. It consists of the following components:
DC controller
Low-voltage power supply
High-voltage power supply
Fuser control
Figure 1-2 Engine-control system
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
DC controlle r
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM
Low-voltage power suppl y
Formatte r
IMAGE-FORMA TION SYSTEM
High-voltage power suppl y
PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM
Fuser control
ENWW Engine-control system 7

DC controller
The DC controller provides operational commands to each of the product components, and it
interacts with the other engine-control systems and product systems to control the product
operational sequence.
Figure 1-3 DC controller block diagram
Motor
ITB assy
High-voltage Fan
power supply
Process cartridge (A/B)
(4 each)
Solenoid
Switch
Fuser Photointerrupter
Sensor
AC input Fuser control
DC controller
Input
HIP accessory
(Camas only) Low-voltage
power supply
Duplexing reverse
assy
Control panel
Formatter Connector PCA Laser scanner assy
Output Intermediate paper

accessory transportation unit
Table 1-3 Motors

Abbreviation Component name Replacement part number
M1 Scanner motor (Y/M) RM2-5176-000CN
M2 Scanner motor (C/K) RM2-5176-000CN
M5 Pickup motor RM1-9843-000CN

Table 1-3 Motors (continued)
M6 Registration motor RM1-9843-000CN
M7 Cassette lifter motor RM1-3222-000CN
M10 ITB motor RM1-4519-000CN
M11 Fuser motor RM1-4519-000CN
M12 Drum motor (Y) RM1-9614-000CN
M13 Drum motor (M) RM1-9614-000CN
M14 Drum motor (C) RM1-9614-000CN
M15 Drum motor (K) RM1-9614-000CN
M17 Fuser shutter motor A2W75-67910
M18 Developer alienation motor (C/K) A2W75-67910
M19 Developer alienation motor (Y/M) A2W75-67910
M20 T1 roller alienation motor RM1-3280-000CN
M21 Toner-replenishment motor (Y/M) RK2-4819-000CN
M22 Toner-replenishment motor (C/K) RK2-4819-000CN
M301 Duplex re-pickup motor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
M302 Duplex switch back motor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
M303 Duplex feed motor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Table 1-4 Fans

FM1 Laser scanner fan RK2-1322-000CN
FM2 Fuser fan RK2-1378-000CN
FM3 Cartridge fan (Y/M) RK2-1378-000CN
FM4 Cartridge fan (C/K) RK2-1378-000CN
FM5 VOC fan RM1-3364-000CN
FM6 Low-voltage power supply fan RL1-4003-000CN
FM7 Cartridge front area cooling fan RK2-1378-000CN
FM8 Delivery fan RK2-1382-000CN
FM9 Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear) RK2-1378-000CN
FM10 Fuser edge area cooling fan (front) RK2-1378-000CN

Table 1-4 Fans (continued)
FM301 Duplex fan 1 RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
FM302 Duplex fan 2 RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Table 1-5 Solenoids
SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid RM1-9599-000CN
SL2 MP tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid RM1-9644-000CN
SL4 Toner-replenishment solenoid (Y)
SL5 Toner-replenishment solenoid (M)
SL6 Toner-replenishment solenoid (C)
SL7 Toner-replenishment solenoid (K)
SL301 Duplex flapper solenoid RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Table 1-6 Switches
SW11 Tray 2 paper size switch RM1-3222-000CN
SW12 Cassette trailing edge switch RM1-3222-000CN
SW13 Right door open/close switch RM2-7035-000CN
SW14 Front door open/close switch RM2-7035-000CN
SW17 Main switch
SW101 Interlock switch 1 RM2-5062-000CN
SW102 Interlock switch 2 RM2-5062-000CN
Table 1-7 Photointerrupters

SR11 Fuser shutter home position sensor (front) RM1-9857-000CN
SR12 Fuser shutter home position sensor (rear) RM1-9857-000CN
SR13 T2 door open/close sensor WG8-5935-000CN
SR14 Drum home position sensor (K) A2W77-67908

Table 1-7 Photointerrupters (continued)
SR15 Drum home position sensor (C) A2W77-67908
SR16 Drum home position sensor (M) A2W77-67908
SR17 Drum home position sensor (Y) A2W77-67908
SR18 ITB alienation sensor A2W79-67902
SR19 Developer alienation sensor (Y/M) RM2-5051-000CN
SR20 Developer alienation sensor (C/K)
SR21 Tray 2 media-level sensor RM1-3222-000CN
SR22 Tray 2 feed sensor RM1-9599-000CN
SR24 Tray 1 feed sensor RM1-9615-000CN
SR25 Tray 1 paper sensor RM1-9644-000CN
SR26 Tray 1 last-media sensor RM1-9642-000CN
SR27 ITB toner collection box full sensor A2W77-67904
SR28 Fuser pressure release sensor C1N54-67901 (fuser 110V)
C1N58-67901 (fuser 220V)
SR29 Fuser loop sensor 1 RM1-9621-000CN
SR30 Fuser loop sensor 2 RM1-9621-000CN
SR32 Tray 2 paper surface sensor RM1-9599-000CN
SR33 Output bin full sensor RM1-9841-000CN
SR34 Fuser flap open/close sensor RM1-9606-000CN
SR35 Fuser output sensor 1 RM1-9640-000CN
SR36 Output media width sensor RM1-9841-000CN
SR37 Fuser front width sensor RM1-9640-000CN
SR38 Fuser rear width sensor RM1-9640-000CN
SR39 Toner cartridge presence sensor (K) WG8-5935-000CN
SR40 Toner cartridge presence sensor (C) WG8-5935-000CN
SR41 Toner cartridge presence sensor (M) WG8-5935-000CN
SR42 Toner cartridge presence sensor (Y) WG8-5935-000CN
SR43 Toner-replenishment motor rotation sensor (Y/ A2W75-67910

M)
SR44 Toner-replenishment motor rotation sensor (C/ A2W75-67910

K)

Table 1-7 Photointerrupters (continued)
SR301 Duplex switchback feed sensor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
SR302 Developer delivery sensor
SR303 Color sensor engagement sensor RM2-5045-000CN
SR304 Duplex refeed sensor RM1-9640-000CN
SR2501 TOP sensor A2W77-67904
Table 1-8 Sensors
CN1 Environment sensor RK2-4811-000CN
CS Color sensor RM2-5045-000CN
MS Registration sensor A2W77-67904
- CPR/Density sensor RM2-7026-000CN
- ITB seal sensor
SCN-TH1 Laser scanner assembly temperature sensor 1
SCN-TH2 Laser scanner assembly temperature sensor 2
- Process cartridge toner collection box full

sensor (Y)

sensor (M)

sensor (C)

sensor (K)
- Process cartridge toner-level sensor (Y)
- Process cartridge toner-level sensor (M)
- Process cartridge toner-level sensor (C)
- Process cartridge toner-level sensor (K)
Motors
The product has numerous motors for paper feed and image formation. The DC controller can sense
failure for several of the motors. When this occurs, the DC controller notifies the formatter so it can
halt the printing process and provide an alert on the control panel display.

Table 1-9 Motors
Abbreviation Component name Components driven or motor function Failure detection
M1 Scanner motor (Y/M) Laser/scanner
M2 Scanner motor (C/K) Laser/scanner
M5 Pickup motor Cassette pickup roller, cassette feed roller, and MP tray No
pickup roller
M6 Registration motor Registration roller No
M7 Cassette lifter motor Cassette lifter mechanism No
M9 Primary-transfer roller Engages or disengages the primary transfer roller No

disengagement motor
M10 ITB motor ITB and the secondary transfer roller Yes
M11 Fuser motor Fuser roller, delivery roller, and fuser pressure roller Yes
M12 Drum motor (Y) Photosensitive drum and primary charging roller in the Yes
yellow imaging drum
M13 Drum motor (M) Photosensitive drum and primary charging roller in the Yes
magenta imaging drum
M14 Drum motor (C) Photosensitive drum and primary charging roller in the Yes
cyan imaging drum
M15 Drum motor (K) Photosensitive drum and primary charging roller in the Yes
black imaging drum
M17 Fuser shutter motor Fuser edge shutter
M18 Developer alienation Engages and disengages the developing rollers in the No
motor (C/K) cyan- and black-imaging drums
M19 Developer alienation Engages and disengages the developing rollers in the No
motor (Y/M) yellow- and magenta-imaging drums
M20 T1 roller alienation

motor
M21 Toner-replenishment
motor (Y/M)
M22 Toner-replenishment
motor (C/K)
M301 Duplex re-pickup Duplexing paper re-pickup roller, engages or disengages No

motor the color sensor
M302 Duplex switch back Duplexing paper-reverse roller No

motor
M303 Duplex feed motor Duplexing paper-feed roller No

Fans
The product has 11 fans that prevent the temperature from rising in the product and for cooling
delivered paper.
Table 1-10 Fans
Abbreviation Component name Area cooled Type Speed Failure

detection
FM1 Laser/scanner fan Laser/scanner area and Intake Full/half

formatter
FM2 Fuser fan Fuser Intake Full/half
FM3 Cartridge fan (Y/M) Around the cartridge (Y/M) Exhaust Full Yes
FM4 Cartridge fan (C/K) Around the cartridge (C/K) Exhaust Full Yes
FM5 Low-voltage power Low-voltage power supply unit Exhaust Full/half

supply fan
FM6 Cartridge front-area Toner-cartridge and imaging- Intake Full/half

fan drum area
FM7 Delivery unit fan Delivery unit Intake Full
FM9 Fuser edge area Around the rear edge of fuser Exhaust Full/half Yes
cooling fan (rear) sleeve
FM10 Fuser edge area Around the front edge of fuser Exhaust Full/half Yes
cooling fan (front) sleeve
FM301 Duplex fan 1 Duplexing driver PCA Intake Full
FM302 Duplex fan 2 Output bin area Exhaust Full/half
Automatic damp paper detection

The product automatically detects damp paper. This helps to avoid jams caused by curling damp
paper.
The DC controller detects damp paper by measuring the resistance value of the transfer roller during
a transfer operation. Also, the DC controller records the damp condition of paper that is loaded in the
input devices.
The DC controller optimizes the fuser temperature control and prevents an occurrence of paper curl
when the damp paper is fed through the product.

The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) converts AC power into the DC voltage for the product
mechanical assemblies. The following figure shows the system block diagram of the low-voltage
power supply.
The product uses three DC voltages: 24V, 5V, and 3.3V. See Table 1-11 Low-voltage power supply
voltages description on page 16.
Figure 1-4 Low-voltage power supply block diagram
AC input
Fuser control
FUSE
(FU11)
Fuser
DC controller
FUSE
Triac +24V generation +24VA
Noise Rectifying
circuit circuit
filter
+24VB +24VB
Relay
Interlock SW
Protection
SW101
circuit
+5VR
Rectifying +5V generation Connector
circuit circuit +5VF PCA
Load SW
Protection +5V_OFF
circuit +5VA
Load SW
+3.3VA
+3.3V generation +3.3VR

circuit
PSACV +24VBS
+5V generation circuit
Zerocross
/ZEROX
circuit
/PSAVE
/PSRL
+24VA
+5VB
Interlock SW
SW102

Table 1-11 Low-voltage power supply voltages description
Main DC voltage Sub-voltage Behavior
+24V +24VA Supplied constantly
Stopped during inactive off, active off, or Sleep mode
+24VB Supplied constantly
Interrupted when right door open or front door open
+5V +5VA Supplied constantly
+5VB Supplied constantly
Interrupted when right door open or front door open
+5VR Supplied constantly
+5VF Supplied constantly
Stopped during inactive off
+3.3V +3.3VA Supplied constantly
Stopped during inactive off or active off
+3.3VR Supplied constantly

Over-current/over-voltage protection
The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) has a protective circuit against over-current and over-voltage to
prevent failures in the power supply circuit. It automatically stops supplying the DC voltage whenever
excessive current flows or voltage abnormally increases.
If the DC voltage is not being supplied from the LVPS, the protective function might be running. In this
case, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable. Do not turn the power switch on until the
problem is identified.
The DC controller notifies the formatter of a LVPS failure when the protective function is activated.
In addition, the fuser control and the LVPS each have one fuse to protect against over-current. If
over-current flows into the AC line, the fuse fails and AC power is stopped.
For personal safety, the product interrupts +24VB and +5VB power when the interlock switch is
turned off. Accordingly, the DC voltage to the following components is interrupted:
Fuser
Delivery fan
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear)
Fuser edge area cooling fan (front)
Drum motor
ITB motor
Fuser motor
Developer alienation motor
Pickup motor
Registration motor
Fuser shutter motor
Duplex re-pickup motor
Duplex feed motor
Duplex switch back motor
Laser/BD PCA
WARNING! The remote switch control circuit turns the product power on or off so that the AC power
flows even if the power switch is turned off. Unplug the power cord before disassembling the product.
WARNING! If you believe the over-current or over-voltage protection circuits have been activated,
do not connect the product power cord or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is
found and corrected.

Table 1-12 Low-voltage power supply functions
Function Supported feature
Sleep mode Yes
Power supply voltage detection Yes
Automatic power OFF Yes
Automatic power ON/OFF No
Active OFF Yes
Inactive OFF Yes
Network mode No
Power switch illumination Yes
Low-voltage power supply failure detection Yes
Power save mode Yes
Sleep mode operation

When the product is in Sleep Mode, the sub-power supply is off and the low-voltage power supply is
on. The scanner (M880) can not be used when the product is in Sleep Mode.

The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) applies biases to the following components:
Primary charging roller
Developing roller
T1 roller
T2 roller
Static charge eliminator
Pressure roller
The following figure shows the system block diagram of the high-voltage power supply.
NOTE: The primary charging roller and the developing roller are in the cartridge.
Figure 1-5 High-voltage power supply block diagram

High-voltage power supply D
Primary charging Developing bias

bias circuit circuit
Fuser sleeve Pressure roller
Process cartridge
DC controller
Photosensitive drum
T1 roller
T2 roller
T1 bias T2 bias Static charge Fuser bias

circuit circuit eliminator bias circuit
circuit
High-voltage power supply T

Circuit Description
Primary-charging-bias generation A DC negative bias is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum in each
imaging drum to prepare it for image formation.
Developing-bias generation A DC negative bias is used to adhere the toner to each photosensitive drum
during the image formation process.
Primary-transfer-bias generation A DC positive bias is used to transfer the latent toner image from each
photosensitive drum onto the ITB.
Secondary-transfer-bias generation Two DC biasesone positive and one negativeare used to transfer the toner
from the ITB onto the paper.
Static-charge-eliminator-bias generation A DC negative bias is used to reduce the electrical charge on the paper after the
secondary-transfer process.
Fuser-roller-bias generation A DC negative bias is applied to the fuser roller to remove any toner that
adheres to the roller after fusing.
Fuser bias
The product uses instant-on fusing. The fuser bias is dc positive for improved print quality. The fuser
bias circuit is located in the high-voltage power supply.

Fuser-control circuit
This product features on-demand fusing. The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser
temperature according to commands from the DC controller. The fuser-control circuit consists of the
following major components:
Figure 1-6 Fuser-control circuit

TH3
Fuser sleeve
TH1 TH2
TP101
H1, H2, H3 Pressure roller

TH4
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Fuser heater Fuser heater

control circuit safety circuit DC controller
Fuser control
Table 1-13 Fuser components
Abbreviation Component name Function
H1 Fuser main heater Heats the edge of the fuser sleeve
H2 Fuser sub heater Heats the edge of the fuser sleeve
H3 Fuser sub heater Heats the center area of the fuser sleeve
TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center temperature of the fuser heater
TH2 Sub thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater
TH3 Sub thermistor 2
TH4 Sub thermistor 3
TP101 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater

Figure 1-7 Fuser system block diagram
DC controller
FSR_SL_TH
FSR_D2
FSR_F_TH
FSR_R_TH
FSR_SS_TH
FSR_D1
/FSR_RLD
+24V
+3.3V
GND
FSR_CURRMS
/ZEROX
INL_CURRMS
FSR_NEW
FSR_100
FSR_200
Low-voltage
power supply
Zerocross
Safety Safety Safety circuit
circuit 3 circuit 1 circuit 2
TH4
TH1 Noise
Triac 2 Triac 1
filter
TH2 drive circuit drive circuit
TH3
Relay 1 Relay 2
Triac 2 drive drive
circuit circuit
TP101 Triac 1
Heater
H1 Fuser Inlet
H2 Relay 2 current current
Pressure roller H3 detection detection
circuit circuit
AC input
Relay 1
New part detection fuse
100V-200V +3.3V
discrepancy
circuit
Fuser Fuser PCA

Fuser heater protection
The fuser heater protective function detects an excessive temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts
the power supply to the fuser heater.
The following four protective components prevent the fuser heater from excessive rising temperature:
DC controller
The DC controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. It releases the triac and
relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature.
TH1: 223 C (433 F) or higher
TP1: 240 C (464 F) or higher
Fuser-heater safety circuit
The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. It releases
the triac and relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive
temperature.
Current detection circuit
The inlet current detection circuit monitors the current flowing through the fuser control circuit.
The fuser current detection circuit monitors the current flowing through the fuser heater. The DC
controller deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal to interrupt power supply to the
fuser heater when the current of the CURRENT DETECTION signal is higher than a specified
value.
Thermoswitch
The contact to the thermoswitch breaks to interrupt the power supply to the fuser heater when
the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high.
TS101: 200 C (392 F) or higher

NOTE: When the thermoswitches reach this temperature, the actual temperature on the fuser
rollers is approximately 370 C (698 F).
Table 1-14 Fuser control functions
Fuser temperature control Yes
Fuser failure detection Yes
Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes
Fuser depressurization mechanism failure detection Yes
Fuser type discrepancy detection Yes
Fuser type identification detection Yes
Fuser presence detection Yes
Fuser life detection Yes
Relay failure detection Yes
Pressure roller cleaning Yes
Fuser edge cooling function Yes
The conditions of the fuser failure detection change as follows:
Abnormal high temperature
Abnormal high temperature 1
The sub thermistor 1 keeps detecting 285C (545F) or higher for a specified period.
The main thermistor keeps detecting 210C (410F) or higher for a specified period.
Abnormal low temperature
Abnormal low temperature 1
The sub thermistor 1 keeps detecting 80C (176F) or lower for a specified period during
INTR period or PRINT period.

STBY period.
STBY period.
STBY period.
The main thermistor keeps detecting 60C (140F) or lower for a specified period during
Abnormal temperature rise
Each thermistor does not detect a specified temperature within a specified period from when the
fuser heater is turned on.
Drive circuit failure
The current flowing through the fuser heater is out of specified power supply range. The current
flowing through the low-voltage power supply from the inlet is out of specified current range.
Fuser identification
Whenever the product is turned on or when the right door is closed, the DC controller detects whether
the fuser is present and whether the fuser is for a 110V model or a 220V model.
Fuser-life detection
The fuser is rated to print a certain number of pages. When a new fuser is installed, the DC controller
receives a signal and directs the formatter to set the fuser count to zero.
As pages are printed, the formatter increments the fuser count. When the page count reaches a
certain threshold, the formatter sends a message to the control panel to alert the customer to order a
replacement fuser.
When the maximum number of pages has printed, the formatter sends a message to the control
panel to prompt the customer to replace the fuser.

Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums inside
each of the imaging drums. The product has two laser/scanners: one for yellow and magenta and the
other for cyan and black.
The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be
printed. The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses
and onto the scanner mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the
photosensitive drum in the pattern required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can
receive toner.
Figure 1-8 Laser/scanner system
Scanner mirror BD sensor
Scanner motor unit

Laser driver
Black laser
Cyan laser
SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal
LASER CONTROL signal
BD INPUT signal
VIDEO signal
Photosensitive drum (C)
Photosensitive drum (Bk)
DC controller
Formatter

Image-formation system
The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. It consists of the laser/scanners,
toner cartridges, imaging drums, ITB, and fuser.
Figure 1-9 Image-formation system
Laser/scanner unit Laser beam

Photosensitive drum
Fuser roller
Pressure roller
Print cartridge
Primary transfer roller

Imaging drum Y
C M
K
Secondary transfer roller
ITB
DC controller High-voltage power supply A/B
ENWW Image-formation system 27

Image-formation process
The image formation system consists of ten steps that are divided into six functional blocks.
Figure 1-10 Image-formation process

Media path
Direction of the drum rotation Delivery
Block
Latent image formation Fuser
Step 8. Fuser
3. Laser beam exposure
2. Primary charging
1. Pre-exposure 4. Development
Y Development
M
C Drum cleaning
K 10. Drum cleaning Transfer
7. Separation
5. Primary transfer
6. Secondary transfer
9. ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning Registration
Pickup
Functional block Steps Description
Latent image formation 1. Pre-exposure An invisible latent image is formed on

the surface of the photosensitive drums.
2. Primary charging
3. Laser-beam exposure
Development 4. Development Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent

image on the photosensitive drums.
Transfer 5. Primary transfer The toner image is transferred to the

ITB and subsequently to the paper.
6. Secondary transfer
7. Separation
Fusing 8. Fusing The toner is fused to the paper to make

a permanent image.
ITB cleaning 9. ITB cleaning Residual toner is removed from the ITB.
Drum cleaning 10. Drum cleaning Residual toner is removed from the
photosensitive drums.

Step 1: Pre-exposure
Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove any
residual electrical charges from the drum surface.
Figure 1-11 Pre-exposure

LED
Photosensitive drum
Step 2: Primary charging

The primary-charging roller contacts the photosensitive drum and charges the drum with negative
potential.
Figure 1-12 Primary charging

DC bias
Photosensitive drum

Step 3: Laser-beam exposure
The laser beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum in the areas where the image will be
formed. The negative charge is neutralized in those areas, which are then ready to accept toner.
Figure 1-13 Laser-beam exposure

Laser beam
Unexposed area Exposed area
Step 4: Development
Toner inside the toner cartridge acquires a negative charge as the developing cylinder contacts the
developing blade. Because the negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drums have been
neutralized where they have been struck by the laser beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the
drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface of each drum.
Figure 1-14 Development

Blade
Developing cylinder
Exposed area Unexposed area

DC bias
Unexposed area Exposed area
Photosensitive drum

Step 5: Primary transfer
The positively charged primary-transfer rollers contact the ITB, giving the ITB a positive charge. The
ITB attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum, and the
complete toner image is transferred onto the ITB, beginning with yellow, then magenta, cyan, and
black.
Figure 1-15 Primary transfer
Photosensitive
drum
ITB
DC bias
Step 6: Secondary transfer

The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary transfer roller, and so it attracts the
negatively charged toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image is transferred onto
the paper.
Figure 1-16 Secondary transfer
Media
ITB
Secondary transfer opposed roller
DC bias

Step 7: Separation
The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static charge
eliminator removes excess charge from the paper to ensure that the toner is fused correctly.
Figure 1-17 Separation
Media

ITB
Secondary transfer opposed roller
DC bias
Step 8: Fusing
To create the permanent image, the paper passes through a set of heated, pressurized rollers to melt
the toner onto the page. The fuser roller has a negative DC bias to prevent the negatively-charged
toner from being attracted to the roller, which would decrease print quality.
Figure 1-18 Fusing
Fuser rolle r
Pressure roller
Halogen heater Halogen heater
Toner
Media
DC bias

Step 9: ITB cleaning
After the paper separates from the ITB, the cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner from the
surface of the ITB, preparing it for the next image. The waste toner feed screw picks up the residual
toner and deposits it in the waste toner container inside the imaging drum.
Figure 1-19 ITB cleaning

Cleaning blade
Waste toner feed screw
ITB
Sweeper strip
Step 10: Drum cleaning

Inside the imaging drum, the cleaning blade removes the residual toner from the surface of the
photosensitive drum to prepare it for the next image. The waste toner feed screw picks up the
residual toner and deposits it in the waste toner container inside the imaging drum.
Figure 1-20 Drum cleaning

Sweeper strip Cleaning blade
Photosensitive
drum

Toner cartridge
The product has four toner cartridges, one for each color. Each toner cartridge contains a reservoir of
toner and the following components:
Toner feed screw
Toner stirrer
Memory tag
Figure 1-21 Toner-cartridge system
Print cartridge
The toner feed screw rotates, picks up the toner particles, and transports them into the imaging drum.
The toner stirrer rotates at the same time as the toner feed screw to keep the toner particles from
sticking to each other.
The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the toner
cartridge.

The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist:
The memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller.
Any of the toner-cartridge presence sensors do not detect the presence of the toner cartridge.
The toner level in any of the toner cartridges drops below a certain level.
The toner feed motor is rotating but the rotational-count sensor does not increment the rotation
count after a specified length of time. This condition indicates a failure in the toner-feed motor.

Imaging drum
The product has four imaging drums, one for each color. Each imaging drum contains the following
components:
Photosensitive drum
Developing roller
Toner feed roller

Toner feed screw
Figure 1-22 Imaging-drum system
DRUM HOME-POSITION signal

DEVELOPING HOME-POSITION signal
Developing home-position sensor
Drum home-position sensor
Print cartridge
The drum motor causes the photosensitive drum to rotate. That rotation causes the primary charging
roller to rotate. The drum motor also drives the toner feed screw, the toner feed roller, and the
developing roller to transfer toner from the toner cartridge onto the imaging drum.
The toner feed motor drives the waste toner feed screw, which removes the waste toner and
transports it to the waste toner container.
The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage of the imaging
drum.

The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist:
The memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller.
The toner level in any of the waste toner containers reaches a certain level.
Any of the drum-presence sensors do not detect the presence of the imaging drum.
Any of the imaging drums are installed incorrectly.
The number of pages printed with the current imaging drum reaches a predetermined level.
The level of toner in the imaging drum is not at a predetermined level while the toner cartridge is
feeding toner to the imaging drum. This indicates a toner feed failure.
The toner-level sensor detects a level of toner that is outside of a certain range during the print
operation. This indicates a toner-level sensor failure.
Developing roller engagement and disengagement

The product can print in full-color mode or in black-only mode. To print in black only, the developing
rollers in the cyan, magenta, and yellow imaging drums are disengaged. This maximizes the life of
those three imaging drums.
Figure 1-23 Developing roller engagement and disengagement control

Developing disengagement motor (C, Bk) Developing disengagement motor (Y, M)
SR22: SR21:
Developing home-position sensor (C, Bk) Developing home-position sensor (Y, M)
M18 M19
Developing roller
Developing roller
disengagement cam
Photosensitive drum
Bk C M Y
Engaged Disengaged Disengaged Disengaged
The DC controller rotates the developing disengagement motor and changes the direction of the cam
according to the instructions from the formatter for each print job.
When the product is turned on and at the end of each print job, all four of the developing rollers
disengage from the photosensitive drums. If the next print job is full-color, each of the developing
rollers engage. If the next print job is black only, only the black developing roller engages.
If the DC controller does not detect any output from the developing home-position sensor, it
determines that the developing disengagement motor has failed.

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed
image to the paper. The ITB unit has these main components:
ITB motor
ITB feed roller
ITB-driven roller
Primary transfer rollers
The ITB motor drives the ITB feed roller, which rotates the ITB. The motion of the ITB causes the
primary transfer rollers to rotate.
Figure 1-24 ITB unit

DC controller
WASTE TONER FULL

ITB SENSOR MARK DETECTION signal
signal
ITB UNIT PRESENCE signal
NEW ITB UNIT signal
ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal

ITB sensor mark
ITB
M10
ITB motor
ITB feed roller
ITB sensor mark detection sensor
ITB driven roller

Primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement
Depending on the requirements of the print job, the primary transfer rollers engage with the ITB so it
can receive toner from the photosensitive drums. There are three states of roller engagement.
Table 1-15 Primary-transfer roller engagement states
All rollers disengaged The home position for the ITB unit
Black roller engaged The state for a black-only print job
All rollers engaged The state for a full-color print job
The primary-transfer roller disengagement motor rotates or reverses to place the primary-transfer
roller disengagement cam into one of three positions. The cam causes the transfer roller slide plate to
move to the right or left, which causes the primary transfer rollers to move up to engage the ITB with
the photosensitive drum or down to disengage it.
If the DC controller does not receive the expected signal from the ITB home-position sensor during
the primary-transfer roller engagement or disengagement operation, but the primary-transfer roller

disengagement motor is rotating, it determines that the primary-transfer disengagement mechanism
has failed, and it notifies the formatter.
Figure 1-25 Three states of primary-transfer roller engagement and disengagement
DC controller
TRANSFER ROLLER DISENGAGEMENT ITB HOME-POSITION signal

MOTOR CONTROL signal
4 colors are disengage M9

Primary transfer roller SR10:
Photosensitive drum disengagement motor ITB home-position sensor
ITB
Transfer roller disengagement cam
Transfer roller slide plate Primary transfer roller
Only Bk is engaged
4 colors are engaged

ITB unit detection
The DC controller monitors several signals from the ITB unit to detect status.
Table 1-16 ITB unit detection
ITB unit life detection When a specified number of pages have been printed since an ITB unit was
installed, the DC controller alerts the formatter that the ITB unit is at the end of its
life.
ITB unit waste toner full detection When any of the waste-toner containers collect a specified level of toner, the DC
controller alerts the formatter that the imaging drum needs to be replaced.
ITB unit presence detection The DC controller uses an ITB sensor to make sure that the ITB is correctly
installed.
ITB perimeter detection To make sure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC
controller uses the ITB sensor marks on the surface of the ITB. It adjusts the
paper re-pickup timing based on this position.
ITB sensor-mark detection-sensor- If the DC controller cannot detect the ITB sensor marks, it determines that the ITB
failure detection sensor-mark detection-sensor has failed, and it notifies the formatter.

Secondary-transfer roller unit
The secondary-transfer roller unit transfers the toner image from the ITB surface onto the paper. The
ITB motor drives the secondary transfer roller, and the registration motor drives the registration roller.
To ensure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC controller stops the
registration motor when the leading edge of the paper passes the vertical synchronous position
sensor. It holds the paper in this position until the ITB is in the correct position, according to the ITB
perimeter detection, to align the toner image with the paper.
The DC bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller when the product is turned on, when it is
coming out of Sleep mode, or after a door has been closed. If no current is detected, the DC
controller determines that the secondary-transfer roller unit is not present, and it notifies the formatter.
The DC controller can detect when a new secondary-transfer roller unit has been installed. After a
specified number of pages have been printed since a new secondary-transfer roller unit has been
installed, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the secondary-transfer roller unit is reaching the
end of its life.
Figure 1-26 Secondary-transfer roller unit

Calibration
The product calibrates itself to maintain proper print quality. The calibration corrects color-
misregistration and color-density variation due to environmental changes or internal variations in the
product. The CPR/Density sensor is added in the center of horizontal scanning direction for more
precise correction.
Figure 1-27 Calibration mechanism

CPR/Density sensor
ITB
CPR/Density pattern
The product has the following calibration functions.
Table 1-17 Calibration functions
CPR correction control Yes
Environment correction control Yes
Image density control (DMAX) Yes
Image halftone control (DHALF) Yes
Density uniformity with a page adjustment Yes
Gray axis control (GAS) No
Color measurement on paper (M855 only) Yes

Calibration overview
The product calibration feature supports the following major components or sub systems:
No swipe calibration sensor systemthere are no covers or brushes on the calibration sensors.
The no swipe calibration sensor system prevents the build up of static electricity that can
cause toner contamination of the sensors, which causes unreliable calibrations.
The product uses three density sensors aligned across the width of the paper path.
The three density sensors are required to support the product density uniform adjustment
function. These sensors read the three sets of CPR/density patterns on the ITB.
The product supports a self initiated page image density uniformity adjustment function.
This function makes sure that the density across the page is consistent. This automatic
firmware function monitors the results of the calibrations. If the density of the same level
varies across the page, an adjustment is made to the laser as it sweeps across the page.
The calibration CPR/density pattern is then adjusted to reflect the adjusted calibration.
The product supports an enhanced CPR/density pattern and single execution for image halftone
control (DHALF) and color plane registration (CPR) using consecutive execution.
The enhanced CPR/density pattern combines the CPR and DHALF patches into a single
calibration pattern that is used for a DHALF/CPR combined calibration and for CPR
calibration.
The product supports a CPR prediction algorithm that was added to supplement the thermal
adjust algorithm.
This item allows the product to adjust CPR without executing a calibration sequence.
The product supports correlated error diffusion (CED) calibrations.
This item reduces calibration time and frequency.
The product supports the Restore Calibration control panel menu item.
Selecting the Restore Calibration item from the control-panel menus restores factory set
calibration settings and deletes only the stored calibration values from the product memory.
In contrast, selecting the Restore Factory Defaults item from the control-panel menus
deletes all of the stored values from the product memory.
HP recommends using the Restore Calibration item from the control-panel menus if the
product is experiencing calibration related problems.
The product supports an on media calibration sequence.
This feature allows the customer to execute a calibration for a specific media to make sure
that the best calibration performance is achieved for a specific media type.

Color-misregistration control
Internal variations in the imaging drums or the laser/scanners can cause the toner images to become
misaligned. The color misregistration control corrects the following problems:
Horizontal scanning start position
Horizontal scanning magnification
Vertical scanning start position
This calibration occurs at these times:
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging drum.
The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.
A specified number of pages have been printed.
The temperature in the laser/scanner unit area changes, which is a predictor of color
misregistration.
The user requests a calibration by using the control panel menus.
If data from the color misregistration and image-density sensors is outside a specified range when the
product is turned on or when it is beginning the calibration sequence, the DC controller determines
that these sensors have failed, and it notifies the formatter.
Image stabilization control

Environmental changes or deterioration of the photosensitive drums and toner can cause variations in
the image density. The image stabilization control reduces these fluctuations. There are three kinds of
image stabilization controls.
Table 1-18 Image stabilization controls
Environment change control The DC controller monitors environmental information from internal and external
temperature and humidity sensors. It adjusts the high-voltage bias to
accommodate environmental changes. This control is performed under the
following circumstances:
The product is turned on.
The imaging drum is replaced.
A change in environmental conditions occurs.

Table 1-18 Image stabilization controls (continued)
Image density control (DMAX) This control corrects variations in image density that are related to deterioration of
the photosensitive drum or the toner. The DC controller adjusts the high-voltage
biases to correct the problem under the following conditions:
The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is
turned on.
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an
imaging drum.
Image halftone control (DHALF) The formatter performs this control to calibrate the halftone, based on the
halftone-density measurements, under the following conditions:
The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is
turned on.
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an
imaging drum.

Color sensor and color-sensor sensor control (M855 only)
The image halftone control measures the color halftones of the toner image on the ITB. However, this
control cannot adjust halftone variations that occur because of differences in types of paper. To
accommodate differences in paper, the product has a color sensor and a color-sensor-control
mechanism, which is located in the duplex paper path. The product adjusts the color halftones based
on measurements from a test pattern that is printed on a page and passed through the duplexer after
fusing.
The color sensor is a spectrophotometer that is installed in the duplex paper path. The sensor
measures the toners spectral response to white light illumination, which allows the color density of the
fused toner to be calculated using the media that is being printed on.
This is the best measurement of color and tone reproduction since the toner has been fused and is
measured on the paper.
The color sensor engages or disengages based on the position of the color-sensor disengagement
cam, which is driven by reversing the duplexing re-pickup motor.
If the DC controller receives no signal from the color-sensor disengagement sensor during a color
sensor control operation, it determines that the duplexing paper feed mechanism has failed.
Figure 1-28 Color-sensor control

Gray-axis correction
The gray axis correction adjusts for differences in the process-gray color that is designated by the
formatter. The formatter adjusts the color balance for cyan, magenta, and yellow based on
measurements from this control.
Figure 1-29 Gray-axis correction

Scanning/image capture system
NOTE: The information in this section applies only to the HP LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880
product.
Scanner
The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, LED optics, and a
scanner controller board (SCB) attached to the back of the assembly. The scanner has two sensors
to detect Legal and Ledger/A3 sized paper and a switch to indicate when the document feeder is
open.
The document feeder and control panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly. If the
scanner fails, it can be replaced as a whole unit. The scanner replacement part does not include the
document feeder, SCB, or control panel assembly.

Document feeder system
Figure 1-30 Document feeder cross section
Item number Component name
1 Paper stopper
2 Input tray
3 Lift plate
4 Exit-drive roller
5 Pick roller
6 Separation roller
7 Deskew-drive roller
8 Pre-scan drive roller
9 Simplex selector
10 Post-scan drive roller
11 Duplex selector (background selector)
12 Output tray
ENWW Scanning/image capture system 51

Document feeder sensors
The document feeder contains the following sensors:
Figure 1-31 Document feeder sensor positions
7 6
2 1
5 3
4
8 9
Table 1-19 Document feeder sensors
Item number Component name Description
1 Sensor, legal Detects whether there is a legal-size original.
2 Sensor, portrait/landscape Detects whether there is a portrait-size or landscape-size

original.
3 Sensor, media width Detects the media stack width (one sheet or multiple sheets).
Used in combination with other sensors to determine media
size and orientation.
4 Sensor, stack height Detects the media stack height (one sheet or multiple
sheets).

Table 1-19 Document feeder sensors (continued)
5 Sensor, paper presence Detects whether a document is present in the document

feeder. If paper is present in the document feeder when
copies are made, the product scans the document using the
document feeder. If no paper is present when copies are
made, the product scans the document using the scanner
glass.
6 Sensor, ultrasonic Uses ultrasonic sound to detect a mutli-page paper feed.
NOTE: This sensor also functions as the pick success

sensor, and is the sensor that supports HP EveryPage.
7 Sensor, deskew Detects the top of the page as it approaches the deskew
rollers so the page can be deskewed.
8 Sensor, prescan1 Detects the top of the page as it approaches the front side
scan module (in the scanner base) to tell the system when to
start scanning.
9 Sensor, prescan2 Detects the top of the page as it approaches the e-duplex
scan module so the system will start scanning.
Document feeder simplex operation

Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job.
Figure 1-32 Simplex operation paper path
Simplex scan
1. The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded in the input tray.
2. The lift motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the stack
height sensor is triggered.
3. The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper.

4. The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller. If there is a
multipick, the document feeder stops, and an error message appears on the control panel
display.
NOTE: This function can be enabled or disables by using the Copy Settings or Scan Settings
control-panel menus for print jobs that are a single sheet, but might be detected as two sheets
(for example, a page with a sticky not on it).
5. The deskew sensor is activated when leading edge of paper is driven passed it. The firmware
registers the leading edge of paper position.
6. The leading edge of paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew drive
roller and the deskew pinch rollers. The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to
create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction
7. The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller which pulls paper toward the prescan
drive roller.
8. The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick and separator rollers to spin freely while
paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller.
9. The feed motor rotates to drive paper into the prescan1 sensor. The firmware registers the paper
leading edge position as the prescan1 sensor is triggered.
10. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from
prescan1 sensor to the simplex scan area. The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data.
11. If the ultrasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and paper presence sensor is still
activated, more than one page was loaded in the input tray, and the next page is fed starting
with step 3. This is repeated for all pages loaded in the document feeder input tray.
12. The prescan1 sensor is deactivated when trailing edge of paper passes it. The firmware
registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper.
13. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance
from prescan1 sensor to the scan area. The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data.
14. The feed motor continues to rotate until the input tray is empty and all pages have been fed
through the document feeder.
15. The lift motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position, and the document feeder is in a
ready state for the next scan operation.

Document feeder duplex operation
Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder duplex job.
Figure 1-33 Duplex operation paper path
Duplex scan
Simplex scan
1. The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded onto the input tray.
2. The lift motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the stack
height sensor is triggered.
3. The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper.
4. The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller. If there is a
multipick, the document feeder stops and an error message appears on the control panel
display.
NOTE: This function can be enabled or disables by using the Copy Settings or Scan Settings
control-panel menus for print jobs that are a single sheet, but might be detected as two sheets
(for example, a page with a sticky not on it).
5. The deskew sensor is activated when the leading edge of the paper is driven passed it. The
firmware registers the leading edge of the paper position.
6. The leading edge of the paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew drive
roller and the deskew pinch rollers. The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to
create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction.
7. The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller, which pulls the paper toward the
prescan drive roller.
8. The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick roller and the separator roller to free-spin
while paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller.
9. The feed motor rotates to drive the paper into the prescan1 sensor . The firmware registers the
paper leading edge position as the prescan1 sensor is triggered.
10. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from
prescan1 sensor to the simplex scan area. The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data.

11. The feed motor continues to drive the paper until the prescan2 sensor is triggered by the paper
leading edge. The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan2 sensor is
triggered.
12. The feed motor continues to drive the paper leading edge through the calibrated distance from
prescan2 sensor to the duplex scan area. The duplex scanner begins capturing scan data.
13. If the ultrasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and the paper presence sensor is
still activated, more than one page was loaded, and the next page is fed (once the firmware has
the memory available to store the scan data). This is repeated for all pages that are loaded in
the document feeder.
14. The prescan1 sensor is deactivated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The firmware
from the prescan1 sensor to the scan area. The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data.
16. The prescan2 sensor is deactivated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The firmware
from the prescan2 sensor to the scan area. The duplex scanner stops capturing scan data.
18. The feed motor continues to rotate until the input tray is empty and all pages have been fed
through.
19. The lift motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position and the document feeder is in a
ready state for the next scan operation.

Document feeder paper control and deskew
Figure 1-34 Deskew rollers and width adjust
Item number Component name
1 Deskew Pinch Rollers
2 Deskew Rollers
3 Width Adjust
Adjustable width adjust guides are provided on the input tray to ensure that the paper is stacked
together neatly at the center of the input tray. It also ensures the paper is located parallel with
the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.
To further minimize skew due to improper loading of paper in the input tray, a deskew function is
perform by buckling the paper to remove any skew between the paper and the document feeder.
The leading edge of the paper lines up parallel with the deskew drive rollers in preparation to be
driven into the remaining paper path of the document feeder.

Document feeder paper pick and separation
Figure 1-35 Separation angled ramp, separation roller, and separation pad
Item number Description
1 Angled ramp
2 Separation roller
3 Separation pad
The top sheet of paper is picked by the pick roller.
The angled ramp (callout 1) profile functions as a barrier to prevent the remaining lower sheets
from being picked with the top sheet.
If more than one sheet of paper is being picked, the separation roller (callout 2) and separation
pad (callout 3) stop the lower sheet of paper, which allows only the single top sheet to be pulled
into the document feeder.
The ultrasonic sensor, located behind the separator pad, ensures that the document feeder
stops if more than one page is picked (HP Every page technology).
The separation roller and separation pad are customer replaceable and have an expected life of
100,000 pages.

Document feeder paper stopper and fins
Figure 1-36 Paper stopper
Paper stopper A4/legal
Paper stopper A3/legal

The paper stopper on the output bin is adjustable to receive A4 short edge/legal and A3/Ledger
paper.
An audible click sound can be heard when the paper stopper is pulled out and locked in position.
A spring automatically retracts the paper stopper when the user pushes in to close it.
A pair of guides function to neatly stack A4 and letter size media, and then collapse when a
longer sized paper is used.

Document feeder simplex selector
The simplex selector serves as a white or black background during the scanning process. The
black background is used when certain automatic cropping and edge detection modes are
enabled on the device.
Switching between white and black mode is caused by rotating the deskew motor in reverse
which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector.
The simplex selector can sufficiently move (relative to the document feeder) to ensure consistent
and stable contact with the document feeder-specific window of the simplex scanner.
Document feeder white backing

Figure 1-37 White backing and simplex selector
1 White backing

The white backing (mounted to the document feeder; callout 1) ensures that any paper placed
on the flatbed scanner conforms to the glass, resulting in a uniform scan. The white color also
enables scanning of transparent paper on the flatbed scanner window.
The optical properties (color and reflectance) are sufficient to achieve the required image quality
attributes on both transparent and non-transparent paper.
The material used is UV-stabilized so its color will not change over time after being exposed to
the light source from the scanner. Also, the light source on the scanner uses LED's and does not
emit any UV light that might yellow the backing material.
Document feeder duplex selector

Figure 1-38 Duplex selector
1 Duplex selector
The duplex selector is used as a white and black background for duplex scans. It also provides a
white surface for duplex scanner calibration when the device is powered on.
Switching between white, black, and calibration mode is done by rotating the deskew motor in
reverse, which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector.
The duplex selector is biased toward the duplex scanner to keep the media conformed to the
duplex scanner glass.
The duplex selector is removable so that the surfaces of the selector and the scanner can be
cleaned if scans start to have lines in them.

To remove the selector, open the cover hatch, raise the input tray, push on the green latches,
and then pull duplex selector out of the document feeder.
TIP: Remove the duplex selector to gain access to jammed paper.

Document feeder hinge
Figure 1-39 Document feeder closed (book mode)
The hinges of the document feeder allow the document feeder to move vertically and
accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 40 mm (1.57 in) in height onto the
flatbed scanner window, while still being able to close on top of the book or object (with the
bottom of the document feeder mostly parallel to the flatbed scanner window).
The document feeder hinge provides a height adjustment of at least 40 mm (1.57 in) when a
maximum downward force of 5 kg (11 lb) is applied at front edge of the document feeder, with
the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) centered in the scan window and perpendicular to its
long axis.
The document feeder can withstand a downward force of at least 15 kg (33 lb) applied at the
front edge center of the document feeder, and the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) oriented
parallel to the long axis of the scan window but located anywhere within the scan window,
without breaking, deforming, detaching, or experiencing performance degradation.
The document feeder hinge supports the document feeder in the open position and will prevent
the document feeder from damage by being slammed.
The hinge will hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 125 mm (4.92 in) (as
measured at the front of the document feeder). The force required to open or close the
document feeder is less than 2.27 kg (5 lb).
The hinge allows the document feeder to open to an angle of 70 from the horizontal.

Figure 1-40 Document feeder open (maximum opening 70)

Pickup, feed, and delivery system
The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the
formatter. The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through
the product.
Photo sensors and switches

The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the pickup, feed, and delivery system.
Figure 1-41 Photo sensors and switches electrical components

Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path SR301
SR33
SR36
SR45
SW14
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR37 (front)
SR38 (rear)
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS SR26
SW13
SR21 SR31
SR24
SW12 SW11
SR32 SR25
Table 1-20 Photo sensors and switches

Abbreviation Component name Replacement assembly
SW11 Tray 2 paper size switch Lifter drive assembly
RM1-3222-000CN
SW12 Tray 2 trailing edge switch Lifter drive assembly
RM1-3222-000CN
SW13 Right door open/close switch Door open switch assembly
RM2-7035-000CN
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 65

Table 1-20 Photo sensors and switches (continued)
SW14 Front door open/close switch Door open switch assembly
RM2-7035-000CN
SR21 Tray 2 media-level sensor Lifter drive assembly
RM1-3222-000CN
SR22 Tray 2 feed sensor Cassette paper pick up assembly
RM1-9599-000CN
SR24 Tray 1 feed sensor MP (Tray 1) media feed sensor
RM1-9615-000CN
SR25 Tray 1 paper sensor MP (Tray 1) paper pick up assembly
RM1-9644-000CN
SR26 Tray 1 last-media sensor MP (Tray 1) assembly
RM1-9642-000CN
SR29 Fuser loop 1 sensor RM-9621-000CN
Registration secondary transfer assembly
SR30 Fuser loop 2 sensor RM-9621-000CN
Cassette paper pickup assembly
SR32 Tray 2 paper surface sensor RM1-9599-000CN
SR33 Output bin full sensor RM1-9841-000CN
Face down delivery assembly
Right door sub assembly
SR36 Output media width sensor RM1-9841-000CN
Face-down delivery assembly
SR37 Fuser front width sensor RM1-9621-000CN
SR38 Fuser rear width sensor RM1-9621-000CN

Table 1-20 Photo sensors and switches (continued)
SR301 Duplex switchback feed sensor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Duplex reverse assembly
SR302 Developer delivery sensor RM1-9640-000CN
SR2501 TOP sensor A2W77-67901
Intermediate transfer Belt (ITB)
MS Registration sensor A2W77-67901
Intermediate transfer Belt (ITB)

Motors and solenoids
The following figure shows the motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed and delivery system.
Figure 1-42 Motors and solenoids electrical components

Duplex flapper
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path M11

M302
SL301
M303
M301
Pickup cam
Lifting plate
Lifter SL1
SL2
M10 M6 M7 M5
CW CCW
Table 1-21 Motors and solenoids (paper path)
M5 Pickup motor RM1-9843-000CN
M6 Registration motor RM1-9843-000CN
M7 Cassette lifter motor RM1-3222-000CN
M10 ITB motor RM1-4519-00CN
M11 Fuser motor RM1-4519-00CN

Table 1-21 Motors and solenoids (paper path) (continued)
RM2-9646-000CN (M880)
M302 Duplex switch back motor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
M303 Duplex feed motor RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid RM1-9599-000CN
SL2 MP tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid RM1-9644-000CN
SL301 Duplex flapper solenoid RM2-0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
The pickup, feed, and delivery system can be divided into three units:
Pickup-and-feed system
Fuser and delivery unit
Duplexing unit

Figure 1-43 Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system
Fuser/delivery unit
Duplexing unit
M Y
C
K
M Y
C
K
ITB
Pickup/feed unit
Pickup-and-feed system
The pickup-and-feed unit picks an individual sheet of paper from the multipurpose tray or the
cassettes, carries it through the secondary-transfer unit, and feeds it into the fuser.
Table 1-22 Main operations within the pickup-and-feed system
Operation Steps
Cassette pickup 1. Paper-size and cassette-presence detection
2. Lift operation
3. Paper-level and paper-presence detection
4. Multiple-feed prevention
Multipurpose tray pickup 1. Paper-presence detection
2. Last paper detection
Paper feed 1. Skew-feed prevention
2. Paper detection
3. Feed-speed control

Cassette pickup
The sequence of steps for the cassette tray pickup operation is the following:
1. When the product is turned on or the tray is pushed closed, the lifting mechanism lifts the paper
stack so it is ready.
2. After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller rotates the pickup motor,
which causes the cassette pickup roller, cassette feed roller, and cassette separation roller to
rotate.
3. The DC controller drives the cassette pickup solenoid, which rotates the cassette pickup cam.
As the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm moves down, the cassette pickup roller touches the
surface of the paper stack, and it picks up one sheet of paper.
Figure 1-44 Cassette-pickup mechanism
DC controller
CASSETTE PICKUP
PICKUP MOTOR
SOLENOID DRIVE signal
CONTROL signal
1
M5 Pickup motor
1. The pickup cam rotates

Cassette feed roller
SL1 2. The pickup arm goes down
Cassette pickup Cassette pickup arm
solenoid
Cassette pickup roller 3

Cassette separation roller
3. The cassette pickup roller

Cassette pickup cam
picks one sheet of paper
Cassette paper-size and cassette-presence detection
The cassette end-plate detection switch and the cassette side-plate detection switch detect the size
of the paper that is loaded in the cassette. Each of these switches contains three sub-switches.
The DC controller compares the paper length that is detected by the vertical-synchronous-position
sensor to the detected size and to the size that is specified for the print job. If they do not match, the
DC controller notifies the formatter.

The cassette end-plate detection switch also detects whether the cassette is present. If all three of its
switches are off, the DC controller determines that the cassette is absent.
Figure 1-45 Cassette paper-size detection switches
DC controller
Bottom switch (CSTW1)
Top switch (CSTOUT)

Top switch (CSTL2)
Bottom switch (CSTL0)
Center switch (CSTW0)

Center switch (CSTL1)
SW4 SW5
Table 1-23 Switch states for paper-size detection

Paper size Cassette end-plate detection switch (SW4) Cassette side-plate detection switch (SW5)
Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch1 Center switch Bottom switch
A5 On On Off On or off Off On
A4 On On Off On or off Off Off
Letter On On Off On or off On Off
B5 Off On Off On or off Off On
Executive Off On Off On or off Off On
Letter-R Off Off On On or off Off On
A4-R On Off On On or off Off On

Table 1-23 Switch states for paper-size detection (continued)
Paper size Cassette end-plate detection switch (SW4) Cassette side-plate detection switch (SW5)
Top switch Center switch Bottom switch Top switch1 Center switch Bottom switch
Legal On Off Off On or off Off On
B4 On Off Off On or off On On
A3 On Off Off On or off Off Off
Ledger On Off Off On or off On Off
Cassette Off Off Off

absence
1 The top side-plate detection switch controls the lifter mechanism. When the switch is on, the lifting plate moves up. When it
is off, the lifting plate moves down. Its position has no effect on paper-size detection.

Cassette lift operation
When the product is turned on, when the cassette is inserted, or as the paper level in the cassette
decreases, the cassette lift mechanism raises the plate to keep the surface of the stack high enough
so the pickup roller can reach it.
1. The DC controller rotates the cassette-lifter motor to raise the lift plate.
2. When the paper-stack surface sensor detects the paper surface, the DC controller stops rotating
the cassette-lifter motor. If the sensor no longer detects paper, the DC controller begins rotating
the motor again.
If the paper-stack surface sensor does not detect the paper within a specified time after the lifter
motor begins rotating, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the lifter motor has failed.
Figure 1-46 Cassette lift mechanism
DC controller
CASSETTE MEDIA
CASSETTE MEDIA
CASSETTE LIFTER
STACK SURFACE
PRESENCE signal
MOTOR CONTROL signal
signal
SR2: SR1:
Cassette media stack surface sensor Cassette media presence sensor
M7:
Cassette lifter motor
Cassette media presence sensor lever
Cassette media stack surface sensor lever

Lifting plate
Lifter
<After lift-up operation>
<Before lift-up operation>

Cassette paper-level and paper-presence detection
The height of the paper-lift plate in the cassette indicates the paper level. The paper-level sensor,
which is at the end of the lifter motor, monitors the rotations of the motor and calculates the paper
level. It reports the paper level to the DC controller in the following increments:
No paper
Less than 10%
Between 10% and 20%
Between 20% and 40%
More than 40%
The cassette media-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the cassette.
Figure 1-47 Paper-level-detection mechanism

DC controller
CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal
CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR

CONTROL signal
M7:
SR4:
Cassette media level sensor Lifting plate

Multifeed prevention
In each of the cassettes and in the multipurpose tray, a separation roller prevents multiple sheets of
paper from entering the paper path. The separation roller is driven by the rotation of the feed roller,
but it is equipped with a torque limiter that counteracts this rotation when more than one sheet of
paper is between the two rollers.
Figure 1-48 Multifeed prevention

Cassette feed roller
Cassette pickup roller
Rotational force transmitted from

the cassette feed roller
Media
Cassette separation roller Rotational force transmitted from
the cassette pickup motor through
the torque limiter
<Normal-feed>
<Multiple-feed>
Multipurpose tray pickup

The multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the tray. If no paper is
present, the DC controller notifies the formatter. The print operation is not performed until paper is in
the tray.
The sequence of steps for the multipurpose tray pickup operation as follows:
1. After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller reverses the pickup motor,
which causes the multipurpose tray separation roller to rotate.
2. The DC controller turns on the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid, causing the multipurpose tray
pickup roller to rotate.

3. The lifting plate rises to meet the rotating pickup roller, and paper is picked from the stack.
4. The multipurpose tray separation roller isolates a single sheet of paper in case more than one
sheet was picked. The single sheet of paper is fed into the product. This mechanism is the same
as for the cassette pickup operation.
Figure 1-49 Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism
DC controller
MP TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID
MP TRAY MEDIA
PICKUP MOTOR
PRESENCE signal
DRIVE signal
CONTROL signal
Media
M5 Pickup motor
MP tray pickup solenoid

SL2
SR6
MP tray pickup roller
Lifting plate
MP tray separation roller SR6: MP tray media presence sensor
Multipurpose tray last-paper detection

Because the paper path between the multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor and the registration
roller is short, the product attempts to form the next image before the DC controller detects that the
tray is empty. To prevent the image from being formed on the photosensitive drum and wasting toner,
the multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects the empty tray before the image-formation process
begins.
As the last sheet of paper is picked up, the multipurpose tray last-paper detection roller rotates. It
does not rotate if two or more sheets are in the tray. The multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects

the moving roller, and it sends a signal to the DC controller. The DC controller notifies the formatter
so it can temporarily disable the image-formation process.
Figure 1-50 Multipurpose tray last-paper detection
Paper feed
After the pickup operation, the paper is fed through the product and into the fuser.
1. The paper passes through the feed rollers. The registration shutter aligns the paper correctly to
prevent skewed printing.
2. When the vertical synchronous position sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the
registration motor stops, and the paper movement pauses while the image on the ITB is timed to
align with the leading edge of the paper.

3. While the paper is paused, the media sensor detects the type of paper.
4. When the timing is correct, the registration motor begins rotating again to feed the paper through
the secondary transfer unit and into the fuser.
Figure 1-51 Paper-feed mechanism
Fuser unit

Skew-feed prevention
The product can straighten the paper without slowing the feed operation.
1. As the paper enters the paper path, the leading edge strikes the registration shutter, but the
paper does not pass through the shutter, so it is straightened.
2. The feed rollers keep pushing the paper, creating a force on the leading edge against the
registration shutter.
3. When the force is great enough, the registration shutter opens and the paper passes through.
Figure 1-52 Skew-feed prevention

1
Registration shutter
Me
dia
Paper-type detection
The product can detect the type of paper in the paper path, and it adjusts the print mode accordingly.
The product uses two types of media sensors:

Reflection: Detects the glossiness of the paper
Transmission: Detects the thickness of the paper
Figure 1-53 Media sensor unit
Media sensor (reflection type)
Media sensor (transmission type)
Registration shutter
Simplex printing:
The mode specified for the print job is Transparency, but the media sensor detects another
type.
The mode specified for the print job is something other than Auto or Transparency, but the
media sensor detects a transparency.
Duplex printing: The mode specified for the print job is compatible with duplex printing, but the
media sensor detects a transparency.
When the product is turned on or when it comes out of Sleep mode, it tests the media sensor by
turning on the LED. If the intensity of the light does not match the specified value, the DC controller
determines that the sensor has failed.
Feed-speed control
The DC controller adjusts the feed speed to improve print quality depending on the type of paper
used for the print job. The paper is fed at a specific rate depending on the print mode designated by
the formatter.
Table 1-24 Print mode and corresponding feed speed

Print mode Feed speed Media sensor detection
Automatic N/A N/A
Normal 1 1/1 Yes
Normal 2 1/1 N/A

Table 1-24 Print mode and corresponding feed speed (continued)
Print mode Feed speed Media sensor detection
Heavy media 1 3/4 Yes
Light media 1 1/1 N/A
Light media 2 1/1 N/A
Glossy media 1 1/3 Yes
Glossy film 1/3 Yes
Envelope 1 1/2 N/A
OHT 1/3 Yes
Label 1/2 N/A
Designated media 1 1/2 N/A
Designated media 2 1/3 N/A
Media width detection

The DC controller detects the width and position of paper to prevent an edge overheat of the fuser
heater. The DC controller detects the small-size or one-sided paper according to the media-width
sensor combination and notifies the formatter of a misprint when it detects that the paper size is
different from the designated size.
Table 1-25 Media-width combination of the sensors (1 of 2)
Fuser front width sensor (SR37) Fuser rear width sensor (SR38) Media-width/location
ON ON Larger than B4
OFF OFF Narrower than B4
ON OFF Narrower than Letter-R and one-sided

toward the front side
OFF ON Narrower than Letter-R and one-side

toward the rear side
Table 1-26 Media-width combination of the sensors (2 of 2)
Output media width sensor (SR36) Media-width/location
ON Wider than A4
OFF Narrower than B5

Fusing and delivery unit
The fusing and delivery unit fuses the toner onto the paper and delivers the printed page into the
output bin. It has the following controls to ensure optimum print quality:
Loop control
Pressure roller pressurization/depressurization control
A sensor detects when the output bin is full, and the DC controller notifies the formatter.
Loop control
The loop control maintains even tension on the paper while it is moving through the fuser to prevent
print-quality defects and paper-handling defects.
If the fuser rollers rotate more slowly than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp
increases and an image defect or paper crease occurs.
If the fuser rollers rotate faster than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp decreases
and the toner image is not transferred to the paper correctly, causing color misregistration.
To prevent these problems, the loop sensor, located between the secondary transfer rollers and the
fuser rollers, detects whether the paper is sagging or is too taut. The DC controller adjusts the speed
of the fuser motor accordingly.
Two loop sensors detect the amount of deflection:
Fuser loop sensor 1
Detects the deflection of heavy paper
Fuser loop sensor 2

Detects the deflection of normal paper other than heavy paper
Figure 1-54 Mechanism of the loop control

DC controller
M11
Loop sensor flag for heavy paper
Loop sensor flag for other than heavy paper
Pressure roller
SR30
SR29
<A> <B> <C>

Amount of deflection is small. Amount of deflection is large. Amount of deflection is large.
(heavy paper) (other than heavy paper)
Pressure roller
ITB

Table 1-27 Loop control
Fuser loop sensor 1 Fuser loop sensor 2 Speed of fuser motor Figure reference
(SR29) (SR30)
OFF OFF Speed down A
ON OFF Heavy paper: Speed up B
Other than heavy paper: Speed down
ON ON Speed up C
Fuser depressurize control

To prevent excessive wear on the pressure roller, deformation of the fuser sleeve, and to facilitate
jam-clearing procedures, the pressure roller is not pressurized except during printing. The DC
controller reverses the fuser motor, which rotates the fuser pressure-release cam.
The operational sequence of the fuser depressurize control is as follows:
1. Reverses the fuser motor and accordingly the fuser depressurize cam rotates.
2. As the fuser depressurize cam rotates, the fuser sleeve is pressurized toward or depressurized
against the pressure roller.

The DC controller determines a fuser depressurization mechanism failure and notifies the formatter
when the fuser home position sensor does not sense the home position within a specified period from
when the fuser motor is reversed.
Figure 1-55 Mechanism of the fuser depressurize control

DC controller
M11
SR28
Fuser depressurize cam
Pressure roller
Fuser sleeve
<Pressurized state> <Depressurized state>

The pressure roller is depressurized under the following conditions:
When the product is turned off
During Power-save mode (Sleep mode, active off or inactive off)
When a paper jam is detected
NOTE: The fuser remains pressurized if the power is interrupted by removing the power cord or
turning off a surge protector, or if the fuser is removed without turning off the product.

Duplexing unit
For supported models, the duplexing unit reverses the paper and feeds it through the paper path to
print the second side. It consists of the following components:
Duplexing-reverse unit: Installed on top of the product
Duplexing-feed unit: Inside the product, along the right side
The duplex flapper solenoid (SL301) controls the position of the duplexing flapper to feed the paper
into the duplexing unit.
Figure 1-56 Duplexing unit
Table 1-28 Duplexing-unit components

RM2-9646-000CN (M880)
M302 Duplex switchback motor RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
M303 Duplex feed motor RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)

Table 1-28 Duplexing-unit components (continued)
FM301 Duplex fan 1 RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
FM302 Duplex fan 2 RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
SL301 Duplex flapper solenoid RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
SR301 Duplex switchback feed sensor RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
SR302 Developer delivery sensor RM2:0291-000CN (M855)
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
All these components are driven by the duplexing driver, according to signals from the DC controller.
If the DC controller cannot communicate with the duplexing driver, it notifies the formatter that the
duplexing unit has failed.
Duplexing reverse and feed control

The duplexing reverse procedure pulls the paper into the duplexing unit after it exits the fuser, and the
duplexing feed procedure moves the paper through the duplexer so it can enter the product paper
path to print the second side of the page.
1. After the first side has printed, the duplexing flapper solenoid is opened, which creates a paper
path into the duplexing-reverse unit.
2. After the paper has fully entered the duplexing-reverse unit, the duplexing-reverse motor
reverses and directs the paper into the duplexing-feed unit.
3. The duplexing re-pickup motor and duplexing feed motor move the paper into the duplexing
repickup unit.
4. To align the paper with the toner image on the ITB, the duplexing re-pickup motor stops and the
paper pauses until the specified time.
5. The paper re-enters the paper path, and the second side is printed.

Jam detection
The product uses the following sensors and switches to detect the presence of the paper as it moves
through the paper path, to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed, and to
report to the DC controller if the paper has jammed:
Tray 2 feed sensor (SR22)
TOP sensor (SR2501)
Fuser loop sensor 1 (SR29)
Fuser output sensor 1 (SR35)
Output bin full sensor (SR33)
Duplex switchback feed sensor (SR301)
Developer delivery sensor (SR302)
Duplex refeed sensor (SR304)
Registration sensor (MS)
Right door open/close switch (SW13)
Front door open/close switch (SW14)

The product determines that a jam has occurred if one of the sensors detects paper at an
inappropriate time. The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter.
Figure 1-57 Location of each jam sensor and switch

Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path

SR301
SR33
SR45
SW14
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS
SW13
SR24
The product detects the following jams.
Table 1-29 Jam detection

Jam Causes and conditions
Pickup stay jam 1 From MP tray (Tray 1)
The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper
within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
From Cassette
The cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a
specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
Pickup stay jam 2 The TOP sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period
from when it detects the leading edge.
Fuser delivery delay jam 1 The fuser delivery sensor 1 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified
period from when the TOP sensor detects the leading edge.
Fuser delivery delay jam 2 The fuser delivery sensor 2 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified
period from when the fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the leading edge.

Table 1-29 Jam detection (continued)
Fuser delivery stay jam The fuser delivery sensor 1 does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified
period from when the TOP sensor detects the trailing edge.
Fuser wrapping jam 1 The fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the trailing edge of paper within a specified period
from when it detects the leading edge.
Fuser wrapping jam 2 The face-down tray media-full sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a
specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the leading edge.
Fuser wrapping jam 3 The fuser delivery sensor 2 detects the trailing edge of paper within a specified period
from when the fuser delivery sensor 2 detects the leading edge.
Residual paper jam Any one of the following sensor detects a paper presence when the product is turned
off, when the door is closed or when the product is released from Power-save mode
(Sleep mode, active off or inactive off):
TOP sensor
Loop sensor 1
Loop sensor 2
Fuser delivery sensor 1
Duplex switch back feed sensor
Duplex feed sensor
Duplex re-pickup sensor
After a jam, some sheets of paper might remain inside the product. If the DC controller detects
residual paper after a door is closed or after the product is turned on, the product automatically clears
itself of those residual sheets.

1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet
paper feeder
The product is configured with either the additional 1x500-sheet input tray (M8555 only) or 3x500-
sheet input tray depending on which bundle was purchased.
The 1x500-sheet input tray (M8555 only) has one tray (Tray 3) and a storage compartment.
The 3x500-sheet input tray has three trays (Trays 3, 4, and 5).
NOTE: These optional trays are not identical to the main cassette (Tray 2).
Figure 1-58 Paper feeder installation and paper path
1x500-sheet paper deck (M855 only) 3x500-sheet paper deck

These additional trays are each controlled by paper-feeder drivers, which contain a microcomputer.
The paper-feeder drivers receive commands from the DC controller. If the DC controller is unable to
communicate with a paper-feeder driver, it notifies the formatter that the optional input tray is not
connected correctly.
1x500- and 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and

cassette-presence detection
The paper deck detects the size of the paper loaded in the paper deck cassette by monitoring the
paper deck cassette-media-end switch and the paper deck cassette-media-width switch. It also
detects the presence of a cassette by monitoring the switches. The paper deck controller notifies the
formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is absent.

Table 1-30 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection
Paper size 3x500-sheet paper deck 3x500-sheet paper deck
Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch
Top switch Center switch Bottom Top switch Center switch Bottom switch
switch
Executive Off On On On On On
Letter Off Off On On On On
A5 On On Off On On On
B5 Off On Off On On On
Ledger Off Off On Off Off On
Legal On On Off Off Off On
B4 Off On Off Off Off On
A3 Off Off Off Off Off On
A4-R NOTE: The product cannot detect the paper size of A4-R and Letter-R. If A4-R or Letter-R sized paper is
loaded to the cassette, A5 size is reported by the formatter.
Letter-R
Universal On On Off Off On On
Cassette Off Off Off Off Off Off

absent
ENWW 1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder 93
Paper feeder electrical components
The following figure shows the signal flow of the paper feeder controller.
Figure 1-59 Paper feeder electrical components

Paper deck cassette 1
Motor
+3.3V
+24V
Solenoid
DC controller
Photointerrupter
Switch (NOTE)
Paper deck cassette 2 (NOTE)
Motor
Paper deck
Solenoid
controller
Photointerrupter
Paper deck cassette 3 (NOTE)
Motor
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Note: 3x500-sheet paper feeder only

Table 1-31 Paper feeder electrical components
Component type Abbreviation Component name Replacement assembly
Motor M111 Cassette 1 lifter motor Paper pickup assembly
RM2-0275-000CN
M112 Cassette 1 pickup motor Motor
RK2-1331-000CN
M121 Cassette 2 lifter motor Paper pickup assembly
RM2-0275-000CN
M122 Cassette 2 pickup motor Motor
RK2-1331-000CN
M131 Cassette 3 lifter motor (3x500-sheet Paper pickup assembly

paper feeder only)
RM2-0275-000CN
M132 Cassette 3 pickup motor (3x500-sheet Motor

paper feeder only)
RK2-1331-000CN
Solenoid SL111 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (1x500- Paper pickup assembly

and 3x500-sheet paper feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SL121 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (3x500-
sheet paper feeder only)
SL131 Cassette 5 pickup solenoid (3x500-

Switch SW111 Cassette 3 media trailing edge switch Auto close assembly
(1x500- and 3x500-sheet paper
feeder) RM1-3531-000CN
SW112 Tray 3 media size switch (1x500- and

3x500-sheet paper feeder)
SW113 Right door open detection switch Switch button

(3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
WC2-5512-000CN
SW121 Cassette 4 media trailing edge switch Auto close assembly

RM1-3531-000CN
SW122 Tray 4 paper size switch (3x500-sheet
paper feeder only)
SW131 Cassette 5 media trailing edge switch

SW132 Tray 5 paper size switch (3x500-sheet

paper feeder only)
Table 1-31 Paper feeder electrical components (continued)
Photointerrupter SR111 Cassette 3 media-level sensor Auto close assembly

(1x500- and 3x500-sheet paper
feeder) RM1-3531-000CN
SR112 Tray 3 feed sensor (1x500- and Paper pickup assembly

RM2-0275-000CN
SR113 Tray 3 paper sensor (1x500- and
SR114 Tray 3 paper surface sensor (1x500-

and 3x500-sheet paper feeder)
SR121 Cassette 4 media-level sensor Auto close assembly

RM1-3531-000CN
SR122 Tray 4 feed sensor (3x500-sheet Paper pickup assembly

paper feeder only)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR123 Tray 4 paper sensor (3x500-sheet
paper feeder only)

SR131 Cassette 5 media-level sensor Auto close assembly

RM1-3531-000CN
SR132 Tray 5 feed sensor (3x500-sheet Paper pickup assembly

paper feeder only)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR133 Tray 5 paper sensor (3x500-sheet
paper feeder only)


Paper-feeder pickup-and-feed operation
The pickup and feed operation is the same for each of the trays.
Figure 1-60 Paper-feeder pickup-and-feed operation
DC controller
Paper deck driver

UPPER PD CASSETTE SIDE PLATE POSITION signal
UPPER PD CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE
UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE END PLATE POSITION signal
UPPER PD CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL
UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA PRESENCE signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL
UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal
UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal

signal
signal
signal
PD pickup
roller
SR102
SR104
SR101 SW103
SW101 SW102 PD feed roller
SR105
PD separation roller
Lifter
PD pickup cam
M102
SL101
M101
The methods for all the following operations are the same as for the main cassette (Tray 2):
Paper-size detection and cassette-presence detection
Lift operation
Paper-level and paper-presence detection
Multiple feed prevention
Jam detection
Paper feeder jam detection

The paper feeder uses the following sensors and switch to detect the presence of the paper and to
check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:

Right door open detection switch (SW113)
Figure 1-61 Paper feeder sensor and switch location
SR112
SR122
SW113
SR132
Table 1-32 Paper feeder jam detection

Jams Supported feature
No pick jam 1 Yes
No pick jam 3 Yes
No pick jam 4 Yes
Table 1-32 Paper feeder jam detection (continued)
Jams Supported feature
Residual paper jam Yes
Right door open jam Yes
No pick jam 3 From cassette 2: The cassette 1 media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of
paper within a specified period from when the cassette 2 media-feed sensor detects the
leading edge.
From cassette 3: The cassette 1 media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of
paper within a specified period from when the cassette 3 media-feed sensor detects the
leading edge.
No pick jam 4 The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor in the product does not detect the leading edge of paper
within a specified period from when the cassette 1 media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.

3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder
The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder is optionally installed at the bottom of the product.
The 3,500-sheet paper feeder picks up one sheet of paper and feeds it to the product. The HCI
controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
The HCI also detects the presence of a cassette by monitoring the switches. The HCI controller
notifies the formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is not installed.
The following figure shows the installation and the paper path.
Figure 1-62 HCI installation and paper path
ENWW 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder 101

HCI electrical components
The following figure shows the signal flow of the HCI controller.
Figure 1-63 HCI electrical components

3,500-sheet paper deck
Motor
+3.3V
+24V
Solenoid
DC controller HCI controller
Photointerrupter
Switch
Table 1-33 HCI electrical components

Motor M3301 Tray 3 pickup motor Motor, DC stepping
RK2-1331-000CN
M3302 Tray 3lifter motor Lifter drive assembly
M3303 Tray 4 lifter motor RM1-8879-000CN
M3304 Tray 4 pickup motor Motor, DC stepping
RK2-1331-000CN
Solenoid SL3301 Tray 3 pickup solenoid Paper pickup assembly right
RM1-8869-000CN
SL3302 Tray 4 pickup solenoid Paper pickup assembly left
RM1-8876-000CN
Switch SW3301 Right door open/closed switch Switch button
WC2-5512-000CN
SW3302 Tray 3 open/closed switch Auto close assembly
SW3303 Tray 4 open detection switch RM1-8880-000CN

Table 1-33 HCI electrical components (continued)
Photointerrupter PS3101 Tray 3 lift-up media-surface sensor Paper pickup assembly right
PS3102 Tray 3 paper surface sensor RM1-8869-000CN
PS3103 Tray 3 paper sensor
PS3201 Tray 4 lift-up media-surface sensor Paper pickup assembly left
PS3202 Tray 4 paper surface sensor RM1-8876-000CN
PS3203 Tray 4 paper sensor
PS3301 HCI feed sensor Merge paper feed assembly
RM2-0270-000CN
PS3302 Tray 3 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly right
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3303 Tray 3 paper size sensor Auto close assembly
PS3304 Tray 4 paper size sensor RM1-8880-000CN
PS3305 Tray 4 feed sensor Paper pickup assembly left
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3306 HCI inner flag sensor Paper pickup assembly left
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3308 Tray 3 media-level sensor Media level sensor
PS3309 Tray 4 media-level sensor RM1-9579-000CN
HCI motor control

The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) has four motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
Component name Components driven
M3301 Tray 3 pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for right cassette
M3302 Tray 3 lifter motor Lifter for right cassette
M3303 Tray 4 lifter motor Lifter for left cassette
M3304 Tray 4 pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for left cassette

HCI motor failure detection
The HCI controller determines the following motor failures.
Table 1-35 HCI motor failures
Failure detection function Supported feature
Tray 3 pickup motor failure detection No
Tray 3 lifter motor failure detection Yes
Tray 4 lifter motor failure detection Yes
Tray 4 pickup motor failure detection No

HCI pickup-and-feed operation
The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder picks up one sheet of paper in the paper feeder
cassette and feeds it to the product.
HCI electrical components

The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder has two cassettes, and each of them operates in
the same manner.
Figure 1-64 HCI electrical components
M3304
SL3302
PS3305
PS3301 SW3301
PS3203
PS3306
PS3201 PS3302
PS3103
PS3202
PS3101 PS3102
SL3301
PS3309 PS3308
M3301
SW3303 PS3304 SW3302 PS3303
M3303 M3302

Abbreviation Component name Signal
M3301 Tray 3 pickup motor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL
M3302 Tray 3 lifter motor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL
M3303 Tray 4 lifter motor HCI LEFT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL
M3304 Tray 4 pickup motor HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL
SL3301 Tray 3 pickup solenoid HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID
SL3302 Tray 4 pickup solenoid HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID
CL3301 Tray 3 pickup clutch HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH
CL3302 Tray 4 pickup clutch HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH
SW3301 Right door open detection switch HCI RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION
SW3302 Tray 3 open detection switch HCI RIGHT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION

Table 1-36 HCI electrical components (continued)
Abbreviation Component name Signal
SW3303 Tray 4 open detection switch HCI LEFT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION
PS3101 Tray 3 lift-up media-surface sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2
PS3102 Tray 3 paper surface sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1
PS3103 Tray 3 paper sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT
PS3201 Tray 4 lift-up media-surface sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2
PS3202 Tray 4 paper surface sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1
PS3203 Tray 4 paper sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT
PS3301 HCI feed sensor HCI MEDIA FEED
PS3302 Tray 3 feed sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED
PS3303 Tray 3 paper size sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE
PS3304 Tray 4 paper size sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE
PS3305 Tray 4 feed sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED
PS3306 HCI inner flag sensor HCI LONG EDGE FEED GUIDE OPEN DETECTION
PS3308 Tray 3 media-level sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL
PS3309 Tray 4 media-level sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL

HCI lift-up operation
The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever any of the
following occur:
The product is turned on.
The cassette is installed.
The paper stack surface lowers as a result of the pickup operation.
Figure 1-65 HCI lift-up operation mechanism

Wire HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor
PS3202
PS3201
HCI left cassette

media stack surface 2
sensor Tray
Pulley
M3303 HCI left cassette lifter motor
The figure above illustrates the mechanism for the left cassette, but each HCI cassette has the same
mechanism.
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows:
1. The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates the pulley to reel the wire. The tray moves up.
2. The HCI cassette lifter motor stops when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor detects
the paper surface.
3. The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates again when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor
detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
The HCI controller determines an HCI cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through
the DC controller when the HCI cassette media stack surface 2 sensor does not detect the paper
surface within a specified period from when the HCI cassette lifter motor starts rotating.
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection

The HCI controller detects whether the paper loaded in the cassette is A4-R or Letter-R size by
monitoring the cassette media-size sensors and notifies the formatter through the DC controller. The
HCI controller also detects the presence of the cassette by monitoring the cassette open detection
switches and notifies the formatter through the DC controller. These detections are not executed
during Sleep mode.

HCI jam detection
The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder uses the following sensors to detect the presence of
the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
HCI feed sensor (PS3301)
Tray 3 feed sensor (PS3302)
Figure 1-66 HCI jam sensor locations
PS3305 PS3301
PS3302
HCI no pick jam 1 From right cassette
The right cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a
specified period from when the right cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
From left cassette
The left cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a
specified period from when the left cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
HCI no pick jam 3 From right cassette
The media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified
period from when the right cassette media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
From left cassette
The media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified
period from when the left cassette media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
HCI no pick jam 4 The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor in the product does not detect the leading edge of
paper within a specified period from when the media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.

HCI Residual paper jam Any one of the following sensors detects a paper presence when the product is turned off,
when the door is closed or when the product is released from Power-save mode (Sleep mode,
active off, or inactive off):
Media-feed sensor
Right cassette media-feed sensor
Left cassette media-feed sensor
HCI right door open jam The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.

The intermediate paper transportation unit (IPTU) is optionally installed on the face-down delivery part
of the product. The IPTU feeds the printed paper to the output accessory. The IPTU driver controls
the operational sequence of the IPTU.
Figure 1-67 IPTU installation and paper path

Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
To output accessory
IPTU electrical components

The following figure shows the signal flow of the IPTU driver.
Figure 1-68 IPTU driver signal flow

Motor
+24V
DC controller IPTU driver Photointerrupter
Fan
Output accessory

Table 1-37 IPTU electrical components
Motor M201 Feed motor 2 Motor, DC stepping
M202 Feed motor 1 RK2-1320-000CN
Fan FM201 Feed area fan Fan
RM1-4394-000CN
Photointerrupter SR201 IPTU feed sensor 3 Lower guide assembly

(IPTU)
SR202 IPTU feed sensor 2
RM2-5057-000CN
SR203 ITPU feed sensor 1
SR204 IPTU door open/close sensor
IPTU motor control

The IPTU has two motors for the paper-feed.
Table 1-38 IPTU motor specifications
Component name Component driven
M201 Feed motor 2 Feed roller
M202 Feed motor 1 Feed roller
Feed operation
The paper is delivered to the finishing accessory through the IPTU.
Figure 1-69 Motors and sensors of the IPTU

M201 M202
SR204 SR201 SR202 SR203

To delivery option
Component name Signal Driver
IPTU feed motor 2 M201 IPTU feed motor 2 control IPTU driver
IPTU feed motor 1 M202 IPTU feed motor 1 control signal IPTU driver
IPTU media feed sensor 3 SR201 IPTU media feed 3 signal IPTU driver
ENWW Intermediate paper transportation unit 111

Component name Signal Driver
IPTU door open/close sensor SR204 IPTU door open detection signal IPTU driver
IPTU sequence
1. The paper is fed into the IPTU after fusing.
2. The DC controller sends a drive command to the IPTU driver after the fusing delivery media feed
sensor detects the leading edge of the paper.
3. When it receives a command, the IPTU driver drives the IPTU feed motors to rotate the PD
media feed rollers.
4. The IPTU feed rollers feed the paper to the accessory.
IPTU motor failure detection

The IPTU driver does not detect the motor failures. A jam is notified when the feed motors have
failed.
IPTU fan control

The IPTU has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the IPTU.
Table 1-39 IPTU fan specifications
Component name Cooling area Type Speed
FM201 Feed area fan Inside of the IPTU Intake Full
IPTU fan failure detection

The IPTU driver determines the following fan failure.
Table 1-40 IPTU fan failure
Feed area fan failure detection Yes
The DC controller determines a fan failure and notifies the formatter when the feed area fan locks for
a specified period from when it starts up.

IPTU jam detection
The IPTU uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the
paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
IPTU feed sensor 1 (SR203)
IPTU door open/close sensor (SR204)
Figure 1-70 IPTU jam detection sensors
SR204 SR201 SR202 SR203
The IPTU detects the following jams.
Table 1-41 IPTU jam detection
Jam Supported feature
Delivery delay jam 1 Yes
Delivery delay jam 2 Yes
Delivery stay jam 1 Yes
Residual paper jam Yes
Door open jam Yes
ENWW Intermediate paper transportation unit 113

The stapler/stacker is optionally installed at side of the product. The stapler/stacker delivers the
printed paper directly to the output bin or delivers the set of printed paper after stapling to the output
bin. The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has the hole punching function in addition to the
standard stapler/stacker function. The stacker controller controls the operational sequence of the
stapler/stacker. The stacker controller and the hole punch controller control the operational sequence
of the stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly.
Figure 1-71 Staple/stacker installation and paper path

Output bin
Staple stacker assy
Pass through assy

Figure 1-72 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path
Output bin
Staple stacker assy
Pass through assy
Puncher assy
ENWW Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch 115

Stapler/stacker electrical components
The following figure shows the signal flow of the stacker controller.
Figure 1-73 Stapler/stacker controller signal flow

Staple/stacker
Motor
DC controller
Solenoid
Formatter Clutch
Stacker
controller Switch
IPTU +24V
controller
Photointerrupter
Sensor
Hole puncher*
Motor
Switch
Punch
controller
Photointerrupter
Sensor
* Staple stacker with hole puncher assembly only

Table 1-42 Stapler/stacker electrical components (1 of 2)
Motor M41 Staple motor Staple assembly
4G3-0938-000CN
M61 Hole punch motor (Stapler/stacker with Hole punch assembly

puncher assembly only)
A2W84-67901 (2/3 punch)
M62 Side registration motor (Stapler/stacker
with puncher assembly only) CZ999-67902 (2/4 punch)
M63 Hole punch feed motor (Stapler/stacker

with hole puncher assembly only)
M101 Inlet motor Paper feed motor assembly
FM0-1889-000CN
M102 Stack ejection motor Stack ejection motor
4G3-0769-000CN
M103 Front alignment plate motor Operation tray assembly
M104 Rear alignment plate motor RM2-5309-000CN
M105 Stapler mobility motor Staple subassembly
4G3-0939-000CN
M106 Swing motor Press motor assembly
FM2-1409-000CN
M107 Output bin 1 shift motor Stack upper tray assembly
RM2-5324-000CN
M108 Output bin 2 shift motor Stack lower tray assembly
RM2-5339-000CN
M109 Trailing edge assist motor Operation tray assembly
M110 Gear change motor RM2-5309-000CN
M113 Saddle inlet motor Paper pass assembly (stapler/stacker

and Stapler/stacker with hole punch
RM2-5334-000CN
Saddle motor assembly (booklet maker

and booklet maker with hole punch)
FM2-0737-000CN

Table 1-42 Stapler/stacker electrical components (1 of 2) (continued)
Solenoid SL101 Inlet roller alienation solenoid Upper entrance guide assembly
RM2-6024-000CN
SL102 Buffer roller alienation solenoid Upper crossmember assembly
SL103 Delivery roller alienation solenoid FM0-1882-000CN
SL104 Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid Solenoid
FH6-5100-000CN
Clutch CL101 Shutter open-close clutch Clutch, electromagnetic
CL102 Stack ejection lower roller clutch 4H3-0370-000CN
Switch MSW61 Top door open detection switch 2/3 hole punch assembly
(Stapler/stacker with hole puncher
assembly only) RM2-5354-000CN
2/4 hole punch assembly
RM2-5355-000CN
MSW62 Front door open detection switch 2/3 hole punch assembly
RM2-5355-000CN
MSW101 Front cover close detection switch Sensor switch assembly
FM2-1417-000CN
MSW102 Swing guide open detection switch Upper crossmember assembly
FM0-1882-000CN
MSW103 Output bin 1 close detection switch Stack upper tray assembly
4G3-0938-000CN
MSW104 Staple safety switch Upper crossmember assembly
FM0-1882-000CN

Photointerrupter PI61 Side registration home position sensor 2/3 hole punch assembly
See Table 1-43 Stapler/ assembly only) RM2-5354-000CN
stacker electrical
components (2 of 2) 2/4 hole punch assembly
on page 120 for
additional RM2-5355-000CN
photointerrupters.
PI62 Hole punch motor clock sensor (Stapler/ 2/3 hole punch assembly
stacker with hole puncher assembly
only) RM2-5354-000CN
RM2-5355-000CN
PI63 Hole punch home position sensor 2/3 hole punch assembly
RM2-5355-000CN
PI101 Top cover open detection sensor Paper feed motor assembly
FM0-1889-000CN
PI102 Front cover open detection sensor Sensor switch assembly
FM2-1417-000CN
PI103 Inlet sensor Entrance sensor bracket assembly
FM2-0717-000CN
PI104 Paper path sensor Return roller assembly
FM0-2403-000CN
PI105 Swing guide home position sensor Upper crossmember assembly
FM0-1882-000CN
PI106 Front alignment plate home position Operation tray assembly

sensor
RM2-5309-000CN
PI107 Rear alignment plate home position
sensor
PI108 Processing tray media-presence sensor
PI109 Trailing edge assist home position

sensor
PI110 Staple shift home position sensor Stapler assembly
4G3-0938-000CN
PI111 Output bin 1 media-presence sensor Stack upper tray assembly
4G3-0938-000CN

Sensor PCA - Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA
- Output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA
- LED PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole

- Photosensor PCA (Stapler/stacker with

hole puncher assembly only)
- Hole punch chip box full sensor PCA

assembly only)
Table 1-43 Stapler/stacker electrical components (2 of 2)
Photointerrupter PI112 Output bin 2 media-presence sensor Stack lower tray assembly
continued
RM2-5339-000CN
PI113 Shutter home position sensor Shutter HP assembly
FM2-1401-000CN
PI114 Output bin 1 media-surface sensor Paper-face sensor assembly
PI115 Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 1 4G3-0934-000CN
PI116 Stapler alignment interference sensor Staple subassembly
4G3-0939-000CN
PI120 Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 2 Photointerrupter

(newly added electrical component)
WG8-5593-000CN
PI123 Swing height sensor (newly added Swing guide assembly

electrical component)
RM2-5307-000CN

Stapler/stacker motor control
The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has an additional three motors in the hole puncher
assembly.
Table 1-44 Stapler/stacker motor control
Abbreviation Component name Component driven
M61 Hole punch motor Hole punch assembly
M62 Hole punch feed motor Hole punch feed roller
M63 Side registration motor Hole punch slide assembly
Stapler/stacker motor failure detection

The stacker controller determines the following motor failures.
Table 1-45 Stapler/stacker motor failure detection
Hole punch motor failure detection Yes
Hole punch feed motor failure detection No
Side registration motor failure detection Yes
A jam is sent to the formatter if the hole punch feed motor fails.

Stapler/stacker feed-and-delivery operation
The following figure is a diagram of the electrical components for the feed-and-delivery operation of
the stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly.
Figure 1-74 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components
M103 M101
M102 M104 M109 M113 M63
PI104
Trailing edge
detection sensor
(LED5, PTR5)
PI103
PI111
M107
M105
M41
PI112
M108
SL103
SL102
SL101
SL104
Table 1-46 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components
Abbreviation Component name
M41 Staple motor

Table 1-46 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components (continued)
Abbreviation Component name
M63 Hole punch feed motor (stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
M101 Inlet motor
M102 Stack ejection motor
M103 Front alignment plate motor
M104 Rear alignment plate motor
M105 Stapler mobility motor
M107 Output bin 1 shift motor
M108 Output bin 2 shift motor
M109 Trailing edge assist motor
M113 Saddle inlet motor
SL101 Inlet roller alienation solenoid
SL102 Buffer roller alienation solenoid
SL103 Delivery roller alienation solenoid
SL104 Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid
PI103 Inlet sensor
PI104 Paper path sensor
PI111 Output bin 1 media-presence sensor
PI112 Output bin 2 media-presence sensor
N/A LED PCA (stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
N/A Photosensor PCA (stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)

Stapler/stacker basic operation
The stapler/stacker delivers jobs from the product in several ways. The modes of delivery include
simple stacking, job offset, and stapling. The stacker controller PCA controls all operations involved in
these modes, according to the commands from the product.
Figure 1-75 Basic operation of the stapler/stacker
Swing guide drive system

Output bin drive system
Alignment drive system
Control system
Stapler drive system
Delivery drive system
Feeder drive system

Output bin drive system
Shutter drive system
NOTE: With job offset, each sheet of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep
each job separate from the others.
Stapler/stacker electrical circuitry

The stacker controller PCA controls the stacker operation sequence. A 16-bit microprocessor (CPU)
is installed on the stacker controller PCA to control the stacker operation sequence and controller
area network (CAN) signal communication with the video controller PCA. The stacker controller PCA
drives solenoids, motors, and so forth in response to the commands received from the video
controller through the CAN signal communication line. In addition, the stacker controller PCA reports
information about various sensors and switches to the video controller through the CAN signal
communication line. Major functions of the IC chips installed on the stacker controller PCA are as
follows:
IC13 (CPU): Controls the operation sequence
IC10 (EEP-ROM): Backs up adjustment values
IC6 (Communication IC): Communicates with the host machine

IC8 (Regulator IC): Generates 5 Vdc
IC14 (Regulator IC): Generates 3.3 Vdc
Figure 1-76 Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker

DC Stacker controller PCB Motor
controller
PCB
Solenoid
IC13
Formatter CPU
Clutch
IC10
EP-ROM
Switch
IC6
Communication IC Sensor
IC8
Regulator IC
IC14
Regulator IC

Stapler/stacker feed drive system
Based on commands from the product, the stapler/stacker delivers jobs to the output bins in the
appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling.
Figure 1-77 Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker

Normal
Method of delivery Simple stacking
delivery
Stack job offset
Staple
Front 1-point stapling
Rear 1-point stapling
2-point stapling
Figure 1-78 Output bins of the stapler/stacker
Normal output bin
Normal output bin

Paper delivery path (stapler/stacker and booklet maker)
There are two paper paths to output bin 1 and output bin 2 depending on the ejection process.
All sheets are ejected through the following path when the accessory is set to non-sort.
Figure 1-79 Paper path when set to non-sort

Tray
Paper is stacked alternately

1st delivery roller
Stack ejection roller Buffer roller Inlet roller
When the product sorts paper size other than A4, B5, or LTR or when set to staple and sort, copies
are delivered to the processing output bin for aligning and stapling and then ejected using the stack
trailing-edge assist.

Figure 1-80 Paper path for sizes other than A4, B5, or LTR
1st delivery roller
Paper Buffer roller Inlet roller
Stack ejection roller
Paper
Processing tray
Stack trailing-edge assist
With A4, B5, or LTR paper sizes, two sheets of paper feed into the buffer (two or three sheets if 2-
point stapling). The sheets are then aligned and stapled in the processing output bin and ejected.
While stapling or offset is performed, copies are simultaneously ejected, delivered to the buffer, and
stacked in the processing output bin. Copies are received continuously from the product. The stack
delivered from the buffer is ejected to the processing output bin, and the stack processed in the
processing output bin is ejected to the output bin. Simultaneous stack ejection is described below for
two A4 copies between stacks when the equipment is set to sort.

1. When the first paper reaches the switchback point, it is sent to the buffer unit, and the buffer
guide holds the trailing edge of the paper.
Figure 1-81 Paper path (1 of 5)

Buffer roller
Buffer guide
Inlet roller
20mm
Switch back
point
2. When the first sheet arrives at the buffer, the second sheet is sent from the product.

Buffer roller
Inlet roller
3. The first delivery roller descends and works with the stack-delivery roller to deliver the first and
second sheet to the processing output bin. At the same time, the return roller and stack trailing-
edge assist send the stack in the processing output bin to the output bin.

Stack ejection roller Buffer roller
1st delivery roller Buffer guide
Inlet roller
20mm
Switch back
point
Stack
trailing-edge
Return roller
assist guide

4. When the stack in the processing output bin is sent to the delivery output bin and the trailing
edge of the first and second paper exits the first delivery roller, the stack-delivery roller and
return roller deliver the first and second sheet to the processing output bin.

1st delivery roller
Return roller
Processing tray
5. The first and second paper delivered to the processing output bin are aligned and then delivered
to the output bin.

Return roller
Stack trailing-edge
assist guide
Stack operation
Output bin operation

This accessory has an upper output bin (output-bin 1) and a lower output bin (output-bin 2).
The output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) move output-bin 1 and
output-bin 2 up and down independently.
The output-bin-1 paper sensor (PI111) and output-bin-2 paper sensor (PI112) detect paper
stacked on the output bin.
The output-bin-1 paper-surface sensor (PI141) and output-bin-2 paper-surface sensor (PI115)
detect the home positions of output-bin 1 and output-bin 2.
The home position is the top surface of the paper when paper is stacked on the output bin, or
the position where the edge of the output bin is detected when no paper is stacked.
When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the output-bin-1-shift motor
(M107) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) to return the output bin to home position. If already

at home position, the output bin is moved from the home position and then returned. If both
output bins are at home position, this is performed for output-bin 1 and then for output-bin 2.
If the product specifies output-bin 2, the stacker controller PCA shifts the output bin so that
output-bin 2 is at the delivery port. When paper is stacked on the output bin, a prescribed
number of pulses drive the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) or output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) to
lower the output bin. Then the output bin returns to home position to prepare for the next stack.
The upper and lower limits of the output bin are detected by three area sensors (PS981, PS982,
and PS983) on the output-bin-1- and output-bin-2-shift area sensor PCA.
The stacker controller PCA stops driving the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and output-bin-2-
shift motor (M108) when it detects the upper or lower limit of the output bin. Also, the on/off
combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) are used to detect over-stacking
according to the stack height for large-size and mixed stacking.
The stacker controller PCA stops supplying +24 Vdc to the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and
stops the stacker operation when the output-bin-1 switch (MSW103) turns on.
Figure 1-86 Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983)
Rack
Output bin 1 paper sensor (PI111)
Output bin 1 switch (MSW103)
Output bin 1 shift motor

(M107)
Output bin 1 shift area

sensor PCA

(M108)
Output bin 2 paper sensor (PI112) Output bin 2 shift area

sensor PCA
Light-shielding plate
Rack
NOTE: PI111 is located on output-bin 1. PI112 is located on output-bin 2.

Figure 1-87 Output-bin components
Paper surface sensor (PI41) (locate inside the accessory)
Paper surface sensor flag
Edge
Output bin 2 paper surface Output bin 1

sensor (PI48)
Paper surface
sensor flag
Edge
Output bin 2
When the output bin capacity is reached, the ON/OFF combinations of the area sensors (PS981,
PS982 and PS983) are used to determine an over-stacking condition. Area sensor conditions are as
follows:
Table 1-47 Stapler/stacker output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA
Detection item Output bin 1shift area sensor PCA
Area sensor 1 Area sensor 2 Area sensor 3
(PS983) (PS982) (PS981)
Output bin 1 upper limit ON OFF OFF
Stack count 650 sheets exceeded ON ON ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded ON ON ON
Output bin 1 lower limit ON ON OFF
Table 1-48 Stapler/stacker output bin 2shift area sensor PCA
(PS983) (PS982) (PS981)
Output bin 2 upper limit ON OFF ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded OFF ON ON
Stack count 1,700 sheets exceeded OFF OFF ON
Output bin 2 lower limit OFF ON OFF

Process output bin paper-stacking operation
When the trailing edge of the paper exits the first delivery roller, the sheet is delivered to the
processing output bin by the stack-delivery roller and return roller and then pushed against the
processing output-bin stopper.
Figure 1-88 Process output bin

1st delivery roller
Return roller
Processing tray stopper
Shutter operation
To prevent the delivery section from catching stacked paper in output-bin 1 when it passes, a shutter
is provided at the delivery section. The shutter closes when output-bin 1 passes, even when no paper
is stacked. When the shutter clutch (CL101) and stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL102) are on, the
shutter moves up (closes) when the stack-ejection motor (M102) turns forward and moves down
(open, delivery enabled), which occurs when the motor turns backward. The shutter home-position
sensor (PI113) detects the opening and closing of the shutter.
Figure 1-89 Shutter location
Stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102)
Stack ejection
roller (lower)
Stack ejection motor (M102)
Shutter home position

sensor (PI113)
Shutter
Shutter clutch (CL101)

Stack delivery operation
The stack is ejected each time 2-4 large sheets or 2-6 small sheets are offset on the processing
output bin. The swing motor turns and the swing guide descends causing the upper and lower stack-
delivery rollers to hold the stack. The stack-delivery motor turns the stack-delivery roller and return
roller. At the same time, the stack trailing-edge assist motor starts the stack trailing-edge assist guide,
and the stack held by the stack-delivery rollers is moved forward. When the stack trailing-edge assist
motor reverses, the stack trailing-edge assist guide returns to home position. The stack-delivery
motor then ejects the stack with the upper and lower stack-delivery rollers.
Figure 1-90 Stack delivery

Swing guide
Return roller
Stack trailing-edge
assist guide
Offset operation
The job-offset operation offsets the paper stack to the front or rear when ejecting to sort the paper
stack. The forward/backward movement of the sheet delivered to the processing output bin is
controlled by the front-aligning plate and rear-aligning plate. The aligned copies are stapled or ejected
according to the signal from the product. When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA
drives the aligning plate front motor (M103) and aligning-plate rear motor (M104) to return the two
aligning plates to the home position. The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack
job-offset function are shown below.
Figure 1-91 Motors and sensors for stack job offset

Rear aligning plate
home position sensor (P107)
Aligning plate (rear)
Front aligning plate

Aligning plate Paper
(front)
Rear aligning plate motor (M104)

(FRONT)
Light-shielding plate Front aligning plate motor (M103)

Figure 1-92 Stack job offset example
Results Delivering 4 sets
4th set
3rd set 2nd set
1st set
Direction of delivery
Figure 1-93 Job offset operation (1 of 2)
Rear aligning plate
Sheet to be offset
Tray

Rear aligning plate
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Table 1-49 Motors for the stack job offset
Motor Function
Front-aligning-plate motor (M103) Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the front
Rear-aligning-plate motor (M104) Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the rear
Swing motor (M106) Moves the swing guide up/down
Stack trailing-edge assist motor (M109) Carry the stack end during stack ejection

Stack trailing-edge assist operation
To improve stacking performance when ejecting jobs delivered to the processing output bin, a stack
trailing-edge assist guide supports the back of the stack during stack ejection.
Figure 1-95 Stack trailing-edge assist operation
Paper
Stack trailiing-edge assist
home position sensor (PI39)
Stack trailing-edge assist guide
Stack trailing-edge assist motor (M109)
Intermediate-process output-bin assembly
Stack job offset

drives the aligning-plate front motor (M103) and aligning-plate rear motor (M104) to return the two
aligning plates to home position. The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack job-
offset function are shown below.

Rear aligning plate

(front)

(FRONT)

4th set
3rd set 2nd set
1st set
Motor Function
Table 1-51 Sensors for the stack job offset
Sensor Function
Swing-guide home-position (HP) sensor (PI105) Detects the swing guide home position
Front-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI106) Detects the aligning plate front-home position
Rear-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI107) Detects the aligning plate rear-home position
Stack trailing-edge assist HP sensor (PI109) Detects the stack trailing-edge assist home-position
Stapler/stacker delivery modes

The stapler/stacker supports the following delivery modes.
Table 1-52 Stapler/stacker delivery modes
Feed Staple Punch Offset Supported feature
Face-down N N/A N Yes
Face-down N N/A Y Yes
Face-down Y N/A N Yes
Face-down Y N/A Y No

Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes
The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly supports the following delivery modes.
Table 1-53 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes
Feed Staple Punch Offset Supported feature
Face-down N N N Yes
Face-down N N Y Yes
Face-down Y N N Yes
Face-down Y N Y No
Face-down N Y N Yes
Face-down N Y Y Yes
Face-down Y Y N Yes
Face-down Y Y Y No
Staple operation
The stapling operation staples the prescribed number of copies with the stapler unit. The staple
position depends on the staple mode and paper size. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI110)
detects whether the stapler unit is at the home position. The stapler unit is equipped with a stapler-
alignment interference sensor (PI116). The staple motor (M41) operation is prohibited when the
stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46) is on. This prevents stapling at the stopper and
damaging the stopper when the stapler-shift motor (M105) is incorrectly adjusted. When the power is
turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the stapler-shift motor (M105) to return the stapler unit to
home position. If the stapler unit is already at home position, it waits in that state.
Figure 1-98 Stapler unit
Paper
Stapler shift motor (M105)
Stapler
Stapler shift home position sensor (PI110)

Figure 1-99 Staple location
Paper width 1/2
Front diagonal stapling 2-point stapling
Rear diagonal stapling

Table 1-54 Sensors used in stapling
Abbreviation Sensor Connector Function Remarks
PI110 Stapler-shift home position J6B-7 Detects the home position for the
sensor stapler moving back and forth
PI116 Stapler-alignment interference J5-3 Staple prohibited area detection

sensor
N/A Stapler home-position sensor J5-5 Detects the home position for the In the stapler
stapling operation
N/A Staple edging sensor J5-6 Detects the staple top position In the stapler
N/A Staple sensor J5-7 Detects presence or absence of In the stapler

staples in the cartridge
Table 1-55 Motors used in stapling
Abbreviation Component name Function
M105 Stapler-shift motor Moves the stapler
M41 Staple motor Performs the stapling operation
The stacker controller PCA moves the stapler according to the specified stapling position. When the
rear of the first sheet passes the first delivery roller, the stacker controller PCA stops the stack-
delivery motor (M102) and then rotates it in reverse. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-
delivery roller and return roller and delivers the paper to the processing output bin. The paper in the
processing output bin is detected by the processing-output-bin paper sensor (PI108). When the paper
is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M106) starts and raises the swing guide.
When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI105) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-
guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin
paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M103/M104) starts and aligns the paper.

Figure 1-100 Paper path for stapling
Swing guide
1st delivery roller
Return roller
Processing tray Stapler
Figure 1-101 Rollers and sensors for stapling

Swing guide home position sensor (P105)
Stack ejection roller (upper)

Stack ejection roller (lower)
Swing guide
Swing motor
(M106)
Stack ejection lower roller cluch (CL102)

The stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M106) and lowers the swing guide when the rear
of the second paper passes the first delivery roller. The stack-delivery motor is reversed. The stack-
delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller (upper) and return roller and sends the paper to the
processing output bin. At this point, the stack-delivery roller (lower) does not rotate because the
stack-ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is disengaged. The output-bin paper sensor (PI108) detects
the processing-output bin paper sensor (PI108). When the paper is delivered to the processing output
bin, the swing motor (M106) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position
sensor (PI105) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing
guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the
aligning motor (M103/M104) starts and aligns the paper.

Figure 1-102 Staple paper path
Swing guide
1st delivery roller
Return roller
When the last sheet is aligned, the stacker controller PCA moves the aligning plate to the alignment
position with the aligning motor (M103/M104) (the paper is held by the aligning plate). Then the
stacker controller PCA staples at the specified staple position. After stapling, the stacker controller
PCA starts the swing motor (M106) and lowers the swing guide. Then the stack is ejected by the
stack-delivery roller, return roller, and stack trailing-edge assist guide.
Figure 1-103 Shift process for the staple unit

Swing guide
Return roller
Stack trailing-edge
assist guide
Stapler
The stapler motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The stapler home-position sensor
detects the home position of the cam. The macro computer (IC13) on the stacker controller PCA
controls the forward and reverse rotation of the staple motor. When the stapler home-position sensor
is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the stapler motor in the forward direction until the sensor
turns on, allowing the staple cam to return to the original position. The staple sensor detects the
presence or absence of a staple cartridge in the machine and the presence or absence of staples in
the cartridge. The staple edging sensor determines whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
staple cartridge. For safety, the stacker controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless
the staple safety switch (MSW103) is on.

Figure 1-104 Stapling operation (1 of 2)
M41
Hook top position detect signal
Hook empty detect signal
Staple motor drive signal

Stapler HP detect signal
Stacker controller PCA

Shift the staple unit
The stapler-shift motor (M105) shifts the stapler unit. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI110)
detects the home position. When there is a staple command from the product, the stapler shifts to the
staple ready position, which depends on the stapling position and paper size. The stapler unit waits at
the following points when staple mode is selected.
Figure 1-106 Front 1-point stapling
Rear aligning plate
Stopper
Feeding direction
Stapling position/
Wait position
Figure 1-107 Rear 1-point stapling

Rear aligning plate
Stapling position/
Wait position
Stopper
Feeding direction

Figure 1-108 2-point stapling
Rear aligning plate
Stopper
Stapling position
Stopper
Feeding direction
Stapling position/
Wait position
Stopper

Hole puncher assembly
The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has either one of the 2-hole/3-hole puncher
assembly or 2-hole/4-hole puncher assembly so that it operates two types of hole punching functions.
The puncher assembly has following two functions:
Side registration operation
Hole punching operation (2-hole/3-hole or 2-hole/4-hole)
Figure 1-109 Hole puncher assembly

2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly
Punch motor
Punch motor clock sensor
Punch slide assy
Punch shaft
2-hole punch Encoder
Punch home position sensor

Off-centering cam
PTR1
Photosensor PCA
2
Punch 3
5
4
LED1
LED PCA
2
3
4
5 Side registration home position sensor
Side registration motor
Punch feed motor
3-hole punch
Punch chip box full sensor PCA
Paper feed direction

Punch feed roller
Punch chip box
2-hole/4-hole puncher assembly
4-hole punch
PTR1
2
3
4
Trailing edge sensor 5 LED1
PTR1 3
2
2 Photosensor PCA 5
4
4 3
5
LED PCA
LED1
2
3
4
5 Side registration sensor
2-hole punch

Side registration operation
The side registration operation detects the trailing edge of paper by the side registration sensor and
trailing edge sensor, and moves the hole punch slide assembly to the proper punching position
according to the paper size.
The side registration sensor and the trailing edge sensor consist of 5 sets of sensors on the paper
path of the hole puncher assembly inlet. The photo sensors are located upper side and the LEDs are
located lower side so that the paper passes through between them.
Operational sequence of the side registration operation is as follows:
1. When the trailing edge sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the hole punch controller
drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves toward front side
of the stapler/stacker from its home position.
PI61
M62
Punch slide assy
Trailing edge sensor

(LED5, PTR5)
Paper feed direction
2. The side registration sensor detects the side edge of paper according to the MEDIA SIZE signal
sent from the product.

3. The hole punch controller drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide
assembly moves further toward front side of the stapler/stacker to its specified position.
M62
Side registration sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1):

Detects side edge of A3, A4-R, Ledger and Letter-R sized paper
Detects side edge of B4, B5-R, Legal and Letter sized paper
Detects side edge of A4 sized paper
Detects side edge of B5 sized paper
4. When the trailing edge sensor detects the trailing edge of paper, the hole punch controller stops
the hole punch feed motor accordingly the paper stops.
5. The punch controller drives the punch motor to punch holes in the paper.
M62
Trailing edge sensor

(LED5, PTR5)
Punch hole
6. When the hole punching operation is completed, the hole punch controller drives the hole punch
feed motor and reverses the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly
moves back to its home position.
If the following paper requires the punching operation, the hole punch slide assembly moves back to
its home position every paper and step 1 to 6 are repeated.
Hole punching operation (2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly)

The 2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 3 holes in the trailing edge of paper. Five
off-centering cams are on the hole punch shaft; two off-centering cams with punch for 2-hole
punching and three off-centering cams with punch for 3-hole punching.
The sensor flag is also on the hole punch shaft, and the hole punch home position sensor detects the
home position of hole punch shaft. The hole punch home position for 3-hole punching is shifted 180
degrees from the hole punch home position for 2-hole punching. When the hole punch shaft is at
home position, the hole punch home position sensor is turned on. The hole punch motor clock sensor

counts the clock pulse of hole punch motor by the encoder on the shaft so that the hole punch
controller stops the hole hole punch motor at its home position. Accordingly, the hole hole punch shaft
stops at either home position for 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching. A hole punching is operated by
turning the hole punch shaft 180 degrees from its home position. The hole punch chips are collected
into the hole punch chip box. The hole punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with punch
chips.
Operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 2-hole punching in 2 sheets of paper is as
follows:
1. The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 180
degrees clockwise.
2. The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the hole punching operation in the first sheet
is completed.
Punch a hole in the first sheet
Encoder
Sensor flag
Punch home
position sensor
Punch shaft
Off-centering cam
for 3-hole
Off-centering cam
for 2-hole
Punch
Punch chip
Paper
Punch shaft stops: Punch shaft turns 90 degrees cw.: Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw.:
Home position for 2-hole Operates 2-hole punching Punching operation is completed
degrees counter clockwise.

4. The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the hole punching operation in the second
sheet is completed.
Punch a hole in the second sheet
Punch shaft stops: Punch shaft turns 90 degrees ccw.: Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw.:
Home position for 3-hole Operates 2-hole punching Punching operation is completeed
When operating 3-hole punching in 2 sheets of paper, the hole punch shaft for 3-hole punching
is rotated 180 degrees counter clockwise from its home position and then 180 degrees
clockwise.
Hole punching operation (2-hole/4-hole hole puncher assembly)

The 2-hole/4-hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 4 holes in the trailing edge of paper. Four
off-centering cams are on the punch shaft; two off-centering cams with punch for 2-hole punching and
two off-centering cams with punch for outside 4-hole punching. The sensor flag is also on the hole
punch shaft, and the hole punch home position sensor detects the home position of the hole punch
shaft. When the hole punch shaft is at home position, the hole punch home position sensor is turned
on. The hole punch motor clock sensor counts the clock pulse of hole punch motor by the encoder on
the shaft so that the hole punch controller stops the punch motor at its home position. Accordingly the
hole punch shaft stops at either home position for 2-hole punching or 4-hole punching. A punching of
2-hole is operated by turning the hole punch shaft 180 degrees from its home position. A punching of
4-hole is operated by turning the hole punch shaft 360 degrees from its home position first to punch
inside 2 holes and then outside 2 holes. The hole punch chips are collected into the punch chip box.
The punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with hole punch chips.
Operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 4-hole punching in a sheet of paper is as
follows:
1. The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 90 degrees
clockwise.
2. Inside 2 holes punching is operated.
degrees clockwise.
4. The hole punch home position sensor turns on and inside 2 holes punching operation is
completed.
5. The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the punch shaft 270 degrees
clockwise.

6. Outside 2 holes punching is operated.
7. The hole punch controller drives the punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft 360 degrees
clockwise.
8. The hole punch home position sensor turns on and outside 2 holes punching operation is
completed.
Figure 1-110 Operation of 4-hole punching

Operation of 4-hole punchin>
Encoder
Sensor flag
Punch home position sensor
Punch shaft
Off-centering cam
for outside 2-hole
Off-centering cam
for inside 2-hole
Punch
Punch chip
Paper
Punch shaft stops: Punch shaft turns 90 degrees cw.: Punch shaft turns 180 degrees cw.:
Home position for inside 2-hole Operates inside 2-hole punching Inside punching operation is completed
Punch shaft turns 360 degrees cw.: Punch shaft turns 270 degrees cw.:
Outside punching operation is completed Operates outside 2-hole punching

Stapler/stacker additional functions
The staple/stacker has the following additional pickup, feed and delivery functions.
Table 1-56 Staple/stacker additional pickup, feed and delivery functions
Swing height detection control Yes
Registration shutter skew correction function (staple/stacker with hole puncher assembly only) Yes
Side registration detection (staple/stacker with puncher assembly only) Yes
Hole punch operation with unshared hole punch (2-hole/3-hole) function (staple/stacker with hole Yes
Hole punch operation with shared hole punch (2-hole/4-hole) function (staple/stacker with hole puncher Yes
assembly only)
Hole punch home position detection (staple/stacker with hole puncher assembly only) Yes
Hole punch chip box full detection (staple/stacker with hole puncher assembly only) Yes

Stapler/stacker jam detection
The following sensors detect paper and determine whether paper is delivered properly.
Stacking paper-path-entry sensor (PI103)
Stacking paper-path-delivery sensor (PI104)
A jam is identified by checking whether paper is present at each sensor at the timing programmed in
the memory of the microcomputer (CPU) on the stacker controller PCA. When the CPU identifies a
jam, it suspends the stacker's delivery operation and informs the product of the jam. When all doors
are closed after the paper jam is removed, the stacker use the two sensors (stacking paper-path-
entry sensor and stacking paper-path-delivery sensor) to check for further jams. If the sensors detect
paper, the stacker determines that the paper jam has not been removed and sends another jam
removal signal to the product.
Figure 1-111 Jam detection sensors
PI104 PI103

Hole puncher assembly jam detection
The hole puncher assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to
Hole punch home position sensor (PI63)
Hole punch motor clock sensor (PI62)
Trailing edge detection sensor (LED5, PTR5)
Figure 1-112 Hole puncher assembly sensor location
Trailing edge detection sensor

PI62 (LED5, PTR5)
PI63
The stapler/stacker detects the following additional jams.
Table 1-57 Staple/stacker jam detection
Hole punch path delay jam Yes
Hole punch path stay jam Yes
Hole punching jam Yes
Residual paper jam (puncher assembly) Yes

Stapler/stacker assembly jam detection
The stapler/stacker assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to
Inlet sensor (PI103)
Trailing edge detection sensor (LED5, PTR5, hole puncher assembly)
Figure 1-113 Stapler/stacker jam sensor location
Trailing edge detection sensor

PI103
(LED5, PTR5)

Stapler/stacker assembly inlet delay jam
When hole punching is not The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period
operating from when the stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product.
When hole punching is operating The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period of
time from when the trailing edge detection sensor detects the leading edge.

The booklet maker is optionally installed at the side of the product. The booklet maker with hole
puncher assembly has the hole punching function in addition to the standard stapler/stacker function.
The booklet maker delivers the printed paper as follows:
To the output bin.
To the output bin, after stapling.
To the saddle output bin, after saddle-stitching and double-folding.
NOTE: The saddle function (saddle-stitching or saddle output bin delivery) does not apply to hole-
punched paper.
The stacker controller and the saddle stitcher controller control the operational sequence of the
booklet maker. The stacker controller, saddle stitcher controller, and hole punch controller control the
operational sequence of the booklet maker with the hole puncher assembly.
Figure 1-114 Booklet maker installation and paper path

Staple stacker assembly
Output bin
Inlet feed assembly
Saddle assembly
Saddle output bin

Figure 1-115 Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path
Staple stacker assembly
Output bin Inlet feed assembly
Puncher assembly
Saddle assembly
Saddle output bin
ENWW Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch 157
Booklet maker power supply
The stacker unit and booklet maker unit use both 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc power.
Stacker unit power supply route

When power is turned on, 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc are supplied from the product to the stacker controller
PCA. The 24 Vdc power drives the motor, solenoid, and so on. The 5 Vdc power drives sensors, IC
chips on the stacker controller PCA, and so on. Both 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc are also supplied from the
stacker controller PCA to the saddle-stitcher controller PCA. The 24 Vdc power for the motor drive is
shut down when the front door switch (MSW101) is open. A block diagram of the power supply is
shown as follows.
Figure 1-116 Power-supply route for the stacker unit

Front door
switch Inlet door Delivery
(MS31) switch door switch
(SW1) (SW3)
24V
24V
Motors
24V
24V
Circuit Motors
breaker
24V
Motors
Stacker 24V
controller Solenoids
PCA Saddle stitcher
controller PCA
5V
Sensors
5V 5V
Logic
Stacker unit protective function

The 24 Vdc has a fuse or motor driver with over-current protection.
Booklet maker unit power-supply route

When the power to the product is turned on and the door is closed, 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc are supplied
from the stacker-controller PCA as saddle stitcher power. The 24 Vdc power supply to solenoids is
supplied from the stacker controller PCA without passing through protection mechanisms such as
microswitches. The 5 Vdc power drives sensors and IC chips on the stacker controller PCA. The 24

Vdc power supply to motors is interrupted if either of the door switches on the booklet maker unit in
an open condition (doors opened).
Figure 1-117 Power supply route for the booklet maker unit
Front door
switch Inlet door Delivery
(MS31) switch door switch
(SW1) (SW3)
24V
24V
Motors
24V
24V
Circuit Motors
breaker
24V
Motors
Stacker 24V
controller Solenoids
PCA Saddle stitcher
controller PCA
5V
Sensors
5V 5V
Logic
Booklet maker unit protective function

The 24 Vdc power supply for motors and solenoids comes with a circuit breaker (CB1). The 24 Vdc
power supply for the guide motor (M3), the alignment motor (M5), and the paper-positioning plate
motor (M4) comes with a fuse designed to interrupt power when there is too much current.
Booklet maker electrical components
The following figure shows the electrical components for both the stapler/stacker assembly and hole
puncher assembly.
Figure 1-118 Booklet maker signal flow of the stacker, hole punch, and saddle stitcher controllers
Staple stacker
Motor
DC controller
Solenoid
Formatter Clutch
Stacker
controller
Switch
IPTU +24V
controller
Photointerrupter
Sensor
Hole puncher*
Motor
Switch
Punch
controller
Photointerrupter
Sensor
*Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly only
Saddle
Motor
Solenoid
Saddle
sticher Switch
controller
Photointerrupter
Sensor

Table 1-58 Saddle stitcher electrical components (1 of 2)
Motor M1 Feed motor Saddle feed motor assembly
4G3-1933-000CN
M2 Paper folding motor Motor mount assembly
FM0-1686-000CN
M3 Guide motor Guide motor assembly
4G3-0725-000CN
M4 Paper positioning plate motor Inner side plate assembly
4G3-0671-000CN
M5 Alignment motor Motor, DC stepping
4K-1103-000CN
M6 Stitch motor (rear) Saddle stapler assembly
4G3-2721-000CN
M7 Stitch motor (front) Saddle stapler assembly
4G3-2721-000CN
M8 Paper pushing plate motor Motor mount assembly
FM0-1686-000CN
Solenoid SL1 Flapper solenoid 1 Upper flapper arm assembly
FM0-1885-000CN
SL2 Flapper solenoid 2 Lower flapper arm assembly
FM0-1886-000CN
SL4 Feed plate alienation Intermediate solenoid

solenoid
4G3-0676-000CN
SL5 Saddle inlet solenoid Saddle paper feed assembly
RM2-5351-000CN
Table 1-58 Saddle stitcher electrical components (1 of 2) (continued)
Switch MSW3 Delivery door open detection Delivery switch mount

switch assembly
RM2-5633-000CN
SW4 Stapler presence switch Saddle stapler assembly

(rear)
4G3-2721-000CN
SW5 Stitch home position switch Saddle stapler assembly

(rear)
4G3-2721-000CN
SW6 Stapler presence switch Saddle stapler assembly

(front)
4G3-2721-000CN
SW7 Stitch home position switch Saddle stapler assembly

(front)
4G3-2721-000CN

Table 1-58 Saddle stitcher electrical components (1 of 2) (continued)
Photointerrupter PI1 Paper pushing plate motor Motor mount assembly

clock sensor
See Table 1-59 Saddle FM0-1686-000CN
stitcher electrical
components (2 of 2) PI3 Delivery cover open Delivery switch mount
on page 164 for additional detection sensor assembly
photointerrupters.
RM2-5633-000CN
PI4 Paper folding motor clock Motor mount assembly

sensor
FM0-1686-000CN
PI5 Alignment plate home Photointerrupter

position sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI6 Saddle output bin media- Saddle tray assembly

presence sensor
RM2-5318-000CN
PI7 Paper positioning plate home Photointerrupter

position sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI8 Paper positioning plate Inner side plate assembly

media-presence sensor
4G3-0671-000CN
PI9 Inlet cover open detection Photointerrupter

sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI11 Delivery sensor Saddle assembly
NOTE: This assembly is

not orderable. If this sensor
fails, escalate the problem to
your Global Business unit.
PI12 Crescent roller phase sensor Photointerrupter
WG8-5593-000CN
PI13 Guide home position sensor Guide sensor assembly
FM6-2283-000CN
PI14 Paper pushing plate home Photointerrupter

position sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI15 Paper pushing plate leading Photointerrupter

edge position sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI16 Stitcher assembly storage Photointerrupter

sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
Table 1-59 Saddle stitcher electrical components (2 of 2)
Photointerrupter continued PI17 Paper path feed sensor Lower slide rail assembly
FM2-1638-000CN
PI18 Feed sensor 1 Rear end sensor assembly
PI19 Feed sensor 2 FM2-0763-000CN
PI20 Feed sensor 3
PI21 Paper folding home position Photointerrupter

sensor
WG8-5593-000CN
PI22 Saddle inlet sensor Entrance sensor bracket

assembly
FM2-0717-000CN
Booklet maker motor control

The booklet maker with puncher assembly has three additional motors in the puncher assembly.
Table 1-60 Booklet maker motor specifications
Component name Components driven
M61 Hole punch motor Hole punch assembly
M62 Hole punch feed motor Hole punch feed roller
M63 Side registration motor Hole punch slide assembly
Booklet maker motor failure detection

The stacker controller determines the following motor failures.
Table 1-61 Booklet maker motor failures
Hole punch motor failure detection Yes
Hole punch feed motor failure detection No
Side registration motor failure detection Yes

Booklet maker feed-and-delivery operation
Basic operation
Stacker unit basic operation

The stacker unit processes simple stacking, job offset, and stapling. The stacker controller PCA
controls all operations involved in these modes, according to the commands from the product. Jobs
from the product can also be routed for booklet making.
Figure 1-119 Stacker unit basics
Swing guide drive system

Output bin
drive system
Control system
Stapler drive system
Feeder drive system

Output bin
drive system Shutter drive system
Booklet making control system

(saddle stitcher controller PCB)
Stacker unit electrical security

A 16-bit microprocessor (CPU) is installed on the stacker controller PCA to control the stacker
operation sequence and CAN signal communication with the video controller PCA. The stacker
controller PCA drives solenoids, motors, and so forth in response to the commands received from the
video controller through the CAN singnal communication line. In addition, the stacker controller PCA
reports information about various sensors and switches to the video controller through the CAN signal
communication line. Major functions of the IC chips installed on the stacker controller PCA are as
follows:
IC13 (CPU): Controls the operation sequence
IC10 (EEP-ROM): Backs up adjustment values
IC6 (Communication IC): Communicates with the host machine
IC12 (communication IC): Communicates with the saddle stitcher unit
IC8 (Regulator IC): Generates 5 Vdc
IC14 (Regulator IC) : Generates 3.3 Vdc
Figure 1-120 Electrical circuitry of the stacker unit

DC Stacker controller PCB Motor
controller
PCB
Solenoid
IC13
Formatter CPU
Clutch
IC10
EP-ROM
Switch
IC6
Communication IC Sensor
Saddle stitcher
controller PCB IC12
Communication IC
IC8
Regulator IC
IC14
Regulator IC

Booklet maker unit basic operation
The booklet maker unit staples and folds stacks of paper delivered from the stacker unit. The product
sends commands via the stacker to the saddle stitcher controller PCA, which controls these
operations.
Figure 1-121 Booklet maker unit basics

Stacker unit control system
Guide plate drive system
Paper positioning plate

drive system

Control system
Stitcher drive system
Feed drive system
Paper pushing plate

drive system
Paper folding roller

drive system
Booklet maker unit electrical circuitry
The saddle-stitcher controller PCA has a microprocessor that controls the sequence of operations
and that handles serial communications with the stacker controller PCA. This includes driving
solenoids and motors in response to the commands from the stacker controller PCA. The saddle-
stitcher controller PCA is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to the
stacker controller PCA. The functions of the major ICs mounted on the saddle stitcher controller PCA
are as follows:
IC7 (CPU): Controls the sequence of operations. Contains the sequence program
IC8 (communications IC): Communicates with the finisher unit
IC512 (regulator IC): Generates 5 Vdc
IC10 (regulator IC): Communicates with the product
Figure 1-122 Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit

Saddle stitcher
Sensor controller PCA Motor
IC7 CPU Solenoid
Switch
IC512
Regulator IC
IC10
Regulator IC
IC8
Communi-
cations IC
Stacker controller Product

PCA (Host machine)
Feed drive system
The stacker unit stacks paper delivered from the product, offsets stack jobs, and staples and delivers
paper to the outputs according to commands from the product. The booklet maker unit carries, aligns,
and stitches paper delivered from the product, and then feeds the resulting stack. After these
operations, the booklet maker unit folds the stacks of paper and delivers them to the booklet-maker-
unit output bin. The delivery methods are shown in the following figure.
Figure 1-123 Feed drive for the stacker unit

Normal
Method of delivery Simple stacking
delivery
Stack job offset
Staple
Front 1-point stapling
Rear 1-point stapling
2-point stapling
Saddle stitch delivery

Figure 1-124 Feed drive for the booklet maker unit
Output bin 1
Output bin 2
Booklet maker
output bin
Stacker-unit control system

The paper sent from the product is delivered to the output bin or the processing tray according to the
type of job. Job offset or stapling is performed on paper delivered to the output bin according to the
instructions from the product. When paper ejects from the processing tray, a stack trailing-edge assist
guide is used in addition to the stack-ejection roller to eject the stack. The inlet motor (M101), stack-
ejection motor (M102), and stack trailing-edge assist motor (M109) are step motors. The
microcomputer (CPU) in the stacker controller PCA rotates these motors forward or backward. The
following two sensors in the paper delivery path detect the arrival or passing of paper:
Stacking paper-path-entry sensor (PI103)
Stacking paper-path-delivery sensor (PI104)
Each output bin also has sensors to detect the presence of paper on the bin:
First output-bin paper sensor (PI111)
Second output-bin paper sensor (PI112)
If the sheet does not reach or pass each sensor within the prescribed time, the stacker controller PCA
determines that a jam has occurred and stops the operation. It then notifies the product that a jam
has occurred. After the jam is cleared and the doors are closed, the stacker unit checks whether the
sheet is detected by the stacking paper path entry sensor or stacking paper path delivery sensor. If
Second bin shift motor drive signal
M108
First bin shift motor drive signal
M107
170 Chapter 1 Theory of operation

Stack ejection motor drive signal
1st eject roller separation solenoid drive signal
M102
DELIV-ROL-SL SL103
Aligning plate front/rear
M104 motor drive signal
M103
Buffer roller separation solenoid drive signal

SL102
Stacker controller PCA (2/2)

BUFF-ROL-SL
Inlet roller separation solenoid drive signal Stack trailing-edge

INLET-ROL-SL SL101 motor drive signal
M109
sends the jam processing signal to the product.
Buffer rear end holding solenoid drive signal

Stacker controller PCB (1/2)
BUFF-P-SL SL104
Inlet motor drive signal
M113
Saddle inlet switching solenoid drive signal

SDL-INLET-SL SL105
Saddle inlet
motor drive signal
PCB
M63
Saddle driver
Stapler drive motor drive signal

Figure 1-125 Components of the stacker unit control system (1 of 2)
controller PCA
M105
Saddle stitcher
Stapler motor drive signal
M41
the sensors detect a sheet of paper, the stacker unit determines that the jam is not cleared and re-
ENWW
Figure 1-126 Components of the stacker unit control system (2 of 2)
First tray paper detection sensor (PI 42) TRY2-P

Second tray paper detection sensor (PI 43) TRY2-P
Inlet paper detection sensor (PI 33) INLET

Delivery path paper detection
sensor (PI 34) TIMING
Booklet-maker-unit control system
The paper-output mechanism keeps paper from the stacker unit in place for stapling and folding.
The No. 1 flapper and the No. 2 flapper of the paper inlet configure the paper path to fit the
paper size.
The paper-positioning plate is kept at a predetermined location to fit the paper size.
The paper-positioning-plate motor (M4) drives the paper-positioning plate. The position of the
plate is identified by the number of motor pulses coming from the paper-positioning-plate home
position sensor (PI7).
The feed rollers and the crescent roller handle paper are moved by the inlet roller and held in a
predetermined position.
The feed plate moves paper through the accessory by coming into contact with or moving away
from paper as needed.
The alignment plates order the stack when paper is output. The alignment motor (M5) drives the
alignment plates. The position of the alignment motor (M5) is identified by the number of motor
pulses sent from the alignment-plate home-position sensor (PI5).
The guide plate covers the folding rollers to prevent interference between paper and the paper
folding rollers when paper is output. The guide plate moves down to expose the paper-folding
rollers before the paper is folded.
The inlet has three paper sensors (PI18, PI19, PI20) that are each suited to specific paper sizes.
The paper-positioning plate has a paper-positioning-plate paper sensor (PI8).
Figure 1-127 Components of the booklet-maker-unit control system

Stacker controller Saddle stitcher controller PCA (1/2)
Feed plate contact solenoid drive signal RLNIPSL

PCA
No.1 paper deflecting plate

solenoid drive signal FLPSL1
No.2 paper deflecting plate
solenoid drive signal FLPSL2
Saddle inlet
motor drive
signal
Saddle inlet
solenoid drive
signal
SDLINSL
SL5
M9
SL1
SL2
M6/
M7
M5
M1
SL4
M8
PI1
M2
PI4
Paper pushing motor clock signal LUNGECLK
M3
M4
Paper folding motor clock signal FLDCLK
Paper pushing motor drive signal
Paper folding motor drive signal
Paper positioning plate motor

Alignment motor drive signal
Stitcher motor drive signal
Guide motor drive signal
Feed motor drive signal
drive signal
(front/rear)
Saddle stitcher controller PCA (2/2)

ENWW
Paper positioning plate home position detection signal PAPPOS
Paper positioning plate paper detection signal PPOSPAR
Output bin paper detection signal TRYPAR
PI6
Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP
Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP
PI11
Delivery detection signal DEIV
Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP
PI7
PI21
PI8
PI13
PI12
Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM
PI17
Paper pushing plate leading edge
position detection signal LUNGETOP
Saddle stitcher controller PCA (2/2)

Saddle stitcher controller PCB (1/2)
PI15
Paper pushing plate home
PI19
position detection signal LUNGEHP

PI22
PI14
No.3 paper detection signal 3RDPA
PI20
PI18
Figure 1-128 Components of the booklet-maker control system
No.2 paper detection signal 2NDPA
No.1 paper detection signal 1STPA

Saddle inlet paper detection signal INLET-ROLL
Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch 173

Booklet maker paper delivery path
The saddle-stitcher flapper routes paper from the product to the booklet maker unit. The booklet
maker unit staples, folds, and then delivers the paper to the booklet-maker-unit output bin.
Figure 1-129 Booklet-maker-unit paper path

Booklet maker basic operation
When receiving paper from the stacker unit, the booklet maker unit outputs paper in a vertical
orientation to a vertical path.
Two paper-deflecting plates configure the path.
The paper-positioning plate sets the position of the paper so that the center of the stack matches
the stapling/folding position.
Subsequent paper is output closer to the delivery slot. The volume of paper that can be output is
15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80 g/m2 + 1 sheet of 250 g/m2).
Figure 1-130 Paper delivery for booklet maker
Direction of
delivery
Second sheet
First sheet
The alignment plates put paper in order when it is output to the vertical-path assembly. Mounted at
the edge of the-vertical path assembly, alignment plates also prepare the stack for delivery after
stapling.
Figure 1-131 Alignment plates

Sheets
Alignment plate Alignment plate
When all the paper has been output, the two stitchers staple the stack. The stitchers face the center
of a stack and alternate to prevent the paper from wrinkling and to limit the load on the power supply.
If only one sheet arrives, stitching does not take place and the next operation (stack feeding) occurs.
Figure 1-132 Stitching the stack
Stitcher (staplers)
Staple
Paper pushing guide
The booklet maker unit folds the stitched stack, and then feeds it to where the stapling position
matches the height of the paper-pushing plate and the paper-folding roller nip. The paper-positioning
plate moves the stack forward and the guide plate descends so that the paper-folding rollers directly
face the stack.

Figure 1-133 Position the stack
Paper pushing guide

Guide plate
The paper-postioning plate moves the stack to the paper-folding rollers that hold the stack at its
center and fold it. The paper-folding rollers and delivery roller then output the stack to the output bin.
Figure 1-134 Fold and deliver the stack
Paper folding
roller
Booklet delivery roller
Booklet maker control of the inlet flappers

The two flappers mounted at the paper inlet configure the feed path according to paper size. The
flappers detect the trailing edge of the paper and prevent the trailing paper from butting against the
top of the existing stack. The following table shows the relationship between sensors and paper sizes.
Table 1-62 Sensors and paper sizes
Sensor A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x B4/LGL A4R/LTRR

17)
No.1 paper sensor (PI18) Used Used Used
No.2 paper sensor (PI19) Not used Used Used
No.3 paper sensor (PI20) Not used Not used Used
Each flapper is driven by its own solenoid. The following table shows the relationship between
solenoids and paper sizes.

Table 1-63 Solenoids and paper sizes
Sensor A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x B4/LGL A4R/LTRR

17)
No.1 paper-deflecting off on on

solenoid (SL1)
No.2 paper-deflecting off off on

solenoid (SL2)
Figure 1-135 A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) paper path (3 sheets)
No.1 paper sensor

PI18 Passage of paper
No.1 paper deflecting
OFF
plate solenoid SL1
No.2 paper sensor Non-passage of paper
PI19 OFF
SL2
No.2 paper deflecting
Non-passage of paper
plate solenoid
No.3 paper sensor
PI20 Top edge
PI18
PI19
PI20
PI18
PI19
PI20
Entry of First sheet
Entry of Second sheet
Entry of Third sheet
Figure 1-136 B4/LGL paper path (3 sheets)
Passage of paper
No.1 paper sensor
PI18 ON
SL1
No.2 paper sensor Passage of paper
PI19 OFF
SL2
No.3 paper sensor Non-passage of paper
PI20
PI18
PI19
Top edge
PI20
PI18
PI19
PI20

Figure 1-137 A4R/LTRR Paper Path (3 sheets)

PI18 ON
SL1
PI19 ON
SL2
PI20
PI18
PI19
PI20 Top edge
PI18
PI19
PI20
Booklet maker control of paper movement

When the leading edge of the paper has passed the inlet flapper, the intermediate-feed roller
and the crescent roller start to move the paper forward.
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the intermediate-feed roller, the feed-plate-contact
solenoid (SL4) causes the roller to contact the path bed and move the paper forward. When the
leading edge of the paper reaches the paper-positioning plate, contact is broken.
When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the paper-positioning plate, the paper-
positioning-plate paper sensor (PI8) turns on. Subsequent sheets will not be checked because
the first sheet will still be over the sensor.
The crescent roller rotates while sheets are output, pushing the leading edge of each sheet
against the paper-positioning plate and keeping the leading edge of the stack in order.
The alignment motor (M5) drives the alignment plates for each sheet to keep both the left and
right edges of the sheet in order.
1. The solenoid turns on while paper is being moved so that the feed plate comes into contact with
the page.
Figure 1-138 Paper movement (1 of 3)

Intermediate feed roller
Feed motor
M1
ON
SL4
Feed plate contact
solenoid
2. The solenoid turns off when the paper touches the paper-positioning plate. The feed motor
continues to rotate.
M1
OFF
SL4
3. The solenoid turns on when the next sheet arrives, and the feed plate comes into contact with
the page.
M1
ON
SL4

Booklet maker alignment of paper
The alignment motor (M5) drives the alignment plates each time paper is output, putting both left and
right edges of the sheet in order. The alignment-plate motor is a four-phase stepping motor. The
position of the alignment plate is identified by the number of motor pulses from the alignment-plate
home-position sensor (PI5). The saddle-stitching mechanism operates on two sheets as follows.
1. When the first sheet is output, the alignment plates touch the left and right edges of the stack
(first alignment). The alignment plates leave the home position in advance and wait at points 10
mm from the edges of the stack.
Figure 1-141 Paper alignment (1 of 8)

Sheets
Alignment Alignment
plate plate
Alignment plate home

Paper positioning position sensor
plate (PI5)
2. The alignment plates move away from the stack and then return (Second alignment).
3. The alignment plates move 10 mm from the edge of the stack.
4. When the stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 repeat.
5. The alignment plates return to the stack and stitching takes place.
6. The alignment plates move 10 mm from the edges of the stack and folding and delivery takes
place.

7. When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 paper sensor, the guide moves to
10 mm from the edge of the stack for the next alignment.
Alignment plate
Alignment motor
M5
Alignment plate
Stack
Alignment plate
home position
sensor (PI5)

In case of 2 sheets:
Entry of Entry of 1st sheet of follow-
1st sheet 2nd sheet ing stack entry
Alignment plate home [1] [2] [3] [4]

position sensor (PI5)
Alignment motor (M5)

motor (M4)
: Alignment : Escape
[1]: Move to wait position
[2]: Stapling period
[3]: Paper folding/delivery period
[4]: Move to following stack size wait position
Booklet maker control of the crescent roller
During alignment, the crescent roller can create friction against the roller causing the stack to move
incorrectly. To prevent this problem, the crescent-roller phase sensor (PI12) identifies the phase of
the crescent roller to determine the timing of alignment. The flag for the crescent-roller phase sensor
is mounted to the crescent-roller shaft. The roller shaft rotates, turning the sensor on and off.
Operation of the alignment plates corresponds with the change in the state of the sensor.
Figure 1-149 Crescent-roller process (1 of 4)

Crescent roller
phase sensor (PI12)
Alignment plates
Flag
Crescent roller
M1
Feed motor
Stack

Alignment plates
Crescent roller
phase sensor (PI12)
Sensor flag
Crescent roller
If the crescent roller was

in contact with the stack,
alignment operation
could be obstructed.

Alignment operation
is started when the
flag has covered the
sensor and the
crescent roller is
away from the stack.

First sheet Second sheet
Feed motor
Crescent roller phase
stops
sensor (PI12)
Alignment operation
Feed motor (M1)
Booklet maker folding

The paper-folding mechanism includes a guide plate, paper-folding rollers, paper-pushing plate, and
paper-positioning plate. The guide plate covers the folding rollers to prevent sheets from contacting
the folding rollers during output. Before folding, the guide plate descends, allowing the folding rollers
to operate. The following tables show the names and the functions of the motors and sensors used by
the paper folding mechanism.
Motor Function
Paper-folding motor (M2) Drives the folding roller
Paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) Drives the paper-pushing plate
Sensor Function
Paper-pushing-plate-motor clock sensor (PI1) Detects the paper-pushing-plate-motor clock
Paper-folding-motor clock sensor (PI4) Detects the paper-folding-motor clock
Output-bin paper sensor (PI6) Detects the presence/absence of a stack of sheets in the
saddle output bin
Delivery sensor (PI11) Detects the paper delivery
Paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14) Detects the paper pushing plate leading edge position
Vertical-path paper sensor (PI17) Detects the presence/absence of paper after removal of a
jam
Paper-folding home-position sensor (PI21) Detects the paper-folding home position
Booklet maker fold the stack
The paper-pushing plate pushes the center of the stack to the roller-contact section and waits at the
leading-edge position until the stack is taken by the paper-folding roller. When the paper-folding roller
has gripped the stack, the paper-pushing-plate motor rotates, returning the paper-pushing plate to its
home position. The paper-folding roller draws the stack until the delivery roller moves it to the output
bin. The thickness of the paper-folding rollers is reduced at the upper half of the periphery but
maintained in the center area and at the lower half of the periphery. At the lower half of the periphery
where the thickness is not reduced, the paper-folding roller (upper) and the paper-folding roller
(lower) contact each other tightly, and paper starts to be folded at this position. The upper and lower
rollers feed paper while folding it and stop at the folding position. At the upper half of the periphery
where the thickness is reduced, the upper and lower paper-folding rollers do not contact each other
except at the center, so they only feed the paper to prevent paper from being wrinkled. The paper-
folding start and stop positions are controlled by the number of motor pulses delivered from the
paper-folding home-position sensor (P121).
Figure 1-153 Folding position (1 of 5)

Paper pushing plate top Paper pushing plate home
position sensor (PI15) position sensor (PI14)
Paper folding roller (upper)

Sensor flag
Paper folding home
position sensor (PI21) Paper pushing plate
Paper folding
roller (lower)
M8
Portion which the
thickness is reduced M2 Paper pushing
plate motor
Stack of sheets Paper folding motor
Figure 1-154 Folding process (2 of 5)

Paper pushing plate top position Paper pushing plate home
sensor (PI15) position sensor (PI14)
Sensor flag
Paper folding home
position sensor (PI21) Paper pushing plate
M8
Paper pushing
M2
plate motor
Paper folding motor

Figure 1-155 Folding start position (3 of 5)
Stack of sheets
Paper pushing plate

Delivery outlet Paper feed inlet
Sensor flag
Paper folding home
Paper folding/feeding is performed.

Paper feeding is performed.
Figure 1-156 Folding start position (4 of 5)
Delivery outlet Paper feed inlet
Sensor flag
Paper folding home
Paper folding/feeding is performed.

Paper feeding is performed.
Figure 1-157 Folding stop position (5 of 5)

Paper folding motor (M2)
Paper pushing plate
motor (M8)
Equivalent of 10mm by paper folding motor
Paper pushing plate top
Booklet paper path
exit sensor (PI11)
Tray paper sensor (PI6)

Paper folding home
: Motor CW : Motor CCW
Booklet maker double folding a stack
A stack of 10 or more A4R or LTRR sheets is folded twice.
1. The paper-pushing plate pushes the stack to the paper-folding rollers.
Figure 1-158 Double-folding process (1 of 5)
Paper pushing plate
M2
M8
Paper folding motor
Paper pushing plate motor
2. The paper-folding rollers grip the stack.
20 mm
(appro
x.)
M2
Paper folding motor
3. The paper-folding rollers rotate in reverse, pushing the stack backward 20 mm (reverse feeding).

20 m
(app m
rox.)
M2
Paper folding motor

4. The paper-folding rollers rotate forward to push the stack forward. The paper-pushing plate
returns to its home position.
M2
Paper folding motor M8

Gripping of paper stack
Equivalent of 20 mm Equivalent of 20 mm (reverse feeding)

Paper folding motor (M2)
Paper pushing plate
motor (M8)
Paper pushing plate top
Booklet paper path
exit sensor (PI11)
Tray paper sensor (PI6)
Paper folding home
: Motor CW : Motor CCW
Booklet maker intermediate-process-tray assembly
Stack job offset

drives the aligning plate front motor (M103) and aligning-plate rear motor (M104) to return the two
aligning plates to the home position. The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack
job-offset function are shown below.

Rear aligning plate

(front)

(FRONT)

4th set
3rd set 2nd set
1st set

Rear aligning plate
Sheet to be offset
Tray

Rear aligning plate
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Motor Function
Booklet maker staple operation
The stacker unit provides 1-point front stapling, 1-point rear stapling, and 2-point stapling. The booklet
stapler provides 2-point center stapling.
Figure 1-167 Location of the staplers
Stapler unit
Stitcher unit
(front, rear stitch staples)
Stapler unit
The staple motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The macro computer (IC101) on
the stacker controller PCA controls the motor.
The staple home-position sensor detects the home position of the cam. When the staple home-
position sensor is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the staple motor forward until the sensor
turns on, moving the staple cam to its original position.
The staple sensor detects presence of a staple cartridge and of staples in the cartridge.

The staple-edging sensor determines whether staples are pushed to the top of the staple
cartridge.
For safety, the stacker-controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless the staple
safety switch (MS34) is turned on.
M41

Stapling operation
The stapling operation staples the prescribed number of copies with the stapler unit. The staple
position depends on the staple mode and paper size. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI40)
detects whether the stapler unit is at the home position. The stapler unit is equipped with a stapler-
alignment interference sensor (PI46). The staple motor (M41) operation is prohibited when the
stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46) is on. This prevents stapling at the stopper and
damaging the stopper when the stapler-shift motor (M105) is incorrectly adjusted. When the power is
turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the stapler-shift motor (M105) to return the stapler unit to
home position. If the stapler unit is already at home position, it waits in that state.
Figure 1-170 Stapler unit
Paper
Stapler shift motor (M35)
Stapler
Stapler shift home position sensor (PI40)
Figure 1-171 Staple location
Paper width 1/2
Front diagonal stapling 2-point stapling
Rear diagonal stapling
Table 1-65 Sensors used in stapling

Sensor Symbol Connector Function Remarks
Stapler-shift home- PI40 J721B-6 Detects the home

position sensor position for the stapler
moving back and forth
Stapler-alignment PI46 J717-3 Staple prohibited area

interference sensor detection

Table 1-65 Sensors used in stapling (continued)
Sensor Symbol Connector Function Remarks
Stapler home-position J717-5 Detects the home In the stapler

sensor position for the
stapling operation
Staple edging sensor J717-6 Detects the staple top In the stapler
position
Staple sensor J717-7 Detects presence or In the stapler

absence of staples in
the cartridge
Table 1-66 Motors used in stapling
Function Motor Symbol Remarks
Moves the stapler Stapler-shift motor M105
Performs the stapling Staple motor M41

operation
The stacker controller PCA moves the stapler according to the specified stapling position. When the
rear of the first sheet passes the first delivery roller, the stacker controller PCA stops the stack-
delivery motor (M102) and then rotates it in reverse. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-
delivery roller and return roller and delivers the paper to the processing output bin. The paper in the
processing output bin is detected by the processing-output-bin paper sensor (PI38). When the paper
is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M106) starts and raises the swing guide.
When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-
guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin
paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M103/M104) starts and aligns the paper.
Figure 1-172 Paper path for stapling

Swing guide
1st delivery roller
Return roller
Figure 1-173 Rollers and sensors for stapling
Swing guide home position sensor (PI35)
Stack ejection roller (upper)

Stack ejection roller (lower)
Swing guide
Swing motor
(M36)
Stack ejection lower roller cluch (CL32)
The stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M106) and lowers the swing guide when the rear
of the second paper passes the first delivery roller. The stack-delivery motor is reversed. The stack-
delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller (upper) and return roller and sends the paper to the
processing output bin. At this point, the stack-delivery roller (lower) does not rotate because the
stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) is disengaged. The output-bin paper sensor (PI38) detects
the processing-output-bin paper sensor (P138). When the paper is delivered to the processing output
bin, the swing motor (M106) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position
sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing
guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the
aligning motor (M103/M104) starts and aligns the paper.
Figure 1-174 Paper path

Swing guide
1st delivery roller
Return roller
When the last sheet is aligned, the stacker controller PCA moves the aligning plate to the alignment
position with the aligning motor (M103/M104) (the paper is held by the aligning plate). Then the
stacker controller PCA staples at the specified staple position. After stapling, the stacker controller
PCA starts the swing motor (M106) and lowers the swing guide. Then the stack is ejected by the
stack-delivery roller, return roller, and stack trailing-edge assist guide.

Figure 1-175 Shift process for the staple unit
Swing guide
Return roller
Stack trailing-edge
assist guide
Stapler
Staple unit
The stapler motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The stapler home-position sensor
detects the home position of the cam. The macro computer (IC13) on the stacker controller PCA
controls the forward and reverse rotation of the staple motor. When the stapler home-position sensor
is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the stapler motor in the forward direction until the sensor
turns on, allowing the staple cam to return to the original position. The staple sensor is used to detect
the presence or absence of a staple cartridge in the machine and the presence or absence of staples
in the cartridge. The staple edging sensor determines whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
staple cartridge. For safety, the stacker controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless
the staple safety switch (MS34) is on.
M41

Stitcher (stapler) unit

The stitcher base unit includes two stitchers and stitcher bases. The stitchers are fixed in position and
do not slide or swing. Stitching begins when the stitcher motor (M7, M6) drives the rotary cam. The
front and rear stitcher units operate with a time delay to prevent wrinkling of paper and to limit the
load applied to the power supply. The stitcher home-position sensor (SW7, SW5) monitors the
movement of the rotary cam and allows identification of individual stitcher operations. The staple
sensor (SW6, SW4) detects the presence or absence of staples inside the staple cartridge. The
alignment plates keep both edges of the stack in place while stitching takes place.
Figure 1-178 Stitcher unit

Figure 1-179 Sequence of stitching
Stitcher home position sensor
(front) (SW7)
Stitcher motor (front) (M7)

Stitcher home position
sensor (rear) (SW5)
Stitcher motor (rear) (M6)
No.1 paper sensor (PI18)
Alignment motor (M5)
Alignment Escape
Figure 1-180 Rotation of the cam

Cam
Mount
Booklet maker stack operation
Output bin operation

This accessory has an upper output bin (output-bin 1) and a lower output bin (output-bin 2).
The output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) move output-bin 1 and
output-bin 2 up and down independently.
The output-bin-1 paper sensor (PI111) and output-bin-2 paper sensor (PI112) detect paper
stacked on the output bin.
The output-bin-1 paper-surface sensor (PI141) and output-bin-2 paper-surface sensor (PI115)
detect the home positions of output-bin 1 and output-bin 2.
The home position is the top surface of the paper when paper is stacked on the output bin, or
the position where the edge of the output bin is detected when no paper is stacked.
When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the output-bin-1-shift motor
(M107) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) to return the output bin to home position. If already
at home position, the output bin is moved from the home position and then returned. If both
output bins are at home position, this is performed for output-bin 1 and then for output-bin 2.
If the product specifies output-bin 2, the stacker controller PCA shifts the output bin so that
output-bin 2 is at the delivery port. When paper is stacked on the output bin, a prescribed
number of pulses drive the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) or output-bin-2-shift motor (M108) to
lower the output bin. Then the output bin returns to home position to prepare for the next stack.
The upper and lower limits of the output bin are detected by three area sensors (PS981, PS982,
and PS983) on the output-bin-1- and output-bin-2-shift area sensor PCA.
The stacker controller PCA stops driving the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and output-bin-2-
shift motor (M108) when it detects the upper or lower limit of the output bin. Also, the on/off
combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) are used to detect over-stacking
according to the stack height for large-size and mixed stacking.
The stacker controller PCA stops supplying +24 Vdc to the output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) and
stops the stacker operation when the output-bin-1 switch (MSW103) turns on.
Figure 1-181 Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983)
Rack
Output bin 1 paper sensor (PI111)
Output bin 1 switch (MSW103)

(M107)
Output bin 1 shift area

sensor PCA

(M108)
Output bin 2 paper sensor (PI112) Output bin 2 shift area

sensor PCA
Rack
NOTE: PI111 is located on output-bin 1. PI112 is located on output-bin 2.

Figure 1-182 Output-bin components
Paper surface sensor (PI41) (locate inside the accessory)
Paper surface sensor flag
Edge
Output bin 2 paper surface Output bin 1

sensor (PI48)
Paper surface
sensor flag
Edge
Output bin 2
When the output bin capacity is reached, the ON/OFF combinations of the area sensors (PS981,
PS982 and PS983) are used to determine an over-stacking condition. Area sensor conditions are as
follows:
(PS983) (PS982) (PS981)
Output bin 1 upper limit ON OFF OFF
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded ON ON ON
Output bin 1 lower limit ON ON OFF
(PS983) (PS982) (PS981)
Output bin 2 upper limit ON OFF ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded OFF ON ON
Stack count 1,700 sheets exceeded OFF OFF ON
Output bin 2 lower limit OFF ON OFF
Shutter operation
To prevent the delivery section from catching stacked paper in output-bin 1 when it passes, a shutter
is provided at the delivery section. The shutter closes when output-bin 1 passes, even when no paper
is stacked. When the shutter clutch (CL31) and stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) are on, the
shutter moves up (closes) when the stack-ejection motor (M102) turns forward and moves down
(open, delivery enabled), which occurs when the motor turns backward. The shutter home-position
sensor (PI113) detects the opening and closing of the shutter.
Figure 1-183 Shutter location
Stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102)
Stack ejection
roller (lower)
Shutter home position

sensor (PI113)
Shutter
Shutter clutch (CL101)

Booklet maker paper-delivery path
The saddle-stitcher flapper routes paper from the product to the booklet maker unit. The booklet
maker unit staples, folds, and then delivers the paper to the booklet-maker-unit output bin.
Figure 1-184 Booklet-maker-unit paper path
Booklet maker delivery modes

Table 1-69 Booklet maker delivery modes
Feed Staple/Saddle Punch Offset Supported feature
Face-down N N/A N Yes
Face-down N N/A Y Yes
Face-down Staple N/A N Yes
Face-down Staple N/A Y No
Face-down Saddle N/A N Yes
Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes
Table 1-70 Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes
Feed Staple/Saddle Punch Offset Supported feature
Face-down N N N Yes
Face-down N N Y Yes
Face-down Staple N N Yes
Face-down Staple N Y No
Face-down Staple Y N Yes
Face-down Staple Y Y No
Face-down Saddle N N Yes
Face-down Saddle Y N No
Booklet maker jam detection

The saddle stitcher unit identifies a jam, and sends the jam signal to the product. When all doors are
closed after the jam is removed, the saddle stitcher unit checks whether the vertical-path paper
sensor (PI17) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor has detected paper, the unit
identifies the condition as being a faulty jam removal and sends the jam signal to the product once
again.
Figure 1-185 Booklet maker jams
PI22
PI18
PI19
PI20
PI17
PI11
PI15
PI14
PI8

2 Solve problems
Solve problems checklist
Menu map
Preboot menu options
Current settings pages
Troubleshooting process
Tools for troubleshooting
Clear jams
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
Use manual print modes
Solve image quality problems
Clean the product
Solve performance problems
Solve connectivity problems
Service mode functions
Solve fax problems (M880)
Product upgrades
ENWW 207
Solve problems checklist
If the product is not correctly functioning, complete the steps (in the order given) in the following
checklist. If the product fails a checklist step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions for
that step. If a checklist step resolves the problem, skip the remaining checklist items.
1. If the control panel is blank or black, complete these steps:
a. Check the power cable.
b. Check that the power is turned on.
c. Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label
that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip
and its voltage is not within specifications, connect the product directly into the electrical
outlet. If it is already connected into the outlet, try a different outlet.
If the control panel is not responding to touch, or if it appears black or blank, look for the
following conditions.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the product has halted while in Sleep mode.
The control-panel home button LED is illuminated.
The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds.
The product does not exit Sleep mode when a page is placed in the document feeder (MFP model only).
The product does not exit Sleep mode when the document feeder is opened to place a page on the scanner
flatbed (MFP model only).
a. If the product appears to be halted while in Sleep mode, do not replace the control panel.
Update the firmware to the FutureSmart 2 SP2 version.
NOTE: Several firmware enhancements have been incorporated this version of firmware
to prevent the product from halting while in Sleep mode.
b. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the product still halts while in
Sleep mode, elevate the case after collecting the following info:
Try printing to the product from a host computer. Does the product print a page?
Can you access the product HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)?
Turn the product power off, and then on again. Collect the product Diagnostic File.
c. If the product is not halted while in Sleep mode, verify that the control panel is correctly
functioning by accessing the control panel diagnostics (see the Control-panel tests in the
Component tests section of the product problem solving manual).
If the control panel does not respond to the diagnostic button, try the following:
Turn the product power off.
Reseat the cable connections on the bottom of the control-panel assembly.
208 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW

Remove, and then reseat the formatter PCA.
Turn the product power on, and then check for functionality of the control-panel.
d. If the error persists, replace the control-panel assembly.
2. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on status. If an error
message displays, resolve the error.
Use the Power-on checks section in the product troubleshooting service manual to solve
the problem
3. Check the cables.
a. Check the power and network cable connections between the product and the computer or
network port. Make sure that the connections are secure.
b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if possible.
c. Check the network connection.
4. Make sure that the selected paper size and type meet HP specifications. Also open the Trays
menu on the product control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper
type and size.
5. Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also
prints.
a. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration
button.
b. Open the following menus:
Reports
Configuration/Status Pages
Configuration Page
c. Touch the Print button to print the page.
If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
If the page jams in the product, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the
jam.
If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware.
If the page prints correctly, the product hardware is working. The problem is with the
computer you are using, with the print driver, or with the program.
6. Print a supplies status page and then check that the maintenance items below are not at their
end-of-life.
TIP: If a maintenance item needs to be replaced, order the part number provided below.
a. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration
button.
b. Open the following menus:
ENWW Solve problems checklist 209

Reports
Supplies Status Page
c. Touch the Print button to print the page, and then check the following maintenance items:
Maintenance kit 110V/220V (includes the fuser, pickup and feed rollers, and
secondary transfer roller); estimated life: 200,000 pages
110V C2H67A
220V C2H57A
Fuser kit
110V C1N54A
220V C1N58A
ADF roller maintenance kit; estimated life: 100,000 pages
D1P70A
7. Verify that you have installed the print driver for this product. Check the program to make sure
that you are using the print driver for this product. The print driver is on the CD that came with
the product, or can be downloaded from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 or
www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880 .
8. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution
works, the problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not
print), complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.
b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with
a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the
new connection type that you are using.

Menu map
Print a report of the complete Administration menu to more easily navigate to the settings needed.
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration
button.
2. Open the following menus:
Reports
3. Select the Administration Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
ENWW Menu map 211

Preboot menu options
If an error occurs while the product is initializing, an error message displays on the control-panel
display. The user can open the Preboot menus. The error menu item will not be seen if an error did
not occur.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action.
Open the Preboot menu
1. Turn the product on.
2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays
below the HP logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu.
TIP: You can also wait for the HP logo to move to the center of the control-panel display, and
then touch the logo to open the Preboot menu.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Preboot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Preboot menu
2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays
below the HP logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Startup Options item, and then touch the OK
button.
5. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button.
6. Touch the Home button to highlight the Continue item, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The product will initialize.
Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30

seconds, the product returns to a normal boot (the same as
selecting Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required

to open the Preboot menu.

Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) (continued)
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already

signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required
to sign in.
Download Network This item initiates a preboot firmware download process. A

USB drive option will work on all FutureSmart products.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive
Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all

data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download
must be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all

data except the firmware repository.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (product remains bootable).
Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.
Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password

from the Administrator menu. Before the password is
actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to
confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the OK
button to confirm the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK

button to clear the password.
ENWW Preboot menu options 213

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to disable using an external
device for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled
continued only for the Boot device. This will be grayed out unless
the 99.09.68 error is displayed.
Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure
disk to this product.
The secure disk already locked to this product will

remain accessible to this product. Use this function to
have more than one encrypted disk accessible by the
product when using them interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

product always remains accessible to this product.
Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event. The
secure disk that is already locked to this product will
remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk's
encryption password with the new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this product

remains accessible to this product.
Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated with
the yet-to-be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Retain Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure

Password disk for this session only, and then search for the
missing secure disk in future sessions.
Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on
the disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is
a one-pass overwrite, which erases the entire disk
including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase

all data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user
to gain access to it from any product.

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
device or get a status about the internal device.
continued continued
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command
erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk
remains an encrypted disk.

all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the
user to gain access to it from any product.

files are reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure
Hard Disk is erased.

available.
External Select the External Device item to erase the internal

Device device or get status about the internal device.
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on

files are reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.

all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a
user to gain access to it from any product.

files are reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so
the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

available.

Administrator Configure LAN Select the Configure LAN item to set up the network
settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade.
continued
The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
IP Mode Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
[DHCP] DHCP server.
IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.

[STATIC]
IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Default Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.

Gateway
Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Administrator Startup Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be
Options set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to
continued the Ready state.
Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version
when the product reaches the Ready state.
Once the product power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is not
shown.
Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-party
applications.
Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time
the power is turned on without calibrating.
Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Preboot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume

during startup.

Administrator Startup First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the product to
Options initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
continued
continued For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time
settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
product power is turned on.
When the product power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the

Jetdirect Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.
WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Diagnostic items are useful for troubleshooting formatter
problems. Use the options below the Do Not Run item to
continued help troubleshoot formatter problems.
Short
Long
Disk Do Not Run
Short
Long
Optimized
Raw
Smart
ICB
CPB
Interconnect Run
Selected
Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
gain access to the product remotely to troubleshoot
issues.
Stop Telnet
Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If you cannot print the error logs, the System Triage item
allows you to copy the error logs to a flash drive on the
next startup. The files can then be sent to HP to help
determine the problem.
Service Tools This item requires the service access personal

identification number (PIN) for this product (see the
service mode functions section in the product
troubleshooting manual). If the product does not reach
the Ready state, you can use this item to print the error
logs. The logs can be copied to a USB drive when the
product is initialized, and then these files can be sent to
HP to help determine what is causing the problem.
Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password.
Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec This item is for factory use only.
WARNING! HP recommends that field service

personnel do not access, or use this item. This item is for
factory use only.

Current settings pages
Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be
helpful in the troubleshooting process.
button.
Reports
3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
ENWW Current settings pages 219

Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel
alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many
possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the
problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
Are supply items within their rated life?
Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good
condition.
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve
product hardware problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A yes answer to a question allows you to proceed to
the next major step. A no answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate
section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the
next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart
1 Is the product on and does a readable Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power
message display? subsystem on page 221.
Power on
Yes No After the control-panel display is functional, see step 2.
2 Does the message Ready display on the After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
control panel?
Control-panel
messages Yes No
3 Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an If the event log does not print, check for error messages.
event log to see the history of errors with this
Event log product. If paper jams inside the product, see the jams section of the
product service manual.
Does the event log print?
If error messages display on the control panel when you try to
Yes No print an event log, see the control-panel message section of the
service manual.
After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see

step 4.

Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
4 Open the Reports menu and print the If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration
configuration pages to verify that all the page, remove the accessory and reinstall it.
Information pages accessories are installed.
After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.
Are all the accessories installed?
Yes No
5 Does the print quality meet the customer's Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect
requirements? tables. See the images defects table in the product service
Print quality manual.
Yes No
After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.
6 Can the customer print successfully from the Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid
host computer? IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.
Interface
Yes. This is the end of No If error messages display on the control panel when you try to
the troubleshooting print an event log, see the control-panel message section of the
process. service manual.
When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the
end of the troubleshooting process.
Power subsystem
Power-on checks
The basic product functions should start up when the product is connected into an electrical outlet
and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in
this section to isolate and solve the problem.
If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the
control-panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on.
Place your hand over the vents in the left-side cover, above the formatter. If the fan is operating, you
will feel air passing out of the product. You can lean close to the product and hear the fan operating.
You can also place your hand over the vents on the right side of the rear cover. If the fan is operating,
you should feel air being drawn into the product.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the right or front cover is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and
audibly determine if the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print
engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it
might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter,
and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost
certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items:
ENWW Troubleshooting process 221

1. Make sure that the product is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.
2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position.
3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
4. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.
5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove
the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, make sure the power switch is in the on position, and then
verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the product on again.
NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product
power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the
control-panel display, formatter, or other product assemblies.
Scanning subsystem (M880)

Calibrate the scanner
Use this procedure to properly position the copied image on the page.
TIP: This adjustment might be required after the scanner or document feeder is replaced.
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance
button.
2. Touch the Calibration/Cleaning button.
3. Touch the Calibrate Scanner button, and then follow the instructions provided on the screen.
Control panel checks

The product includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel. This mode allows you to
troubleshoot issues with the touchscreen, the Speaker, and the Home button.
NOTE: Some of the diagnostic tests are for factory use only.
TIP: To diagnose control panel problems, see Control panel diagnostic flowcharts on page 226.
Open diagnostic mode
Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, remove the round black-
rubber cover near the center of the control panel, and then press the button inside the hole to
access the diagnostic mode.
Repeatedly pressing the button will scroll through additional screens on the control-panel
display. Continue to press the button to scroll back to the diagnostic-mode main test screen.

Exit diagnostic mode
Do one of the following:
Touch the Cancel button.
Wait 20 seconds. The control panel will return to the Home screen.
Table 2-8 Control panel diagnostic functions

Item Description Remarks
Exits a test
Cancel button
Selects test settings in some of the test windows
Keypad
Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Use this item to check the accuracy of the touch
screen.
Use a finger or 3 mm (.118 in) conductive stylus

to trace between the grid lines to check the
accuracy of the touchscreen calibration.
NOTE: The gap between the grid lines is 6

mm (.236 in).
Red-grid touch test
When the screen is touched, a line or a dot
displays on the screen (the X and Y coordinates
of the position on the screen are also
displayed).
Checks calibration Use this item to determine if the touchscreen

calibration is within the acceptable range.
When selected, ten target points (and the X and

Y coordinates of the position of the target point)
display on the screen.
Touching a target causes the X and Y

Calibration touch test
coordinate of that target to appear in the middle
of the touchscreen (above the cancel button).
NOTE: The product automatically calibrates

the touchscreen. A manual touchscreen
calibration procedure is not available for this
product.

Table 2-8 Control panel diagnostic functions (continued)
Selects a test pattern to view on the display. Use this item to identify touchscreen LED
display problems.
1. Touch the icon.
2. Touch the up or down arrow buttons

to scroll though touchscreen LED display
test screens.
Touchscreen LED
display test
Tests sounds Use this item to test audio functionality.
1. Touching this item causes the speaker to

emit a tone.
2. Touch the 2 button on the keypad, and

then touch this item to cause the speaker
to emit a more complex tone.
Speaker test
Shows the firmware version Touch this item to display the control panel
firmware version and firmware build date.
Firmware information
Factory use only
Tests the product keyboard When this item is selected, pressing a button on
the keyboard causes the corresponding
NOTE: For products with a keyboard feature character to appear on the control-panel display.
only.
1. Touch the icon.
Keyboard test 2. Press a button on the keyboard. The

corresponding character should appear on
the control-panel display.
Adjusts the backlight Use this item to adjust the brightness of the
control-panel display.
1. Touch the icon.
2. Touch the up or down arrow buttons

to adjust the backlight level.
Backlight test

Table 2-8 Control panel diagnostic functions (continued)
Checks the ambient light sensor Use this item to test the ambient-light sensor
functionality.
1. Touch the icon.
2. Shine a flashlight at the control panel to the

left of, and down about 25.4 mm (1 in,)
from the Home button.
Ambient-light sensor 3. The numbers displayed below the icon

test should be any value other than zero.
Tests the Home button Use this item to test the Home button LED
and switch functionality.
1. Touch the icon.
2. Press the Home button on the right

side of the control panel. The LED icon on
the control-panel display illuminates if the
Home button test button LED and switch are correctly
functioning.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts
TIP: Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, remove the round black-
rubber cover near the center of the control panel, and then press the button inside the hole to access
the diagnostic mode.
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
No control panel sound.
Home button is unresponsive.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Figure 2-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Remove and reseat the formatter.
If the error persists,
troubleshoot the formatter, USB cable,
Turn the product power off. N and the control panel.
Remove and reseat the formatter.
Troubleshoot the formatter.
N
Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond
TIP: Use the red-grid touch test to verify that all areas of the touchscreen are correctly functioning.
See Table 2-8 Control panel diagnostic functions on page 223.
Figure 2-2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond
Touchscreen slow to
respond or requires
multiple presses
to respond
Not a control-panel problem.

Troubleshoot firmware or
software application problems.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Figure 2-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
red-grid touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound
Figure 2-4 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive
Figure 2-5 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Figure 2-6 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Tools for troubleshooting
The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with your product.
HP recommends that you provide enough space around the product to ensure there is sufficient
space to open doors and covers, provide proper ventilation, and for service personnel to remove
covers and internal assemblies.
Table 2-9 Product environment spacing
Item Recommended spacing
From the left-side or right-side of the 430 mm (17 in) to 760 mm (30 in)
product, input accessory, or finishing
accessory to an obstruction
From the front-side of the product, input 610 mm (24 in) to 1010 mm (40 in)
accessory, or finishing accessory to an
obstruction
From the back-side of the product, input 460 mm (18 in) to 760 mm (30 in)
accessory, or finishing accessory to an
obstruction
Individual component diagnostics

LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems.
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.
NOTE: The formatter for the M855 product is shown in the figure below, but the LEDs are in the
same position for the M880 product.
Figure 2-7 LEDs
2
1
1 Heartbeat LED
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 233

2 Connectivity LED
3 HP Jetdirect LEDs
Connectivity LED
The connectivity LED provides information about product operation. If a product error occurs, the
formatter displays a message on the control-panel display. However, error situations can occur
causing the formatter-to-control panel communication to be interrupted.
NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either
assembly. Use the connectivity LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid
unnecessarily replacing these assemblies.
Formatter-to-control panel communication interruptions
The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface.
The control panel is not functioning (either a failed assembly or power problem).
Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected.
TIP: If the connectivity LED is illuminatedby an error condition or normal operationthe formatter
is fully seated and the power is on. The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are
recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated.
The Heartbeat LED operates according to the product state. When the product is initializing, see
Connectivity LED, product initialization on page 234. When the product is in Ready mode, see
Connectivity LED, product operational on page 237.
Connectivity LED, product initialization

The following table describes the connectivity LED operation while the product is executing the
firmware boot process.
NOTE: When the initialization process completes, the connectivity LED should be illuminated solid
green.
If after initialization, the connectivity LED is not solid green, see Connectivity LED, product
operational on page 237.
Table 2-10 Connectivity LED, product initialization

Product initializing state Connectivity LED, normal state Connectivity LED, error state
No power (power cable Off Not applicable

disconnected or power
switch off)
Power on (immediately Red, solid Red, solid

after the power switch
pressed) Duration should be 1 second or less Firmware error: problem finding hardware
and booting the serial peripheral interface
flash memory
Boot process halted
Replace the formatter.

Table 2-10 Connectivity LED, product initialization (continued)
Serial peripheral Green, solid Red, solid

interface (SPI) flash
memory boot Firmware error; problem corrupt or missing
SPI flash memory
Boot process halted
HW checks on board Green, solid Red, solid

DRAM
Power on self check failure
Boot process halted
Control panel Green, solid Yellow, fast flash

connection initializes
NOTE: Control panel communication Formatter to control panel connection
successful. If an error occurs, a message failed
should appear on the control-panel display.
Boot process continues
Check the cables between the formatter and

control panel for damage. Make sure that the
cables are fully seated.
Preboot menu available Green, solid Red, solid

(including diagnostics)
Diagnostic failure
Follow diagnostic instructions
Turn the power off, and then on again to restart

the initialization process.
Accessing disk for Green, solid Yellow, fast flash

firmware image
NOTE: If applicable, disk error messages Control panel not connected
appear on the control-panel display.
Firmware boot Green, solid Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear Control panel not connected

on the control-panel display.
Product operational Green, heartbeat blink Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear Control panel not connected

on the control-panel display.

Table 2-10 Connectivity LED, product initialization (continued)
49.XX.YY error or Not applicable LED off

initialization freezes
NOTE: An error message (for example,
49.XX.YY) might appear on the control-panel
display.
Eventually a formatter connection missing

message will appear.
Turn the power off, and then on again to restart

the initialization process.
If the error persists, perform a firmware

upgrade.
Control panel Not applicable Yellow, fast flash

connection interrupted
after the product is Control panel not connected
operational
Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable
Approaching Sleep Green, slow blink Not applicable

Mode
Wake up from Sleep Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression

Mode
Approaching wake up Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression

from Sleep Mode

Connectivity LED, product operational
The following table describes the connectivity LED operation when the product completes the
firmware boot process and is in the Ready state.
Table 2-11 Connectivity LED, product operational
LED color Description
Green Normal operation
Formatter is operating normally
Firmware is operating normally
Control panel is connected
Yellow Formatter cannot connect to the control panel
Check control panel connections
Verify control panel functionality
Red Formatter error or failure
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error
Power on self test (formatter) failed
Diagnostic (formatter) failed
Off TIP: The connectivity LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the product power switch is
in the off position, or the product is in Sleep Mode.
Firmware or system freeze
Check control panel for an error message
Control panel failure
NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then
on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing
after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the
initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity,
and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the
green LED is off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually
configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control panel menus.
button.

Network Settings
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then touch the OK button.
Engine diagnostics
The product contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, you
can run the diagnostic test when the front and upper-right doors are open. To operate the product
with the doors open, the door switch levers must be depressed to simulate a closed-door position.
WARNING! Be careful when performing product diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained
service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of
the power supplies when the product is turned on.
1. Open the right and front doors.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the front door and right door sensor slots, and then wait until
the product enters the Ready state.
NOTE: The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm.
Figure 2-8 Defeating interlocks

Disable cartridge check
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when the toner
cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the product is in this mode. When
the product is in this mode, you can navigate the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the
print quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise,
and to isolate print-quality problems that are related to the toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange a toner cartridge until after you start the disable cartridge check
diagnostic.
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Disable Cartridge Check

Engine test button
To verify that the product engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object
to depress the test-page switch located on the rear of the product. The test page should have a series
of horizontal lines.
NOTE: The engine test only uses Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in
Tray 2.
Figure 2-9 Engine test button
Paper path test

This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and
specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent
problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:
Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one
copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll
back up and select Print Test Page to start the test.
Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.
Test Duplex Path: Enable or disable two-sided printing.
Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or
500.
button.

Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Paper Path Test
3. Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run.
Paper path sensors test

This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while
printing internal pages.
Figure 2-10 Paper path sensor locations (product base)

Simplex paper path
SR33
SR36
SR45
SW14
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR37 (front)
SR38 (rear)
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS SR26
SW13
SR21 SR31
SR24
SW12 SW11
SR32 SR25
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Paper Path Sensors
NOTE: Exiting the Paper path sensors menu and then reentering the test will clear the test values
from the previous test.
The menu list of sensors and motors for the Paper path sensors test varies depending on which
optional accessories are installed.

Table 2-12 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests
Sensor name Sensor/Switch Replacement part number Descriptions
number
ITB alienation sensor SR18 RM2-7026-000CN Color plane registration (CPR) sensor
assembly
Developer alienation sensor SR19 RM2-5051-000CN Shutter gear holder assembly
SR20
Tray 2media level sensor SR21 RM1-3222-000CN Lifter drive assembly
Tray 2 feed sensor SR22 RM1-9599-000CN Cassette paper pickup assembly
Tray 1 feed sensor SR24 RM1-9615-000CN MP (Tray 1) guide assembly
Fuser pressure release sensor SR28 C1N54-67901 (110V) Fuser
C1N58-67901 (220V)
Fuser loop 1 and 2 sensors SR29 RM1-9621-000CN Registration secondary transfer

assembly
SR30
Output bin full sensor SR33 RM1-9841-000CN Face-down delivery assembly
Fuser output sensor 1 SR35 RM1-6940-000CN Right sub door assembly
Output media width sensor SR36 RM1-9841-000CN Face-down delivery assembly
Fuser front width sensor SR37 RM1-9621-000CN Registration secondary transfer

assembly
Fuser rear width sensor SR38 RM1-9621-000CN Registration secondary transfer

assembly
Fuser output sensor 2 SR45 RM1-6940-000CN Right sub door assembly
Tray 3 feed sensor SR112 RM2-0275-000CN Paper pickup assembly (1x500- or

3x500-sheet feeder)
Tray 4 feed sensor SR122 RM2-0275-000CN Paper pickup assembly (3x500-sheet

feeder)
Tray 5 feed sensor SR132 RM2-0275-000CN Paper pickup assembly (3x500-sheet

feeder)
ITPU feed 3 sensor SR201 RM2-5057-000CN Lower guide assembly (IPTU)
Duplex switchback sensor SR301 RM2-0291-000CN (M855) Duplex reverse assembly
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Developer delivery sensor SR302 RM1-9640-000CN Right sub door assembly
Color sensor (M855 only) SR303 RM2-5045-000CN Duplex feed assembly
Duplex refeed sensor SR304 RM1-9640-000CN Right sub door assembly
Registration sensor MS A2W77-67901 ITB assembly
HCI feed sensor PS3301 RM2-0270-000CN Merge paper feed assembly

Table 2-12 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests (continued)
Sensor name Sensor/Switch Replacement part number Descriptions

number
Tray 3 feed sensor PS3302 RM1-8869-000CN Paper pickup assembly right (HCI)
Tray 4 feed sensor PS3305 RM1-8876-000CN Paper pickup assembly left (HCI)
Manual sensor and tray/bin manual sensor tests

Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the product sensors and switches.
Manual sensor test

The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Manual Sensor Test.
Use the manual sensor test

The Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name, sensor state (active or
inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Manual Sensor Test
3. Touch the sensor number and name on the Manual Sensor Test screen to display a sensor
location graphic on the control-panel display.
4. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state
(active or inactive).
The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when
the sensor is active.
The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after
the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted
(activated or deactivated).
For example, opening and closing the front door increments the SW14 Front door Toggle
item count two timesonce when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.
5. Touch the Reset Sensors button to reset the Toggle count item.
-or-
Touch the Cancel button to exit the Manual Sensor Test screen and return to the Diagnostic
Tests menu.

Table 2-13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests
Sensor or switch Replacement Part number Description
SW13 Right door open/close Right door open/closed switch
RM2-7035-000CN
SW14 Right door open/close Front door open/closed switch
RM2-7035-000CN
SW3301 Switch button Lower right door 1 switch (HCI)
WC2-5512-000CN
SW3302 Auto close Tray 4 cassette open/close switch (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
SW3303 Auto close Tray 5 cassette open/close switch (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
SR13 Registration secondary transfer T2 door open/close sensor

assembly
RM1-9621-000CN
SR21 Lifter drive assembly Tray 2 media level sensor
RM1-3222-000CN
SR22 Cassette paper pickup assembly Tray 2 feed sensor
RM1-9599-000CN
SR24 MP (Tray 1) guide assembly Tray 1 feed sensor
RM1-9615-000CN
SR28 Fuser Fuser pressure release sensor
C1N54-67901 (110V)
C1N58-67901 (220V)
SR29 Registration secondary transfer Fuser loop 1 and 2 sensors

assembly
SR30
RM1-9621-000CN
SR33 Face-down delivery assembly Output bin full sensor
RM1-9841-000CN
SR34 Fuser drive assembly Fuser flap open/close sensor
RM1-9606-000CN
SR35 Right sub door assembly Fuser output sensor 1
RM1-6940-000CN
SR36 Face-down delivery assembly Output media width sensor
RM1-9841-000CN

Table 2-13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued)
SR37 Registration secondary transfer Fuser front width sensor

assembly
RM1-9621-000CN
SR38 Registration secondary transfer Fuser rear width sensor

assembly
RM1-9621-000CN
SR45 Right sub door assembly Fuser output sensor 2
RM1-9640-000CN
SR112 Paper pickup assembly Tray 3 feed sensor (1x500- or 3x500-sheet feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR122 Paper pickup assembly Tray 4 feed sensor (3x500-sheet feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
RM2-0275-000CN
SR201 Lower guide assembly (IPTU) IPTU feed 3 sensor
RM2-5057-000CN
RM2-5057-000CN
RM2-5057-000CN
SR204 Lower guide assembly (IPTU) ITPU door open/close sensor
RM2-5057-000CN
SR302 Right sub door assembly Developer delivery sensor
RM1-9640-000CN
SR304 Right sub door assembly Duplex refeed sensor
RM1-9640-000CN
MS ITB assembly Registration sensor
A2W77-67901
PS3103 Paper pickup assembly right (HCI) Tray 3 paper sensor (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3102 Paper pickup assembly right (HCI) Tray 3 paper surface sensor (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3203 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 paper sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN

Table 2-13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued)
PS3202 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 paper surface sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3301 Merge paper feed assembly HCI feed sensor
RM2-0270-000CN
PS3302 Paper pickup assembly right (HCI) Tray 3 feed sensor (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3303 Auto close (HCI) Tray 3 paper size sensor (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
RM1-8880-000CN
PS3305 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 feed sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN

Tray/bin manual sensor test
The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test.
Use the tray/bin manual sensor test
The Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name, sensor state
(active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test
3. Touch the sensor number and name on the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test screen to display a
sensor location graphic on the control-panel display.
For example, opening Tray 2 increments the SW7,8 Tray 2 Paper Size Toggle item count
two timesonce when the tray is opened, and once when the tray is closed.
-or-
Touch the Cancel button to exit the Manual Sensor Test screen and return to the Diagnostic
Tests menu.
Table 2-14 Tray/bin manual sensors

Sensor or switch name Replacement part number Descriptions
SW11 Lifter drive assembly Tray 2 paper size switch
RM1-3222-000CN
SW112 Auto close assembly Tray 3 paper size switch (1x500- or 3x500-
sheet feeder)
RM1-3531-000CN
SW122 Auto close assembly Tray 4 paper size switch (3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM1-3531-000CN
SW132 Auto close assembly Tray 5 paper size switch (3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM1-3531-000CN

Table 2-14 Tray/bin manual sensors (continued)
SW3301 Switch button Lower right door 1 switch (HCI)
WC2-5512-000CN
SW3302 Auto close (HCI) Tray 4 cassette open/close switch (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
SW3308 Auto close (HCI) Tray 5 cassette open/close switch (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
SR22 Cassette paper pickup assembly Tray 2 feed sensor
RM1-9599-000CN
SR24 MP (Tray 1) guide assembly Tray 1 feed sensor
RM1-9615-000CN
SR25 MP (Tray 1) paper pickup assembly Tray 1 paper sensor
RM1-9644-000CN
SR31 Cassette paper pickup assembly Tray 2 paper sensor
RM1-9599-000CN
SR32 Cassette paper pickup assembly Tray 2 paper surface sensor
RM1-9599-000CN
SR33 Face-down delivery tray assembly Output bin full sensor
RM1-9841-000N
SR112 Paper pickup assembly Tray 3 feed sensor (1x500- or 3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR113 Paper pickup assembly Tray 3 paper sensor (1x500- or 3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR114 Paper pickup assembly Tray 3 paper surface sensor (1x500- or

3x500-sheet feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
RM2-0275-000CN
SR123 Paper pickup assembly Tray 4 paper sensor (1x500- or 3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR124 Paper pickup assembly Tray 4 paper surface sensor (1x500- or

3x500-sheet feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
RM2-0275-000CN

Table 2-14 Tray/bin manual sensors (continued)
SR133 Paper pickup assembly Tray 5 paper sensor (3x500-sheet feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
SR134 Paper pickup assembly Tray 5 paper surface sensor (3x500-sheet

feeder)
RM2-0275-000CN
RM1-8869-000CN
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3103 Paper pickup assembly right (HCI) Tray 3 paper sensor (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
PS3203 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 paper sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3202 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 paper surface sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3301 Merge paper feed assembly HCI feed sensor
RM2-0270-000CN
PS3302 Paper pickup assembly right (HCI) Tray 3 feed sensor (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
RM1-8880-000CN
RM1-8880-000CN
PS3305 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) Tray 4 feed sensor (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN
PS3306 Paper pickup assembly left (HCI) HCI inner flag sensor
RM1-8876-000CN

Print/stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams
within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path.
The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper
reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer
is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two
ways.
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Print/Stop Test
3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.
After the print job is completed press OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before
the timer times out.
After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine
and return it to a normal state.
NOTE: If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing, activate the door switch.
Component tests
Control panel tests

From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Available control panel tests
LEDs: test the LEDs on the control panel
Display: sequence through display tests
Buttons: tests the keypad and other control-panel buttons
Touchscreen: tests the control-panel touchscreen
For control-panel diagnostics, see Control panel checks in the product troubleshooting service
manual.
Component test (special-mode test)

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If you turn on the Repeat option from the
drop-down menu, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes,
and then the test terminates.
NOTE: The front or side door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests. Some tests
might require that the ITB and toner cartridges be removed. The control panel-display prompts you to
remove some or all cartridges during certain tests.
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Component Test
3. Select the component test options for the test you want to run.
Table 2-15 Component test details

Component test Item tested Replacement part number Comments
Drum motors M12 RM1-9614-000CN Remove the image drums to perform this
test.
M13 DC motor assemblies
Activates the motors at a specific speed for
M14 10 seconds.
M15
Toner motors M21 RK2-4814-000CN Remove the toner cartridges to perform this
test.
Activates the specified motor at a specific
speed for 10 seconds.
Fuser motor M11 RM1-4519-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific

DC motor assembly
Alienation motor M20 RM1-3280-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific

ITB Alienation drive assembly
ITB contact alienation M10 RM1-4519-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific
motor speed for 10 seconds.
DC motor assembly
IPTU drive motor M201 RK2-1320-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific
Tray N pickup motor M5 RM1-9843-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific

MP drive assembly
Tray N pickup motor NA RM1-3222-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific

Tray 2 lifter drive assembly

Table 2-15 Component test details (continued)

Tray 2 paper pickup assembly

Tray 3 (1x500) paper pickup assembly

Trays 3-5 (3x500) paper pickup assembly
Tray N pickup motor M112 RK2-1331-000CN Activates the specified motor at a specific
Tray 3 (1x500) motor stepping, DC
Duplex switchback M302 RM2-0291-000CN (M855) Activates the specified motor at a specific
motor speed for 10 seconds.
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Duplex reverse Assembly
Duplex feed motor M303 RM2-0291-000CN (M855) Activates the specified motor at a specific
RM2-5061-000CN (M880)
Duplex reverse Assembly
Duplex re-pickup motor M301 RM2-5045-000CN (M855) Activates the specified motor at a specific
RM2-9646-000CN (M880)
Duplex feed assembly
Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL2 RM1-9644-000CN Activates the specified solenoid for 10
seconds.
MP Tray pickup assembly
Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL1 RM1-9599-000CN Activates the specified solenoid for 10
seconds.
Tray 3-5 pickup SL111 RM2-0275-000CN Activates the specified solenoids for 10
solenoids seconds.
SL121 Tray 3-X paper pickup assembly
SL131
Y/M laser/scanner M1 RM1-5176-000CN Activates the specified motor for 10

motor seconds.
Scanner Motor Y/M

Table 2-15 Component test details (continued)
C/K laser/scanner M2 RM1-5176-000CN Activates the specified motor for 10

motor seconds.
Scanner Motor C/K
Repeat NA NA Options:
On
Off

Finishing accessory component test
Use the procedures in this section to diagnose problems with the finishing accessories. During the
test, the finishing accessory is isolated and does not communicate with the product engine.
IMPORTANT: Before you configure the dual-inline-package switches (DIPSW) on a PCA to perform
a test, you must turn the power off. You do not have to turn the power off again before changing the
DIPSW settings to perform other testsas long as the subsequent tests are performed using the
same DIPSW.
However, if subsequent tests involve setting a different DIPSW on a different PCA other than the one
used to perform the first test, you must turn the product power off before changing the DIPSW
settings.
For example:
1. Turn the product power off.
2. Set DPSW4 on the main controller PCA.
3. Perform the test.
4. Turn the product power off.
5. Set DPSW on the punch controller PCA.
6. Perform the test.

Access the finishing accessory controller PCAs
Access the main controller PCA
CAUTION: ESD sensitive component.
For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the main controller PCA, see
the product repair manual.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
Bin cable cover
Open/closed stepped cover
Upper stepped cover
Lower stepped cover
Rear cover
2. Locate the following controller PCA switches:
SW3 (callout 1)
DIPSW4 (callout 2)
NOTE: The DIPSW4 has eight electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF
position. The controller PCA is marked ON and OFF to show the current switch position.
For normal operation of the finishing accessory, all of the DIPSW4 switches must be in the
OFF position. Always return the DIPSW4 switches to the factory setting when you are
finished testing an accessory.
Figure 2-11 Finishing controller PCA switches
2 2

Access the saddle controller PCA
For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the saddle controller PCA, see
Rear cover
Rear cover (BM PCA)
2. Locate the following controller PCA switches:
SW1 (callout 1)
DIPSW (callout 2)
NOTE: The DIPSW has eight electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF
position. The DIPSW is marked ON to show the current switch position.
For normal operation of the finishing accessory, all of the DIPSW switches must be in the
OFF position. Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when you are
Figure 2-12 Booklet maker (BM) saddle controller PCA switches
Access the punch controller PCA
For specific instructions about removing the following covers to access the saddle controller PCA, see

Bin cable cover
Open/closed stepped cover
Upper stepped cover
Lower stepped cover
Rear cover
2. Locate the following controller PCA switches and LEDs:
SW602 (callout 1)
SW603 (callout 2)
LED601 and LED602 (callout 3)
DIPSW (callout 4)
NOTE: The DIPSW has four electronic switches that can be set to either the ON or OFF
position. The DIPSW is marked ON to show the current switch position.
For normal operation of the finishing accessory, all of the DIPSW switches must be in the
OFF position. Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when you are
Figure 2-13 Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) punch controller PCA switches
2
3
4

Finishing accessory function tests
Use the procedures in this section to diagnose problems with the stapler/stacker (SS), stapler/stacker
with hole punch (SSHP), or booklet maker (BM) assemblies.
Pre-alignment plate motor test (operation tray assembly)
Post-alignment plate motor test (operation tray assembly)
Swing guide motor test (press motor assembly)
Staple subassembly to staple position test (Stapler mount shift assembly)
Staple subassembly motor test
Stacker entrance motor test (paper feed motor assembly)
Stapled job output motor test (stack ejection motor assembly)
Trailing edge assist motor test (operation tray assembly)
Stacker solenoid test (upper crossmember assembly)
Stacker clutch test (electromagnetic clutch)
Shutter assembly test (stack ejection motor assembly)
First tray test (stack upper tray assembly)
Secondary tray test (stack lower tray assembly)
Saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor test (saddle feed motor)
Returning roller test (stack ejection assembly)
Booklet maker solenoid test
Saddle (booklet) feed motor test
Paper folding motor test
Jogger plate motor test
Saddle (booklet) aging test
Saddle (booklet) alignment plate test
Paper position plate test
Guide plate test
Punch aging test
Punch side registration test
Punch motor test

Pre-alignment plate motor test (operation tray assembly)
1. Do one of the following:
If this is the first test you are performing, turn the product power off, remove all paper, and
then make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
If you are continuing from a previous main controller PCA test, go to step 2.
2. On the main controller PCA, set DIPSW4 to the following settings:
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 through switch 8 OFF
3. Turn the product power on.
4. On the main controller PCA, press and release SW3, and then observe the following:
First press of SW3: The pre-alignment plate moves to the home positionunless it is
already in the home position.
Second press of SW3: The pre-alignment plate moves to the A4 landscape positionif it
was in the home position.
Third press of SW3: The pre-alignment plate moves from to the A4 portrait positionif it
was in the A4 landscape position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the pre-alignment plate from position
to position.
5. If the pre-alignment plate correctly functions, press and release SW3 until the plate is in the
home position.
6. Turn the product power off, and then return all of the DIPSW4 switches to the OFF setting.
TIP: If you are going to perform another test, skip this step and go to the next testmake sure
that the pre-alignment plate is in the home position before continuing.
7. If the pre-alignment plate fails the test, replace the operation tray assembly (RM2-5309-000CN).
TIP: Also test the jogger and tray alignment.

Post-alignment plate motor test (operation tray assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 8 ON
4. On the controller PCA, press and release SW3, and then observe the following:
First press of SW3: The post-alignment plate moves to the home positionunless it is
Second press of SW3: The post-alignment plate moves to the A4 landscape positionif it
was in the home position.
Third press of SW3: The post-alignment plate moves from to the A4 portrait positionif it
was in the A4 landscape position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the post-alignment plate from position
to position.
5. If the post-alignment plate correctly functions, press and release SW3 until the plate is in the
home position.
TIP: If you are going to perform another test, skip this step and skip this step and go to the next
testmake sure that the post-alignment plate is in the home position before continuing.
7. If the post-alignment plate fails the test, replace the operation tray assembly
(RM2-5309-000CN).
TIP: Also test the jogger and tray alignment.

Swing guide motor test (press motor assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 7 ON
Switch 8 OFF
First press of SW3: The swing guide moves to the closed positionunless it is already in
the close position.
Second press of SW3: The swing guide moves to the open positionunless it is already in
the open position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the swing guide from position to
position.
5. If the swing guide correctly functions, press and release SW3 until the swing guide is in the close
position.
TIP: If you are going to perform another test, skip this step and skip this step and go to the next
testmake sure that the swing guide is in the close position before continuing.
7. If the swing guide fails the test, replace the press motor assembly (FM2-1409-000CN)

Staple subassembly to staple position test (Stapler mount shift assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 7 and switch 8 ON
3. Locate the staple subassembly.
NOTE: For clarity, the figure below shows the inner upper cover removed. This cover does not
need to be removed to perform this test.
First press of SW3: The staple subassembly moves to the home positionunless it is
already in the home position (as shown in the figure above).
Second press of SW3: The staple subassembly moves to the rear positionunless it is
already in the rear position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the staple subassembly from position
to position.
6. If the staple subassembly correctly functions, press and release SW3 until the staple
subassembly is in the home position.

that the staple subassembly is in the home position before continuing.
8. If the staple subassembly fails the test, replace the staple subassembly (4G3-0939-0000CN).

Staple subassembly motor test
Switch 1 ON
Switch 6 ON
Switch 7 and switch 8 OFF
3. Remove the staple cartridge from the staple subassembly.
First press of SW3: The staple subassembly clinches a staple.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the staple subassembly to continuously clinch the
staple.
6. Reinstall the staple cartridge from the staple subassembly.
TIP: If you are going to perform another test, skip this step and go to the next test.
8. If the staple subassembly motor fails the test, replace the staple subassembly
(4G3-0939-0000CN).

Stacker entrance motor test (paper feed motor assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 6 ON
Switch 7 OFF
Switch 8 ON
First press of SW3: The stacker entrance guide motor rotateslisten for the motor to rotate.
Second press of SW3: The stacker entrance guide motor stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the stacker entrance guide motor to repeatedly
rotate and then stop.
that the stacker entrance guide motor is stopped before continuing.
6. If the stacker entrance guide motor fails the test, replace the paper feed motor assembly
(FM0-1889-000CN).

Stapled job output motor test (stack ejection motor assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 5 ON
Switch 8 ON
First press of SW3: The stapled job output motor rotateslisten for the motor to rotate.
Second press of SW3: The stapled job output motor stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the stapled job output motor to repeatedly rotate
and then stop.
that the stapled job output motor is stopped before continuing.
6. If the stapled job output motor fails the test, replace the stack ejection motor assembly
(4G3-0769-000CN).

Trailing edge assist motor test (operation tray assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 5 ON
Switch 6 OFF
First press of SW3: The trailing assist assembly moves to the home positionunless it is
Second press of SW3: The trailing assist assembly moves to the forward positionunless it
is already in the forward position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the trailing assist assembly from
position to position.
that the trailing assist assembly is in the home position before continuing.
6. If the trailing assist motor fails the test, replace the operation tray assembly (RM2-5309-000CN).

Stacker solenoid test (upper crossmember assembly)
Switch 1 ON
First press of SW3: The entrance roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms
(milliseconds), and then deactivateslisten for the solenoid to activate, and then
deactivate.
Second press of SW3: The buffer roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms, and then
deactivateslisten for the solenoid to activate, and then deactivate.
Third press of SW3: The primary output roller alienation solenoid activates for 500ms, and
then deactivateslisten for the solenoid to activate, and then deactivate.
Fourth press of SW3: The buffer trailing edge solenoid activates for 500ms, and then
deactivateslisten for the solenoid to activate, and then deactivate.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the solenoids to repeatedly activate, and then
deactivatein the order listed above.
that the solenoids are deactivated before continuing.
6. If a solenoid fails the test, replace the upper crossmember assembly (FM0-1882-000CN).

Stacker clutch test (electromagnetic clutch)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 7 OFF
Switch 8 ON
First press of SW3: The lower stack ejection roller clutch activates for 500ms (milliseconds),
and then deactivateslisten for the clutch to activate, and then deactivate.
Second press of SW3: The shutter open/close clutch activates for 500ms, and then
deactivateslisten for the clutch to activate, and then deactivate.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the clutches to repeatedly activate, and then
that the clutches are deactivated before continuing.
6. If a clutch fails the test, replace the electromagnetic clutch (4H3-0370-000CN).

Shutter assembly test (stack ejection motor assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 5, switch 6, and switch 7 ON
Switch 8 OFF
First press of SW3: The shutter assembly moves to the home positionunless it is already
in the home position.
Second press of SW3: The shutter assembly moves to the close positionunless it is
already in the close position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to continuously move the shutter assembly from position to
position.
that the shutter assembly is in the home position before continuing.
6. If the shutter assembly fails the test, replace the stack ejection motor assembly
(4G3-0769-000CN).

First tray test (stack upper tray assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 4 ON
CAUTION: Immediately unplug the product power cord if you hear any abnormal sounds when
the bins are moving.
First press of SW3: The stack upper and lower output bins move to the paper out position
for the upper output bin position.
Second press of SW3: The stack upper output bin moves to the detecting bin surface
position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to repeat moving the stack upper output bin to the detecting
bin surface position.
that the bin has stopped moving before continuing.
6. If the stack upper tray assembly the test, replace the stack upper tray assembly
(RM2-5324-000CN).

Secondary tray test (stack lower tray assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 5 through switch 8 ON
CAUTION: Immediately unplug the product power cord if you hear any abnormal sounds when
the bins are moving.
First press of SW3: The stack upper and lower output bins move to the paper out position
for the lower output bin position.
Second press of SW3: The stack lower output bin moves to the detecting bin surface
position.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to repeat moving the stack lower output bin to the detecting
bin surface position.
that the bin has stopped moving before continuing.
6. If the stack lower tray assembly fails the test, replace the stack lower tray assembly
(RM2-5339-000CN).

Saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor test (saddle feed motor)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 4 ON
Switch 5 OFF
Switch 6 ON
First press of SW3: The saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor rotateslisten
for the motor to rotate.
Second press of SW3: The saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to cause the saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller
motor to repeatedly rotate and then stop.
that the saddle entrance motor or punch feed roller motor stops before continuing.
6. If the motor fails the test, replace the saddle feed motor assembly (4G3-1933-000CN).

Returning roller test (stack ejection assembly)
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 OFF
Switch 3 ON
Switch 4 OFF
Switch 7 OFF
Switch 8 ON
First press of SW3: The swing guide is open, the stapled job output motor rotates, and the
returning roller rotateslisten for the motor to rotate.
Second press of SW3: The stapled job output motor and returning roller stop, and the swing
guide is closed.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW3 to repeatedly cause the swing guide to open and close, and
the stapled job output motor and the returning roller to rotate and stop.
that the swing guide is closed, and that the stapled job output motor and the returning roller are
stopped before continuing.
6. If the returning roller fails the test, replace the return roller assembly (FM0-2403-000CN).

Booklet maker solenoid test
If you are continuing from a previous saddle controller PCA test, go to step 2.
2. On the saddle controller PCA, set DIPSW to the following settings:
Switch 4 ON
Switch 5 through switch 8 not used
4. On the saddle controller PCA, press and release SW1, and then observe the following:
First press of SW1: The primary paper deflector solenoid activateslisten for the solenoid
to activate.
Second press of SW1: The primary paper deflector solenoid deactivateslisten for the
solenoid to deactivate.
Third press of SW1: The secondary paper deflector solenoid activateslisten for the
solenoid to activate.
Fourth press of SW1: The secondary paper deflector solenoid deactivateslisten for the
solenoid to deactivate.
Fifth press of SW1: The feed plate solenoid activateslisten for the solenoid to activate.
Sixth press of SW1: The feed plate solenoid deactivateslisten for the solenoid to
deactivate.
Seventh press of SW1: The booklet entrance solenoid activateslisten for the solenoid to
activate.
Eighth press of SW1: The booklet entrance solenoid deactivateslisten for the solenoid to
deactivate.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW1 to cause the solenoids to repeatedly activate, and then
5. Turn the product power off, and then return all of the DIPSW switches to the OFF setting.
that the solenoids are deactivated before continuing.
6. If a solenoid fails the test, replace the appropriate solenoid.
SL1 flapper solenoid 1
SL2 flapper solenoid 2
SL4 intermediate solenoid assembly
SL5 saddle inlet solenoid

Saddle (booklet) feed motor test
Switch 1 OFF
Switch 2 ON
First press of SW1: The saddle feed motor rotates at a slow rate130 mm/sec (5.12 in/
sec). Listen for the motor to slowly rotate.
Second press of SW1: The saddle feed motor rotates at a fast rate200 mm/sec (7.87 in/
sec). Listen for the motor to increase rotation speed.
Third press of SW1: The saddle feed motor stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW1 to cause the motor to repeatedly rotate, and then stop.
that the motor is stopped before continuing.
6. If the motor fails the test, replace the saddle motor assembly (FM2-0737-000CN).

Paper folding motor test
Switch 1 OFF
Switch 2 ON
Switch 3 OFF
Switch 4 ON
First press of SW1: The paper folding motor rotates in the feed directionlisten for the
motor to rotate.
Second press of SW1: After a 100 millisecond delay, the paper folding motor rotates in the
reverse directionlisten for a pause, and then for the motor to rotate.
Third press of SW1: The paper folding motor stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW1 to cause the motor to repeatedly rotate, pause, reverse
direction, and then stop.
6. If the motor fails the test, replace the motor mount assembly (FM0-1686-000CN).

Jogger plate motor test
Switch 1 OFF
Switch 2 through switch 4 ON
First press of SW1: The jogger plate moves to the push positionlisten for the motor to
rotate.
Second press of SW1: The jogger plate moves to the home positionlisten for the motor to
rotate.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW1 to cause the plate to move from position to position.
6. If the motor fails the test, replace the motor mount assembly (FM0-1686-000CN).

Saddle (booklet) aging test
Switch 1 ON
First press of SW1: The following aging sequence begins and continues until SW1 is
pressed and released again:
a. The paper folding motor rotates.
b. The booklet feeder motor rotates.
c. The jogger plate moves.
d. The booklet alignment plate moves to the A3-P alignment position.
e. The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4-P alignment position.
f. The paper position plate moves to the LDR-P staple position.
g. The paper position plate moves to the LDR-P folding position.
h. The paper position plate moves to the LTR-P staple position.
i. The paper position plate moves to the LTR-P folding position.
j. The guide plate moves to the up position, and then to the down position.
k. The booklet feeder motor stops.
l. All of the saddle assembly solenoids activate, and then deactivate.
Second press of SW1: The aging sequence above stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW1 to continuously repeat and then stop the aging sequence
above.
that the aging sequence is stopped before continuing.
6. If the aging sequence fails the test, determine which assembly failed during the process (see the
list below), and then replace the defective assembly.

Feed
Folding
Jogger movement
Alignment
Stapler movement
Guide open/close

Saddle (booklet) alignment plate test
Switch 1 ON
Switch 4 ON
First press of SW1: The booklet alignment plate moves to the home positionlisten for the
plate to move.
Second press of SW1: The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4-P pre-positionlisten
for the plate to move.
Third press of SW1: The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4-P alignment position
listen for the plate to move.
that the plate is in the home position before continuing.
6. If the plate fails the test, replace the motor (M5).

Paper position plate test
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 OFF
Switch 3 ON
Switch 4 OFF
First press of SW1: The paper position plate moves to the home positionlisten for the
plate to move.
Second press of SW1: The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4-P folding position
listen for the plate to move.
Third press of SW1: The booklet alignment plate moves to the A4-P staple positionlisten
for the plate to move.
6. If the plate fails the test, replace the inner side plate assembly (4G3-0671-000CN).

Guide plate test
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 OFF
First press of SW1: The guide plate moves to the down positionlisten for the plate to
move.
Second press of SW1: The guide plate moves to the up positionlisten for the plate to
move.
6. If the plate fails the test, replace the guide motor assembly (4G3-0725-000CN).

Punch aging test
If you are continuing from a previous punch controller PCA test, go to step 2.
2. On the punch controller PCA, set DIPSW to the following settings:
Switch 1 ON
4. On the punch controller PCA, press and release SW602, and then observe the following:
First press of SW602: The following aging sequence begins and continues until SW1 is
pressed and released again:
a. The punch motor initializes.
b. The punch side registration motor initializes.
c. The punch moves to the inside position.
d. The punch operation begins.
e. The punch moves to its initial position.
f. The sequence starts again with step c.
Second press of SW1: The aging sequence above stops.
NOTE: Press and hold down SW602 to continuously repeat the aging sequence steps a and b
above.
that the punch is in the home (front) position before continuing.
6. If the aging sequence fails the test, replace the saddle stapler assembly (4G3-2721-000CN).

Punch side registration test
Switch 1 OFF
Switch 2 ON
4. On the punch controller PCA, locate LED601 and LED602, and then observe the following:
Ready state
LED601 off
LED602 flashing
Press SW603 to move the punch to the center position.
LED601 and LED602 alternate flashing
Press SW603 to stop the LEDs from flashing.
LED601 off
LED602 flashing
Press SW602 to move the punch to the home (front) position.
Press SW602 to stop the LEDs from flashing and return to the ready state.
LED601 is off
LED602 is flashing
that the punch is in the home (front) position before continuing.
6. If the punch side registration fails the test, replace the staple assembly (4G3-0938-000CN).

Punch motor test
Switch 1 ON
Switch 2 ON
4. On the punch controller PCA, locate LED601 and LED602, and then observe the following:
Ready state
LED601 off
LED602 flashing
Press SW602 (for a 3-hole or 4-hole punch) or SW603 (for a 2-hole punch) to activate the
punch operation (drills go up and down).
Press SW602 (for a 3-hole or 4-hole punch) or SW603 (for a 2-hole punch) to stop the
LEDs from flashing.
LED601 is off
LED602 is flashing
that the drills have stopped moving before continuing.
6. If the punch side registration fails the test, replace the hole punch assembly.
A2W84-67902
CZ999-67901

Scanner tests M880
Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors.
Scanner tests
This section lists the sensors available in the Scanner Tests.
Use the scanner tests

The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name, sensor state (active or inactive), and the number
of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
button.
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Scanner Tests
Sensors
3. Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor location graphic on the
For example, opening and closing the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover Toggle
item count two timesonce when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.
-or-
Touch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen, and then touch the Cancel button
again to return to the Diagnostic Tests menu.
Scanner tests sensors
ADF paper present
ADF (length) short
ADF (length) long
ADF slider 1
ADF slider 2

ADF slider 3
ADF jam cover
ADF paper path deskew
ADF paper path pick success
Paper path sensor 1 (unreachable)
Flatbed Y (length) short
Flatbed Y (length) long
Flatbed cover

Diagrams
Block diagrams
Location of connectors
Plug/jack locations
Locations of major components
General timing chart
Circuit diagrams
Block diagrams
Figure 2-14 Motors and solenoids (product base)
Duplex flapper
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path M11

M302
SL301
M303
M301
Pickup cam
Lifting plate
Lifter SL1
SL2
M10 M6 M7 M5
CW CCW
Table 2-16 Motors and solenoids (product base)
Item Description Item Description
M5 Pickup motor M302 Duplex switchback motor
M6 Registration motor M303 Duplex feed motor

Table 2-16 Motors and solenoids (product base) (continued)
M7 Cassette lifter motor STM2501 Tray 1 pickup motor
M10 ITB motor SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid
M11 Fuser motor SL2 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid
M301 Duplex re-pickup motor SL301 Duplex flapper solenoid
Figure 2-15 Rollers and main assemblies (product base)

11 22 33 44
22
22 55
21
21 66
20
20 77
88
99
19
19
10
10
18
18 11
11
12
12
13
13
16
16
17
17 15
15 14
14
1 Laser/scanner assembly 12 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup roller
2 Delivery roller 13 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) separation roller
3 Duplex switchback roller 14 Cassette separation roller
4 Duplex flapper 15 Cassette feed roller
5 Fuser 16 Cassette pickup roller

6 Pressure roller 17 Cassette
7 Fuser sleeve 18 Transfer (T1) roller
8 Color sensor (M855 only) 19 ITB
9 Secondary transfer (T2) roller 20 Photo sensitive drum
10 Registration shutter 21 Process cartridge
11 Registration roller 22 Toner cartridge
Figure 2-16 Switches and sensors (product base)

Simplex paper path
SR33
SR36
SR45
SW14
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR37 (front)
SR38 (rear)
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS SR26
SW13
SR21 SR31
SR24
SW12 SW11
SR32 SR25
Table 2-17 Switches and sensors (product base)

SW11 Tray 2 paper size switch SR32 Tray 2 paper surface sensor
SW12 Tray 2 media trailing edge switch SR33 Output bin full sensor
SW13 Right door open/closed switch SR35 Fuser output sensor 1
SW14 Front door open/closed switch SR36 Output media width sensor
SR21 Tray 2 media-level sensor SR37 Fuser front width sensor
SR22 Tray 2 feed sensor SR38 Fuser rear width sensor
SR24 Tray 1 feed sensor SR45 Fuser output sensor 2

Table 2-17 Switches and sensors (product base) (continued)
SR25 Tray 1 paper sensor SR301 Duplex switchback sensor
SR26 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) last-media sensor SR302 Developer delivery sensor
SR29 Fuser loop sensor 1 SR304 Duplex refeed sensor
SR30 Fuser loop sensor 2 SR2501 TOP sensor
SR31 Tray 2 paper sensor MS Registration sensor
Figure 2-17 Document feeder sensors (M880 only)
7 6
2 1
5 3
4
8 9
Table 2-18 Document feeder sensors
1 Sensor, legal Detects whether there is a legal-size original.
2 Sensor, portrait/landscape Detects whether there is a portrait-size or landscape-size

original.

Table 2-18 Document feeder sensors (continued)
3 Sensor, media width
4 Sensor, stack height
5 Sensor, paper presence Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder.
If paper is present in the document feeder when copies are
made, the product scans the document using the document
feeder. If no paper is present when copies are made, the product
scans the document using the scanner glass.
6 Sensor, ultrasonic Uses ultrasonic sound to detect a mutli-page paper feed.
NOTE: This sensor also functions as the pick success sensor.
7 Sensor, deskew Detects the top of the page as it approaches the back-side scan
module during e-duplex copy jobs.
8 Sensor, prescan1 For an e-duplex copy job (HP EveryPage), this sensor is used to
activate the front-side scan module (this component is in the
scanner base) and the front-side background selector (this
component is in the document feeder) if needed.
9 Sensor, prescan2 For an e-duplex copy job, this sensor is used to activate the
backside scan module and the backside background selector if
needed (these components are in the document feeder) .

Figure 2-18 Jam sensors and switches (product base)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path

SR301
SR33
SR45
SW14
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS
SW13
SR24
Table 2-19 Jam sensors and switches (product base)
SR22 Tray 2 feed sensor SR33 Output bin full sensor
SR24 Tray 1 feed sensor SR301 Duplex switchback sensor
SR2501 TOP sensor SR302 Developer delivery sensor
SR29 Fuser loop sensor 1 SR304 Duplex refeed sensor
SR30 Fuser loop sensor 2 MS Registration sensor
SR35 Fuser output sensor 1 SW13 Right door open/closed switch
SR45 Fuser output sensor 2 SW14 Front door open/closed switch

Figure 2-19 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder jam sensors
PS3305 PS3301
PS3302
Table 2-20 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder jam sensors
Item Description
PS3301 HCI feed sensor
PS3302 Tray 3 feed sensor
PS3305 Tray 4 feed sensor

Figure 2-20 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder cross section
1 2 3
6 5 4
Table 2-21 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder cross section
Item Description
1 Cassette pickup roller
2 Cassette feed roller
3 Intermediate feed roller
4 Cassette separation roller
5 Right cassette
6 Left cassette

Figure 2-21 1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder jam sensors and switch
SR112
SR122
SW113
SR132
Table 2-22 1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder jam sensors and switch
Item Description
SR112 Tray 3 feed sensor
SW113 Right door open detection switch

Figure 2-22 Stapler/stacker (SS) cross section
11 22 33 44 55
66
77
10
10
88
99
Table 2-23 Stapler/stacker (SS) cross section
1 Stack ejection roller 6 Latch assembly
2 Delivery roller 7 Return roller
3 Buffer roller 8 Stapler assembly
4 Inlet roller 9 Shutter
5 Inlet roller 1 10 Processing tray assembly

Figure 2-23 Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) cross section
11
22
33
44
55
66
Table 2-24 Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) cross section
1 Hole punch 4 Registration roller
2 Latch assembly 5 Hole punch chip collection box
3 Registration shutter 6 Hole punch assembly

Figure 2-24 Booklet maker (BM) cross section
11
22
33
44
55
11
11
66
77
10
10 88
99
Table 2-25 Booklet maker (BM) cross section
1 Saddle stitcher flapper 7 Intermediate roller
2 Inlet roller 2 8 Paper pushing plate
3 Flapper 1 9 Crescent roller
4 Flapper 2 10 Saddle delivery roller
5 Stitcher (front, rear) 11 Paper folding roller
6 Stitcher rack

Figure 2-25 Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) cross section
11
22
33
44
55
66
Table 2-26 Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) cross section
1 Hole punch 4 Registration roller
2 Latch assembly 5 Hole punch chip collection box
3 Registration shutter 6 Hole punch assembly

Figure 2-26 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) cross section
11
Table 2-27 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) cross section
Item Description
1 Feed roller

Location of connectors
DC controller PCA connectors
NOTE: Connector J199 is not used.
Figure 2-27 DC controller PCA connectors

J105 J130 J118 J127
J138
J108
J132 J119 J126
J134 J199
J142
J141
J101 J133 J131
J135
J128
J109 J113 J123
J125
J111 J110 J122
J107
J114 J103
J102 J104 J112 J116 J115 J121

J144
Table 2-28 DC controller PCA connectors

J101 Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) J121 ITB seal detection LED
Media-width sensor 1
Media-width sensor 2
Fuse for T2 roller assembly detection
Loop sensor 1
Loop sensor 2
Fuser home position sensor
Right door open detection switch
J102 Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) J122 High-voltage power supply (HVPS) B

Table 2-28 DC controller PCA connectors (continued)
J103 VOC fan J123 Controller PCA
Cartridge front area cooling fan
Delivery fan
Interlock switch 1
Interlock switch 2
Main switch
J104 High-voltage power supply (HVPS) A J125 Fuser edge area cooling fan (front/rear)
Fuser shutter home position sensor (front/

rear)
T2 assembly cover open detection sensor
J105 ITB motor J126 Laser BD PCA (Y/M)
Fuser motor
J210 High-voltage power supply (HVPS) J127 Laser BD PCA (C/K)
J107 Fuser PCA J128 Duplex switchback assembly
J108 Face-down bin media-full sensor J130 Scanner thermistor 1
Media-width sensor 3 Scanner thermistor 2
Fuser cover open detection sensor Toner cartridge presence sensor (Y/M/C/
K)
Scanner motor (Y/M)
Scanner motor (C/K)
Duplex feed sensor
Duplex reverse assembly (IPTU)
J109 Cartridge driver PCA J131 Toner-replenishment solenoid (Y/M)
Developer home position sensor (Y/M)
Toner-replenishment motor rotation

sensor (Y/M)
J110 Cassette pickup solenoid J132 Fuser fan
Tray 2 media-feed sensor Cartridge fan (Y/M)
Tray 2 media-presence sensor Cartridge fan (C/K)
Tray 2 media-surface sensor
J111 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor J133 Duplex switchback assembly
Pickup motor
Registration motor

Table 2-28 DC controller PCA connectors (continued)
J112 Tray 2 media-width switch J134 Laser scanner fan
Tray 2 media trailing edge switch
Tray 2 media-level sensor
J113 Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/K) J135 Toner-replenishment solenoid (C/K)
Drum home position sensor (Y/M/C/K) Developer home position sensor (C/K)
Toner-replenishment motor rotation

sensor (C/K)
J114 Input accessory J138 Drum motor (Y/M/C/K)
J115 Environment sensor J141 Cartridge driver PCA
J116 ITB J142 Cartridge driver PCA
J118 Color-plane registration sensor assembly J144 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) media-
(center/rear) presence sensor
Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) last-media

sensor
Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid
J119 Front door open detection switch J199 Not used
Color-plane registration sensor assembly (front)
Figure 2-28 Cartridge driver PCA connectors
J425 J402 J409
J401
J424 J423 J412 J422 J426 J411

J421
Table 2-29 Cartridge driver PCA connectors
J401 DC controller PCA J422 Developer alienation motor (C/K)
J402 Cartridge I/F PCA (Y/M) J423 ITB home position sensor
J403 Cartridge I/F PCA (C/K) J424 Fuser shutter motor
J411 DC controller PCA J425 Developer alienation motor (Y/M)
Toner-replenishment motor (Y/M)
J412 DC controller PCA J246 Toner-replenishment motor (C/K)
J421 T1 roller alienation motor

Figure 2-29 Fuser PCA connectors
J302
J303 J305
Table 2-30 Fuser PCA connectors
Item Description
J302 Fuser
J303 Fuser
J305 DC controller PCA

High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors
Figure 2-30 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors
J3011 J3001 J3016

J3006
J3015
J3005
J3014
J3004
J3008 J3018
J3003 J3013
J3007 J3010 J3020 J3017
Table 2-31 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors

J3001 DC controller PCA J3011 Not used
J3003 Right cassette lifter motor J3013 Left cassette lifter motor
J3004 Right cassette pickup motor J3014 Left cassette pickup motor
J3005 Right cassette lift-up media-surface sensor J3015 Left cassette lift-up media-surface sensor
Right cassette pickup coordinate media surface Left cassette pickup coordinate media
sensor surface sensor
Right cassette media-presence sensor Left cassette media-presence sensor
Right cassette media feed sensor Left cassette pickup solenoid
Right cassette pickup solenoid
J3006 Media feed sensor J3016 Left cassette media feed sensor
Right door open detection switch Side feed guide open detection sensor

Table 2-31 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder controller PCA connectors (continued)
J3007 Right cassette media-size sensor J3017 Left cassette media-size sensor
Right cassette open detection sensor Left cassette open detection sensor
J3008 Right cassette media-level sensor J3018 Left cassette media-level sensor
J3010 Not used J3020 Not used

1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors
Figure 2-31 1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors
J8133 J8102
J8123
J8113
J8132 J8122 J8112
J8131 J8121 J8111
J8103 J8101
Table 2-32 11x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors
J8101 DC controller PCA J8121 Tyay 4 media-level sensor
Tray 4 media-width switch
Tray 4 media trailing edge switch
J8102 Right door open detection switch J8122 Cassette 4 lifter motor
J8103 Not used J8123 Tray 4 media-feed sensor
Tray 4 media-presence sensor
Tray 4 media-surface sensor
Cassette 4 pickup solenoid
Cassette 4 pickup motor
J8111 Tray 3 media-level sensor J8131 Tray 5 media-level sensor
Tray 3 media-width switch Tray 5 media-width switch
Tray 3 media trailing edge switch Tray 3 media trailing edge switch
J8112 Cassette 3 lifter motor J8132 Cassette 5 lifter motor
J8113 Tray 3 media-feed sensor J8133 Tray 5 media-feed sensor
Tray 3 media-presence sensor Tray 5 media-presence sensor
Tray 3 media-surface sensor Tray 5 media-surface sensor
Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 5 pickup solenoid
Cassette 3 pickup motor Cassette 5 pickup motor

Figure 2-32 Intermediate paper transport unit (ITPU) driver PCA connectors
J7006 J7008
J7003
J7007
J7004
J7002
J7005 J7001
Table 2-33 Intermediate paper transport unit (ITPU) driver PCA connectors
J7001 DC controller PCA J7005 Output accessory
J7002 Not used J7006 Feed sensor 3
Feed sensor 2
Feed sensor 1
Hole punch home position sensor
J7003 Feed motor 1 J7007 Feed motor 2
J7004 Output accessory J7008 Feed area fan

Finishing accessories PCA connectors
Figure 2-33 Finishing accessories main controller PCA connectors
J3 J17 J24 J2 J1
J10 J20 J14
J13
J29
J25 J19
J21
J7
J32
J8
J9
J11 J4 J6
J28 J5
J16 J27
J15
J30 J18
J12
Table 2-34 Finishing accessories main controller PCA connectors

J1 Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid J15 Saddle controller
Output bin 1 delivery roller alienation solenoid
Buffer roller alienation solenoid
Inlet roller alienation solenoid
J2 Swing guide home position sensor J16 Common media feed PCA
Paper path sensor
Front door open-close detection sensor
Swing height sensor
J3 Top door open-close detection sensor J17 Inlet motor
Inlet sensor
J4 Trailing edge assist motor J18 Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 2
Rear alignment plate motor
Front alignment plate motor
Trailing edge assist home position sensor
Rear alignment plate home position sensor
Front alignment plate home position sensor
Tray paper sensor

Table 2-34 Finishing accessories main controller PCA connectors (continued)
J5 Stapler PCA 1 J19 Stack ejection motor
J6 Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 1 J20 Staple safety switch
Output bin 1 media-surface sensor Swing guide open detection switch
Shutter home position sensor
Stapler shift home position sensor
Shutter open-close clutch
J7 Output bin 1 shift motor J21 Not used
Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA
Output bin 1 media-presence sensor
J8 Output bin 2 shift motor J24 Swing motor
Output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA
Output bin 2 media-presence sensor
J9 Saddle inlet motor J25 Not used
Punch controller
J10 Front door open detection switch J27 Not used
J11 Intermediate feed unit J28 Not used
J12 Saddle controller J29 Not used
J13 Lower stack ejection roller clutch J30 Saddle controller
J14 Output tray 1 close detection switch J32 Not used

Figure 2-34 Common driver PCA connectors
J805 J804
J803
J802 J801
Table 2-35 Common driver PCA connectors
J801 Stacker controller PCA J804 Hole punch controller PCA
J802 Stacker controller PCA J805 Hole punch controller PCA
Side registration home position sensor
J803 Saddle inlet motor

Figure 2-35 Saddle stitcher controller PCA connectors (BM and BMHP)
SJ2 SJ18 SJ11 SJ13 SJ21
SJ1 SJ22
SJ10
SJ19
SJ9
SJ15
SJ5
SJ6
SJ12
SJ4 SJ8 SJ23 SJ7
Table 2-36 Saddle stitcher controller PCA connectors (BM and BMHP)
SJ1 Stacker controller PCA SJ11 Paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
Delivery cover open detection sensor
Paper folding motor clock sensor
Alignment plate home position sensor
SJ2 Stacker controller PCA SJ12 Guide motor
SJ4 Delivery door open detection switch SJ13 Stitcher assembly storage sensor
Vertical paper path feed sensor
SJ5 Feed motor SJ15 Flapper solenoid 1
Flapper solenoid 2
Feed plate alienation sensor
SJ6 Paper positioning plate media-presence sensor SJ18 Paper folding home position sensor
Paper positioning plate home position sensor
Saddle output bin media-presence sensor
SJ7 Paper positioning plate motor SJ19 Saddle inlet solenoid
Alignment motor
SJ8 Stitcher assembly (front/rear) SJ21 Saddle inlet sensor

Table 2-36 Saddle stitcher controller PCA connectors (BM and BMHP) (continued)
SJ9 Delivery sensor SJ22 Stacker controller PCA
Crescent roller phase sensor
Guide home position sensor
Paper pushing plate home position sensor
Paper pushing plate leading edge position

sensor
SJ10 Paper sensor PCA SJ23 Paper folding motor
Figure 2-36 Hole punch controller PCA connectors (SSHP and BMHP)
J602 J604
J603
J601
J605
J607
J606
J1
Table 2-37 Hole punch controller PCA connectors (SSHP and BMHP)
J1 Stacker controller PCA J604 Hole punch feed motor
J601 Common driver PCA J605 Side registration motor
Side registration home position sensor
Hole punch motor clock sensor
Hole punch home position sensor
LED PCA
Photosensor PCA

Table 2-37 Hole punch controller PCA connectors (SSHP and BMHP) (continued)
J602 Top door open detection switch J606 Hole punch chip box full sensor PCA
Front door open detection switch
J603 Hole punch motor J607 Common driver PCA
Plug/jack locations
Figure 2-37 Plug/jack locations (M855)
1
3
4
5
Table 2-38 Plug/jack locations (M855)
Item Description
1 Slot for a cable-type security lock
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
3 USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)
4 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
NOTE: For Easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.
5 Foreign interface harness (for connecting third-party devices)

Figure 2-38 Plug/jack locations (M880)
1
3
4
5
Table 2-39 Plug/jack locations (M880)
Item Description
1 Slot for connecting a cable-type security lock
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
3 USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)
4 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
NOTE: For Easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.
5 Foreign interface harness (for connecting third-party devices)
6 Fax port (fax models only)

Locations of major components
Use the diagrams to locate components.
Base product
Figure 2-39 M880 product integrated scanner assembly (ISA)
2 3
1
4
5
Table 2-40 M880 product integrated scanner assembly (ISA)
1 Scanner assembly 4 ADF output bin
2 Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover 5 Control-panel assembly
3 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Figure 2-40 Base product covers M855
11
15
15
2
2
11
11
1414
10
10 5
5
13
13 33
1212 99
88 66
44
77
Table 2-41 Base product covers M855
1 Right upper cover 9 Rear cover
2 Switchback cover 10 Rear top cover
3 Right door assembly 11 Right upper rear cover
4 Lower right cover 12 Front door assembly
5 Face-down bin 13 Left front cover
6 Left cover 14 Right upper front cover
7 Left rear cover 15 Front top cover
8 Right rear cover
Figure 2-41 Base product covers M880
16
16
15 11
11
15
11
10
10 44
14
14
22 88 9
9
13
13
55
77
12
12
66
33
Table 2-42 Base product covers M880
1 Switchback cover 9 Left upper rear cover

Table 2-42 Base product covers M880 (continued)
2 Right door assembly 10 Rear upper rear cover
3 Lower right cover 11 Right upper rear cover
4 Face-down bin 12 Front door assembly
5 Left cover 13 Left front cover
6 Left rear cover 14 Right upper front cover
7 Right rear cover 15 Front top cover
8 Rear cover 16 Rear upper front cover
Figure 2-42 Base product main assemblies (1 of 2)
11 5
22 6
11
11 10
33 7
8
44
9
Table 2-43 Base product main assemblies (1 of 2)
1 Face-down delivery assembly 7 Fuser drive assembly
2 Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 8 ITB alienation drive assembly
3 Secondary transfer (T2) assembly 9 Fuser PCA
4 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) drive assembly 10 Main drive assembly
5 Toner cartridge drive assembly (C/K) 11 Shutter gear holder assembly
6 Toner cartridge drive assembly (Y/M)

Figure 2-43 Base product main assemblies (2 of 2)
11
55
44 22
33
Table 2-44 Base product main assemblies (2 of 2)
1 Duplex reverse assembly 4 Fuser home position sensor assembly
2 Duplexing feed assembly 5 Color-plane registration sensor assembly
3 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup assembly
High-capacity input (HCI) feeder
Figure 2-44 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder covers
77 11
66 22
55
44 33
Table 2-45 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder covers

1 Right door assembly 5 Right rear cover

Table 2-45 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder covers (continued)
2 Right lower cover 6 Right cassette
3 Left cover 7 Left cassette
4 Rear cover
Figure 2-45 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder main assemblies (1 of 3)

11 2
2
88
77 33
66 44
55
Table 2-46 High-capacity input (HCI) feeder main assemblies (1 of 3)
1 Left cassette pickup drive assembly 5 Right cassette automatic close assembly
2 Right cassette pickup drive assembly 6 Left cassette automatic close assembly
3 Right cassette media-level sensor assembly 7 Left cassette lifter drive assembly
4 Right cassette lifter drive assembly 8 Left cassette media-level sensor assembly

11
22
33
1 Left tray pickup assembly 3 Merge assembly
2 Right tray pickup assembly

Item Description
1 HCI controller PCA

Figure 2-48 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) covers
11
22
33
Table 2-49 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) covers
Item Description
1 Side panel assembly
2 Upper guide assembly
3 Finisher lock assembly

Figure 2-49 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) main assemblies
11
22
Table 2-50 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) main assemblies
Item Description
1 IPTU fan assembly
2 Lower guide assembly
Figure 2-50 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) PCA
11
Table 2-51 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) PCA
Item Description
1 IPTU driver PCA

Finishing accessories
Figure 2-51 Stapler/stacker (SS) covers
11 5
22 6
12
12 33
11
11
9
44
10
10
7
Table 2-52 Stapler/stacker (SS) covers
1 Step lower cover 7 Front foot cover
2 Top door assembly 8 Rear foot cover
3 Latch assembly 9 Rear cover
4 Latch lower cover 10 Inner lower cover
5 Step top cover 11 Inner upper cover assembly
6 Open-close step cover 12 Front door assembly

Figure 2-52 Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) covers
11
6
22
7
17
17 33
16
16 44
11
15
15
14
14 10
55
13
13
8
12
12 11
10 9
Table 2-53 Stapler/stacker with hole punch (SSHP) covers
1 Step lower cover 10 Rear cover
2 Top door assembly 11 Punch rear cover
3 Punch top cover 12 Punch lower cover
4 Latch assembly 13 Inner lower cover
5 Latch lower cover 14 Punch front cover
6 Step top cover 15 Punch inner cover assembly
7 Open-close step cover 16 Inner upper cover assembly
8 Front foot cover 17 Front door assembly
9 Rear foot cover

Figure 2-53 Booklet maker (BM) covers
11 5
22 6
12
12 33
11
11
9
44
10
10
8
Table 2-54 Booklet maker (BM) covers
1 Step lower cover 7 Front foot cover
2 Top door assembly 8 Rear foot cover
3 Latch assembly 9 Rear cover
4 Latch lower cover 10 Inner lower cover assembly
5 Step top cover 11 Inner upper cover assembly
6 Open-close step cover 12 Front door assembly

Figure 2-54 Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) covers
11
22
17
17 33 66
44 77
16
16
15
15
14
14
11
11
55
13
13
10
10
12
12
88
99
Table 2-55 Booklet maker with hole punch (BMHP) covers
1 Step lower cover 10 Rear cover
2 Top door assembly 11 Punch rear cover
3 Punch top cover 12 Punch lower cover
4 Latch assembly 13 Inner lower cover assembly
5 Latch lower cover 14 Punch front cover
6 Step top cover 15 Punch inner cover assembly
7 Open-close step cover 16 Inner upper cover assembly
8 Front foot cover 17 Front door assembly
9 Rear foot cover

Figure 2-55 Finishing accessories main assemblies
11 2
2
33
Table 2-56 Finishing accessories main assemblies
Item Description
1 Pass through assembly
NOTE: For the SS and SSHP accessories.
2 Saddle feed assembly
NOTE: For the BM and BMHP accessories.
3 Hole punch assembly
NOTE: For the SSHP and BMHP accessories.

Figure 2-56 Finishing accessories PCA
11
Table 2-57 Finishing accessories PCA
Item Description
1 Hole punch controller PCA
NOTE: For the SSHP and BMHP accessories.

ENWW
Two consecutive prints on LTR paper
Power ON
Signal WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
1 Print command (EEC12)
2 Cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)
3 TOP sensor (SR2501)

General timing chart
4 Fuser delivery sensor 1 (SR35)
6 Scanner motor (M1 and M2)
8 Pickup motor (M5)
9 Registration motor (M6)
10 Drum motor (M12)
14 ITB motor (M10)
15 Fuser motor (M11)
16 Fuser heater
ITB engagement start to alienation

17
complete
Developer roller engagement start
Figure 2-57 General timing chart (1 of 2)
18
to alienation complete (Y/M)
Developer roller engagement start
19
to alienation complete (C/K)
20 Primary charging bias (Y)
20 Primary charging bias (M)
20 Primary charging bias (C)
20 Primary charging bias (K)
21 Developing bias (Y)
22 Developing bias (M)
23 Developing bias (C)
24 Developing bias (K)
25 T1 bias (Y/M/C/K)
26 T2 bias
Tools for troubleshooting 333

27 Static charge eliminator bias
28 Fuser bias
29 Laser scanner fan (FM1)
30 Fuser fan (FM2)
31 Cartridge fan (Y/M) (FM3)
32 Cartridge fan (C/K) (FM4)
33 VOC fan (FM5)
334 Chapter 2 Solve problems

Low-voltage power supply fan
34
(FM6)
Cartridge front area cooling fan
35
(FM7)
36 Delivery fan (FM8)
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear)

37
(FM9)
Fuser edge area cooling fan (front)
38
(FM10)
39 Duplex fan (FM301)
40 Duplex fan (FM302)

Figure 2-58 General timing chart (2 of 2)
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
1
J1806 J1803
Control panel GND
1
J1801 INLET
2
J2
MT1 FAN5LK
J3
2
5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
123
2
J7
FM6
FAN5PS
3
Low-voltage
1
4
1
4
J1
3
2
1
power supply PCA
GND
1
GND
GND
CGND
KEYS
2
5V
5V
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
GND 5
DETECT
MT2
3.3V_CP2
3
1
2 USB- 2
3 USB+ 3
4
5 GND 5
1
2 USB- 2
3 USB+ 3
4
J4 J6
4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J5
Circuit diagrams
Hardware D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 4 J705 J703 /FSR_RLD
GND
GND
integration
+5VF
+5VR
J1805
FSR_D1
2
pocket FSR_D2
3
1 2 3 4
J701 FSR_TEST24
4
Connector PCA FSR_R_TH
5
J702 32
PSL
PSN
N
L
FSR_SS_TH
6
FSR_SL_TH
7
FSR_NEW TB103 TB104 TB102 TB101
8
FSR_100
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
32
31
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FSR_200
J107
FSR_F_TH
7
+3.3VA Fuser PCA
6
/ZEROX
5
FSR_CURRMS
/VDOEN
GND
JLPWRON 30
JLCANL
JLCANH
GND
/MFP
/VCRST
GND
4
INL_CURRMS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 CLEI
11 CLEO
12 GND
13 /TOPO
14 GND
15 /BD1O
16 /BD2O
17 /BD3O
18 /BD4O
19 GND
20 /VDO_41
21 VDO_41
22 /VDO_31
23 VDO_31
24 /VDO_21
25 VDO_21
26 /VDO_11I
27 VDO_11I
28 GND
29 WAKEENG 4
30 WAKEVC
31 GND
32 +3.3VR
3
GND J302 J303
2
+24VB 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1
J305
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
+24VA
+24VB
+24VB
ZEROX
FAN5LK
FAN5PWM
PSACV
/PSAVE
VDT3
5VF_OFF
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+5VA
+5VA
PSRL
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J123 1 2 3 4 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32 J101 J102
HEATERC
HEATER2
HEATER1

J141 J142 J113
+3.3VA
25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C
24VRL 8
FSR_R_TH7
GND6
GND5
FSR_SS_TH4
FSR_SL_TH 3
GND2
+24VB 1
FSR_NEW6
FSR_100 5
FSR_200 4
FSR_F_TH3
GND2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
MT103
+5VA
GND
D1HP
PREEXP1
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D2HP
PREEXP2
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D3HP
PREEXP3
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D4HP
PREEXP4
+5VA
RM2-7058
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
TONM12VREF
TONMA
TONMB
TONM12ENB
ITBSEPMA
ITBSEPMB
ITBSEPMI0
ITBSEPMI1
ITBSEPMI2
ITBSEPMI3
ITBSEPVREF
TONM34ENB
TONM34VREF
RM2-7058
+5VA
DEVM34_STBY
DEVM34B
DEVM34A
DEVM12_STBY
DEVM12B
DEVM12A
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
SHUTMA
SHUTMB
SHUTMI0
SHUTMI1
SHUTMI2
SHUTMI3
ITBSEP
4 3 2 1
J1901DH 8 6
TGCS1
TGCS2
TGCS3
TGCS4
TGCS5
TGCS6
TGCS7
TGCS8
+24VA
J1901DB J1901DA
25 /TESTPRINT
24 PWTON1FUL
23 PWTON2FUL
22 PWTON3FUL
21 PWTON4FUL
20 PTONLED
19 PTONLED
18 PTON1LES
17 PTON2LES
16 PTON3LES
15 PTON4LES
14 +5VA
13 GND
12 GND
11 R_DATA
10 S_DATA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1901LB J1901LA
J1901LH
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 8 6
J1971D J1972D J1973D J1974D MT12
25 J401 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J411 J412
J1971DH J1972DH J1973DH J1974DH
J424 J423 J421 J425 J426 J422 J1971L J1972L J1973L J1974L
Cartridge driver PCA 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
J9948D
FT9962 FT9961
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VIN 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1
+5VA
GND
ITBSEP
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
FT9963
J3001A PVSS1 2 J2017 J2018 J2019 J2020
PVIN1 16
PTONLED1 3
PVSS1 15
1st
RM2-7030
B
SHUTMOUTB/
SHUTMOUTB
SHUTMOUTA/
SHUTMOUTA
RM2-7029
PWTONLED1 4
DEVM12OUTA
DEVM12OUTA/
DEVM12OUTB
DEVM12OUTB/
14
P-TAG
ITBSEPMOUTA
ITBSEPMOUTA/
ITBSEPMOUTB
ITBSEPMOUTB/
TONM34_OUTA
TONM34_OUTA/
TONM34_OUTB
TONM34_OUTB/
DEVM34OUTA
DEVM34OUTA/
DEVM34OUTB
DEVM34OUTB/
PWTON1FUL 5 2 1 4 3 2 1
TONM12_OUTA
TONM12_OUTA/
TONM12_OUTB
TONM12_OUTB/
SR14 SR15 SR16 SR17 2 1
13 1 2
J9948L
J3001B TVIN1 VIN 6 J9956D J9955D

12 H3
2
TVSS1 TVSS2 7
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
1st
11 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J9956DH J9955DH
GND 1 2
8 J1716 J1720 J1719 J1721 J1718
T-TAG
10 J2010 H2 J9956L J9955L J9951L
VIN 9 4 3 2 1
17
4 3 2 1
17
J3002A 9 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2
1
PVIN2 TVSS1 10 1 2
FU101
8 M 2 1
PVSS2 PTONPT1 11 M M M M 2 1 2 1 2 1 H1
2st
1
1
1
7
1
SR18
PWTON2FUL12 LED1
P-TAG
M22 M18 LED2 LED3 LED4 1 2
6 M20 M21 M19
J402
PWTONLED213
TH3
TH2
TH1
J3002B TVIN2 5 2 1 2 1
TH4
J2201A
2
2
2
PTONLED2 14 TP101
2
TVSS2 4
2st
VIN 15 R_TH SS_TH SL_TH F_TH
3
Service
only
T-TAG
PVSS2 16
2 J9903
PTONPT2 17 J9904
1
4 3 2 1
J9960D J138WH
100VFuser 200VFuser 100V(S) 200V(S)
J138A J138B
J1901LA1 J1901LA2 J1901LA3 J1901LA4
VIN 1 J9960DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
PVSS3 2 J9960L
16 1 2 3 4
PTONLED3 3
15
J3003A PWTONLED3 4
14
PVIN3 PWTON3FUL 5
13 4 3 2 1
PVSS3 VIN 2 1 2 1 MT9953 2 1 MT9954 2 1
6
3st
12 J1717
J9952D J9953D J9954D
P-TAG
TVSS4 7 J9951D
11 4 3 2 1 J9952DH J9953DH J9954DH
J3003B GND 8 J9951DH
10
TVIN3 VIN 9 M
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
/DM3ACC
/DM3DEC
/DM3FG
/DM123REV
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
/DM4ACC
/DM4DEC
/DM4FG
/DM4REV
17
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
/DM2ACC
/DM2DEC
/DM2FG
/DM123REV
17
9
TVSS3
3st
/DM1ACC
/DM1DEC
/DM1FG
/DM123REV
TVSS3 10
A
8 M17 Fuser
T-TAG
PTONPT3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11
7 J1712 J1713 J1714 J1715
J3004A
PWTON4FUL 12
Figure 2-59 General circuit diagram, product base M855 (1 of 4)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PVIN4 6
J403
PWTONLED4 13
PVSS4 5
4st
M M M M
J2201B
PTONLED4 14
4
P-TAG
VIN 15
M12 M13 M14 M15
J3004B 3
TVIN4 PVSS4 16
2
TVSS4 PTONPT4 17
4st
1
T-TAG

6 5 4 3 2 1
J104 J125 J112 J110 J111 J144

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MT14 MT16
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VA
+5VA
+5VA
GND
+5VA
FAN8LK
FAN9LK
CSTW1
CSTW0
CSTL2
CSTL1
CSTL0
+5VA
GND
CSTLUM
CSTOUT
+24VAF1
FAN8PWM
FAN9PWM
CSTPREM
+24VAF1
CSTSL
+5VA
GND
CSTPFED
+5VA
CSTPEMP
GND
CSTPS
+5VA
MPTPFED
2TRDOPEN
REGMOUTA
REGMOUTA/
REGMOUTB
REGMOUTB/
FED_OUTA
FED_OUTA/
FED_OUTB
FED_OUTB/
J1926D
FSR_WIN_HPS1
FSR_WIN_HPS2
+24VB
GND
PRI1PWM
PRI2PWM
PRI3PWM
PRI4PWM
PRI1_CPR
PRI2_CPR
PRI3_CPR
PRI4_CPR
DEV1PWM
DEV2PWM
DEV3PWM
DEV4PWM
HVDALD
HVDACLK
HVDATA_A
HVCLK1
J1924D
+3.3VA
GND
MPTPEMP
+24VAF1
MPTSL
+5VA
GND
MPTPLAST
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
J1935D J1926DH D
J9961D J1943D J1922DH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1911D J1920D J1922D
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J9961DH J1943DH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1935DH 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1911DH J1920DH
J201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J9961L J1922L J1924L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1926L
J1943L J1911L J1920L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J1935L
High-voltage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 J1924LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MT15 MT17
1 2 3
power supply PCA A
3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
J2006 J1925D J1936D
J1925DH J1936DH
J9905D J9906D J9959D J1923D
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J9905DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 J1925L J1936L
J9906DH J9959DH J2001 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J8302 J8301 J2004 J2005 J2007 1 2 1 2 3
J9905L 1 2 3 1 2 3 J9906L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1706 J1705 SR25
J9959L M J1923L 1 2
SW11 SW12 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
M7 SR22 SR31 SR32 SR24
123 123 SR21 1 2 1 2
M M J2008
SL SL 3 2 1

3 2 1 J2033 SL1 MP tray M6 M5 SL2
J9913 3 2 1 3 2 1 J9914
FM9 FM10 SR26
guide MP tray MP tray
SR11 SR12 SR13 assy
Lifter drive assy Cassette pickup assy drive assy pickup assy MP tray
J116 J122 J115 J103

DC controller PCA J121 J119 J118
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 C
ESTMP
GND
ESHUM
+3.3VA
/RDOPEN
GND
GND
FAN6LK
FAN6PWM
GND
FAN4LK
FAN4PWM
GND
FAN7LK
FAN7PWM
+24VBF3
GND
+24VBS
GND
PSRL
GND
+24VAF3
/PWRSW
PWRLED
+3.3VR
MSTRLED
+5VA
+5VA
GND
PAPRW1
+5VA
GND
PAPRW2
2TRNEW
+5VA
GND
FSRLP
+5VA
GND
FSRLP2
+5VA
GND
FSRSEP
/FDOPEN
GND
RSCGAIN0
RSCGAIN1
RDSCLED
DSCSR
DSCDR
GND
+5VA
GND
+5VA
DSRDR
DSRSR
RDSRLED
RSRGAIN1
RSRGAIN0
ITBTOPLED
ITBTOP
+5VA
GND
ITBWTONFUL
ITBDET
/ITBNEW
/TOPI
GND
N.C.
+5VA
MSSR
MSDR
GND
MSLED
+5VA
GND
HVCLK1
2TRI
1TR4I
1TR3I
1TR2I
1TR1I
/2TRNPWM
/2TRPPWM
HVDALD
HVDACLK
HVDATA_B
HVCLK2
DISI
GND
+24VB
RSFGAIN0
RSFGAIN1
RDSFLED
DSFSR
DSFDR
+5VA
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1955D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J251 J1955DH J1824D J1931D
J1904DH High-voltage power 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 J1824L J1931L

14 J1904D FT9 J9986 J9910D J1921D J1910D J1501 J994 J9939D J1824LH J1931LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J1955L J1964D J9940D
supply PCA B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J9910DH J1921DH J1910DH 1 2 J9940DH J9939DH
1 2 J1964DH
MT46 SW102 J1964L J9940L J9939L
J1934L J1921L J1910L SW17
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
(BL)
CN1
J1904LH J1904L SW101
14
(RED)
(RED)
(GLAY)
(BROWN)
(GREEN)
123 123 123 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(VIOLET)
(VIOLET)
(VIOLET)
J601B J9941 J601A
(BROWN)
MT19 (GREEN)
(VIOLET)
(RED)
(GLAY)
(VIOLET)
1 2 1 2 REG/DENSITY REG/DENSITY REG/DENSITY
FSR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
10
11
12
13
14
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
FM7 FM5 FM8 J2026 J2015 J2014 J2013 J9930 J1965 SW13 SW14 (Front) (Center) (Rear)
DIS
MT48
J2028F
FU3
1 2
3 2 1 1 2
1
J2031 1 2 CPR/ B
J2028M SR38
LED5 SR37 SR29 SR30 SR28
Service Density sensor assy
only
SR27
J132 J134 J105 J131 J135 J199

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DIS
J2701
GND
GND
GND
GND
MT47
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
J2702
/FSRMFG
/ITBMFG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
FAN3LK2
FAN3PWM
GND
FAN3LK1
FAN3PWM
GND
FAN2LK
FAN2PWM
/FSRMACC
/FSRMDEC
/ITBMACC
/ITBMDEC
/ITBMREV
+24VAF1
/TON_SL1
+24VAF1
/TON_SL2
+5VA
GND
+5VA
GND
DEV12SEP
FAN1PWM
FAN1LK
GND
/FSRMREV
+24VAF1
/TON_SL3
+24VAF1
TON_SL4
+5VA
GND
+5VA
GND
DEV34SEP
TONM12ROT
TONM34ROT
FT31 MT41
TR1_St1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J9919D J9915D J1917D J1916D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1930D
J1929D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1962D MT42 J1711 J1710 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FT32
TR1_St2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1962LH J9919LH J9915LH J1917LH J1916LH J1929L J1930L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J1962L J1929LH J1930LH
J9919L J9915L J1917L J1916L M M
M11 M10
MT43 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
FT33
TR1_St3
123 123 123 123
GND
MSSR
MSDR
GND
MSLED
+5VA
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
/TOPI
MT44
+5VA
FT34
TR1_St4 J1937D J1938D J1948D J1949D
FM4 FM3 FM2 FM1 A
J1937DH J1938DH J1948H J1949H
J1937L J1938L J1948L J1949L
CT-2 CT-2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J2009 J901 MT35 MT45

TR2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J2023 J2021 J2024 J2022
MEDIA SENSOR 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
SL SL SL SL
SL4 SL5 SR43 SR19 SL6 SL7 SR44 SR20

SR2501
ITB assy
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting 337 ENWW
3
1
3
2
2
2
J2111
1
3
SR122
1
INPOPTMG3 1 12 INPOPTMG3
2
1
J8121
J2112
LED22
1
J1985L
3
2
6
PREM2
SR121
J1985LH
GND
J114
J1985D
2
GND 3 10 GND
3
GND
12
12
PJAM2
3
INPOPCLK 4 9 INPOPCLK
4
12 11 10 9
LED21
11 10 9
LED23
J8101
INPOPSTS 5 8 INPOPSTS
1
5
5
8
PWSIZE2-3
1
PSNS2
5
INPOPCMD 6 7 INPOPCMD
2
6
SR123
4
7
GND
2
GND
6
3
7
3
6
J1903D
PWSIZE2-2
3
J1903L
PLVL2
7
J8322
+3.3V 8 5 +3.3VA
4
8
2
5
PWSIZE2-1
4
5
SW122
LED24
8
PGND 9 4 GND
5
1
4
PLSIZE2-3
4
+24B PGND 10 3 GND

3
GND DOPEN
1
1
3
2
SR124
SL2 +24V 11 2 +24VA

2
PLSIZE2-2 GND
2
2
2
1
J1903LH
J8313
J1903DH
+24V 12 1 +24VA
1
PLSIZE2-1
9 10 11 12
1
SW113
J8321
J8201B
SW121
J1984D
4
J1984L
J1984LH
J8102
9 10 11 12 13 14
J2101
LIFT2
2
2
J1982L
J1986L
M
1
J1986LH
J1982LH
J1982D
+24B
J8123
J1986D
1
1
J2102
2
LED12
1
2
3
PREM1
1
1
3
3
SR111
GND
SL
2
1
2
2
2
GND
PJAM1
M121
1
SL121
3
LED11
SR112
11 10 9
J8122
PWSIZE1-3
1
1
M2_OUT /B
4
GND
2
2
M2_OUT B
3
PWSIZE1-2
3
3
M2_OUT /A
M
2
J8312
SW112
LED13 PWSIZE1-1
4
4
5
5
J1752
M2_OUT A
M122
1
1
5
J8111
1
5
PSNS1 PLSIZE1-3
5
4
4
SR113
4
J2121
GND GND
6
1
3
3
PLVL1 PLSIZE1-2
7
2
2
2
LED14 PLSIZE1-1
8
3
1
1
J1988L
5
PREM3
J8311
SW111
+24A
J1988LH
J1988D
4
SR131
GND
SR114
J2122
SL1
LED31
11 10 9
3
J8131
PWSIZE3-3 LIFT1
1
2
8
2
2
M
2
J1981L
GND +24A
2
1
7
1
1
J8201A
J1981D
1
J1981LH
PWSIZE3-2
3
SR132
J8332
9 10 11 12 13 14
SW132
PWSIZE3-1
4
LED32
1
PLSIZE3-3
4
M111
J8112
GND
2
GND
3
J1987L
1
PJAM3
J8113
PLSIZE3-2
J1987D
J1987LH
2
J8201C
2
LED33
4
PLSIZE3-1
1
5
1
3
PSNS3
J8331
4
2
SR133
4
J1983LH
J1983L
SW131
GND
6
3
3
RM1-3576
J1983D
PLVL3
7
2
4
2
1
1
2
LED34
8
1
5
1
SL
2
2
1
+24C
SL111
SR134
SL3
LIFT3
2
2
M
+24C M1_OUT /B
1
1
4
M1_OUT B
3
J8132
3
M
J1751
M1_OUT /A
2
J8103
9 10 11 12 13 14
2
M1_OUT A
J1989L
M131
M112
J1989D
1
4
J1989LH
1
2
1
SL
2
1
J8133
SL131
M3_OUT /B
1
4
M3_OUT B
2
3
Paper deck controller PCA
M3_OUT /A
M
3
2
1x500-sheet paper deck
J1753
M3_OUT A
M132
4
1

DC controller PCA
IPTU
M202 M201
FM201 M M
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1952L
J1952DH
J1952D
J7011 J7012
1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
321
SCNTMP2
1
2
GND
2
1
SCN_TH2
27 GND 1
FANLK
26 +5VB 2
GND
FANON
3
25 GND 3
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
24 VDO11O 4
J1928D
J7008 J7003 J7007 1
J1928DH
J1927L
MT18
1
23 /VDO11O 5
2
J1991DH
2
22 GND 6
4
4
3
4
J1906LH
4
J130A
14 JLPWRON
3
J1906DH
21 LD1CTRL1 7
3
3
J7001
3
+24VA
3
13 JLCANL
M
4
20 LD1CTRL0 8
2
2
M1
5
2
GND
J1701
2
1
12 JLCANH
5
19 LD1PDOUT 9
1
1
6
1
14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
J7004
1
2
11 GND
6
18 EEDI 10
7
J7002
8
14
3
J1906L
1 GND 10 /PDLV2
7
17 /LDICRST 11
8
Output accessory
7
2 N.C. 9 IPTUOPCLK
8
16 EECLK 12
9
6
3 CS_TP 8 IPTUOPSTS
15 GND 13 5 10
14
4 CANH 7 IPTUOPCMD
4
14 LDICCK 14
11
27
J1906D
7
4
5 CANL 6 +24VA
3
13 GND 15
IPTU driver PCA
12
3
J7005
6 PWRON 5 +24VA
J1991D
12 EEDO 16
13
2
7 GND 4 +24VA
J7006
1
11 LD1ICSEL 17
14
27
1
J501A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 9
3 GND
10 LD2PDOUT 18
2 GND
9 GND 19
1 GND
8 VDO21 20
J126
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VA
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
3
7 /VDO21 21
GND
2
6 GND 22
JAMSNS
SR42
/CRG1OUT
REARSNS
1
5 LD2CTRL0 23
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
FRONTSNS
J1935
DOOROPEN
RM2-7039
J130WH
4 LD2CTRL1 24
3
(Y/M)
Laser scanner assy
+5VA
1
3 GND 25
2
3 2 1 GND
2
2 /BD1I 26 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SR41
1
2
J1934
/CRG2OUT
3
1 +5VA 27
J2204
J2203
J2202
J2201
+5VA
4
27 GND 1 GND
5
2
J130B
26 +5VB 2
SR40
/CRG3OUT
6
1
J1933
25 GND 3 +5VA
7
24 VDO31 4
SR204
SR203
SR202
SR201
GND
8
23 /VDO31 5 /CRG4OUT
SR39
1
22 GND 6
J1932
+24VA
21 LD3CTRL1 7 /SCNM1ACC
20 LD3CTRL0 8 /SCNM1DEC
J1928L
19 LD3PDOUT 9
J1927D
J1927DH
GND
18 EEDI 10 +24VA
4
4
4
17 /LDICRST 11 /SCNM3ACC
3
3
3
16 EECLK 12
M
/SCNM3DEC
2
2
M2
J1702
15 GND 13 GND
1
1
1
14 LDICCK 14 SCNTMP1
13 GND 15
27
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 EEDO 16
11 LD3ICSEL 17
10 LD4PDOUT 18
J127
27
1
9 GND 19
1
8 VDO41 20
2
7 /VDO41 21
SCN_TH1
J501B
6 GND 22
5 LD4CTRL0 23
1
4 LD4CTRL1 24
J1951L
3 GND 25
J1951DH
J1951D
2 /BD3I 26
(C/K)
Laser scanner assy
1 +5VA 27
A
B
C
D
6 5 4 3 2 1
DC controller PCA
J133 J128 J108
SR45 SR35 SR302
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J2307 J1945 J2303

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
GND
POUT
+5VA
GND
PFUL
+5VA
GND
PAPRW3
+5VA
+5VA
GND
POUT2
+5VA
GND
FSRDOPEN
Right door sub assy
POUT2
SGND
+5VA
POUT
SGND
+5VA
MIDS
GND
+5V
J1995D
J1995DH 3 2 1
1 2 3
DUPOPCLK
DUPOPSTS
DUPOPCMD
DUPOPTMG3
DUPOPTMG2
DUPOPTMG1
+3.3VA
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
+5VCS
GND
/CS
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPICLK
INT
+3.3VCS
J1995L
J2034
3 2 1
SR34

J1950L J1942D J1941D
J1905D J1919D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1942DH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1941DH
6 5 4 3 2 1 J1905DH 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1919DH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1942L J1941L
1 2 3 4 5 6 J1905L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1919L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1950D
J1950DH
DRMOUTA
DRMOUTB
DRMOUTA/
DRMOUTB/
+5VA
GND
CAMS
+5VA
GND
ENDS
+5VCS
GND
/CS
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPICLK
INT
+3.3VCS
C
3 2 1 3 2 1
J2016 J1912L
4 3 2 1
SR33 SR36 J1771

4 3 2 1
M J2301 J2302
Face-down delivery 3 2 1 3 2 1
assy M301
SR303 SR304
J9946DH
J1909D J1908D
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J9946D
3 2 1 J1909DH 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1908DH
J1902DH J1902D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J9946L 1 2 3 J1909L J1908L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
J1902L
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J9931
MIDS
GND
+5VA
J9932 B
DUPOPCLK
DUPOPSTS
DUPOPCMD
DUPOPTMG3
DUPOPTMG2
DUPOPTMG1
+3.3VA
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
+5VCS
GND
/CS
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPICLK
INT
+3.3VCS
+3.3VCS
INT
SPICLK
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
/CS
GND
+5VCS
ENDS
GND
+5VA
CAMS
GND
+5VA
DRMOUTB/
DRMOUTB
DRMOUTA/
DRMOUTA
14
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14
13
12
11
10
J4101 J4110 J4105 J4104
Duplex driver PCA

TCK
GND
GND
/CS
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPICLK
INT
+3.3VCS
14 +5VCS
13 /TRS
12 TMS
11 TDI
10 TDO
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J4106 J4107 J4108

J4109 J4103 J4102
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J2306
GND
14
IOTR
IOTT
GND
GND
REVS
+3.3VA
/RESET
TFAN_FG
+5VA
TFANON
TFANLK
GND
J2304D
FLASH_DAT
FLASH_CLK
Color sensor
FLASH_MODE
DUPFANLK
DUPFANON
4 3 2 1
DVMOUTA
DVMOUTA/
DVMOUTB
DVMOUTB/
DTMOUTA
DTMOUTA/
DTMOUTB
DTMOUTB/
1 2 3 4 J2304DH 3 2 1
J2305
+24VB
J2304L
REVSLON
Duplex feed assy Color sensor assy
J3001DH
J3001D 123 1 2
SR301
SL
4 3 2 1 SL301
FM301
A
1 2 3 4
J3001LH 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J3001L J1773 J1772

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
123 M M
M302 M303
FM302
Duplex switch back assy
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
24VA
1
1
GND
1
INLET
2
2
J2
Image scanner FAN5LK
J3
2
GND
J9958
123
2
J7
FM6
FAN5PS
3
J9935
1
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13
Low-voltage
J1
3
2
1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 power supply PCA
1
2
3
J4 J6
4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J5
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
GND
N.C.
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
PWR_B
PWR_A
PET_N
PET_P
D
PER_N
PER_P
CWAKE_N
CPRSNT_N
CLK100_N
CLK100_P
CPERST_N
/FSR_RLD
GND
GND
1
+5VF
+5VR
FSR_D1
2
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13
FSR_D2
3
1 2 3 4
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
J701 FSR_TEST24
4
J1802 J706
FSR_R_TH
5
J702 32
PSL
PSN
N
L
Control panel J1807 Connector PCA FSR_SS_TH
6
5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FSR_SL_TH
7
FSR_NEW TB103 TB104 TB102 TB101
8
FSR_100
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
32
31
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
4
FSR_200
J107
FSR_F_TH
GND
7
5V 1
GND
GND
CGND
KEYS
+3.3VA
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
5V_CP
Fuser PCA
DETECT
1
2 USB- 2
3 USB+ 3
4
5 GND 5
/ZEROX
3.3V_CP2
5
FSR_CURRMS
/VDOEN
GND
JLPWRON 30
JLCANL
JLCANH
GND
/MFP
/VCRST
GND
4
INL_CURRMS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 CLEI
11 CLEO
12 GND
13 /TOPO
14 GND
15 /BD1O
16 /BD2O
17 /BD3O
18 /BD4O
19 GND
20 /VDO_41
21 VDO_41
22 /VDO_31
23 VDO_31
24 /VDO_21
25 VDO_21
26 /VDO_11I
27 VDO_11I
28 GND
29 WAKEENG 4
30 WAKEVC
31 GND
32 +3.3VR
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GND J302 J303
2
J707
5
J708 +24VB 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1
J305
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
+24VA
+24VB
+24VB
ZEROX
FAN5LK
FAN5PWM
PSACV
/PSAVE
VDT3
5VF_OFF
+3.3VR
+3.3VR
+5VA
+5VA
PSRL
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J123 1 2 3 4 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32
J101 J102
HEATERC
HEATER2
HEATER1

J141 J142 J113
+3.3VA
25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C
24VRL 8
FSR_R_TH7
GND6
GND5
FSR_SS_TH4
FSR_SL_TH 3
GND2
+24VB 1
FSR_NEW6
FSR_100 5
FSR_200 4
FSR_F_TH3
GND2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
MT103
+5VA
GND
D1HP
PREEXP1
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D2HP
PREEXP2
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D3HP
PREEXP3
+5VA
+5VA
GND
D4HP
PREEXP4
+5VA
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
TONM12VREF
TONMA
TONMB
TONM12ENB
ITBSEPMA
ITBSEPMB
ITBSEPMI0
ITBSEPMI1
ITBSEPMI2
ITBSEPMI3
ITBSEPVREF
TONM34ENB
TONM34VREF
+5VA
DEVM34_STBY
DEVM34B
DEVM34A
DEVM12_STBY
DEVM12B
DEVM12A
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
SHUTMA
SHUTMB
SHUTMI0
SHUTMI1
SHUTMI2
SHUTMI3
ITBSEP
4 3 2 1
J1901DH 8 6
TGCS1
TGCS2
TGCS3
TGCS4
TGCS5
TGCS6
TGCS7
TGCS8
+24VA
J1901DB J1901DA
25 /TESTPRINT
24 PWTON1FUL
23 PWTON2FUL
22 PWTON3FUL
21 PWTON4FUL
20 PTONLED
19 PTONLED
18 PTON1LES
17 PTON2LES
16 PTON3LES
15 PTON4LES
14 +5VA
13 GND
12 GND
11 R_DATA
10 S_DATA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1901LB J1901LA
J1901LH
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 8 6
J1971D J1972D J1973D J1974D MT12
25 J401 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J411 J412
J1971DH J1972DH J1973DH J1974DH
J424 J423 J421 J425 J426 J422 J1971L J1972L J1973L J1974L
Cartridge driver PCA 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
FT9962 FT9961
J9948D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VIN 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1
+5VA
GND
ITBSEP
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
FT9963
J3001A PVSS1 2 J2017 J2018 J2019 J2020
PVIN1 16
PTONLED1 3
PVSS1 15 B
1st
SHUTMOUTB/
SHUTMOUTB
SHUTMOUTA/
SHUTMOUTA
PWTONLED1 4
DEVM12OUTA
DEVM12OUTA/
DEVM12OUTB
DEVM12OUTB/
14
P-TAG
ITBSEPMOUTA
ITBSEPMOUTA/
ITBSEPMOUTB
ITBSEPMOUTB/
TONM34_OUTA
TONM34_OUTA/
TONM34_OUTB
TONM34_OUTB/
DEVM34OUTA
DEVM34OUTA/
DEVM34OUTB
DEVM34OUTB/
PWTON1FUL 5 2 1 4 3 2 1
TONM12_OUTA
TONM12_OUTA/
TONM12_OUTB
TONM12_OUTB/
SR14 SR15 SR16 SR17 2 1
13 1 2
J3001B TVIN1 VIN 6 J9956D J9955D
J9948L
12 H3
2
TVSS1 TVSS2 7
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
1st
11 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J9956DH J9955DH
GND J1721 J1718 1 2
8 J1716 J1720 J1719
T-TAG
10 J2010 H2 J9956L J9955L J9951L
VIN 9 4 3 2 1
17
4 3 2 1
17
J3002A 9 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2
1
PVIN2 TVSS1 10 1 2
FU101
8 M 2 1
PVSS2 PTONPT1 11 M M M M 2 1 2 1 2 1 H1
2st
1
1
1
7
1
SR18
PWTON2FUL12 LED1
P-TAG
M20 M22 M18 LED2 LED3 LED4 1 2
6
J402
PWTONLED213
TH3
TH2
TH1
J3002B TVIN2 5 2 1 2 1
TH4
J2201A
2
2
2
PTONLED2 14 TP101
2
TVSS2 4
Only
2st
Service
VIN 15 R_TH SS_TH SL_TH F_TH

3
T-TAG
PVSS2 16
2 J9903
PTONPT2 17 J9904
1
4 3 2 1
J9960D J138WH
100VFuser 200VFuser 100V(S) 200V(S)
J138A J138B
J1901LA1 J1901LA2 J1901LA3 J1901LA4
VIN 1 J9960DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
PVSS3 2 J9960L
16 1 2 3 4
PTONLED3 3
15
PWTONLED3 4
J3003A 14
PVIN3 PWTON3FUL 5
13 4 3 2 1
PVSS3 VIN 2 1 2 1 2 1
6 MT9953 2 1 MT9954
3st
12 J1717
TVSS4 7 J9951D J9952D J9953D J9954D
P-TAG
11 4 3 2 1 J9952DH J9953DH J9954DH
GND 8 J9951DH
J3003B 10
TVIN3 VIN 9 M
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
/DM3ACC
/DM3DEC
/DM3FG
/DM123REV
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
/DM4ACC
/DM4DEC
/DM4FG
/DM4REV
17
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
/DM2ACC
/DM2DEC
/DM2FG
/DM123REV
17
9 A
TVSS3
3st
/DM1ACC
/DM1DEC
/DM1FG
/DM123REV
TVSS3 10
8 M17 Fuser
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
T-TAG
PTONPT3 11
7 J1712 MCT-8 J1713 MCT-8 J1714 MCT-8 J1715 MCT-8
J3004A PWTON4FUL 12 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PVIN4 6
J403
PWTONLED4 13
PVSS4 5
4st
M M M M
J2201B
PTONLED4 14
4
P-TAG
VIN 15
M12 M13 M14 M15
3
J3004B PVSS4 16
TVIN4 2
TVSS4 PTONPT4 17
4st
1
T-TAG

6 5 4 3 2 1
J104 J125 J112 J110 J111 J144

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MT14 MT16
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VA
+5VA
+5VA
GND
+5VA
FAN8LK
FAN9LK
CSTW1
CSTW0
CSTL2
CSTL1
CSTL0
+5VA
GND
CSTLUM
CSTOUT
+24VAF1
FAN8PWM
FAN9PWM
CSTPREM
+24VAF1
CSTSL
+5VA
GND
CSTPFED
+5VA
CSTPEMP
GND
CSTPS
+5VA
MPTPFED
2TRDOPEN
REGMOUTA
REGMOUTA/
REGMOUTB
REGMOUTB/
FED_OUTA
FED_OUTA/
FED_OUTB
FED_OUTB/
J1926D
FSR_WIN_HPS1
FSR_WIN_HPS2
+24VB
GND
PRI1PWM
PRI2PWM
PRI3PWM
PRI4PWM
PRI1_CPR
PRI2_CPR
PRI3_CPR
PRI4_CPR
DEV1PWM
DEV2PWM
DEV3PWM
DEV4PWM
HVDALD
HVDACLK
HVDATA_A
HVCLK1
J1924D
+3.3VA
GND
MPTPEMP
+24VAF1
MPTSL
+5VA
GND
MPTPLAST
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
J1935D J1926DH D
J9961D J1943D J1922DH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1911D J1920D J1922D
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J9961DH J1943DH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1935DH 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1911DH J1920DH
J201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J9961L J1922L J1924L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1926L
J1943L J1911L J1920L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J1935L
High-voltage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 J1924LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MT15 MT17
1 2 3
power supply PCA A
3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
J2006 J1925D J1936D
J1925DH J1936DH
J9905D J9906D J9959D J1923D
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J9905DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 J1925L J1936L
J9906DH J9959DH J2001 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J8302 J8301 J2004 J2005 J2007 1 2 1 2 3
J9905L 1 2 3 1 2 3 J9906L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1706 J1705 SR25
J9959L M J1923L 1 2
SW11 SW12 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
M7 SR22 SR31 SR32 SR24
123 123 SR21 1 2 1 2
M M J2008
SL SL 3 2 1

3 2 1 J2033 SL1 MP tray M6 M5 SL2
J9913 3 2 1 3 2 1 J9914
FM9 FM10 SR26
guide MP tray MP tray
SR11 SR12 SR13 assy
Lifter drive assy Cassette pickup assy drive assy pickup assy MP tray
J116 J122 J115 J103

DC controller PCA J121 J119 J118
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 C
ESTMP
GND
ESHUM
+3.3VA
/RDOPEN
GND
GND
FAN6LK
FAN6PWM
GND
FAN4LK
FAN4PWM
GND
FAN7LK
FAN7PWM
+24VBF3
GND
+24VBS
GND
PSRL
GND
+24VAF3
/PWRSW
PWRLED
+3.3VR
MSTRLED
+5VA
+5VA
GND
PAPRW1
+5VA
GND
PAPRW2
2TRNEW
+5VA
GND
FSRLP
+5VA
GND
FSRLP2
+5VA
GND
FSRSEP
/FDOPEN
GND
RSCGAIN0
RSCGAIN1
RDSCLED
DSCSR
DSCDR
GND
+5VA
GND
+5VA
DSRDR
DSRSR
RDSRLED
RSRGAIN1
RSRGAIN0
ITBTOPLED
ITBTOP
+5VA
GND
ITBWTONFUL
ITBDET
/ITBNEW
/TOPI
GND
N.C.
+5VA
MSSR
MSDR
GND
MSLED
+5VA
GND
HVCLK1
2TRI
1TR4I
1TR3I
1TR2I
1TR1I
/2TRNPWM
/2TRPPWM
HVDALD
HVDACLK
HVDATA_B
HVCLK2
DISI
GND
+24VB
RSFGAIN0
RSFGAIN1
RDSFLED
DSFSR
DSFDR
+5VA
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1955D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J251 J1955DH J1824D J1931D
J1904DH High-voltage power 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 J1824L J1931L

14 J1904D FT9 J9986 J9910D J1921D J1910D J1501 J994 J9939D J1824LH J1931LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J1955L J1964D J9940D
supply PCA B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J9910DH J1921DH J1910DH 1 2 J9940DH J9939DH
1 2 J1964DH
MT46 SW102 J1964L J9940L J9939L
J1934L J1921L J1910L SW17
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
(BL)
CN1
J1904LH J1904L SW101
14
(RED)
(RED)
(GLAY)
(BROWN)
(GREEN)
123 123 123 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(VIOLET)
(VIOLET)
(VIOLET)
J601B J9941 J601A
(BROWN)
MT19 (GREEN)
(VIOLET)
(RED)
(GLAY)
(VIOLET)
1 2 1 2 REG/DENSITY REG/DENSITY REG/DENSITY
FSR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
10
11
12
13
14
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
FM7 FM5 FM8 J2026 J2015 J2014 J2013 J9930 J1965 SW13 SW14 (Front) (Center) (Rear)
DIS
MT48
J2028F
FU3
1 2
3 2 1 1 2
1
J2031 1 2 CPR/ B
J2028M SR38
LED5 SR37 SR29 SR30 SR28
Service Density sensor assy
only
SR27
J132 J134 J105 J131 J135 J199

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DIS
J2701
GND
GND
GND
GND
MT47
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
J2702
/FSRMFG
/ITBMFG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
FAN3LK2
FAN3PWM
GND
FAN3LK1
FAN3PWM
GND
FAN2LK
FAN2PWM
/FSRMACC
/FSRMDEC
/ITBMACC
/ITBMDEC
/ITBMREV
+24VAF1
/TON_SL1
+24VAF1
/TON_SL2
+5VA
GND
+5VA
GND
DEV12SEP
FAN1PWM
FAN1LK
GND
/FSRMREV
+24VAF1
/TON_SL3
+24VAF1
TON_SL4
+5VA
GND
+5VA
GND
DEV34SEP
TONM12ROT
TONM34ROT
FT31 MT41
TR1_St1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J9919D J9915D J1917D J1916D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1930D
J1929D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1962D MT42 J1711 J1710 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FT32
TR1_St2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1962LH J9919LH J9915LH J1917LH J1916LH J1929L J1930L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J1962L J1929LH J1930LH
J9919L J9915L J1917L J1916L M M
M11 M10
MT43 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
FT33
TR1_St3
123 123 123 123
GND
MSSR
MSDR
GND
MSLED
+5VA
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
/TOPI
MT44
+5VA
FT34
TR1_St4 J1937D J1938D J1948D J1949D
FM4 FM3 FM2 FM1 A
J1937DH J1938DH J1948H J1949H
J1937L J1938L J1948L J1949L
CT-2 CT-2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J2009 J901 MT35 MT45

TR2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J2023 J2021 J2024 J2022
MEDIA SENSOR 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
SL SL SL SL
SL4 SL5 SR43 SR19 SL6 SL7 SR44 SR20

SR2501
ITB assy
ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting 341 ENWW
3
1
3
2
2
2
J2111
1
3
SR122
1
2
1
J8121
J2112
LED22
1
J1985L
3
2
6
PREM2
SR121
J1985LH
GND
J114
J1985D
2
GND 3 10 GND
3
GND
12
12
PJAM2
3
INPOPCLK 4 9 INPOPCLK
4
12 11 10 9
LED21
11 10 9
LED23
J8101
INPOPSTS 5 8 INPOPSTS
1
5
5
8
PWSIZE2-3
1
PSNS2
5
INPOPCMD 6 7 INPOPCMD
2
6
SR123
4
7
GND
2
GND
6
3
7
3
6
J1903D
PWSIZE2-2
3
J1903L
PLVL2
7
J8322
+3.3V 8 5 +3.3VA
4
8
2
5
PWSIZE2-1
4
5
SW122
LED24
8
PGND 9 4 GND
5
1
4
PLSIZE2-3
4
+24B PGND 10 3 GND

3
GND DOPEN
1
1
3
2
SR124
SL2 +24V 11 2 +24VA

2
PLSIZE2-2 GND
2
2
2
1
J1903LH
J8313
J1903DH
+24V 12 1 +24VA
1
PLSIZE2-1
9 10 11 12
1
SW113
J8321
J8201B
SW121
J1984D
4
J1984L
J1984LH
J8102
9 10 11 12 13 14
J2101
LIFT2
2
2
J1982L
J1986L
M
1
J1986LH
J1982LH
J1982D
+24B
J8123
J1986D
1
1
J2102
2
LED12
1
2
3
PREM1
1
1
3
3
SR111
GND
SL
2
1
2
2
2
GND
PJAM1
M121
1
SL121
3
LED11
SR112
11 10 9
J8122
PWSIZE1-3
1
1
M2_OUT /B
4
GND
2
2
M2_OUT B
3
PWSIZE1-2
3
3
M2_OUT /A
M
2
J8312
SW112
LED13 PWSIZE1-1
4
4
5
5
J1752
M2_OUT A
M122
1
1
5
J8111
1
5
PSNS1 PLSIZE1-3
5
4
4
SR113
4
J2121
GND GND
6
1
3
3
PLVL1 PLSIZE1-2
7
2
2
2
LED14 PLSIZE1-1
8
3
1
1
J1988L
5
PREM3
J8311
SW111
+24A
J1988LH
J1988D
4
SR131
GND
SR114
J2122
SL1
LED31
11 10 9
3
J8131
PWSIZE3-3 LIFT1
1
2
8
2
2
M
2
J1981L
GND +24A
2
1
7
1
1
J8201A
J1981D
1
J1981LH
PWSIZE3-2
3
SR132
J8332
9 10 11 12 13 14
SW132
PWSIZE3-1
4
LED32
1
PLSIZE3-3
4
M111
J8112
GND
2
GND
3
J1987L
1
PJAM3
J8113
PLSIZE3-2
J1987D
J1987LH
2
J8201C
2
LED33
4
PLSIZE3-1
1
5
1
3
PSNS3
J8331
4
2
SR133
4
J1983LH
J1983L
SW131
GND
6
3
3
RM1-3576
J1983D
PLVL3
7
2
4
2
1
1
2
LED34
8
1
5
1
SL
2
2
1
+24C
SL111
SR134
SL3
LIFT3
2
2
M
+24C M1_OUT /B
1
1
4
M1_OUT B
3
J8132
3
M
J1751
M1_OUT /A
2
J8103
9 10 11 12 13 14
2
M1_OUT A
J1989L
M131
M112
J1989D
1
4
J1989LH
1
2
1
SL
2
1
J8133
SL131
M3_OUT /B
1
4
M3_OUT B
2
3
Paper deck controller PCA
M3_OUT /A
M
3
2
J1753
M3_OUT A
M132
4
1

DC controller PCA
IPTU
M202 M201
FM201 M M
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1952L
J1952DH
J1952D
J7011 J7012
1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
321
SCNTMP2
1
2
GND
2
1
SCN_TH2
27 GND 1
FANLK
26 +5VB 2
GND
FANON
3
25 GND 3
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
24 VDO11O 4
J1928D
J7008 J7003 J7007 1
J1928DH
J1927L
MT18
1
23 /VDO11O 5
2
J1991DH
2
22 GND 6
4
4
3
4
J1906LH
4
J130A
14 JLPWRON
3
J1906DH
21 LD1CTRL1 7
3
3
J7001
3
+24VA
3
13 JLCANL
M
4
20 LD1CTRL0 8
2
2
M1
5
2
GND
J1701
2
1
12 JLCANH
5
19 LD1PDOUT 9
1
1
6
1
14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
J7004
1
2
11 GND
6
18 EEDI 10
7
J7002
8
14
3
J1906L
1 GND 10 /PDLV2
7
17 /LDICRST 11
8
Output accessory
7
2 N.C. 9 IPTUOPCLK
8
16 EECLK 12
9
6
3 CS_TP 8 IPTUOPSTS
15 GND 13 5 10
14
4 CANH 7 IPTUOPCMD
4
14 LDICCK 14
11
27
J1906D
7
4
5 CANL 6 +24VA
3
13 GND 15
IPTU driver PCA
12
3
J7005
6 PWRON 5 +24VA
J1991D
12 EEDO 16
13
2
7 GND 4 +24VA
J7006
1
11 LD1ICSEL 17
14
27
1
J501A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 9
3 GND
10 LD2PDOUT 18
2 GND
9 GND 19
1 GND
8 VDO21 20
J126
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VA
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
3
7 /VDO21 21
GND
2
6 GND 22
JAMSNS
SR42
/CRG1OUT
REARSNS
1
5 LD2CTRL0 23
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
FRONTSNS
J1935
DOOROPEN
RM2-7039
J130WH
4 LD2CTRL1 24
3
(Y/M)
Laser scanner assy
+5VA
1
3 GND 25
2
3 2 1 GND
2
2 /BD1I 26 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SR41
1
2
J1934
/CRG2OUT
3
1 +5VA 27
J2204
J2203
J2202
J2201
+5VA
4
27 GND 1 GND
5
2
J130B
26 +5VB 2
SR40
/CRG3OUT
6
1
J1933
25 GND 3 +5VA
7
24 VDO31 4
SR204
SR203
SR202
SR201
GND
8
23 /VDO31 5 /CRG4OUT
SR39
1
22 GND 6
J1932
+24VA
21 LD3CTRL1 7 /SCNM1ACC
20 LD3CTRL0 8 /SCNM1DEC
J1928L
19 LD3PDOUT 9
J1927D
J1927DH
GND
18 EEDI 10 +24VA
4
4
4
17 /LDICRST 11 /SCNM3ACC
3
3
3
16 EECLK 12
M
/SCNM3DEC
2
2
M2
J1702
15 GND 13 GND
1
1
1
14 LDICCK 14 SCNTMP1
13 GND 15
27
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 EEDO 16
11 LD3ICSEL 17
10 LD4PDOUT 18
J127
27
1
9 GND 19
1
8 VDO41 20
2
7 /VDO41 21
SCN_TH1
J501B
6 GND 22
5 LD4CTRL0 23
1
4 LD4CTRL1 24
J1951L
3 GND 25
J1951DH
J1951D
2 /BD3I 26
(C/K)
Laser scanner assy
1 +5VA 27
A
B
C
D
6 5 4 3 2 1
DC controller PCA
J133 J128 J108
SR45 SR35 SR302
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J2307 J1945 J2303

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
GND
POUT
+5VA
GND
PFUL
+5VA
GND
PAPRW3
+5VA
+5VA
GND
POUT2
+5VA
GND
FSRDOPEN
Right door sub assy
POUT2
SGND
+5VA
POUT
SGND
+5VA
MIDS
GND
+5V
J1995D
J1995DH 3 2 1
1 2 3
J1995L
DUPOPCLK
DUPOPSTS
DUPOPCMD
DUPOPTMG3
DUPOPTMG2
DUPOPTMG1
+3.3VA
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
J2034
3 2 1
SR34

J1950L J1942D
J1905D J1919D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1942DH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 J1905DH 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1919DH
J1942L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 J1905L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1919L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1950D
J1950DH
DRMOUTA
DRMOUTB
DRMOUTA/
DRMOUTB/
+5VA
GND
ENDS
C
3 2 1 3 2 1
J2016 J1912L
4 3 2 1
SR33 SR36 J1771

4 3 2 1
Face-down delivery M J2302 3 2 1
M301
assy
SR304
J1909D J1908D
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 J1909DH 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1902DH J1902D J1908DH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 J1909L J1908L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
J1902L
MIDS
GND
+5VA
B
DUPOPCLK
DUPOPSTS
DUPOPCMD
DUPOPTMG3
DUPOPTMG2
DUPOPTMG1
+3.3VA
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
ENDS
GND
+5VA
CAMS
GND
+5VA
DRMOUTB/
DRMOUTB
DRMOUTA/
DOUTA
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J4101 J4110 J4105 J4104
Duplex driver PCA

J4106 J4107 J4108
J4109 J4103 J4102
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
IOTR
IOTT
GND
GND
REVS
+3.3VA
/RESET
TFAN_FG
+5VA
TFANON
TFANLK
GND
J2304D
FLASH_DAT
FLASH_CLK
FLASH_MODE
DUPFANLK
DUPFANON
4 3 2 1
J2305
DVMOUTA
DVMOUTA/
DVMOUTB
DVMOUTB/
DTMOUTA
DTMOUTA/
DTMOUTB
DTMOUTB/
1 2 3 4 J2304DH 3 2 1
+24VB
J2304L
REVSLON
J3001DH
Duplex feed assy
J3001D SR301 123 1 2
SL
4 3 2 1 SL301
FM301
A
1 2 3 4
J3001LH 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J3001L J1773 J1772

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
123 M M
M302 M303
FM302
Duplex switch back assy
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
PS3306 PS3305
1 2 3 J921 1 2 3 J919
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J931LH
J903 J931L
3
J928L J928D
2
3
1
J920LH
PS3301
J920L
2
6 5 4 3 2 1
3
J920D 1 2 3 4 5 6
D
J928LH
+24V
+24V
PGND
PGND
+3.3V
TMG1
FDR_CMD
FDR_STS
FDR_CLK
GND
TMG2
TMG3
DOPEN_L
GND
+3.3U
PATHS_L
GND
+3.3U
+3.3U 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
GND J3011 J3001 J3002 J3016
2
OUTS
J3006
3
2
DOPEN_R
2
GND
1
1
SW3301
J929D
J917L
J917D J3201_L
PS3203_L
GND
1
7
2
PSNS_L
2
6
J906L
3
PLVL1_L
3
J3015
J906D
4
PLVL2_L
PS3201_R
4
4
J3201_R +3.3U
5
PS3202_L
+3.3U
1
5
5
1
3
PLVL2_R
4
/PICK_SL_L
4
2
PLVL1_R
3
+24V
3
1
PSNS_R J917LH
2
GND
PS3202_R
5
1
PS3201_L
1
+3.3U C
6
GND
7
J906LH
PATHS_R
J3005
8
+24V J915LH
PS3203_R
/PICK_SL_R
10 9
1
2
2
J907L
J907D
SL
2
1
1
J908
3
SL3302
J915D
J915L
2
1
PS3302
J907LH
HCI controller PCA

J909L J909D AOUT1
1
AOUT2
1
1
2
J3014
BOUT1
M
SL
1
2
2
3
BOUT2
M3304
SL3301
J916
J909LH
BOUT2
4
BOUT1
J910
M
AOUT2
2
AOUT1
M3301
J3004
N.C. B
7
PVOL2_L
6
GND J934L
5
J3018
+3.3U
J932L J934D J935
4
PVOL1_L
1
J933 J932D
1
+3.3U GND
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
GND +3.3U
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
1
PS3309
PVOL1_R
1
+3.3U
PS3308
4
J934LH
GND
5
J932LH
6
PVOL2_R
J3008
AOUT1
1
BOUT2
4
AOUT2
2
BOUT1
3
BOUT1
M
M
3
AOUT2
2
BOUT2
J3003
J3007 J3017
M3303
J3010 J3020
J3013
M3302
4
AOUT1
1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+3.3U
+3.3U
+3.3V
+3.3V
SIZE_R
SIZE_L
/RESET
FL_CLK
/RESET
FL_CLK
IOT_RXD
IOT_TXD
FL_MODE
FL_DATA
IOT_RXD
IOT_TXD
FL_MODE
FL_DATA
CSTOPEN_R
CSTOPEN_L
J911D J913D
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 A
J911L
1 2 3 4 5 J913L 1 2 3 4 5
J913LH
J911LH
J912 J904 J914 J922

2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
2 1 2 1
Figure 2-67 General circuit diagram, high-capacity input (HCI) feeder
SW3302 PS3303 SW3303 PS3304

6 5 4 3 2 1
PI104 PI123
PI117
M110 M106 M101 M102 SL104 SL103 SL102 SL101
3 2 1
3 2 1 PI103
3 2 1 J2002 3 2 1 SL SL SL SL
3 2 1 3 2 1
M M M M
PI105 PI102 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J1002
3 2 1
J1005
4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 PI101 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1009 J1011
J1010
D
J1008
3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 J1016L
J1004
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2
J1003
J1001
MT1007 MT2002
J1006
2 1
J1012L J1014L
J1013L
J1012DH 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 J2001L J1014DH
J1007L 2 1 2 1 2 1
J1016D
J1016DH
1 2 3
3 2 1 J2001DH J1012D
J1007DH
J1014D
3 2 1
J2001D
J1013DH
J1013D
J1007D

1 2
J1015DH
J1015L
2 1
MT1006 MT2001
J1015D
+5VR
+5V
CHANGE-A
CHANGE-A*
CHANGE-B
CHANGE-B*
S-GND
G-CHANGE-HP-SEN
S-GND
UP-COVER-SEN
+5VR
S-GND
INLET-SEN
SWG-M-A*
SWG-M-A
SWG-M-B
SWG-M-B*
INLET-M-A*
INLET-M-A
INLET-M-B
INLET-M-B*
BIND-M-A*
BIND-M-A
BIND-M-B
BIND-M-B*
BUFF-P-SL-ON
+24V
DELIV-ROL-SL-ON
+24V
BUFF-ROL-SL-ON
+24V
INLET-ROL-SL-ON
+24V
+5VR
S-GND
SWG-HP-SEN
+5VR
S-GND
TIMMING-SEN
+5VR
S-GND
F-COVER-SEN
+5VR
S-GND
SWG-HIGHT-SEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3 J24 J17 J19
J2 J1

J11 J29 J13 J20 J7WH
J14
2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 J7B 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J7A
2 1
B
MT1003
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5VR
+5VR
P-GND
P-GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
PWRON
CAN-L
CAN-H
S-GND
P-GND
UPTRY-FG
SPD-UP*
TRY-M-CLK
UPPER-M-ON
BIND-CL-SL
SWG-MSW-ON
STP-MSW-ON
MT1010
UPTRY-M-LOCK
END1
UPTRY-M-CW/CCW
UPTRY-PAPER-SEN
UPTRY-AREA-SEN3
UPTRY-AREA-SEN2
UPTRY-AREA-SEN1
UPPER-TRY-MSW-ON
FG
1 2
CL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J823 MT1002
1 2 3
J1021 J981 A
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6
CL102
2 1
J1020
M
Output bin 1 shift
2
J1018 2 1
J1019 2 1 PI111
2
area sensor M107
Figure 2-68 General circuit diagram, finishing accessories (1 of 5)
N.C
2
PCA
1
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J1017
1
J1017A MSW103 MT1011
1
MSW102
MSW104
Drawer connectors
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
Staple assy PI116

M41
Output bin 2 M105
M108 M
PI112 shift area M 3 2 1
J1028 2 1 J1030
1 2 3
sensor PCA J1029
M 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1027 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5
J1981
3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
MSW101
J824
2
J1026 D
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
J993 1 2 J1031
MT1005
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
J995 J994
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Staple PCA 2
STP-M-CCW
STP-M-CCW
STP-M-CCW
STP-M-CW
STP-M-CW
STP-M-CW
STPSFT-M-B*
STPSFT-M-B
STPSFT-M-A
STPSFT-M-A*
S-GND
STP-LS
STP-READY
STP-HP-SEN
+5V
STP-INFERE-SEN
S-GND
+5VR
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
J992
Staple PCA 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LOWTRY-M-CW/CCW
LOWTRY-PAPER-SEN
LOWTRY-AREA-SEN1
LOWTRY-AREA-SEN2
LOWTRY-AREA-SEN3
MT1004 J991 C
LOWTRY-M-LOCK
LOWTRY-M-ON
LOWTRY-FG
TRY-M-CLK
To saddle controller PCA
+5VR
N,C
N,C
N,C
F-COVER- MSW -ON
+24VU
P-GND
P-GND
+24V
+24V
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
+5VR
S-GND
S-GND
J5
J8A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J8B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2
J8WH J30 J15 J12 J10
+5V
+5VR
S-GND
STP-LS
STP-READY
STP-M-CW
STP-M-CW
STP-M-CCW
STP-M-CCW
STP-HP-SEN
STPSFT-M-A*
STPSFT-M-A
STPSFT-M-B
STPSFT-M-B*
STP-INFERE-SEN
J4B J4WH J4A
Stacker controller PCA J6B J6WH J6A
J18
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+24V
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
FJOG-M-B*
FJOG-M-B
FJOG-M-A*
FJOG-M-A
RJOG-M-B*
RJOG-M-B
RJOG-M-A*
RJOG-M-A
ASSIST-M-A
ASSIST-M-B*
ASSIST-M-B
FJOG-HP-SEN
RJOG-HP-SEN
SHUT-HP-SEN
ASSIST-M-A*
JOGTRY-P-SEN
SHUT-CL-ON
ASSIST-HP-SEN
STPSFT-HP-SEN
J1040DA
UPPER-TRY-P-SEN
LOW-TRY-P-SEN
J1032DB J1040DB J1040DWH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J3000D
J1032DWH J1032DA 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J1040LWH
J1040LH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J3000LH
J1032LWH J1040LA
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1040LB J3000L
J1032LH
J1032LA
J1032LB
1 2 3 4 5 6
J1041D
J1041DH
J1046D 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1041L
1 2
J1046DH
2 1
J1046L
J1045 J1044
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
J1043 J1042 J3001

J1033 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
J1035 J1034 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 PI110 PI113 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 5 4 3 2 1
CL
J1038
1 2 3
M M M
PI114 PI115 PI120
1 2 3 CL101
J1036 M103 M104 M109
A
1 2 3
1 2 3
PI106
PI109
J1039 J1037
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
PI108 PI107

6 5 4 3 2 1
1
S-GND
1
2
+5V
2
9 10 11
3
J9A FEED-M-A
3
8
4
FEED-M-A J801A
4
7
J804A 5
FEED-M-B
5
6
6
FEED-M-B
6
5
7
FEED-M-I0
7
4
8
FEED-M-I1
8
3

FEED-M-STBY
2
9 10
OCP*
1
J801WH
9 10
1
S-GND J804WH
1
2
Stacker controller PCA PCH-OUT Common driver PCA To punch controller PCA
2
J9WH
3
PCH-RXD
3
C
9 10 11
4
PCH-TXD
4
8
5
PCH-IN
5
7
6
S-GND
6
6
J801B J804B
7
S-GND
7
5
8
TAIL-EDGE-SEN2
8
4
J9B +5V
3
9 10
9 10
1
2
J805
1
3
J802 J803
2
2
J16
4 3 2 1
1
1
J32 B
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SUDDLE-TEMAE-B
SUDDLE-TEMAE-B
SUDDLE-TEMAE-A
SUDDLE-TEMAE-A
J806 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
M
M113
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
PI17
J138DH J135DH
1
PI21 PI16 J138L J135D
S-GND
2
+24V
1
1
3 2 1
2
1
SUDDL-DL-TXD
3
3 2 1 J132 SDL-INRET-SL SL5
2
2
SL
1
2
SUDDL-DL-RXD 3 2 1 3 2 1
4
+5V
3
3 2 1 3 2 1
J131
5
To stacker controller PCA J308 S-GND J135L
4
9 10 11 12
SDL-MD J308H 1 2 3 4 J133
6
J130 INRET-ROLL-SEN
SJ120
5
8
SDL-RESET 4 3 2 1
3
J208
7
1
L-GND
3
3
6
7
+5V
8
2
MAIN-TXD PI22
2
2
7
6
1
3
OCP*
1
1 D
8
5
J133H
MAIN-RXD J136 J137
4
OCP-OUT
3
7
+24V
+5V
S-GND
SDL-FOLD-HP
2
6
L-GND
J107
1
9 10 11 12
5
+5V
RESET
MD
TXD
RXD
S-GND
1
+5V
S-GND
SDL-STP-UNIT
+5V
S-GND
SDL-VER-PASS
1
4
2
PI1 J138D
To stacker controller PCA
2
3
3
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
2
J403 J203 SJ22 SJ18 SJ13 SJ19 SJ21 SJ2
1
1
3
1
+5V J703L Paper sensor PCA
2
2
PI3
2
2
SDL-THRUST-CLK
3
3
1
3
S-GND PI18
J303
J102 J303H SDL-EJCT-COVER
9 10 11 12
S-GND J304
1
J204
1
8
J304H 3 2 1
+5V +5V
2
2
1
PI4
7
5
5
+5V SDL-A3-EDGE-SEN PI19
3
SJ11
3
2
6
4
4
SDL-FOLD-CLK SDL-B4-EDGE-SEN
3
J309H
5
3
3
J101 J209 S-GND SDL-A4R-EDGE-SEN
4
3 2 1
4
2
2
J309
1
1
SDL-JOG-HP S-GND
3
1
5
3
1
1
PI20
2
2
S-GND
2
2
PI5
2
J123
3
3
+5V
1
3
1
1
3 2 1
2
J124
3
3
3
J704 J139L PI9
2
2
4
P-GND SJ10 C
2
1
1
2
2
2
SJ1
5
To stacker controller PCA +24V
1
1
+5V
1
1
6
J139D
S-GND
7
SDL-INRET-COVER J225 J325
8
Saddle stitcher controller PCA J125 J225H J325H J425
1
1
J111
4
4
J305 J205 J525
2
3
+5V
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
S-GND
2
3
3
PI11
2
2
2
2
2
2
MSW3 SJ4
2
SDL-EJECT-SENS
3
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
+5V J126
1
4
33
S-GND
3
J108
22
SDL-THRUST-MTR-CCW SDL-SEMICIRCLE-HP PI12
2
2
4
1
M8
M
1
SDL-THRUST-MTR-CW +5V J127
1
1
3
3
SJ23
3
SDL-FOLD-MTR-CCW S-GND
8
SJ9
2
2
2
SDL-FOLD-MTR-CW PI13
3
J112 SDL-GUIDE-HP
1
1
1
J128
2
2
+5V
M
3
M2
3
1
1
S-GND
2
2
SDL-THRUST-HP
PI14
1
1
J114
+5V
3
3
SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-B*
1
1
S-GND
2
2
SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-A*
2
2
SDL-THRUST-TOP
PI15
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-COM
3
3
J105
M
M4 SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-COM
4
J129
4
1
+5V
9 10 11 12
1
3
3
3
SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-B
5
5
2
S-GND
8
2
2
2
PI8
2
SDL-PAPER-POS-MTR-A
6
6
SDL-PAPER-SEN
7
3
3
1
1
1
SDL-JOG-MTR-B*
1
SJ7
1
+5V
6
4
SJ6 J201
SDL-JOG-MTR-A*
2
J301
2
S-GND
5
B
5
SDL-JOG-MTR-COM J301H
3
3
S-PAPERPOS-HP
4
6
M
M5 SDL-JOG-MTR-COM
4
4
+5V
3
7
SDL-JOG-MTR-B
5
5
S-GND
2
SJ8 SJ15 SJ5 SJ12
8
SDL-JOG-MTR-A
6
6
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 STRY-PAPER-SEN
1
9
J113
SDL-GUIDE-M-A
SDL-GUIDE-M-B
J134
+24V
+24V
+24V
SDL-GUIDE-M-COM
1
S-GND
S-GND
6
3
3
SDL-GUIDE-M-COM PI7
2
5
2
2
SDL-GUIDE-M-A* J100
3
4
1
1
SDL-GUIDE-M-B*
4
1
3
3
3
3
5
2
PI6
2
2
2
2
SDL-2FLAP-SL
SDL-1FLSP-SL
Stitcher assy (rear)

SDL-PICKUP-SL
6
3
1
1
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
SDL-REAR-STP-CW
SDL-REAR-STP-CW
SDL-REAR-STP-HP
1 J502
SDL-REAR-STP-CCW
SDL-REAR-STP-CCW
SDL-REAR-STP-NDL
SDL-FRONT-STP-CW
SDL-FRONT-STP-CW
SDL-FRONT-STP-HP
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 J202 J402
SW4 J119 J302
SDL-FRONT-STP-CCW
SDL-FRONT-STP-CCW
SDL-FRONT-STP-NDL
JD2B JD1B J302H J402H
J316 M
1
1
7
1
SW5 2 J117D M3
2
6
2
3
1 2
5
3
4
2 1
4
J117DH
1
M6
M
3
J117L
2
J118D J115D
SDL-FEED-M-B*
SDL-FEED-M-B
SDL-FEED-M-A*
SDL-FEED-M-A
6
2
6
7
1 2
1
7
J116D 1 2 3 4
2 1
J116DH 4 3 2 1
1
7
1
1 1 2
2 J118DH
2
SW6 A
6
J115DH
2
2 1
J118L
J115L
3
5
3
2 1
4
1 J116L 2 1
4
4
2
SL
SW7
5
SL
3
5
SL2 4 3 2 1
2 1
6
2
SL1
6
SL
7
M
1
1
7
M7
M
SL4
2
JD2H JD1H
J315 JD2A M1
JD1A
Stitcher assy (front)

6 5 4 3 2 1
M62
Punch
M
Punch LED
photosensor M63
PI63 PCA M61
PI61 PI62 PCA
4 3 2 1
J610L M
4 3 2 1 J614 J615
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M 1 2 3 4 5 6
J610D J611 J612 J613 J619 D
2 1
J620 2 1

B*
B
A
A*
B*
B
A*
A
REG_HP_SEN
GND
+5R
+5R
PUNCH_CLK_SEN
GND
+5R
PUNCH_HP_SEN
GND
GND
A3 LED
B4 LED
A4R LED
B5R LED
TAIL EDGE LED
GND
+5R
A3 PTR
B4 PTR
A4R PTR
B5R PTR
TAIL EDGE PTR
PCH-M-CCW*
PCH-M-CW*
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 C
J605A J605WH J605B J603 J604
J32
1
7
2
6
3
5
To stacker controller PCA
4
4
5
3
6
2
Punch controller PCA
7
1
J1
J607B J607WH J607A J601 J602 J606

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
B
+5V
+5V
+5R
GND
OCP*
+24V
+24V
+24V
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
S-GND
P-GND
PCH-IN
OCP-OUT
PCH-TXD
PCH-RXD
PCH-OUT
DUST PT
FEED-M-B
FEED-M-A
DUST LED
FEED-M-I1
FEED-M-I0
FEED-M-B*
FEED-M-A*
FEED-M-STB*
UP-COVER-SW
TAIL-EDGE-SEN2
FRONT-COVER-SW
J622 J621
1 2 3 1 2 3
2
3
NO NC
2
3
NO NC
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
4 3 2 1
COM
A
COM
1
J804B J804WH J804A J805 J618

MSW62 MSW61
Punch chip
To common driver PCA box full

sensor PCA
ENWW
Internal print-quality test pages
Print-quality troubleshooting pages
Use the print-quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
NOTE: To get further assistance in print-quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/

colorljM855 or www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880 and select PQ Troubleshooting Tools.
button.
Troubleshooting
Print Quality Pages
Print PQ Troubleshooting Page
3. Touch the Print button. The product prints a print-quality troubleshooting procedure page and a
black print-quality troubleshooting page.
Follow the instructions on the print-quality troubleshooting procedure page.
Figure 2-73 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure page
Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure

Page 1

Figure 2-74 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page
Yellow
Green
Figure 2-75 Yellow comparison page
Green
Yellow
Yellow cannot be easily seen unless combined with cyan, so half of each page is yellow and the other
half is an amplified version of yellow problems (green half). Compare the yellow on page one with the
corresponding green on page two for defects. You can also check the cyan page for defects.

Figure 2-76 Black print-quality troubleshooting page
1. Grids The grids are in inches and millimeters. They are labeled
with letters and numbers so that defects can be described by
position and by distance between repeats.
2. Color plane registration (CPR) bars After printing, the box with no extra color in each area on
each page shows how far off the CPR of that color is. Each
page has two process direction areas and three scan
direction areas that are labeled x and y and 111. The page
should be fed by the long edge. Each square from the center
equals 42 microns.
3. Color ramp patches Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the image
drum or offset in the fuser.

Fuser test page
Use the fuser test page to evaluate problems with fuser print quality.
button.
Troubleshooting
Print Quality Pages
Fuser Test Page
3. Touch the Print button.

Cleaning page
button.
Calibration/Cleaning
Cleaning Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the page.
4. The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
Enable and configure auto cleaning

Use the procedure in this section to enable and configure the automatic cleaning function.
To enable the auto cleaning function

button.
Auto Cleaning
3. Select the Enable item, and then touch the Save button.
To configure the auto cleaning function

button.
3. Open one the following menus:
Cleaning Interval
Default setting: 1000 pages
Auto Cleaning Size
Default setting: Letter
4. After selection an option item, touch the Save button

Print configuration page
Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you print a configuration page. In addition to
the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or
to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and product
languages.
button.
Reports

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
4. Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to
print the pages.
NOTE: The View button is available only on the M880 product.
Figure 2-77 Configuration page
HP Laserjet M855
1 HP Laserjet M855
4
HP Laserjet M855
1 Device information
2 Installed personalities and options
3 HP Web services
4 Memory
5 Event log

6 Security
7 Paper trays and options
HP embedded Jetdirect page

The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following
information.
Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates: I/O Card Ready.
Figure 2-78 HP embedded Jetdirect page
HP Laserjet M855
1 4
5
2
6
3
1 General Information indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port
configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.
2 Security Settings information

3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors
received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.
4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address
5 IPv4 information
6 IPv6 information

Finding important information on the configuration pages
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is
especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages.
Table 2-58 Important information on the configuration pages
Type of information Specific information Configuration page
Firmware date codes DC controller Look on the main configuration page,

under Device Information.
When you use the remote firmware upgrade
procedure, all of these firmware Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page,
components are upgraded. under Device Information.
HP embedded Jetdirect firmware Look on the HP embedded Jetdirect

version page, under General Information.
Accessories and internal storage Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page,
under Installed Personalities and
All optional devices that are installed on the Options. Shows model and ID.
product should be listed on the main
configuration page. Total RAM Look on the main configuration page,
under Memory.
In addition, separate pages print for the
optional paper handling devices and the fax Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page,
accessory. These pages list more detailed under Paper Trays and Options.
information for those devices.
Finishing accessories Installed finishing accessory type Look on the main configuration page,
under Paper Trays and Options.
Engine cycles and event logs Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page,
under Device Information.
Total page counts and maintenance kit
counts are important for ongoing product
maintenance.
The configuration page lists only the three

most recent errors. To see a list of the 50
most recent errors, print an event log from
the Diagnostics menu.
Event log information Event log information Look on the main configuration page,
under Event Log.

Color band test
The color-band test page shows bands of colors that can indicate whether the product is producing
colors correctly.
button.
Troubleshooting
Print Quality Pages
Color Band Test
3. Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to
print the pages.
NOTE: The View button is available only on the M880 product.

Print-quality troubleshooting tools
Repetitive defects ruler
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems.
Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between
identical defects and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect
41 mm Primary charging roller1
47 mm Developing roller1
50 mm Registration roller
73 mm Secondary transfer (T2) roller
75 mm Fuser sleeve
94 mm Pressure roller
and/or
Photosensitive drum1
1 The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developing roller cannot be cleaned because they are internal
assemblies in the toner cartridge. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the toner cartridge.
Calibrate the product to align the colors

Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality
problems, calibrate the product.
button.
Full Calibration
3. Touch the Start button to start the calibration process.
4. Wait while the product calibrates, and then try printing again.

Control-panel menus
Administration menu
You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web
Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product
IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.
Reports menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports
menu.
Table 2-59 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
Administration menu and the
View selected values for each setting.
Current Settings Page Print Print a summary of the current

settings for the product. This
View might be helpful if you plan to
make changes and need a
record of the present
configuration.
Configuration Page Print Shows the product settings and

installed accessories.
View
Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the supplies;
View reports statistics on total number
of pages and jobs processed,
serial number, page counts, and
maintenance information.
HP provides approximations of
the remaining life for the
supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might
be different from the
approximations provided.
Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes

that have passed through the
View product; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome,
or color; and reports the page
count.
File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and folder
name for files that are stored in
View the product memory.
Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the product.
View

Table 2-59 Reports menu (continued)
Fax Reports (M880 only) Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that
have been sent from or received
View by this product.
Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are

blocked from sending faxes to
View this product.
Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have
been set up for this product.
View
Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax

operation, either sent or
View received.
Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.
RGB Samples Print Prints color samples for different

RGB values. Use the samples
as a guide for matching printed
colors.
CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different

CMYK values. Use the samples
as a guide for matching printed
colors.
PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.
PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

General Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-60 General Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date and
time and to configure
YYYY/MMM/DD date/time settings.
Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the product uses
24 hours to show the date and
time, for example 12-
hour format or 24-
hour format.
Date/Time Time Zone Select the time zone

from a list.
Date Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.
Time Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.
Adjust for Daylight Checkbox If you are in an area

Savings that uses daylight
savings time, select
the Adjust for
Daylight Savings
box.

Table 2-60 General Settings menu (continued)
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure the
events displays. product to
M880 product Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep at
Delete specific times on
specific days. Using
this feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.
Event Type Wake Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
Sleep event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep event.
Event Time
Event Days Select days of the week

from a list.
Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number of

Settings Off After minutes minutes after which
the product enters
Default = 60 minutes Sleep or Auto Off
mode. Use the arrow
buttons on the
control panel to
increase or decrease
the number of
minutes.
Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
Network port
Power button only
Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep/Auto Off Enabled* Enable or disable the
Settings Timer product sleep or auto
M855 product Disabled off function.
Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number of

Off After minutes minutes after which
the product enters
Default = 60 minutes Sleep or Auto Off
mode. Use the arrow
buttons on the
control panel to
increase or decrease
the number of
minutes.

Print Quality Adjust Color Highlights Cyan -5 to 5 Use to set the

default print-quality
Magenta values and to trigger
cleaning actions for
Yellow optimum print
quality. If you are
Black using specific types
of paper or placing
Default the product in
extreme
environments, you
might need to make
adjustments in this
menu.
Highlights are the

brightest color-
values in an image.
For each color,
select a setting to
adjust the darkness
or lightness of
highlights on the
printed page.
Decrease the value
to lighten the
highlights. Increase
the value to darken
the highlights.
Default: Resets all

the color-density
settings to the
factory default
values.
Midtones Cyan -5 to 5 Midtones are the

middle-range color
Magenta values in an image.
For each color,
Yellow select a setting to
adjust the darkness
Black or lightness of
midtones on the
printed page.
Decrease the value
to lighten the
midtones. Increase
the value to darken
the midtones.

Shadows Cyan -5 to 5 Shadows are the

darkest color values
Magenta in an image. For
each color, select a
Yellow setting to adjust the
darkness or
Black lightness of shadows
on the printed page.
Default Decrease the value
to lighten the
shadows. Increase
the value to darken
the shadows.
Default: Resets all

the color-density
settings to the
factory default
values.
Image Registration Adjust Tray <X> Print Test Page Shift the margin
alignment to center
the image on the
page from top to
bottom and from left
to right. You can also
align the image on
the front with the
image printed on the
back.
Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for each
tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides in
the X and Y
directions so you can
determine which
adjustments are
necessary. You can
adjust values for X1
Shift, X2 Shift, Y1
Shift, and Y2 Shift.
Use the Print Test

Page option to print
a page to test the
image registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X and
Y directions so you
can determine which
adjustments are
necessary.

X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm The direction that is

perpendicular to the
Y1 Shift way the paper
passes through the
X2 Shift product is referred to
as X. This is also
Y2 Shift known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page or
for the second side
of a two-sided page.
X2 is the scan
direction for the first
side of a two-sided
page.
The direction that the

paper feeds through
the product is
referred to as Y. Y1
is the feed direction
for a single-sided
page or for the
second side of a
two-sided page. Y2
is the feed direction
for the first side of a
two-sided page.

Auto Sense Mode Tray 1 Sensing Full sensing Use the Auto Sense
Mode feature to
Expanded sensing* configure which
paper types the
Transparency Only product should
automatically sense.
The following
settings are
available:
Full sensing: Use

this setting if you
don't want media
type misprints and
can accept slower
performance and
possible decreased
cartridge life.
Expanded sensing:
The product senses
only the first page
and assumes the
rest of the pages are
the same type.
Transparency Only:
The product senses
only the first page.
The product
distinguishes
transparencies from
other paper types.
Tray X Sensing Expanded sensing* When configuring

the Auto Sense
Transparency Only Mode option for Tray
1 and Tray 2, the
<x> variable
represents the
highest number of
trays installed on the
product.
Adjust Paper Types Select from a list of Print Mode Select from a list of print Changing the Print
paper types that the modes. Mode setting is
product supports. usually the first thing
The available to try to resolve print-
options are the quality problems.
same for each Problems can
paper type. include toner not
sticking well to the
page, a faint image
of the page repeated
on the same or
following page,
incorrect gloss level,
etc.

Resistance Mode Normal Use this setting to

correct print quality
Up problems in low-
humidity
Down environments and
highly resistive
paper. Use the Up
option to solve print
quality problems that
are related to poor
toner-transfer. Use
the Down option in
the event that small,
pin-hole defects
occur.
Humidity Mode Normal Use this setting to

M880 only Alternate 1 problems in high
humidity
Alternate 2 environments. Use
the alternate settings
Alternate 3 if you are in a high
humidity
environment and you
are seeing problems
with low toner
density on the first
page of a job.
Line Detail Normal
M880 only Alternate 1
Off
Separation Mode Normal* Use the Alternate

setting when you are
M855 only Alternate having problems with
light-weight paper
during duplex print
jobs.
Pre-Rotation Off
Mode
On*
M855 only
Fuser Temp Mode Up Use this feature to

eliminate ghost
M855 only Down images on printed
pages.
Normal*
Paper Curl Mode Normal* Use this setting to

reduce paper curl in
M855 only Alternate 1 print jobs.
Alternate 2
Alternate 3

Optimize Normal paper Standard* Use to optimize

various print modes
Smooth that address print
quality issues.
Use the Smooth

setting to correct
print quality
problems when
using very smooth
paper of normal
weight.
Heavy paper Standard* Use this setting to

Smooth problems when
using very smooth,
heavyweight paper
129-216 g/m2 (32-58
lb). The Smooth
setting should be
used if you are
having print quality
problems with very
smooth, heavy
paper.
Envelope control Normal* If envelopes are

sticking together in
Reduced Temp the output bin, use
this setting to reduce
the fuser
temperature.
Environment Normal* Enable if the product

is operating in a low
M880 only Low Temp temperature
environment and you
are having problems
with print quality
such as blisters in
the printed image.
Line Detail Normal* Use this setting if

you have scattered
M855 only Alternate 1 lines in printed
pages.
Off

Tray 1 Normal* Affects how often the

product performs an
Alternate internal cleaning
procedure. Use the
Alternate setting if
you are having
problems with extra
toner on pages. In
this mode, the
product performs the
cleaning procedure
after each job that is
printed from Tray 1.
Using this mode
increases wear on all
the toner cartridges.
Background Normal* Use if pages are

printing with a
Alternate 1 shaded background.
Using this feature
Alternate 2 might reduce gloss
levels. Use the
Alternate 3 Alternate 1 setting if
you are seeing a
shaded background
on the entire page.
Use the Alternate 2
setting if you are
seeing thin vertical
lines on the
background. The
Alternate 3 setting
applies the Alternate
1 setting and the
Alternate 2 setting at
the same time. Use
this setting if the first
two settings do not
correct the problem.

Uniformity control Normal* This setting might

help correct
Alternate 1 uniformity in print
quality issues, such
Alternate 2 as a mottled
appearance due to
Alternate 3 poor transfer of toner
onto the page. The
Alternate 1 setting
increases the T1
transfer bias and can
be used for any
media type. The
Alternate 2 setting
decreases the fuser
temperature and
reduces the
throughput. Use this
setting if you are
experiencing mottled
output due to poor
fusing on normal or
light paper types.
The Alternate 3
setting applies the
Alternate 1 setting
and the Alternate 2
setting at the same
time. Use this setting
if the first two
settings do not
Tracking control On* Normally, this setting

should be set to On.
Off Tracking control
algorithm is turned
ON/OFF. It is not
expected that the
customer will ever
need to change this
setting.
Registration Normal* Use this setting if

you are having
Alternate trouble with color-
planes shifting or
overlapping on the
page. Use the
Alternate setting if
you are seeing color
mis-registration
problems.

Transfer control Normal* Use this setting to

correct transfer
Alternate 1 issues in print jobs.
Turn this feature on
Alternate 2 if green, mottled
images are printed
Alternate 3 on the page. Note
that using this mode
can increase
problems with blurry
images or specks of
toner on the leading
or trailing edge of the
paper. The Alternate
1 setting reduces the
T1 bias and should
be used when re-
transfer occurs. The
Alternate 2 setting
increases the inter-
page gap. Using this
setting reduces
throughput and
might decrease the
print-cartridge life.
The Alternate 3
setting applies the
Alternate 1 setting
and the Alternate 2
setting at the same
time. Use this setting
if the first two
settings do not
Fuser Temp Normal* If you are seeing a

faint image of the
Alternate page repeated at the
bottom of the page
or on the following
page, you should
first make sure the
Adjust Paper Types
setting and the Print
Mode setting are
correct for the type
of paper you are
using. If you
continue to see
ghost images on
your print jobs, set
the Fuser Temp
feature to the
Alternate setting.
Restore Optimize Use to return all the

settings in the
Optimize menu to
the factory-default
values.

Resolution Image Ret 3600 Sets the resolution at

which the product
61200 x 1200dpi prints.
Edge control Off This setting

determines how
Light edges are rendered.
Edge Control has
Normal* two components:
adaptive half-toning
Maximum and trapping.
Adaptive half-toning
increases edge
sharpness. Trapping
reduces the effect of
color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly.
Select one of the
following options:
Off: Turns off both

trapping and
adaptive half-toning.
Light: Sets trapping

at a minimal level,
and adaptive half-
toning is on.
Normal: Trapping is
at a medium level
and adaptive half-
toning is on.
Maximum: Trapping
is at the highest
level, and adaptive
half-toning is on.

Jam Recovery Auto* This product

provides a jam
Off recovery feature that
reprints jammed
On pages. Select one of
the following options:
Auto: The product

attempts to reprint
jammed pages when
sufficient memory is
available. This is the
default setting.
Off: The product

does not attempt to
reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used to
store the most recent
pages, performance
is optimal.
NOTE: When using

this option, if the
product runs out of
paper and the job is
being printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.
On: The product

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory is
allocated to store the
last few pages
printed. This might
cause a decrease in
overall performance.
Auto Recovery Enabled The product

attempts to reprint
Disabled* jammed pages when
sufficient memory is
available. This is the
default setting.

Manage Stored Sort Stored Jobs By Job Name* This option allows
Jobs you list the jobs
Date either alphabetically
or chronologically.
Quick Copy Job Off* Sets a maximum

Held Timeout storage-time limit for
1 Hour stored Quick Copy
and Proof and Hold
4 Hours jobs. If a stored job
is not printed during
1 Day this period, it is
deleted.
1 Week
Quick Copy Job 1-100 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs that
Default = 32 are stored in the
product memory.
The Quick Copy Job

Storage Limit feature
specifies the number
of Quick Copy and
Proof and Hold jobs
that can be stored on
the product. The
maximum allowed
value is 100.
Default Folder Type the name for

Name the stored jobs folder
that is accessible to
all users.
Enable Retrieve Enabled Enables the product

from USB to open a file from a
Disabled* USB drive.

Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature if

you want to prevent
Disabled print jobs from
starting while a user
is initiating a copy
job from the control
panel. Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.
Restore Factory Address Book (M880 Use to restore all

Settings only) product settings to
their factory defaults.
Copy (M880 only)
Digital Send (M880

only)
E-mail (M880 only)
Fax (M880 only)
General (M880 only)
Print (M880 only)
Security (M880 only)
Cancel (M855)
Reset (M855)

Copy Settings menu (M880 only)
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy
Settings menu.
Table 2-61 Copy Settings menu (M880)

First level Second level Third level Values Description
Copies 19999 Configure the default

options for copy jobs. If
Default = 1 the user does not specify
the job options when
creating the job, the
default options are used.
Sides 1-sided original, 1-sided Use to indicate whether

output* the original document is
printed on one or both
2-sided original, 2-sided sides, and whether the
output copies should be printed
on one or both sides. For
1-sided original, 2-sided example, select 1-sided
output original, 2- sided output
when the original is
2-sided original, 1-sided printed on one side, but
output you want to make two-
sided copies.
Orientation Portrait* Specify portrait or

landscape orientation and
select the way the
second sides are printed.
Portrait orientation means

the short edge of the
page is along the top.
Landscape Landscape orientation

means the long edge of
the page is along the top.

Table 2-61 Copy Settings menu (M880) (continued)
2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making two-

sided copies, select a 2-
Flip-style sided format option.
Book-style original; Flip- Book-style: The back side

style copy of the original is printed
right-side-up, and the
Flip-style original; Book- back side of the copy is
style copy printed the same way.
Use this option for
originals and copies that
are bound along the left
edge.
Flip-style: The back side

of the original is printed
upside-down, and the
back side of the copy is
printed the same way.
Use this option for
originals and copies that
are to be bound along the
top edge.
Book-style original; Flip-

style copy: The back side
right-side-up, but the
printed upside-down. Use
this option when the
original is bound along
the left edge, but you
want the copies to be
bound along the top
edge.
Flip-style original; Book-

style copy: The back side
upside-down, but the
printed right-side-up. Use
this option when the
original is bound along
the top edge, but you
want the copies to be
bound along the left
edge.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy

should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black Prints color documents in
color, and black and
white documents in black
and white. For mixed
documents, the product
will determine whether to
print in color or black and
white.
Color: Prints documents

in color.
Black: Prints documents

in black and white.
Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more

order)* than one copy, select the
Collate on (Sets in page
Collate off (Pages order) option to assemble
grouped) the pages in the correct
order in each set of
copies.
Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same pages
together. For example, if
you are making five
copies of an original
document that has two
pages, all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would be
grouped together.
Reduce/Enlarge Scaling Auto* Use to scale the size of

the document up or
100% down. Select one of the
predefined percentages,
75% or select the Scaling field
and type a percentage
50% between 25 and 400. The
Auto option automatically
125% scales the image to fit the
paper size in the tray.
150%
NOTE: To reduce the
200%
image, select a scaling
Range X-Y (25-400%) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
image, select a scaling
percentage that is greater
than 100.

Auto Include Margins The product reduces the

image slightly to fit the
entire scanned image
within the printable area
on the page.
Paper Selection Manually feed For the best color and

image quality, select the
Automatic appropriate paper type
from the control panel
Tray 1: [Type], [Size] menu or from the print
driver.
Tray <X>: [Type], [Size]
Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the Use to improve the
slide bar, or touch overall quality of the
Automatic. copy.
Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount of
white and black in the
colors.
Contrast Select a value using the Adjust the Contrast

slide bar, or touch setting to increase or
Automatic. decrease the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the
page.
Background Cleanup Select a value using the Adjust the Background

slide bar, or touch Cleanup setting if you are
Automatic. having trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Select a value using the Adjust the Sharpness

slide bar, or touch setting to clarify or soften
Automatic. the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Default Select this to make the

selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.
Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you must
Landscape specify the way the
content of the original
document is placed on
the page. Portrait
orientation means the
short edge of the page is
along the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page is
along the top.

Output Bin Automatic
Standard Bin Correct

Order
Rear Bin Straightest Path
Optimize Text/Picture Manually adjust* Optimize For slider Use this setting to
optimize the output for a
particular type of content.
Text Manually adjust: Use to

manually optimize the
Printed picture setting for each
document.
Photograph
Printed picture: Use for
line drawings and
preprinted images, such
as magazine clippings or
pages from books. If you
see bands of irregular
color or intensity on
copies, try selecting the
Printed picture setting to
improve the quality.
Photograph: Use for

photographic prints.
Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using
Four (4) this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.
Page Order Right, then down If you are printing four

pages per sheet, select
Down, then right the page order. To print
the pages in rows, select
the Right, then down
option. To print the pages
in columns, select the
Down, then right option.
Add Page Borders If you are printing two or

more pages per sheet
and you want to print a
border around each
page, select the Add
Page Borders option.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size
that the product supports. of the original document.

Booklet Format Booklet Booklet off Use to copy two or more

pages onto one sheet of
Booklet on paper so you can fold the
sheets in the center to
form a booklet. The
product arranges the
pages in the correct
order. For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the product
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.
Original Sides 1-sided Select the 1-sided option

if the original document is
2-sided printed on only one side.
Select the 2-sided option

if the original document is
printed on two sides.
Borders on Each Page To print a border around

each page, select the
Borders on Each Page
option.
Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Use to avoid shadows

that can appear along the
Edge-to-Edge output edges of copies when the
original document is
printed close to the
edges. Combine with the
Reduce/Enlarge feature
to ensure that the entire
page is printed on the
copies. When the Edge-
to-Edge feature is turned
on, the product minimizes
margins and prints as
close to the edge of the
paper as possible.
Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine several

original documents into
Job Build on one job. Also use this
feature to scan an
original document that
has more pages than the
document feeder can
accommodate at one
time. The product
temporarily saves all the
scanned images. After
you have scanned all the
pages for the job, touch
the Finish option to finish
the job.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M880)
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Scan/
Digital Send Settings menu.
Table 2-62 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M880)

E-mail Settings E-mail Setup E-mail Setup Wizard Use to configure

settings that apply to
Default Save to NOTE: Email sending documents
Network Folder Settings only through email or
Options saving documents to
a folder on the
Default Save to USB network or on a USB
Options multi-drive.
NOTE: The same The E-mail Setup

options are available Wizard feature
for each of these configures the
features, except product to send
where noted. scanned images as
email attachments.
To open the product
HP Embedded Web
Server and set up
the email notification
server, enter the
product IP address
into a Web browser.

Table 2-62 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M880) (continued)
Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default
job options for each
Require preview function. If you do
not specify the job
Disable preview options when
creating the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the HP
Embedded Web
Server by typing the
IP address of the
product into a Web
browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the product.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Default File Name The product is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled] for
any scanned files
that are sent or
saved. Use this
feature to specify a
different default file
name. If you are
saving a file to a
network folder or
USB storage product
and a file with the
default file name
already exists, a
number is appended
to the file name, for
example,
[Untitled]001.

Document File Type Select from a list of PDF provides the

file types. best overall image
and text quality.
JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
TIFF is a standard
file format that many
graphics programs
support. This file
type produces one
file per page.
MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.
XPS (XML Paper

Specification)
creates an XML file
that preserves the
original formatting of
the document and
supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.
NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
product unless
attached to DSS.

Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Use to optimize the

Picture output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the output
for text, printed
Photograph pictures, or a
mixture.
Manually adjust: Use

to manually optimize
the setting for text or
for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Output Quality High (large file) Use to select the

quality for the
Medium* output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger file
size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some recipients
might have trouble
receiving larger files.

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the original
has portrait or
landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.
Orientation Automatically detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short
edge of the page is
along the top.
Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.

2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The

back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
the back side of the
copy is printed the
same way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
edge.
Flip-style: The back

side of the original is
printed upside-down,
and the back side of
the copy is printed
the same way. Use
this option for
originals and copies
that are to be bound
along the top edge.
Resolution 400 dpi Sets the resolution

for sent documents.
300 dpi Higher resolution
images have more
200 dpi dots per inch (dpi),
so they show more
150 dpi* detail. Lower
resolution images
75 dpi
have fewer dots per
inch and show less
detail, but the file
size is smaller.
Some file types, for
example a file that
will be processed
with OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

Content Orientation Orientation Auto Detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short
edge of the page is
along the top.
Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of the
page is along the
top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the

default style for 2-
Flip-style sided print jobs. If
the Book-style
option is selected,
page is printed the
right way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the left edge.
If the Flip-style
option is selected,
page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.

Color/Black Automatically Use to enable or

detect* disable color
scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page
has color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file
size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns

off this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at
this product.
E-mail: Select to
recieve the
notification to an
email account.
Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to receive
a thumbnail image of
the first page of the
fax in your
notification.

Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to

address receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the text
box following Email
Address, and then
type the email
address for the
notification.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.
Adjust the Darkness

decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
page.
Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting to
clarify or soften the
image. For example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.
Automatic Tone The product

automatically adjusts
the Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background
Cleanup settings to
the most appropriate
for the scanned
document.
Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine

several original
Job Build on documents into one
job. Also use to scan
an original document
that has more pages
than the document
feeder can
accommodate at
one time. The
product temporarily
saves all the
scanned images.
After you have
scanned all the
pages for the job,
touch Finish to finish
the job.
Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to automatically crop
Crop to content the scan for digital
sending. Use the
Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.
Erase Edges Use Inches Use this menu item

to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such as
dark borders or
Front side erase staple marks, by
cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the text
boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from
being included in the
output document.

Digital Send Service Allow Usage of Enabled* Configure how the

Setup Digital Sending product interacts
Software (DSS) Disabled with the HP Digital
Server Sending Software
(DSS) server. HP
DSS handles digital
sending tasks, such
as faxing, emailing,
and sending
scanned documents
to a network folder
or USB storage
device.
Use the Allow Usage

of Digital Sending
Software (DSS)
Server option to
configure the
product to use HP
DSS.
Allow Transfer to Enabled* Use the Allow

New Digital Sending Transfer to New
Software (DSS) Disabled Digital Sending
Server Software (DSS)
Server option to
specify whether DSS
management of a
product is
transferable to a
different DSS.

Fax Settings menu (M880)
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Fax
Settings menu.
Table 2-63 Fax Settings menu (M880)

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Setup Wizard Configure settings
for sending faxes
from the product.
Use the Fax Setup

Wizard feature to set
up options for faxing.
NOTE: To set up
LAN fax or Internet
fax, use the HP
Embedded Web
Server. To open the
HP Embedded Web
Server, type the
product network
address into a Web
browser. To
configure the fax
features, select the
Fax tab.
Fax Dialing Settings Fax Dial Volume Off These settings

control how the fax
Low* modem dials the
outgoing fax number
High when faxes are sent.
Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Redial Interval 1 5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fax Send Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Dialing Prefix
Detect Dial Tone
Redial on Error Range: 0 9
Default = 2
Redial on No Range: 0 2
Answer
Default = 0

Table 2-63 Fax Settings menu (M880) (continued)
Redial on Busy Range: 0 9
Default = 3
General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is

Settings Confirmation enabled, you must
Disabled* enter the fax number
twice.
PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who

have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the product from
their computers.
JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG

compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can result in
lower phone
charges. However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with older
fax machines. If this
occurs, turn off the
JBIG compression.
Error Correction Enabled* When error-

Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
product sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend or

overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Fax Number Speed Enabled Use this item to

Dial Matching match the fax
Disabled* number that you
type to numbers that
are saved as a
speed dial.

Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes Off When billing codes

are enabled, a
On* prompt displays that
asks the user to
enter the billing code
for an outgoing fax.
This prompt does
not appear if the
Allow users to edit
billing codes check
box is not checked.
You can also use

the billing codes
report in the Reports
menu to view the list
of the billing codes
that have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
product. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Default Billing Code Specify a default

billing code for
faxing. If you specify
a default billing
code, this code
displays in the Billing
Code field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code is
provided for the
user.
Minimum Length Range: 1 16 Specify the required

length of the billing
Default = 1 code. Billing codes
can be between 1
and 16 characters
long.
Allow users to edit Off

billing codes
On*

Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Use the Image
Preview feature to
Require preview scan a document
and display a
Disable preview preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the product.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes. If
you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes
might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x they could transmit
300dpi) more slowly. Some
file types, for
example a file that
will be processed
with OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might be
automatically
changed to a valid
value.

Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

document. First
select whether the
printed on one side
or both sides. Then
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape
printed on both
2-sided format that
document.
Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
placed on the page.
Portrait: This setting

means the short
edge of the page is
along the top.
Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Book-style: The

back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
copy is printed the
same way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
edge.
Flip-style: The back

side of the original is
printed upside-down,
and the back side of
the copy is printed
the same way. Use
this option for
originals and copies
that are to be bound
along the top edge.

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

completes document.

off this feature.
Notify when job

completes: Select to
for this job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
sent successfully.
Print Print: Select to print

the notification at
E-mail this product.
E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification in an
box following Email
Address, and then
enter the email
address for the
notification.
Include Thumbnail When sending an

analog fax, select
Include Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E-mail Provide the email

address address that will
receive notifications.
Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
placed on the page.
Portrait: This setting

means the short
edge of the page is
along the top.
Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.

2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the

default style for 2-
Flip-style sided print jobs. If
the Book-style
option is selected,
page is printed the
right way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the left edge.
If the Flip-style
option is selected,
page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the page size of the
product supports. original document.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.
Adjust the Darkness

decrease the
amount of white and
black in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
page.
Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting to
clarify or soften the
image. For example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The product

automatically adjusts
the Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background
Cleanup settings to
the most appropriate
for the scanned
document.
Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.
Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Optimize For Optimizes the output

Picture for a particular type
Text of content. You can
optimize the output
Printed picture for text, printed
pictures, or a
Photograph mixture.
Manually adjust: Use

to manually optimize
the setting for text or
for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Job Build Job Build off* Use to divide a

complex job into
Job Build on smaller segments.
This is useful when
you are copying or
scanning an original
document that has
more pages than the
document feeder
can hold, or when
you want to combine
pages that have
different sizes into
one job. You can
use either the glass
or the document
feeder to scan the
original documents.
Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from
being included in the
output document.
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for receiving
Low* faxes.
High
Rings To Answer Range: 16
Default = 1
Fax Receive Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Ring Interval Range: 220600 ms
Default = 600 ms
Ring Frequency Range: 1200
Default = 68hz

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have concerns

Schedule about the security of
Always print faxes* private faxes, use
this feature to store
Use Fax Printing faxes rather than
Schedule having them
automatically print.
Select Incoming Fax
Options, and then
you can choose to
always store faxes,
always print them, or
you can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.
Schedule Add (plus sign) Print incoming faxes If you are using a fax
printing schedule,
Touch this to set up Edit Store incoming use this menu to
a fax printing faxes configure when to
schedule if you Delete print faxes.
selected the Use Time
Fax Printing
Schedule option. Event Days

Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax list

Numbers Block can contain up to 30
numbers. When the
product receives a
call from one of the
blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a fax
number into the Fax
Number to Block
field, and then touch
the arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button to
delete it from the
blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch the
Delete All button to
clear all of the
numbers from the
blocked fax list.
You can also use

the Blocked Fax List
report in the
Information menu to
view the list of the
fax numbers that
have been blocked
on this product.

Default Job Options Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive

completes document.

off this feature.
Notify when job

completes: Select to
for this job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
sent successfully.
Print E-mail: Select to

receive the
E-mail* notification in an
box following Email
Address, and then
enter the email
address for the
notification.
Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to receive
a thumbnail image of
fax in your
notification.
Notification E-mail
address
Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to

Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* senders phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this product
receives.
Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger than
Disabled Letter-size or A4-
size so that they can
fit onto a Letter-size
or A4-size page. If
this feature set to
Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter or
A4 will flow across
multiple pages.

Paper Selection Automatic*
Select from a list of

the trays.
Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

document. First
select whether the
printed on one side
or both sides. Then
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape
printed on both
2-sided format that
document.
Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.
Type of Fax Job to All faxes

Forward
Sent faxes
Received faxes
Fax Forwarding
Number
Clear Fax Activity Clears all events

Log from the Fax Activity
Log list.

General Print Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General
Print Settings menu.
Table 2-64 General Print Settings menu

Manual Feed Enabled Use to enable or disable the

manual-feed feature, which
Disabled* allows the user to feed paper
into the product by hand. When
this feature is enabled, the user
can select manual feed from the
control panel as the paper
source for a job. If a tray is not
specified as part of a job,
manual feed is selected.
Courier Font Regular* Select which version of the

Courier font you want to use.
Dark The factory default setting is
Regular, which uses an average
stroke width. The Dark setting
can be used if a heavier Courier
font is needed.
Wide A4 Enabled Changes the printable area of

A4-size paper. If you enable this
Disabled* option, eighty 10-pitch
characters can be printed on a
single line of A4 paper.
Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to select

whether a PostScript (PS) error
Disabled* page is printed when the
product encounters a PS error.
Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a PDF error

page is printed when the
Disabled* product encounters a PDF error.
Personality Auto* Configures the default print

language or personality for the
PCL product. Normally you should
not change the product
POSTSCRIPT language. If you change the
setting to a specific product
PDF language, the product does not
automatically switch from one
language to another unless
specific software commands are
sent to it.

Table 2-64 General Print Settings menu (continued)
PCL Form Length Range: 5 128 Controls the PCL print-

command options. PCL is a set
Default = 60 of product commands that
Hewlett-Packard developed to
provide access to product
features.
Use the Form Length feature to

select the user-soft default
vertical form length.
Orientation Portrait* Select the orientation that is

most often used for copy or
Landscape scan originals. Select the
Portrait option if the short edge
is at the top or select the
Landscape option if the long
edge is at the top.
Font Source Internal* Selects the font source for the

user-soft default font. The list of
available options varies
depending on the installed
product options.
Font Number Range: 0 110 Specifies the font number for the
user-soft default font using the
Default = 0 source that is specified in the
Font Source menu. The product
assigns a number to each font
and lists it on the PCL font list.
The font number displays in the
Font # column of the printout.
Font Pitch Range: 0.44 99.99 If the Font Source option and
the Font Number setting indicate
Default = 10 a contour font, then use this
feature to select a default pitch
(for a fixed-spaced font).
Font Point Size Range: 4.00 999.75 If the Font Source option and
the Font Number setting indicate
Default = 12.00 a contour font, then use this
feature to select a default point
size (for a proportional-spaced
font).
Symbol Set Select from a list of symbol sets. Select any one of several
available symbol sets from the
control panel. A symbol set is a
unique grouping of all the
characters in a font. The factory
default value for this option is
PC-8. Either PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended for line-draw
characters.

Table 2-64 General Print Settings menu (continued)
Append CR to LF No* Configure whether a carriage

return (CR) is appended to each
Yes line feed (LF) encountered in
backwards-compatible PCL jobs
(pure text, no job control). Select
Yes to append the carriage
return. The default setting is No.
Some environments, such as
UNIX, indicate a new line by
using only the line-feed control
code. This option allows the
user to append the required
carriage return to each line feed.
Suppress Blank Pages No* This option is for users who are
generating their own PCL, which
Yes could include extra form feeds
that would cause blank pages to
be printed. When the Yes option
is selected, form feeds are
ignored if the page is blank.
Media Source Mapping Standard* Use to select and maintain input

trays by number when you are
Classic not using the product driver, or
when the software program has
no option for tray selection. The
following options are available:
Standard: Tray numbering is

based on newer HP LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray numbering is

based on HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Default Print Options menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Default
Print Options menu.
Table 2-65 Default Print Options menu

Number of Copies Range: 132000 Sets the default number of

copies for a copy job. This
Default = 1 default applies when the Copy
function or the Quick Copy
function is initiated from the
product Home screen.
Default Paper Size Select from a list of sizes that Configures the default paper
the product supports. size used for print jobs.
Default Custom Paper Size X Dimension Range: 38.5 inches Configures the default paper
size that is used when the user
Default = 8.5 inches selects Custom as the paper
size for a print job.
Y Dimension Range: 514 inches
Default = 14 inches
Use Inches Enabled*
Disabled
Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether the

original document is printed on
2-sided one or both sides, and whether
the copies should be printed on
one or both sides. For example,
select the 1-sided original, 2-
sided output option when the
original is printed on one side,
but you want to make two-sided
copies.
Select the Orientation setting to

specify portrait or landscape
orientation and to select the way
the second sides are printed.

Table 2-65 Default Print Options menu (continued)
2-Sided Format Book-style* Configures the default style for

2-sided print jobs. If the Book-
Flip-style style option is selected, the back
side of the page is printed the
right way up. This option is for
print jobs that are bound along
the left edge. If the Flip-style
option is selected, the back side
of the page is printed upside-
down. This option is for print
jobs that are bound along the
top edge.
Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Use to avoid shadows that can

appear along the edges of
Edge-to-Edge output copies when the original
document is printed close to the
edges.

Display Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display
Settings menu.
Table 2-66 Display Settings menu

Display Brightness Range: -10 to 10 Use to specify the intensity of

the LCD control-panel display.
The default value is 0.
Key Press Sound On* Use to specify whether you hear

a sound when you touch the
M880 only Off screen or press buttons on the
control panel.
Language Settings Language Select from a list of languages Use to select a different
that the product supports. language for control-panel
messages and specify the
default keyboard layout. When
you select a new language, the
keyboard layout automatically
changes to match the factory
default for the selected
language.
Keyboard Layout Each language has a default Select the default keyboard
keyboard layout. To change it, layout that matches the
M880 only select from a list of layouts. language you want to use.
How to Connect Button Display* Use this menu item to display or

hide the How to Connect Button
M880 only Hide on the Home screen.
Network Address Button Display* Use this menu item to display or

hide the IP address on the
M855 only Hide Home screen.
Date and Time Show Date and Time* Select whether to display or hide
the date and time on the control
M880 only Hide Date and Time panel Home screen.
Inactivity Timeout Range: 10 300 seconds Specifies the amount of time

that elapses between any
Default = 60 seconds activity on the control panel and
when the product resets to the
default settings. When the
timeout expires, the control-
panel display returns to the
Home menu, and any user
signed in to the product is
signed out.

Table 2-66 Display Settings menu (continued)
Clearable Warnings On Use this feature to set the period

that a clearable warning
Job* displays on the control panel. If
the On setting is selected,
clearable warnings appear until
the Clearable Warnings button
is pressed. If theJob setting is
selected, clearable warnings
stay on the display during the
job that generated the warning
and disappear from the display
when the next job starts.
Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 seconds)* Use this option to configure the
product behavior when the
Touch OK to continue product encounters certain
errors. If the Auto-continue (10
seconds) option is selected, the
job will continue after 10
seconds. If theTouch OK to
continue option is selected, the
job will stop and require the user
to press the OK button before
continuing.

Manage Supplies menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage
Supplies menu.
Table 2-67 Manage Supplies menu

Supplies Status Print
View (M880 only)
Supply Settings Black Cartridge Low Threshold 1-100% Set the estimated
Settings percentage at which
Default = 10% the product notifies
you when the toner
cartridge is very low.
Very Low Settings Stop Specifies how the

product notifies you
Prompt to continue* when the toner
cartridge is very low.
Continue
Stop: The product
stops until you
replace the toner
cartridge.
Prompt to continue:
The product stops
and prompts you to
replace the toner
cartridge. You can
acknowledge the
prompt and continue
printing.
Continue: The
product alerts you
that a toner cartridge
is very low, but it
continues printing.
Color Cartridges Low Threshold Cyan 1 - 100% Set the estimated

Magenta Default = 10% the product notifies
you when the toner
Yellow cartridge is very low.
You can specify a
different percentage
for each color.
Document Feeder Low Threshold 1-100% Set the percentage at

Kit Settings which the product
Default = 10% notifies you when a
M880 only document feeder kit
is needed.

Table 2-67 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
Very Low Settings Stop Configure how the

product responds
Prompt to continue* when the document
feeder kit is reaching
Continue the end of its
estimated life.
Stop: The product

stops until you
replace the document
feeder kit.
Prompt to continue:
The product stops
and prompts you to
replace the document
feeder kit. You can
acknowledge the
prompt and continue
printing
Continue: The
product alerts you
that the document
feeder kit is very low,
but it continues
printing.
Restrict Color Use Enable Use this feature to

enable, restrict, or
Disable color disable color printing
or copying.
Color if allowed*

Color/Black Mix Auto* Instructs the product

when to switch
Mostly Color Pages between color and
monochrome printing
Mostly Black Pages modes for the best
overall performance.
Auto: Uses the mode

that is appropriate for
job. If necessary, the
product switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job is
finished.
Mostly Color Pages:

The product uses
color mode for all
jobs, even if the job
contains no color
pages.
Mostly Black Pages:

The product uses
monochrome mode
until it detects a color
page. The product
switches back to
monochrome mode
when it detects a
sequence of several
monochrome pages.
Maintenance Kit Low Threshold 1-100% Set the percentage at

M855 only Settings which the product
Default = 10% notifies you when the
maintenance kit is
needed.


product responds
Prompt to continue* when the
maintenance kit is
Continue reaching the end of
its estimated life.
Stop: The product

stops until you
replace the
maintenance kit.
Prompt to continue:
The product stops
and prompts you to
replace the
maintenance kit. You
can acknowledge the
prompt and continue
printing
Continue: The
product alerts you
that the maintenance
kit is very low, but it
continues printing.
Fuser Kit Low Threshold 1-100% Set the estimated

Default = 10% the product notifies
you when the fuser is
low.

product responds
Prompt to continue* when the fuser is
reaching the end of
Continue its estimated life.
Stop: The product

stops until you
replace the fuser.
Prompt to continue:
The product stops
and prompts you to
replace the fuser.
You can
acknowledge the
prompt and continue
printing.
Continue: The
product alerts you
that the fuser is very
low, but it continues
printing.

Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage

Data menu provides
Not on supplies a way to suppress
the toner cartridges
from storing most of
the information
gathered exclusively
for the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the product.
Select the On
supplies setting to
store the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip. Select
the Not on supplies
setting to suppress
the information from
being stored on the
memory chip.
Supply Messages Low Message On* Use to configure

whether a message
Off displays on the
control panel when
supplies are getting
low, but have not yet
reached the low
threshold.
Reset Supplies New Document Reset Select this option if

Feeder Kit (M880) you have installed a
Cancel new document feeder
New Maintenance kit.
Kit (M855)

Manage Trays menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage
Trays menu.
Table 2-68 Manage Trays menu

First level Values Description
Use Requested Tray Exclusively* Controls how the product handles jobs that
have specified a specific input tray. Two
First options are available:
Exclusively: The product never selects a

different tray when the user has indicated
that a specific tray should be used, even if
that tray is empty.
First: The product pulls from another tray if

the specified tray is empty, even though the
user specifically indicated a tray for the job.
Manually Feed Prompt Always* Indicate whether a prompt should appear

when the type or size for a job does not
Unless loaded match the specified tray and the product
pulls from the multipurpose tray instead.
Two options are available:
Always: A prompt always displays before

using the multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A message displays only if

the multipurpose tray is empty.
Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether the tray configuration

message displays whenever a tray is
Do not display closed. Two options are available:
Display: Shows the tray configuration

message when a tray is closed. The user is
able to configure the tray settings directly
from this message.
Do not display: Prevents the tray

configuration message from automatically
appearing.
Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or off the control panel
prompt to select another tray when the
Disabled specified tray is empty. Two options are
available:
Enabled: When this option is selected, the

user is prompted either to add paper to the
selected tray or to choose a different tray.
Disabled: When this option is selected, the

user is not given the option of selecting a
different tray. The product prompts the user
to add paper to the tray that was initially
selected.

Table 2-68 Manage Trays menu (continued)
Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper

into the tray the same way for all print jobs,
Enabled whether you are printing to one side of the
sheet or to both sides of the sheet. When
this option is selected, load the paper as
you would for printing on both sides. See
the user documentation that came with the
product for instructions about loading
letterhead for printing on both sides. When
this option is selected, the product speed
slows to the speed required for printing on
both sides.
Duplex Blank Pages Auto* Controls how the product handles two-sided
jobs (duplexing). Two options are available:
Yes
Auto: Enables Smart Duplexing, which
instructs the product not to process blank
pages.
Yes: Disables Smart Duplexing and forces

the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even
if it is printed on only one side. This might
be preferable for certain jobs that use paper
types such as letterhead or prepunched
paper.
Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is

sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the
No product (or to print on A4 paper when a
letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper
is loaded). This option will also override A3
with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-
size paper.

Network Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Network
Settings menu.
Table 2-69 Network Settings menu
I/O Timeout Range: 5 300 sec Use to set the I/O timeout period in
seconds. I/O timeout refers to the elapsed
Default = 15 time before a print job fails. If the stream of
data that the product receives for a print job
is interrupted, this setting indicates how long
the product will wait before it reports that the
job has failed.
Jetdirect Menu See Table 2-70 Jetdirect Menu

on page 422 for details. These menus have
the same structure. If an additional
HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the
EIO slot, then both menus are available.
Table 2-70 Jetdirect Menu

Information Print Sec Report Yes Yes: Prints a page

that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is not
printed.
TCP/IP Enable On* On: Enable the TCP/

IP protocol.
Off
Off: Disable the
TCP/IP protocol.
Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to 32
host name. characters, used to
identify the product.
NPIXXXXXX* This name is listed
on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host
name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is the
last six digits of the
LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

Table 2-70 Jetdirect Menu (continued)
IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters will
be configured on the
Auto IP HP Jetdirect print
server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from a
BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the DHCP
Renew menu are
available to set
DHCP lease options.
Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this option

to the Manual
setting, use the
Manual Settings
menu to configure
TCP/IPv4
parameters.
Manual Settings IP Address Enter the address. (Available only if the

Config Method
NOTE: This menu option is set to the
is available only if Manual option.)
you select the Configure
Manual option under parameters directly
the Config Method from the product
menu. control panel.
Subnet Mask Enter the address.
Default Gateway Enter the address.

Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default to
Legacy when the print
server is unable to
obtain an IP address
from the network
during a forced TCP/
IP reconfiguration
(for example, when
manually configured
to use BootP or
DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might interfere
with a managed
network.
Auto IP: A link-local

IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The
address 192.0.0.192
is set, consistent
with older
HP Jetdirect
products.
Primary DNS Range: 0 255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0 255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Address Manual Settings Enable Use this item to

enable and manually
Address configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.

DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:

The stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server is
determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its address,
its configuration
information, or both
from a DHCPv6
server.
Router Unavailable:
If a router is not
available, the print
server should
attempt to obtain its
stateful configuration
from a DHCPv6
server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
DHCPv6 server.
Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy

provided list. server to be used by
embedded
applications in the
product. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree of
Internet security for
those clients.
To specify a proxy
server, enter its IPv4
address or fully-
qualified domain
name. The name
can be up to 255
octets.
For some networks,

you might need to
contact your Internet
Service Provider
(ISP) for the proxy
server address.

Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port

number used by the
proxy server for
client support. The
port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can be
a value from 0 to
65535.
Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in

seconds, after which
an idle TCP print
data connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).
Security Secure Web HTTPS Required* For configuration

management,
HTTPS Optional specify whether the
HP Embedded Web
Server will accept
communications
using HTTPS
(Secure HTTP) only,
or both HTTP and
HTTPS.
HTTPS Required:
For secure,
encrypted
communications,
only HTTPS access
is accepted. The
print server will
appear as a secure
site.
IPSEC Keep Specify the IPSec

status on the print
Disable* server.
Keep: IPSec status

remains the same as
currently configured.
Disable: IPSec
operation on the
print server is
disabled.

802.1X Reset Specify whether the

802.1X settings on
Keep* the print server are
reset to the factory
defaults.
Reset: The 802.1X

settings are reset to
the factory defaults.
Keep: The current

802.1X settings are
maintained.
Reset Security Yes Specify whether the

current security
No* settings on the print
server will be saved
or reset to factory
defaults.
Yes: Security
settings are reset to
factory defaults.
No: The current

security settings are
maintained.

Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Yes Provides tests to

help diagnose
No* network hardware or
TCP/IP network
connection
problems.
Embedded tests
help to identify
whether a network
fault is internal or
external to the
product. Use an
embedded test to
check hardware and
communication
paths on the print
server. After you
select and enable a
test and set the
execution time, you
must select the
Execute option to
initiate the test.
Depending on the
execution time, a
selected test runs
continuously until
either the product is
turned off, or an
error occurs and a
diagnostic page is
printed.
CAUTION:
Running this
embedded test will
erase your TCP/IP
configuration.
This test performs

an internal loop-back
test. An internal
loop-back test will
send and receive
packets only on the
internal network
hardware. There are
no external
transmissions on
your network.

HTTP Test Yes This test checks

operation of HTTP
No* by retrieving
predefined pages
from the product,
and tests the HP
Embedded Web
Server.
Select the Yes

option to choose this
test, or the No option
to not choose it.
SNMP Test Yes This test checks

operation of SNMP
No* communications by
accessing
predefined SNMP
objects on the
product.
Select the Yes

to not choose it.
Data Path Test Yes This test helps to

identify data path
No* and corruption
problems on an HP
postscript level 3
emulation product. It
sends a predefined
PS file to the
product, However,
the test is paperless;
the file will not print.
Select the Yes

to not choose it.
Select All Tests Yes Use this item to

select all available
No* embedded tests.
Select the Yes

option to choose all
tests. Select the No
option to select
individual tests.

Execution Time [H] Range: 1 24 hours Specify the length of

time (in hours) that
Default = 1 hour an embedded test
will be run. If you
select zero (0), the
test runs indefinitely
until an error occurs
or the product is
turned off.
Data gathered from

the HTTP, SNMP,
and Data Path tests
is printed after the
tests have
completed.
Execute No* No: Do not initiate

the selected tests.
Yes
Yes: Initiate the
selected tests.
Ping Test Dest Type IPv4 This test is used to

check network
IPv6 communications. It
sends link-level
packets to a remote
network host, then
waits for an
appropriate
response.
Specify whether the

target product is an
IPv4 or IPv6 node.
Dest IPv4 Range: 0 255 Enter the IPv4

address.
Default = 127.0.0.1
Dest IPv6 Select from a Enter the IPv6

provided list. address.
Default = : : 1
Packet Size Default = 64 Specify the size of

each packet, in
bytes, to be sent to
the remote host. The
minimum is 64
(default) and the
maximum is 2048.
Timeout Default = 001 Specify the length of

time, in seconds, to
wait for a response
from the remote
host. The maximum
is 100.

Count Default = 004 Specify the number

of ping test packets
to send for this test.
Select a value from
0 to 100. To
configure the test to
run continuously,
select 0.
Print Results Yes
No*
Execute Yes No: Do not initiate

the selected tests.
No*
Yes: Initiate the
selected tests.
Ping Results Packets Sent Default = 00000 Shows the number

of packets (0 -
65535) sent to the
remote host since
the most recent test
was initiated or
completed.
Packets Received Default = 00000 Shows the number

of packets (0 -
65535) received
from the remote host
since the most
recent test was
initiated or
completed. The
default is 0.
Percent Lost Default = 000 Shows the percent

(0 to 100) of ping
test packets that
were sent with no
response from the
remote host since
the most recent test
was initiated or
completed.
RTT Min Default = 0000 Shows the minimum

detected roundtrip-
time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds,
for packet
transmission and
response.
RTT Max Default = 0000 Shows the maximum

detected roundtrip-
time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds,
for packet
transmission and
response.

RTT Average Default = 0000 Shows the average

round-trip-time
(RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds,
for packet
transmission and
response.
Ping In Progress Yes Shows whether a

ping test is in
No* progress. Yes
Indicates a test in
progress. No
Indicates that a test
completed or was
not run.
Refresh Yes When viewing the

ping test results, this
No* item upgrades the
ping test data with
current results.
Select the Yes
option to upgrade
the data, or the No
option to maintain
the existing data.
However, a refresh
automatically occurs
when the menu
times out or you
manually return to
the main menu.

Link Speed Auto* The link speed and

communication
mode of the print
server must match
the network. The
available settings
depend on the
product and installed
print server. Select
one of the following
link configuration
settings:
CAUTION: If you
change the link
setting, network
communications with
the print server and
network product
might be lost.
The print server

uses auto-
negotiation to
configure itself with
the highest link
speed and
communication
mode allowed. If
auto-negotiation
fails, either the
100TX Half feature
or the 10T Half
feature is set
depending on the
detected link speed
of the hub/switch
port. (A 1000T half-
duplex selection is
not supported.)
10T Half 10 Mbps, half-duplex

operation.
10T Full 10 Mbps, full-duplex

operation.
10T Auto 100 Mbps, half-

duplex operation.
100TX Half 100 Mbps, full-

duplex operation.
100TX Full Limits auto-

negotiation to a
maximum link speed
of 100 Mbps.
100TX Auto 1000 Mbps, full-

duplex operation.

Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.
Table 2-71 Troubleshooting menu

Event Log View* Use to print a list of

the 1,000 most recent
M880 only Print events in the Event
Log. For each event,
the printed log shows
the error number,
page count, error
code, and description
or personality.
Print Event Log Use to print a list of

the 1,000 most recent
M855 only events in the Event
Log. For each event,
View Event Log the printed log shows
the error number,
M855 only page count, error
code, and description
or personality.
Paper Path Page View* (M880 only) Shows how many

pages were printed
Print from each tray.
Fax Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax T.30
M880 only trace report. T.30 is
the standard that
specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.
When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30

Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after every
Print only after fax fax job, every fax job
send jobs sent, every fax job
received, every send
Print after any fax error, or every receive
error error.
Print only after fax

send errors
Print only after fax

receive errors

Table 2-71 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable V.34

modulations if several
Off fax failures have
occurred or if phone
line conditions require
it.
Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations.
Fax Log Entries On The standard fax log

includes basic
Off* information such as
the time and whether
the fax was
successful. The
detailed fax log
shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.
Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you resolve
problems with print
quality.
Print PQ Print Use to print pages

Troubleshooting that help you resolve
Page problems with print
quality.
Diagnostics Page Print Use to print a

diagnostics page. The
page includes color
swatches and a table
of
electrophotographic
(EP) parameters.
Color Band Test Print Test Page Print Use to print a page to
help identify arcing in
the high-voltage
power supply for each
color. The page
contains a series of
colored bars. If
streaks appear on a
bar, the high-voltage
power supply for the
corresponding color
might have a
problem.

Copies Range: 1 30 Some problems with

the high-voltage
Default = 1 power supply do not
appear until after
several pages have
been printed, so this
test includes an
option to print up to
30 pages.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensors Select from a list of Initiates a test of the
the product paper path sensors.
sensors.
Paper Path Test Print Test Page
Source Tray Select from a list of Generates a test

the available trays. page for testing paper
handling features.
You can define the
path that is used for
the test in order to
test specific paper
paths.
Output Bin (M880 All Bins

only)
Face Down
Face Up
Test Duplex Path Off*
On
Number of Copies Range: 1500 Sets the default

number of copies for
Default = 1 a copy job. This
default applies when
the Copy or Quick
Copy function is
initiated from the
product Home
screen. The factory
default setting is 1.
Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of Test the product

available sensors and switches
components. for correct operation.
Each sensor is
Reset Sensors displayed on the
control-panel screen,
along with its status.
Manually trip each
sensor and watch for
it to change on the
screen. Press the
Stop button to abort
the test.

Tray/Bin Manual Select from a list of Test the sensors in

Sensor Test available the trays and bins for
components. correct operation.
Each sensor is
Reset Sensors displayed on the
control-panel screen,
along with its status.
Manually trip each
sensor and watch for
it to change on the
screen. Press the
Stop button to abort
the test.
Component Test Select from a list of Use to exercise

available individual parts
components. independently to
isolate noise, leaking,
or other issues. To
start the test, select
one of the
components. The test
will run the number of
times specified by the
Repeat option. You
might be prompted to
remove parts from the
product during the
test. Press the Stop
button to abort the
test.
Print/Stop Test Specify the length of

time in milliseconds
(0-60,000).
Continuous Scan 2-sided

(M880 only)
Scanner Tests Sensors

(M880 only)
Retrieve Diagnostic Create device data Create files that

Data file contain information
about the product that
Create zipped can help identify the
debug information cause of problems.
file
Include crash dump

files
Clean up debug
information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
Generate Debug Start

Data

Device Maintenance menu
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.
Table 2-72 Backup/Restore menu
Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time Set a time for a
Backups scheduled backup to
occur.
Days Between Backups Enter the number of days Set an interval for a
scheduled backup to
occur.
Backup Now Initiate a backup.
Export Last Backup Export backup data.
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that Restore data from an

contains the backup file. external source.
Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880)

Calibration/Cleaning menu.
Table 2-73 Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880)

Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning Off* Select the Auto Cleaning menu
or the Cleaning Interval menu.
On
Cleaning Interval Select from a list of cleaning Set the interval when the
intervals. cleaning page should be printed.
The interval is measured by the
number of pages printed.
Cleaning Size Select from a list of support Select the paper size to use for
sizes. the cleaning page.
Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning

page that was created by using
the Create Cleaning Page
menu. The process takes up to
1.5 minutes.

Table 2-73 Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880) (continued)
Quick Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use
this feature to perform a partial
calibration. Use this calibration if
color density or tone seem
incorrect.
Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready
indicator displays on the control-
panel display. If a job is in
progress, the calibration occurs
when that job is complete.
Full Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use
this feature to perform a full
calibration, which can take up to
three minutes. Use this
calibration if the color layers
seem to be shifted on the page.
Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready
indicator displays on the control-
panel display. If a job is in
progress, the calibration occurs
when that job is complete.

Table 2-73 Calibration/Cleaning menu (M880) (continued)
Delay Calibration at Wake/ Disabled Controls the timing of power-on

Power On calibration when the product
Enabled* wakes up or is turned on.
Wake: Select if you are not

using the feature and want to
print jobs immediately when the
product wakes up or is turned
on, before calibration begins.
No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up or
is turned on. The product will not
print any jobs until it finishes
calibrating.
Yes: Enables the product that is

asleep to accept print jobs
before it calibrates. It might start
calibrating before it has printed
all the jobs it has received. This
option allows quicker printing
when coming out of sleep mode
or when you turn the product on,
but print quality might be
reduced.
NOTE: For the best results,

allow the product to calibrate
before printing. Print jobs
performed before calibration
might not be of the highest
quality.
Calibrate Scanner Touch Next to calibrate the

device scanner. Messages on
the control-panel display will
lead you through the calibration
process.
Clean Rollers Reset Maintenance History screen is

view only. There are two
Cancel options: the Reset option to
reset the page count, or the
Cancel option to go back to the
previous screen.
Clean Document Feeder Low Threshold Settings Range: 0 100% Configure cleaning settings for
Settings the document feeder.
Default = 10%
Very Low Settings Stop Configure the product action if

the document feeder requires
Prompt to continue* cleaning.
Continue

Calibration/Cleaning menu (M855)
Calibration/Cleaning menu.
Table 2-74 Calibration/Cleaning menu (M855)
Auto Cleaning Off* Set an automatic cleaning

period for the product.
On
Cleaning Interval Select from a list of cleaning Set the interval when the
intervals. automatic cleaning page should
be printed. The interval is
measured by the number of
pages printed.
Auto Cleaning Size Select from a list of support Select the paper size to use for
sizes. the automatic cleaning page.
Print Cleaning Page Prints a page to clean the paper

path. The process takes up to
1.5 minutes.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu
USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-
screen instructions.
Service menu
Service menu.
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by
authorized service personnel. See the Service mode function section in the product troubleshooting
manual.
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries

The control-panel messages and event code entries indicate the current product status or situations
that might require action.
NOTE: Event log errors do not appear on the control-panel display. Open the event log to view or
print the event log errors.
A control-panel message displays temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message
to resume printing or by touching the Stop button to cancel the job. With certain messages, the job
might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected. If the message is related to printing and
the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has
appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.
For some messages, restarting the product might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the
product might require service.
NOTE: Some of the messages in the following sections only appear in the event log.
TIP: Some control-panel messages and event log entries refer to a specific product sensor or switch
in the recommended action to solve the problem. See the diagrams in the clear jams section of the
product troubleshooting manual for sensor and switch locations.
10.XX.YZ Error Messages
10.0X.00 e-Label Memory Error

Description
10.00.00 Black Print Cartridge
10.01.00 Cyan Print Cartridge
10.02.00 Magenta Print Cartridge
10.03.00 Yellow Print Cartridge
10.05.00 Black Image Drum
10.06.00 Cyan Image Drum

10.07.00 Magenta Image Drum
10.08.00 Yellow Image Drum
The product is unable to read the Print Cartridge or image drum memory tag data.
The Print cartridge or image drum is present but defective.
This message indicates that the product has determined that it cannot read or write to one of the e-
labels of the print cartridge or image drum.
This error can cause the supplies status feature to become disabled.
Recommended action
1. Open the front door and remove the Print Cartridge or Image Drum suspected.
2. Check the e-label. If it is damaged, replace the Cartridge or the Drum
3. Reinsert the cartridge or the Drum.
4. Close the front door.
5. If the message displays again, turn the product off then on.
6. If the error persists, replace the Print cartridge or Image Drum suspected.
10.0X.10 e-Label Missing Memory Error

Description
10.05.10 Black Image Drum
10.06.10 Cyan Image Drum
10.07.10 Magenta Image Drum
10.08.10 Yellow Image Drum
The product is unable to detect one or more of the E-labels
This error can cause the supplies status feature to become disabled.
Recommended action
1. Open the front door and remove the Print Cartridge or Image Drum suspected.
2. Check the e-label. If it is damaged, replace the Cartridge or the Drum.
3. Reinsert the cartridge or the Drum.

5. If the error persists, replace the print cartridge or Image drum
6. If the error persists, replace the appropriate interface PCA
10.0X.15 Install <supply> (Event Code)

Description
10.00.15 (Event Code) Black Print Cartridge
10.01.15 (Event Code) Cyan Print Cartridge
10.02.15 (Event Code) Magenta Print Cartridge
10.03.15 (Event Code) Yellow Print Cartridge
10.23.15 (Event Code) Fuser Kit
10.31.15 (Event Code) Toner Collection unit (TCU)
The indicated supply has been removed or installed incorrectly.
Recommended action
Replace or install the indicated supply.
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply or kit part number.
10.0X.25 Wrong cartridge in <color> slot

Description
The indicated cartridge is installed in the wrong position.
Recommended action
Install the indicated cartridge in the correct position.
From left to right, the correct cartridge order follows:
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
10.0X.34 Used Supply in use

Description

The indicated cartridge is used.
Recommended action
Make sure this is a genuine HP supply.
NOTE: Removing a cartridge from one product and then installing it in a different product (for testing
functionality) will cause this event code.
10.0X.35 Incompatible <supply>
Description
The indicated supply is not compatible with this product.
Recommended action
Install a supply that is designed for this product.
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply part number
10.0X.40 Genuine HP supplies installed
Description
More than one genuine HP print cartridge has been installed.
Recommended action
No action necessary.
10.0X.41 Unsupported Supply in use
Description

The indicated print cartridge is for a different product.
Recommended action
Remove the indicated print cartridge, and then install the correct cartridge for this product.
TIP: See the parts chapter in the product repair manual for the correct cartridge part number.
10.0X.70 Printing past very low (EVENT CODE)

Description
The product indicates when one of the consumables is very low. The actual remaining consumable
life might vary.
You do not need to replace the consumable at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
CAUTION: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection
warranty ends.
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the indicated print cartridge or fuser kit.
See the parts chapter in the repair manual for the print cartridge or fuser kit part number.
TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to
install when the print quality is no longer acceptable.
10.0X.90 Replace <Color> cartridge
Description
A toner replenishment malfunction occurred and the toner concentration in the image drum dropped
below 30%. This applies to both HP and non-HP print cartridges.
OR
Error occurs when Print (toner) cartridge has been used past end-of-life to the point the reservoir in
the Drum no longer has enough toner to safely continue printing

Recommended action
1. Replace Print Cartridge.
2. If replacing the Print cartridge does not resolve the problem, replace the image drum.
3. If replacing the image drum does not resolve the problem, replace the appropriate cartridge
interface PCA
10.0X.91 Cartridge Error

Description
Cartridge motor stall
Recommended action
1. Check Event log for occurrences of 59.6X errors. If these are seen troubleshooting that error.
2. Perform the image-drum motors component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
3. Replace the Print Cartridge.
10.0X.92 Cartridge Error

Description
Cartridges not engaged.
Recommended action
1. Open front door, Remove and reinstall Print cartridge.
2. Check print cartridge for any damage or defects.
3. Replace Print Cartridge.
10.22.60 (Control Panel Message: Transfer Kit Low) 10.22.69 (Control panel Message: Transfer Kit Very Low)
Description
The product indicates when Transfer Kit (TCU) is either low or very low.

The actual remaining Transfer kit life might vary.
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the TCU. See the parts chapter in the service manual
for the Transfer kit part number.
10.22.70 Printing Past Very Low (Event Code) Transfer Kit

Description
The product indicates when Transfer Kit (TCU) is very low. The actual remaining Transfer kit life
might vary.
warranty ends.
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the TCU. See the parts chapter in the service manual
for the Transfer kit part number.
10.23.35 Incompatible Supply (event code) Fuser Kit
Description
CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Be careful when removing the fuser.
Recommended action
Install a supply that is designed for this product.
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply part number
10.23.60 (Control panel Message: Fuser Kit Low) 10.22.69 (Control panel Message: Fuser Kit Very Low)
Description
The product indicates when Fuser Kit is either low or very low.
The actual remaining Fuser kit life might vary.
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the Fuser Kit.
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the Fuser Kit part number.

10.23.70 Printing Past Very Low (Event Code) Fuser Kit
Description
The product indicates when fuser kit is very low. The actual remaining fuser kit life might vary
You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
warranty ends.
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. See the parts chapter in the service
manual for the fuser kit part number.
10.39.50 New Document Feeder Kit

Description
A new document feeder maintenance kit has been installed and New Document Feeder Kit has been
selected from the control panel menus.
Recommended action
10.39.53 ADF kit clean rollers recommended

Description
Document feeder kit recommend clean prompt..
Recommended action
Remove the document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and the separation pad assemblies. Clean the
rollers and pad with a damp lint free cloth.
10.39.55 Clean Document Feeder Rollers
Description
The document feeder separation pad and rollers need to be cleaned.
Recommended action
10.39.56
Description
Scanned past document feeder scheduled cleaning prompt.

Recommended action
10.39.60 Document Feeder Kit low

Description
The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are near their end of life.
Recommended action
10.39.69 Document Feeder Kit very low

Description
The document feeder pick roller, feed roller, and separation pad are at their end of life.
Recommended action
Order and install a document feeder maintenance kit.
10.39.70 Scanning past very low

Description
Recommended action
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct part number.
10.39.71 Document Feeder has stopped

Description
Recommended action
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct part number.
10.99.91 Cartridge motor stall, no particular cartridge

Description
Cartridge motor stall

Recommended action
1. Check Event log for occurrences of 59.6X errors, If these errors are seen troubleshoot that error.
2. Perform the image-drum motors component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
3. Replace the Print Cartridge
Replace or install the indicated supply.
See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply or kit part number.
11.00.01 or 11.00.02 Internal clock error
Description
This message indicates a problem with the formatter's real time clock.
The product real time clock has experienced an error.
01=dead clock
02=dead real time clock
Recommended action
1. Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date on the
control panel.
2. If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter.
13.60.Az
Description
Stacker Entrance Sensor Stay Jam . Jam in the top left door
Finishers upper-feed-path-entry sensor (PI103) is remaining activated longer than expected,

suggesting that paper has jammed at the sensor.
The specific jam error code will be one of the following forms:
13.60.A1
13.60.A2
13.60.A3
Recommended action
1. Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor PI33..
2. Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly aligned with the sensor
body.

3. Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust
and debris.
4. Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the connector J708 on the stacker
controller PCA is fully seated
13.60.Dz
Description
Stacker Entrance Sensor Delay Jam
Jam in the top left door.
The engine signals the finisher that paper is about to enter the finisher from either the Switch Back
assembly or the Hole Punch assembly if installed.
The finisher's upper-feed-path-entry sensor (PI103), which detects paper entering the finisher, does
not detect the paper within the expected time period triggering the error.
13.60.D1
13.60.D2
13.60.D3
Recommended action
1. Print and analyze the event log, looking for related jams occurring either in the Switch Back
assembly or the Hole Punch assembly. These errors might be the result of media failing to reach
the output device in the correct amount of time. Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first.
2. Make sure that media is in good condition, and not wrinkled or damaged.
3. Make sure that the correct paper size in the trays is selected according the paper size being fed.
4. Check the finisher entry-point guides for damage.
5. Verify where the leading edge of the media is when the Jam occurs.
6. has media made it through Switch Back registration?
Test M2 registration motor
7. Verify that the finisher rollers are turning before the media leaves the Printer. If the rollers are not
turning, test motor M110 and M101 by using the finisher component test from the control-
activate during the test, check the connectors for motor M110 (Saddle inlet Motor) M101 (inlet
motor).
8. Make sure that connector J17 is fully seated on the stacker controller PCA.. If the error persists,
replace motor M110 or M101 or the corresponding assembly.
9. Replace the stacker controller PCA.
10. If media is found in the finisher but has not reached sensor PI103, perform the following steps:
Check the upper and lower guides and rollers in the paper path for damage.
Make sure that the media diverter gate is not blocking the paper path.

11. If media is found in the finisher-covering sensor PI103 (the sensor is not detecting the media),
perform the following steps:
Check the sensor for obstructions. .
Verify that the sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly aligned with the
sensor body.
Make sure that the lower end of the flag is not damaged and is correctly positioned to
activate the sensor.
12. Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis.
and debris.
14. Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connector J1007
and connector J3 on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated.
15. Replace the sensor if necessary.
16. Only if the error persists, Replace the stacker controller PCA.
13.60.FF
Description
Stacker Initial Jam
Jam in the top left door (left bins).
Finisher stay jam at either PI103 or PI104 when engine powered on.
When the engine is powered on, the finisher's upper-feed-path-entry sensor (PI103) or the upper-
feed-path-exit sensor (PI104) is activated suggesting that there is paper in the upper paper path of
the finisher at sensors PI103 or PI104.
Recommended action
1. Open the top door and remove any media in the paper path (media detected at PI103).
2. Raise the upper paper path (exit) delivery rollers and remove any media in the paper path
(media detected at PI104).
3. Remove all paper found from the top left door area.
4. Verify that the sensor flags are not damaged, move freely, and are correctly aligned with the
sensor body and properly mounted. Also check wiring and connectors for damage or loose
connections
and debris.
6. Verify that the sensor connectors (J2 and J3) are fully seated on the stacker controller PCA.
Replace sensor PI103 and PI104
7. Only if the error persists, replace the stacker controller PCA..

13.64.Az
Description
Stacker Delivery Sensor Stay Jam : Jam in the top left door (left bins)
Finisher's upper-paper-path-exit sensor (PI104) remains activated longer than expected suggesting
that paper has jammed at the sensor.
13.64.A1
13.64.A2
13.64.A3
Control-panel diagnostics: M101 (entrance motor), SL102 (buffer-roller solenoid), and SL103 (output-
roller solenoid)
PI104 is located on the front frame of the finisher, above the main stapler unit.
Recommended action
1. Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor PI104.
2. Carefully clean the sensor body, by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to remove dust
and debris.
body.
4. Lift-swing-guide assembly at the paper exit area to output bins and inspect for jammed paper,
obstructions, or damage.
5. Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M101 (entrance motor) to
observe gear rotations on the upper-rear frame of the finisher. Ensure that the first delivery
rollers and buffer rollers that pass paper to and from PI104 are rotating.
6. Test SL102 (buffer-roller solenoid) and SL103 (output-roller solenoid) using the control-panel
diagnostics.
7. Check wiring from sensor PI104 to stacker-control-board connector J2 for damage.
8. Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the stacker
controller PCA.
13.64.Dz
Description
Stacker Delivery Sensor Delay Jam : Jam in the top left door.
Upper-paper-path-entry sensor (PI103) has signaled that paper has passed but upper paper-path-exit
sensor PI104 does not actuate within the expected time, suggesting that the paper has jammed
between PI103 and PI104 in the upper paper path.

13.64.D1
13.64.D2
13.64.D3
Recommended action
1. Remove any media jammed in the upper paper path between sensor PI103 and sensor PI104.
2. Check the paper path between sensor PI103 and sensor PI104 for obstructions that may be
preventing the media from reaching PI104.
3. Verify that the PI104 sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly aligned with the
sensor body.
4. Make sure that sensor PI104 is securely fastened to the chassis and wiring is properly
connected to sensor.
NOTE: Sensor PI104 is located on the front frame of the finisher, directly over the primary
stapler.
5. Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the connector J2 on the stacker
controller PCA is fully seated.
controller PCA.
13.67.Az
Description
Switchback Entrance Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
Switchback entrance sensor (SR101) remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper
has jammed at the sensor.
13.67.A1
13.67.A2
13.67.A3
Recommended action
1. Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor SR101.
2. Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine.
3. Make sure that the finisher and Printer are correctly aligned.
and debris.
body.

7. Perform Sensor test on SR101. If not functioning or damaged replace Sensor.
8. Check wiring from sensor SR101 to the Reverse Driver PCA connector for damage.
9. Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the
Reverse Driver PCA.
13.67.Dz
Description
Switchback Entrance Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
The engine signals the finisher that paper is about to enter the finisher Switchback assembly from the
Printer.
The Switchback inlet Sensor SR101, which detects paper entering the finisher, does not detect the
paper within the expected time period triggering the error
13.67.D1
13.67.D2
13.67.D3
Recommended action
2. Print and analyze the event log, looking for Printer- or MFP-related jams occurring either in the
fuser or in the duplexer. These errors might be the result of media failing to reach the output
device in the correct amount of time. Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first.
7. Adjust the finisher castors to obtain a uniform gap between the finisher and the engine.
8. With the engine-to-finisher gap correct, make sure that the finisher paper path entry point is
aligned with the Printer exit point.
and debris.
body.
12. Perform Sensor test on SR101. If not functioning or damaged replace the Sensor.

Reverse Driver PCA.
13.67.FF
Description
Switchback Initial Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
When the engine is powered on, the finisher's Switchback inlet sensor (SR101) is activated
suggesting that there is paper in the upper paper path of the finisher at sensors SR101
Recommended action
and debris.
body.
Reverse Driver PCA.
13.68.Az
Description
Switchback Registration Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
Switchback Registration sensor (SR102) remains activated longer than expected suggesting that
paper has jammed at the sensor.
13.68.A1
13.68.A2
13.68.A3
Recommended action
2. Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine and make sure that the finisher and
Printer are correctly aligned.

and debris.
body.
6. Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 (Registration motor) to
observe gear rotations on the upper-left rear frame of the finisher.
8. Replace the Reverse assembly
13.68.Dz
Description
Switchback Registration Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
Media did not reach SR102 (switch back registration sensor) after passing SR101 (Switch Back inlet
Sensor) within the expected time period triggering the error.
13.68.D1
13.68.D2
13.68.D3
Recommended action
2. Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine. Make sure that the finisher and Printer
are correctly aligned.
and debris.
body.
5. Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 (Registration motor) to
observe gear rotations on the upper-left rear frame of the finisher.
6. Test SL101 (Switch Back inlet flapper solenoid) using the control-panel diagnostics.
13.69.Az
Description
Switchback Lower Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
Switchback path sensor (SR103) remains activated longer than expected suggesting that paper has
jammed at the sensor.

13.69.A1
13.69.A2
13.69.A3
Recommended action
and debris.
body.
Reverse Driver PCA.
13.69.Dz
Description
Switchback Registration Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the stapler/stacker connection.
Media did not reach SR103 (switchback path sensor) after passing SR101 (Switch Back inlet Sensor)
within the expected time period triggering the error.
13.69.D1
13.69.D2
13.69.D3
Recommended action
2. Verify that the finisher is securely fastened to the engine. Make sure that the finisher and Printer
are correctly aligned.
and debris.
body.

5. Run a diagnostic through the engine control panel and turn on M2 (Registration motor) and M1
Switchback Motor to observe gear rotations on the upper-left rear frame of the finisher.
6. Test SL101 (Switch Back inlet flapper solenoid) using the control-panel diagnostics.
13.84.Az
Description
Accumulator Tray Stay Jam Jam in the top left door.
Upper-paper-path-entry sensor (PI104) has signaled that paper has passed but the output bin Sensor
PI112 or PI111 does not actuate within the expected time.
13.84.A0
13.84.A1
13.84.A2
13.84.A3
Recommended action
1. Remove any media jammed in the upper paper path between sensor PI104 and output bin.
2. Check the accumulator for damage or obstructions.
3. Ensure M109 Trailing Edge Assist Motor functions properly
4. Replace M109 or Assembly as needed.
13.89.3z
Description
Stacker Staple Jam Stapler 1 Jam in the front left door.
When the staple motor (M41) is rotated forward, the staple home-position sensor (PI120) does not
turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off, and the staple home-position
sensor (PI120) turns on within the prescribed time after the staple motor (M41) is rotated backwards.
13.89.30
13.89.31
13.89.32
Recommended action
1. Check the stapler unit for jammed staples.
2. Check the stapler unit for loose staples and paper dust.

3. Inspect the stapler unit for damage.
4. Remove the stapler cartridge and make sure HP-approved staples are being used.
5. Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit and the connector are not damaged.
6. Install new staple cartridge and retest.
7. If the error persists, replace the stapler unit.
13.90.Az
Description
Booklet Inlet Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door
Finisher stay jam at booklet-making paper entry sensor (PI22)
Occurs when the booklet-making paper-entry sensor (PI22) remains activated longer than expected,
suggesting that there is a paper jam at the sensor.
13.90.A0
13.90.A3
Recommended action
1. Remove any media in the upper paper path that might be activating sensor PI22.
body.
and debris.
4. Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connectors
between sensor PI22 and connector J21 on saddle-stitcher controller PCA for damage and
proper connections.
5. If issue still remains, replace sensor
13.90.Dz
Description
Booklet Inlet Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door
Finisher delay jam at booklet-making paper entry sensor (PI22).
Error occurs when booklet making function is selected and after the engine signals the finisher that it
is delivering paper to the finisher. The booklet-making paper-entry sensor (PI22) is not activated
within the expected time period after receiving the engine's delivery signal, suggesting that a paper
jam has occurred somewhere between the Reversing Assembly and sensor PI22.
Control-panel diagnostics: M9 (Inlet Motor), SL5 (Inlet-Switch Solenoid)

13.90.D0
13.90.D3
Recommended action
1. Print and analyze the event log, looking for related jams occurring either in the Switch Back
assembly or the Hole Punch assembly. These errors might be the result of media failing to reach
the output device in the correct amount of time. Troubleshoot all Printer Engine Jams first.
5. Verify where the leading edge of the media is when Jam occurs.
6. Has media made it through Switch Back registration?
Test M2 registration motor
7. Verify that the finisher rollers are turning before the media leaves the Printer.
If the rollers are not turning, test motor M110 by using the finisher component test from the
control-activate during the test, check the connectors for motor M110 (Saddle inlet Motor)
8. Make sure that connector J17 is fully seated on the stacker controller PCA. If the error persists,
replace motor M9 or the saddle-paper-feeder assembly for the type finisher you are working on.
controller PCA.
If media is found in the finisher but has not reached sensor PI22, perform the following steps:
1. Check the sensor for obstructions.
body. Make sure that the lower end of the flag is not damaged and is correctly positioned to
activate the sensor.
and debris.
5. Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not damaged and that the intermediate connectors
between the sensor and connector J21 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA are fully seated.
6. Replace the sensor if necessary. If PI22 is determined to be the failure point, replace the saddle-
paper-feeder assembly, which includes PI22.
7. Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the saddle-
stitcher controller PCA.
If media is found in the finisher cover sensor PI22 (the sensor is not detecting the media), perform the
following steps:

1. Check the upper and lower guides and rollers in the paper path for damage.
2. Make sure that the media-diverter gate (saddle-stitch flapper) is not blocking the paper path.
3. Test solenoid SL5 (inlet-switch solenoid) using the finisher component test from the control
panel display. SL5 should be opening and closing the media diverter gate (saddle stitch flapper).
13.92.FF
Description
Booklet Initial Jam Jam in the front left door.
Occurs when paper is detected by one of the sensors on the paper-sensor board (PI18, PI19, PI20),
vertical-path-paper sensor (PI17), booklet-delivery sensor (PI11), paper positioning-plate paper
sensor (PI8), or booklet-making paper-entry sensor (PI22) when the machine is powered on.
Recommended action
1. Remove media from the booklet-maker paper path.
2. Verify that the sensor flags are not damaged, move freely, and are correctly aligned with the
sensor bodies.
3. Carefully clean each sensor body by gently blowing clean air across each sensor to remove dust
and debris.
4. Make sure that connectors J6, J9, J10,J13, and J21 are fully seated on the saddle-stitcher
controller PCA.
stitcher controller PCA.
13.94.Az
Description
Booklet Deliver Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door.
Finisher stay jam at the booklet-delivery sensor (PI11) or the vertical-paper-path sensor (PI17)
Occurs when the booklet-delivery sensor (PI11) remains activated longer than expected after sensing
the arrival of the new booklet from the folding rollers.
Also occurs when the vertical-paper-path sensor (PI17) remains activated longer than expected after
the paper has already passed through the folding rollers and is now detected by the booklet-delivery
sensor (PI11).
13.94.A0
13.94.A3

Recommended action
1. Check the folder-roller area for a jam.
2. Test the folding motor (M2) by using the finisher component test from the control panel display.
Remove the finisher rear cover before starting the test and make sure that the folding rollers are
rotating when motor M2 is on.
3. Check sensor PI11 and PI17 for damage.
4. Make sure that the sensors are not obstructed.
5. Make sure that sensor PI11 and sensor PI17 are securely fastened to the chassis.
6. Replace Motor or assembly as needed.
13.94.Dz
Description
Booklet Deliver Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door.
Finisher stay jam at the booklet-delivery sensor (PI11) or the vertical-paper-path sensor (PI17)
Occurs when the folded booklet exits the folding rollers and does not reach the booklet delivery
sensor (PI11) within the expected time.
13.94.D0
13.94.D3
Recommended action
1. Check the folder-roller area for a jam or media wrapped around the rollers.
2. Check sensor PI11 for damage.
3. Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed.
4. Make sure that sensor PI11 is securely fastened to the chassis.
5. Replace Motor or assembly as needed.
13.96.33
Description
Stapler 2 Jam
Booklet Staple Jam (Front) - Jam in booklet stapler 2
Finisher jam: front-booklet stapler (SW7) When the rear-staple motor (M7) is rotated forward, the
staple home-position sensor (SW7) does not turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after
it goes off (0.4 seconds).

Recommended action
1. Check the front-booklet stapler unit for jammed staples.
2. Check the front-booklet stapler unit for loose staples.
3. Inspect the front-booklet stapler unit for damage.
4. Verify that HP approved staples for this stapler are being used.
6. Replace the staple cartridge.
NOTE: Replace both the front and rear cartridges at the same time so that the staple low
sensors will properly detect the level of staples in the cartridges.
stapler assembly.
13.97.33
Description
Stapler 3 Jam
Booklet Staple Jam (Rear) - Jam in booklet stapler 3
Finisher jam: rear booklet stapler (SW5) When the rear-staple motor (M6) is rotated forward, the
staple home-position sensor (SW5) does not turn back on after the prescribed time has elapsed after
it goes off (0.4 seconds).
Recommended action
1. Check the rear-booklet stapler unit for jammed staples.
2. Check the rear-booklet stapler unit for loose staples.
3. Inspect the rear-booklet-stitch stapler unit for damage.
4. Verify that HP approved staples for this stapler are being used.
6. Replace the staple cartridge.
13.98.A3
Description
Booklet Output Sensor Stay Jam Jam in the front left door (booklet).
Occurs when the folded booklet exits the folding rollers and passes PI11 booklet delivery sensor but
does not reach the booklet delivery sensor (PI6) within the expected time.
Recommended action

5. Replace sensor or assembly as needed.
13.98.D3
Description
Booklet Output Sensor Delay Jam Jam in the front left door (booklet).
Finisher stay jam at the booklet-output sensor (PI6)
Media is present at P6
Recommended action
5. Replace sensor or assembly as needed
13.A1.A1
Description
Paper Stay Jam in Tray 1
This jam occurs when the Tray 1 media feed sensor (SR24) does not detect the trailing edge of the
paper within a specified period of time from when the sensor detected the leading edge
Recommended action
1. Clear the jam in the area indicated
2. Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam
3. Check and Replace the Tray 1 pickup rollers as needed
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test SR24 to verify that the sensor is functioning properly
6. If it is not, replace MP (tray 1) guide assembly
7. Run the Tray 1 pickup/feed motor drive test under the Administration- Troubleshooting-
Diagnostic Tests - menu to verify that the feed motor is functioning properly
8. If it is not, replace MP (tray 1) MP drive assembly

9. If Tray 1 appears to be functioning correctly, check T2 roller, ITB motor and ITB assembly
10. Replace parts as required.
13.A1.D1
Description
Paper Delay Jam in Tray 1
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 1 feed sensor SR24 in the designated
amount of time after the start of media pick-up from Tray 1.
This is a no-pick jam from Tray 1.
Recommended action
1. Clear the jam in the area indicated.
2. Close the door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
3. Check and replace the Tray 1 pickup rollers as needed.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test SR24 using the sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly.
6. If sensor is not function correctly, replace MP (tray 1) guide assembly
7. Run the Tray 1 pickup/feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly.
8. If it is not, replace MP (tray 1) MP drive assembly
13.A1.FF
Description
Residual Media Jam in Tray 1
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 1 feed sensor (SR24) at power on.
Recommended action
1. Clear the jam in the area indicated.
3. Make sure that the sensor SR24 flag moves smoothly and that the sensor is not damaged. If the
flag is damaged, replace Tray 1.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test SR24 using the Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly.
6. If sensor is not function correctly, replace MP (tray 1) guide assembly
If it is not, replace MP (tray 1) MP drive assembly
13.A2.A2
Description
Paper Stay Jam in Tray 2
paper within a specified period of time from when the sensor detected the leading edge
Recommended action
1. Open Tray 2, remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray
2. Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam
3. Inspect Tray 2 pickup, feed and separation roller are installed properly and show no damage or
wear
4. Clean or replace the pickup/feed rollers as needed
5. Check the connectors J110, J1922 at the sensor and feed motor, and the DC controller PCA
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Run the Tray 2 pickup/feed motor drive test. If test fails replace the pickup assembly
8. Test SR22 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning properly
9. Run the Tray 1 pickup/feed motor drive test under the Administration- Troubleshooting-
Diagnostic Tests - menu to verify that the feed motor is functioning properly
10. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly
11. If Tray 2 appears to be functioning correctly, check T2 roller, ITB motor and ITB assembly
12. Replace parts as required.
13.A2.D2
Description
Jam in Tray 2

This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 2 feed sensor (SR22) in the designated
This is a no-pick jam from tray 2.
Recommended action
1. Open Tray 2, remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray.
2. Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
3. Make sure that the Tray 2 pickup, feed, and separation roller are installed correctly and show no
damage or wear.
4. Clean or replace the pickup/feed rollers as needed.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, and the DC controller PCA. J110, J1922
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
If it is not, replace the pickup assembly.
8. Test SR22 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning
correctly.
9. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly.
13.A2.FF
Description
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 2 feed sensor (SR22).
Recommended action
2. Open and close the upper right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
damage or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, and the DC controller PCA.
6. Check connector J110, J1922 on the DC controller PCA.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
8. Test SR22 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning
correctly.
9. Run the Tray 2 pickup/feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly
(listen for the motor to activate). If it is not, replace the pickup assembly.
13.A3.A3
Description
(1x500 or 3x500 Sheet paper deck)
Paper Stay Jam In Tray 3
paper within a specified period of time from when the sensor detected the leading edge.
Recommended action
2. Open and close right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
3. Inspect the Tray 3 pickup, feed and separation roller are installed properly and show no damage
or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor and feed motor,on the HCI controller PCA.
6. Check connector J8113, J1982 on the HCI controller PCA
7. Open the following menus
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
8. Test SR112 using the Tray/bin Manual sensor test. If test fails, replace the cassette paper
pickup assembly
9. Run the Tray 3 pickup/feed motor drive test. If test fails, replace the cassette pickup motor
10. If the error persists, replace the cassette paper pickup assembly
13.A3.A3
Description
(3500 Sheet paper deck)

Paper Stay Jam In Tray 3
This jam occurs when the Tray 3 media feed sensor (PS3302) does not detect the trailing edge of the
paper within a specified period of time from when the sensor detected the leading edge.
Recommended action
2. Open and close right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
3. Inspect the Tray 3 pickup, feed and separation roller are installed properly and show no damage
or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor and feed motor, on the HCI controller PCA.
7. Open the following menus
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
8. Test PS3302 using the Tray/bin Manual sensor test. If test fails, replace the cassette paper
pickup assembly
9. Run the Tray 3 pickup/feed motor drive test. If test fails, replace the cassette pickup motor
10. If the error persists, replace the Right cassette pickup assembly
13.A3.D3
Description
Paper Delay Jam In Tray 3
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 3 feed sensor (SR112) in designated
amount of time after the start of media pick-up from Tray 3
Recommended action
2. Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam
damage or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, on the HCI controller PCA.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
8. Test SR112 using the Tray/bin Manual sensor test
9. Run the Tray 3 pickup/feed motor drive test
13.A3.D3
Description
Paper Delay Jam In Tray 3
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 3 feed sensor (PS3302) in designated
Recommended action
damage or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor and feed motor, on the HCI controller PCA (J3005, J907)
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test PS3302 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test
8. Run the Tray 3 pickup/feed motor drive to verify that the motor is functioning properly. If it is not,
replace the Tray pickup drive assembly
9. If the error persists, replace the Right Cassette pickup assembly.

13.A3.FF
Description
Recommended action
damage or wear.
5. Check connector J8113, J1982 on the HCI controller PCA.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test (SR112) using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor to verify that the sensors are functioning
correctly.
8. Touch Component Test.
If it is not, replace the pickup assembly.
13.A3.FF
Description
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 3 feed sensor (PS3302) at power on.
Recommended action
damage or wear.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test PS3302 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor to verify that the sensors are functioning
correctly.
If it is not, replace the Tray pickup drive assembly.
10. If the error persists, replace the Right Tray pickup drive assembly.
13.A4.D4
Description
(3x500 Sheet paper deck)
Jam In Tray 4
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor (SR122) in designated
Recommended action
2. Open and close the HCI right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test SR122 using the Tray/bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning
correctly.

If it is not, replace the tray pickup assembly.
10. If the error persists, replace the tray pickup assembly.
13.A4.D4
Description
Jam In Tray 4
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor (PS3305) in designated
Recommended action
damage or wear.
5. Check connectors on the HCI controller PCA.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test PS3305 using the Tray/bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning
correctly.
If it is not, replace the Tray Pickup Drive assembly.
13.A4.FF
Description
(3X500 Sheet paper deck)

Recommended action
damage or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, and the HCI controller PCA.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
correctly.
13.A4.FF
Description
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Tray 4 feed sensor (PS3302) at power on.
Recommended action
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests

7. Test PS3302 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning
correctly.
13.A5.D5
Description
Jam In Tray 5
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Tray 5 feed sensor SR132 in the designated
Recommended action
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test SR132 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning
correctly.
If it is not, replace the tray pickup drive assembly.
13.A5.FF
Description

Recommended action
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
correctly.
If it is not, replace the tray pickup drive assembly.
10. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray pickup assembly.
13.A7.D3
Description
Jam in lower Right Door (From Jam Tray 3)
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the HCI feed sensor (PS3301) in the designated
amount of time after the Tray 3 feed sensor (PS3302) sensed the leading edge of the paper when
printing from Tray 3.
Recommended action
1. Clear the jam in the indicated area.
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests

7. Test PS3301 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning
correctly.
If it is not, replace the pickup drive assembly.
13.A7.D4
Description
Jam in lower Right Door (From Jam Tray 4)
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the HCI feed sensor (PS3301) in the designated
amount of time after the Tray 4 feed sensor (PS3305) sensed the leading edge of the paper when
Recommended action
damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test PS3301 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor are functioning
correctly.
If it is not, replace the pickup drive assembly.
13.A7.FF
Description
Residual Media Jam in High Capacity Input (HCI)
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the HCI feed sensor (PS3301) at power on.

Recommended action
3. Make sure that the Tray 3 and Tray 4 pickup, feed, and separation rollers are installed correctly
and show no damage or wear.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Run a Paper Path Test from both Tray 3 and Tray 4 to validate the issue.
8. Test PS3301 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensors are functioning
correctly.
10. Run the Tray 3 and Tray 4 pickup/feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the pickup drive assembly.
11. Run the intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly. If
it is not, replace the Merge Drive Assembly and/or Merge Assembly.
13.A8.D3 or 13.A8.D4
Description
Jam in Upper Right Door
Jam occurs when the media does not reach the feed sensor (SR24) in designated amount of time
after the HCI Exit sensor (PS3301) sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray 3 or Tray 4
D3 = Tray 3
D4 = Tray 4
Recommended action
3. Run a paper Path test from both tray 3 and tray 4 to validate issue
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, and the DC controller PCA.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test PS3301 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning
correctly.
8. Run the Intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning properly. If
it is not, replace the Merge Drive Assembly and/or Merge Assembly
13.A8.D3 or 13.A8.D4 or 13.A8.D5

Description
(1X500 or 3X500 Sheet paper deck )
Jam in Upper Right Door
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the feed sensor (SR24) in designated amount of time
after the tray 3 feed sensor (SR112) sensed the leading edge when printing from Tray X.
D3 = Tray 3
D4 = Tray 4
D5 = Tray 5
Recommended action
damage or wear.
5. Check the connectors at the sensor, feed motor, on both DC and HCI controller PCAs.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
7. Test SR112 using the Tray/Bin Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning
correctly.
9. Run the Tray pickup/feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning correctly. If
it is not, replace the pickup assembly.

10. Run the Tray intermediate feed motor drive test to verify that the feed motor is functioning
correctly. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly.
13.AA.EE
Description
(1X500 or 3X500 Sheet paper deck)
HCI Door Open Jam
This jam occurs when the HCI right door (SW113) is opened during printing
Recommended action
1. Close the Lower Right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
3. Test SW113 using the Manual Sensor Switch test to verify that the switch is functioning
correctly.
4. If the error persists, replace the Sensor Assembly.
13.AA.EE
Description
HCI Door Open Jam
This jam occurs when the HCI right door (SW3301) is opened during printing.
Recommended action
1. Close the Lower Right door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
3. Test SW3301 using the Manual Sensor Switch test to verify that the switch is functioning
correctly.
4. If the error persists, replace the Sensor Assembly.

13.AB.EE
Description
HCI Door Open Jam
This jam occurs when the HCI inner flap door (PS3306) is opened during printing.
Recommended action
1. Close the inner flap door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
3. Test PS3306 using the Manual Sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly.
4. If the error persists, replace the left tray pickup assembly.
13.B2.Az
Description
Media stay jam at registration sensor (Top Sensor) SR2501
13.B2.A1
This jam occurs when the media is present longer than "the expected media length plus 50mm"
or more is detected at the Registration sensor (SR2501) when printing from the Tray 1.
13.B2.A2
This jam occurs when the media is present longer than" the expected media length plus 50mm"
13.B2.A3
13.B2.A4
13.B2.A5
13.B2.AD
or more is detected at the Registration sensor (SR2501) when printing from the Duplexer.

Recommended action
1. Open Right door and clear the jam in the indicated area. Inspect the paper path and ensure no
paper blocking the paper path
2. Ensure that Input Tray paper guides are snug on sides, not too tight or too loose against the
stack of media
3. Ensure the type and quality of the media that you are using meet HP specifications
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test Registration Sensor Test (TOP sensor) (SR2501) using the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to
verify that the sensor is functioning correctly.
NOTE: This sensor is located on the ITB directly in the center. Manually move sensor to check
for free movement and response in sensor test
6. If sensor test still fails, sensor may be defective Replace the ITB which contains SR2501 sensor
7. If sensor functioning properly, run a few pages to check where the leading edge of the paper
actually stops
8. Check for broken white hooks on the second transfer assembly. If broken replace the hooks or
the 2nd transfer assembly
13.B2.Dz
Description
Media delay jam at registration sensor (Top Sensor) SR2501
13.B2.D1
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor SR2501 in the
designated amount of time after the Tray 1 feed sensor (SR24) sensed the leading edge when
13.B2.D2
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor (SR2501) in the
13.B2.D3
13.B2.D4

13.B2.D5
13.B2.DD
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Registration sensor (SR2501) on the
Secondary transfer assembly in the designated amount of time after leaving the duplex wait
point when duplexing.
Recommended action
CAUTION: Handle the Secondary transfer assembly when removing or reinstalling the assembly to
avoid causing this type of error.
The Registration assembly tension springs and spring mounting blocks at each end of the secondary
transfer assembly can be easily dislodged. This causes an obstruction for the shutter (de-skew gate)
and prevents it from moving freely, which delays the paper from arriving to the registration roller
located at the ITB in the designated time.
To resolve this type of issue, put the springs in the correct position.
Check the Registration assembly springs
1. Before reinstalling the secondary transfer assembly, make sure that the registration assembly
tension springs (callout 1) and spring mounting blocks (callout 2) at each end of the secondary
transfer assembly are correctly positioned.
NOTE: The springs should be straight (as shown below), and not bent or curved.
Figure 2-79 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly (1 of 2)
1
2
1

2. Carefully turn the assembly over, and then make sure that the tabs on the spring mounting
blocks are fully seated in the assembly sheet metal.
Figure 2-80 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly (2 of 2)
To clear the jam
paper blocking the paper path.
stack of media.
3. Ensure the type and quality of the media that you are using meet HP specifications.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test the registration TOP sensor (SR2501) using the manual sensor test to verify that the sensor
is functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the registration sensor assembly.
NOTE: This sensor is located on the ITB directly in the center. Manually move sensor to
check for free movement and response in sensor test.
actually stops . Depending on where media is stopping check for obstructions or damage and
replace parts as required.
8. Check the Second Transfer Assembly for broken white hooks IF white hooks are found to be
Broken elevate to the GBU

13.B2.FF
Description
Residual Media Jam in Registration Area
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Registration sensor (SR2501) at power on.
Recommended action
paper blocking the paper path
stack of media.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test the registration TOP sensor (SR2501) using the manual sensor test to verify that the sensor
is functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the registration sensor assembly.
NOTE: This sensor is located on the ITB directly in the center. Manually move sensor to
check for free movement and response in sensor test.
actually stops . Depending on where media is stopping check for obstructions or damage and
replace parts as required.
8. Check the Second Transfer Assembly for broken white hooks IF white hooks are found to be
Broken elevate to the GBU
13.B4.FF
Description
Residual Media jam Loop sensor (SR29 or SR30)
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Loop sensor (SR29 or SR30) at power on.
Recommended action
1. Open Right door and clear the jam in the indicated area
3. If the issue persists as another specific Paper Jam, troubleshoot the specified Jam location.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test the Loop sensor (SR29 and SR 30) using the manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace T2 assembly
13.B9.Az
Description
Fuser delivery stay
This jam occurs when the fuser delivery sensor (SR35) does not detect the trailing edge of the paper
within a specified period of time from when the sensor detected the leading edge. The paper stopped
at the fuser-output sensor (stay at fuser output sensor).
This jam code may be caused by;
An accordion jam at the fuser exit, something blocking the media before the output rollers. The output
bin rollers not turning, there is very little distance from the fuser exit and the output bin.
The IPTU stalled, both would have to make the next sensor or you would get a late to that sensor jam
first. The rollers would either stop or slow to the point that the timing is off for exiting the fuser sensor.
A sticky fuser exit flag, if it stuck or even delayed momentarily in the activated position.
13.B9.A2
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Normal.
13.B9.A3
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Light 1 or Light 2 (see the event log secondary jam
information digits for specific mode).
13.B9.A4
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy 1.
13.B9.A5
13.B9.AB
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Transparency.
13.B9.AD
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 (see the event log secondary jam
Recommended action
CAUTION: Be careful the fuser is HOT, allow it cool if you need to remove debris from in and
around the pressure heating components

1. Open the right door, and then clear any jammed paper
2. Ensure sure that the paper meets HP specifications.
3. Remove the fuser, and then clear any jammed paper.
4. verify there is no debris from a previous jam stuck in the fuser or rollers leading into or out of the
fuser.
5. Confirm the output bin rollers are turning
6. Remove the IPTU and inspect it for damage and debris.
7. Run the sensor test and confirm the fuser exit flag is working properly.
8. Replace the fuser.
13.B9.Bz Jam in RIGHT Door.

Description
Jam in RIGHT Door.
This jam occurs when a near complete overlap (less than 5 to 15 mm of non-overlap) multi-feed jam
is detected.
13.B9.B1
Multi-Feed jam is detected when printing from Tray 1.
13.B9.B2
13.B9.B3
13.B9.B4
13.B9.B5
13.B9.BD
Multi-Feed jam is detected when printing from the Duplexer.
Recommended action
1. Open the Right door and clear the jam in the indicated area.
3. Make sure the media meets HP specifications and is loaded in the trays correctly.
4. Make sure that the pickup, feed, and separation roller for the specified tray are installed correctly
and show no damage or wear.

13.B9.Cz
Description
Fuser Wrap Jam
This jam occurs when the media disappears from the fuser output sensor (SR35) before a designated
amount of time after the media reached the fuser output sensor (SR35)
(It is determined that the media is being wrapped around the fuser roller)
Z = Fuser mode
13.B9.C1 (event code)
Fuser wrap jam when Auto Sense (Normal).
Fuser wrap jam when Normal.
Fuser wrap jam when Light 1 or Light 2 (see event log secondary jam information for specific
code).
Fuser wrap jam when Heavy 1.
Fuser wrap jam when Heavy 2.
Fuser wrap jam when Heavy media 3.
Fuser wrap jam when Glossy media 1.
13.B9.CB (event code)
Fuser wrap jam when Transparency.
13.B9.CC (event code)
Fuser wrap jam when Label.
13.B9.CD (event code)
Fuser wrap jam when Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 (see event log secondary jam information for
specific code).

Recommended action
1. Open the Right door.
CAUTION: Be careful the fuser might be HOT, allow it cool if you need to remove debris from
in and around the pressure heating components.
2. Remove the fuser, and then remove any paper wrapped around the fuser roller.
3. Reinstall the fuser, and then close the door.
4. Print a cleaning page to make sure that all of the toner is removed from the fuser roller.
5. Use the manual sensor tests to toggle the fuser output sensor (SR35). If the sensor is not
functioning correctly, replace the fuser assembly.
6. If the error persists, the fuser roller or pressure roller might be damaged. Replace the fuser.
13.B9.Dz
Description
Fuser delivery delay jam
This jam occurs when the media disappears from the fuser output sensor (SR35) before a designated
amount of time after the registration sensor (SR2501) sensed the leading edge when printing.
13.B9.D1
Fuser delivery delay jam when printing from Tray 1.
13.B9.D2
13.B9.D3
13.B9.D4
13.B9.D5
13.B9.DD
Fuser delivery delay jam when printing with the Duplexer.
Recommended action
1. Open right door and clear the jam in the indicated area.
Media Stopped before Fuser

1. Thoroughly check the duplex paper path and the ITB/Transfer area for issues with rollers,
jammed paper or any potential obstructions that might be causing the jam
2. Verify that the transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replaced it if
necessary.
3. Inspect the Transfer feed assembly for debris or damage. Replace Right door sub Assembly.
4.
Media Stopped In or At the Fuser
CAUTION: The fuser might be HOT.
1. Remove the Fuser and inspect Fuser sleeve, Pressure roller and delivery roller for blockage
and/or damage. Replace Fuser as needed.
2. Verify that fuser inlet guide is not detached or broken
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
4. Test the Fuser Delivery sensor (SR35) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the fuser.
6. Run the Fuser motor drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly.
If they are not, replace the Fuser Motor Assembly.
13.B9.FF
Description
Residual Media jam Fuser Output Sensor
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Fuser Output sensor (SR35) at power on.
Recommended action
3. Remove the fuser and inspect the fuser sleeve, pressure roller, and delivery roller for blockage
and/or damage. Replace the fuser as needed.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test the Fuser Delivery sensor (SR35) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the fuser.
6. Run the Fuser motor drive test to verify that the Fuser Drive and Gears are functioning correctly.
If they are not, replace the Fuser Motor Assembly.
13.BA.EE
Description
This jam occurs when the Engine front door is opened during printing (Sensor SW14)
Recommended action
2. Check the projection tabs of the front door that engage the door sensors (SW14). If damaged,
replace the appropriate part.
3. Use the Manual sensor test to activate the door switch. Replace the switch if it is not functioning
correctly.
4. Check the appropriate connectors on the DC controller PCA.
13.BB.EE
Description
This jam occurs when the engine right door (SW13) is opened during printing.
Recommended action
1. Close the right door.
2. Check the projection tabs of the right door that engage the door sensor (SW13). If damaged,
replace the appropriate part.
3. Use the Manual sensor test to activate the door switch. Replace the switch if it is not functioning
correctly.
4. Check the appropriate connectors on the DC controller PCA.
13.D1.Az
Description
Jam in Left Door
This jam occurs when the media stays at the duplex switchback sensor (SR301) for a designated
amount of time after it has reached the duplex switchback sensor (SR301).
Z = Fuser Mode
13.D1.A1

The fuser is printing in fuser mode Auto Sense special case distinguished from "typed" Normal.
13.D1.A2
13.D1.A3
13.D1.A4
13.D1.A5
13.D1.A6
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Heavy media 3.
13.D1.A7
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Glossy media 1.
13.D1.A8
13.D1.A9
13.D1.AB
13.D1.AC
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Label.
Recommended action
1. Follow the on screen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction.
3. Check to ensure the duplex motor reverse and reefed motor function properly.
Duplexer reverse-motor test
Administration
Troubleshooting

Component Test.
Duplexer reverse motor
Duplexing reverse-motor test, Activates the duplexing reverse motor for 10 seconds
Duplexer re-feed-motor test
Administration
Troubleshooting
Component Test.
Duplexer re-feed motor
Duplexing reefed motor test, Activates the duplexing re-feed motor for 10 seconds
5. If either of these tests fail replace the Duplexing - Reversing assembly
NOTE: If this error is present after a previous service on the printer, check connector J1902,
J9946, J1909, J1908 for proper seating and connection
6. If Motor tests pass, Check the following sensors: .
SR301 Duplex Switchback Sensor test
SR302 Duplex Delivery sensor, Sensor test
Verify sensor functionality using the Manual Sensor Test:
Administration
Troubleshooting
Touch Paper Path Sensors.
7. If the sensor fails to change state have customer ensure that the sensor moves freely and have
the customer clean to the best of their ability and test again.
8. If sensor test continues to fails, sensor may be defective Replace sensor or the sensor
assembly.
9. If sensor functioning properly, Replace the Right door assembly.
13.D1.Dz
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Duplex Switchback sensor (SR301) in
designated amount of time after the fuser output sensor (SR45) sensed the leading edge.
Z = Fuser Mode
13.D1.D1

13.D1.D2
13.D1.D3
13.D1.D4
13.D1.D5
13.D1.D6
13.D1.D7
13.D1.D8
13.D1.D9
13.D1.DB
13.D1.DC
Recommended action
3. Where is the leading and trailing edge of the paper during the error state?
Has it exited the Fuser?
Stuck in diverter assembly?
Stopped at input of Duplexer?
STOPPED IN Fuser:
Check the event log to find if there are paper jams related Fuser Wrap Jam,

1. Check the life of the Fuser unit, replace fuser as needed.
2. Check Fuser Guide assembly and verify that is not causing the media to get damaged and be
stuck at fuser exit.
STUCK in Diverter:
Check Right door assembly for blockage.
1. Check sensor in right door assembly using sensor test.
2. If faulty or issue with right door, Replace the Right-door sub-assembly
Stopped at Duplexer:
1. Check to ensure the duplex motor reverse assembly and duplex re-feed motor function
properly(Use component test to check both duplexer reverse motor and duplexer re-feed motor
function)
2. If either of these tests fail replace the Duplexing - switchback assembly and Duplexing-feed
assembly
13.D1.FF
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Duplex Switchback sensor (SR301) at power
on
Recommended action
3. Replace the duplex switchback assembly.
13.D3.Az
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when the media stays at the Duplex Feed sensor (SR304) for designated amount of
time after it has reached the Duplex Feed sensor (SR304)
13.D3.A1
13.D3.A2
13.D3.A3

13.D3.A4
13.D3.A5
13.D3.A6
13.D3.A7
13.D3.A8
13.D3.A9
Recommended action
3. Using the component test, Check to ensure the duplex motors reverse and reefed motor function
properly
Duplexer Feed motor. (Duplexing Feed-motor test, Activates the duplexing reverse motor
for 10 seconds).
Duplexer re-feed motor (Duplexing reefed motor test, Activates the duplexing re-feed motor
for 10 seconds).
NOTE: If this error is present after a previous service on the printer, check connector for proper
seating and connection.
5. If Motor tests pass, Verify sensor functionality using the Manual Sensor Test. SR304 Duplex re-
pick feed Sensor
7. If sensor test continues to fails, sensor may be defective Replace the duplex feed assembly.
13.D3.Dz
Description
Jam in Right Door

This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Duplex re-feed sensor (SR304) in designated
amount of time after the Duplex Switchback sensor (SR302) sensed the leading edge
13.D3.D1
13.D3.D2
13.D3.D3
13.D3.D4
13.D3.D5
13.D3.D6
13.D3.D7
13.D3.D8
13.D3.D9
Recommended action
properly
for 10 seconds).
for 10 seconds).
NOTE: If this error is present after a previous service on the printer, check connector J202 for
proper seating and connection.

pick feed Sensor
13.D3.FF
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the duplex delivery sensor SR302 or the duplexer
re-feed sensor (SR304) at power on.
Recommended action
properly
for 10 seconds).
for 10 seconds).
NOTE: If this error is present after a previous service on the printer, check connector J202 for
proper seating and connection.
pick feed Sensor
13.DF.Dz
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the duplex delivery sensor (SR302) in a designated
amount of time after the duplex switchback sensor SR301 sensed the leading edge.
13.DF.D1

13.DF.D2
13.DF.D3
13.DF.D4
13.DF.D5
13.DF.D6
13.DF.D7
13.DF.D8
13.DF.D9
Recommended action
properly
for 10 seconds).
for 10 seconds).
5. If either of these tests fail replace the Duplexing-Reversing assembly
NOTE: If this error occurs after a previous service on the printer, check connector J1902,
J9946, J1909, J1908 for proper seating and connection
6. If Motor tests pass, Verify sensor functionality using the Manual Sensor Test.

SR301 Duplex Switchback Sensor
SR302 Duplex feed sensor
10. If the issue persists, replace the duplexer.
13.E1.Dz
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Face Down sensor (SR33) in designated amount
of time after the Fuser delivery Sensor 2 (SR45) sensed the leading edge.
13.E1.D1
13.E1.D2
13.E1.D3
13.E1.D4
13.E1.D5
13.E1.D6
13.E1.D7
13.E1.D8
13.E1.D9
13.E1.DB

13.E1.DC
Recommended action
1. Open Right Door and clear the jam in the indicated area.
3. Make sure that the delivery flags move smoothly.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test Face Down Bin Full sensor (SR33) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the delivery sensor assembly.
6. Inspect the fuser guide and Fuser for damage, positioning or wear.
7. Replace Fusing Assembly or fuser guide as needed.
8. If message persists, inspect the Right door Assembly and replace if needed.
9. Replace the Face-down delivery assembly
13.E1.FF
Description
Residual Jam -
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Face Down Bin Full sensor (SR33) at power
on.
Recommended action
1. Remove paper from top output. Open the Right door and clear the jam in the indicated area.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test Face Down Bin Full sensor (SR33) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the delivery sensor assembly.
6. Inspect the fuser guide and Fuser for damage, positioning or wear.

7. Replace Fusing Assembly or fuser guide as needed.
8. Replace the delivery Face-down delivery assembly
13.E2.Az
Description
Jam in IPTU
This jam occurs when the media stays at the IPTU feed sensor 1 (SR203) for a designated time
period after IPTU feed sensor 1 (SR203) sensed the leading edge.
13.E2.A1
13.E2.A2
13.E2.A3
13.E2.A4
13.E2.A5
13.E2.A6
13.E2.A7
13.E2.A8
13.E2.A9
13.E2.AB
13.E2.AC
13.E2.AD
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 (see event log secondary jam
information digits for specific mode)

Recommended action
3. Check the IPTU for any damaged or excessive ware.
4. Check the White wheels on Entrance to upper-guide assembly. Look for Damage, skew or
missing rollers.
If a roller is out of the sheet metal holder, you can tighten the holding clip by pinching both sides
of the holder together with the White roller removed. This will apply more force to the sides of the
roller and help hold it more securely.
NOTE: The white rollers from the top cover come off and get inside the output device blocking
the pass of the paper. The paper can also come out skewed.
Many times the rollers can be found inside the output device.
Figure 2-81 Entrance to upper guide white wheels
5. Reinstall the rollers correctly if rollers are recovered from device. If not order new rollers.
6. Check the wheels on the Saddle paper feeder assembly for skew/damaged .
7. Make sure the Delivery assembly is not damaged and the finisher is correctly aligned to printer.
8. Replace the IPTU Lower Guide Assembly
13.E2.Dz
Description
Jam in IPTU
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the IPTU feed sensor 1 (SR203) in designated
amount of time after the Fuser delivery Sensor 2 (SR45) sensed the leading edge.
13.E2.D1

13.E2.D2
13.E2.D3
13.E2.D4
13.E2.D5
13.E2.D6
13.E2.D7
13.E2.D8
13.E2.D9
13.E2.DB
13.E2.DC
13.E2.DD
Recommended action
3. Check the IPTU for any damaged or excessive ware.
missing rollers

If a roller is out of the sheet metal holder, you can tighten the holding clip by pinching both sides
of the holder together with the White roller removed. This will apply more force to the sides of the
roller and help hold it more securely.
NOTE: The white rollers from the top cover come off and get inside the output device blocking
the pass of the paper. The paper can also come out skewed.
Many times the rollers can be found inside the output device.
5. Reinstall the rollers correctly if rollers are recovered from device. If not order new rollers.
6. Check the wheels on the Saddle paper feeder assembly for skew/damaged .
7. Make sure the Delivery assembly is not damaged and the finisher is correctly aligned to printer.
8. Replace the IPTU Lower Guide Assembly
13.E3.Az
Description
Jam in IPTU
13.E3.A1
13.E3.A2
13.E3.A3
13.E3.A4
13.E3.A5
13.E3.A6
13.E3.A7
13.E3.A8
13.E3.A9

13.E3.AB
13.E3.AC
13.E3.AD
Recommended action
3. Check to ensure the Paper-transport motors function properly.
4. Test the Paper-transport motor
This test activates the IPTU motor and is only available when the IPTU is installed. During test,
observe the two sets of rollers on the left side, facing the IPTU, these rollers are controlled by
M201, and M202.
5. Check the IPTU around SR202 sensor to see if there is something possibly blocking the paper
path or for any damaged or excessive ware.
missing rollers.
7. Check the wheels on the Saddle paper feeder assembly for skew/damaged.
8. Make sure the Deliver assembly is not damaged and the finisher is correctly aligned to printer.
9. Replace the IPTU Lower Guide Assembly or Feed Motor 2
13.E3.Dz
Description
Jam in IPTU
amount of time
13.E3.D1
13.E3.D2
13.E3.D3

13.E3.D4
13.E3.D5
13.E3.D6
13.E3.D7
13.E3.D8
13.E3.D9
13.E3.DB
13.E3.DC
13.E3.DD
Recommended action
M201, and M202.
missing rollers.

13.E34Az
Description
Jam in IPTU
13.E4.A1
13.E4.A2
13.E4.A3
13.E4.A4
13.E4.A5
13.E4.A6
13.E4.A7
13.E4.A8
13.E4.A9
13.E4.AB
13.E4.AC
13.E4.AD

Recommended action
M201, and M202.
missing rollers.
13.E4.Dz
Description
Jam in IPTU
amount of time
13.E4.D1
13.E4.D2
13.E4.D3
13.E4.D4
13.E4.D5
13.E4.D6
13.E4.D7

13.E4.D8
13.E4.D9
13.E4.DB
13.E4.DC
13.E4.DD
Recommended action
M201, and M202.
missing rollers.
13.E6.Dz
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when the media does not reach the Face Down sensor (SR33) in designated amount
of time after the Fuser delivery Sensor 2 (SR45) sensed the leading edge.
13.E6.D1

13.E6.D2
13.E6.D3
13.E6.D4
13.E6.D5
13.E6.D6
13.E6.D7
13.E6.D8
13.E6.D9
13.E6.DB
13.E6.DC
13.E6.DD
13.E6.D2
13.E6.D3
13.E6.D4
13.E6.D5

13.E6.DB
13.E6.DD
The fuser is printing in fuser mode Envelope 1 or Envelope 2 (see the event log secondary jam
Recommended action
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
5. Test the face down bin full sensor (SR33) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If not replace the delivery sensor assembly
6. Inspect the fuser guide and Fuser for damage positioning or wear.Replace Fusing guide
Assembly or Fuser as needed.
7. If Jam message persists, inspect the Right door Assembly.
13.E6.FF
Description
Jam in Right Door
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the Face Down Bin Full sensor (SR33) at power
on
Recommended action
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests

5. Test the face down bin full sensor (SR33) using the manual sensor test to verify the sensor is
functioning correctly. If not replace the delivery sensor assembly
13.EA.EE
Description
IPTU Door Open Jam
This jam occurs when the IPTU door (SR204) is opened during printing
Recommended action
1. Close the IPTU door to allow the product to attempt to clear the jam.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
3. Test SR204 using the manual sensor switch test to verify the switch is functioning correctly.
4. If the issue persists, replace IPTU.
13.FF.FF
Description
Jam in Printer
This jam occurs when residual media is detected at the multiple media path sensors.
This jam code will only be in the event log if it is a residual jam at power on.
Recommended action
1. Open all the doors and clear all media from the product.
2. Close all the doors to allow the product to attempt to clear the paper path.
30.01.01
Description
The flatbed cover sensor was interrupted.
The scanner flatbed cover is open.
Message appears only in the event log and is not posted on the control panel.
The control panel will read Flatbed Cover Open.

Recommended action
No action necessary. This error message should automatically clear.
If the error persists, open the Scanner Tests to test the Flatbed cover sensor.
1. If the cover is closed, check the cover sensor at the right rear of the scanner for correct
mechanical functionality, using the scanner sensor test in the Administration / Troubleshooting /
Diagnostics / Scanner Tests Menu.
2. Check the connectors on the scanner control board (SCB) for loose connections.
3. Replace the Lid-Sensor assembly.
4. Replace the SCB
5. Replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA)
30.01.06
Description
Scanner fan error
The Copy, Fax and Send options will be grayed out or not present on the control panel and message
will be posted in Event log.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, and then on again.
2. During the MFP initialization sequence, listen to the fan to determine if it is operating.
3. the error persists, turn the product off and then check the fan wire-harness connectors
4. If the error persists, replace the Scan Control Board (SCB)
You may want to provide both parts SCB and ISA for onsite technician.
30.01.08
Description
The scanner optic failed to return to the home position.
Recommended action
2. Observe the movement of the optics assembly.
3. Check scanner Lock. Have the customer move the lock back and forth and leave it in the Unlock
position. Retest printer by powering the unit back up.
4. If the error persists, run the scanner motor test under component test. Administration/
Troubleshooting/Scanner tests/Flatbed motor test

5. If issue still remains and firmware has been upgraded replace Scanner Control Board (SCB).
6. If the error persists, replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA).
30.01.14
Description
Scanner control board (SCB) EEPROM error.
Recommended action
2. Ensure all connectors on the SCB are seated fully.
3. Ensure the MFP has at latest SCB firmware version.
4. Replace the SCB..
30.01.15
Description
Scanner did not initialize (internal error).
The scanner failed to be initialized due to an internal error.
Recommended action
2. Verify that all covers are installed correctly and that the ADF and ADF jam cover are closed.
3. Check all sensors on the scanner to ensure they are not blocked.
4. Look through the vents on back of Scanner see if GREEN SCB LEDs are lit.
5. Check all connections for SCB to print engine
6. Replace the SCB
30.01.18
Description
Scanner internal optical sensor error.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that all the connectors on the SCB are seated fully.
3. Make sure that the MFP has the latest SCB firmware version.
4. replace the SCB.
5. If the error persists, Replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA)

30.01.19
Description
Scanner internal lamp sensor error.
Recommended action
2. Determine if the scanner lamp turns on and off approximately 12 second after the product turns
on.
3. Test the lower lamp using the Scanner test located in the Diagnostics menu.
4. Re-seat the interconnect cables between the optical carriage and the SCB.
30.01.23 Scanner calibration failure
Description
The scanner calibration failed.
Recommended action
2. After the product warms up, repeat the calibration process.
3. If the error persists, Replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA).
30.01.30 or 30.01.32
Description
HP image ASIC error.
Recommended action
Turn the product off, and then on again.
Check the connection on the SCB.
Replace the SCB
30.01.36
Description
Scanner firmware upgrade error.
Recommended action
1. Re-send the scanner firmware upgrade.
2. If the error persists, replace the SCB.

30.01.41
Description
The formatter lost connections with the SCB or communication was corrupted.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, and then on.
2. Re-seat the Formatter.
3. Upgrade the firmware.
4. Verify that all cables are connected to the product and to the interconnect board/ formatter and
SCB.
5. Verify that the Scanner Control Board (SCB) has power.
6. Replace the Scanner Control Board (SCB).
7. Replace the Formatter.
8. Replace the interconnect board.
30.01.42
Description
Internal product communication error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the SCB connectors.
30.01.43
Description
Scan memory error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then re-seat the formatter.
3. If the error persists, replace the formatter.
30.01.44
Description
CPB/SCB communication error

Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the scanner cable.
5. If the error persists, replace the SCB or the formatter.
30.01.45
Description
Internal CPB communication error.
CPB code assertion error for the copy processor board firmware.
Recommended action
30.01.46
Description
The firmware cannot find the copy processor board.
Recommended action
30.01.47
Description
Document feeder error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the document feeder wire-harness
connectors.

3. If the error persists, replace the document feeder assembly.
30.01.48
Description
Scanner error.
Scanner power is not connected.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the scanner wire-harness connectors
and the scanner power supply fan.
3. If the error persists, replace Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA).
30.01.49
Description
Scanner inverter fan error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the scanner wire-harness connectors
and the scanner power supply fan.
3. If the error persists, replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA)
30.01.50
Description
Internal SCB error.
Recommended action
2. Upgrade the Firmware (FW).
30.03.14
Description
A non-fatal error has occurred.
A scanner EEPROM (NVM) error has occurred.
Recommended action
This is an informational message, and no action is required.

30.03.20
Description
The copy processor board firmware cannot communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly.
Recommended action
2. Verify that the FFC cables between scanner and the SCB are connected.
3. Replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA).
30.03.22
Description
Front side illumination calibration failure.
The scan module cannot see the illumination module, or marginal illumination.
The optical assembly may not be parked under the calibration strip.
Recommended action
3. Check the service event log for other scanner errors, and then resolve those errors.
4. Check the scan module FFC connection.
30.03.23
Description
Flatbed Alignment calibration error
Recommended action
3. Replace the scanner.
30.03.30
Description
Flatbed motor shutdown
The scanner control board cannot communicate with the flatbed scanner motor.

Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, and then on again. As the product turns on, verify that the scan head
moves.
2. Verify that the drive belt is in the correct position.
3. Run diagnostics on the flatbed scanner to see if the scan bar moves.
4. Check the cable connection to the SCB.
5. Replace the scanner.
30.03.45
Description
Scanner control board (SCB) firmware assertion failure. SCB firmware assert controls the scan head
motor.
Recommended action
3. Replace the SCB.
4. Replace the scanner assembly.
31.03.14
Description
Backside scanner EEPROM (NVM) error
A non-fatal error has occurred.
Recommended action
This is an informational message, and no action is required.
31.03.20
Description
Backside scanner not detected
Recommended action
2. Verify the cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected.
3. the Document Feeder Assembly

31.03.22
Description
Backside illumination calibration failure
Recommended action
2. Verify the cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected.
3. the Document Feeder Assembly
31.03.30
Description
The document feeder pick motor is not turning.
Recommended action
1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications.
2. Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded.
3. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and then resolve any errors first.
4. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If the motor
turns, then the motor is good.
5. Verify that the motor cables are connected.
6. Re-seat the document feeder to the SCB.
7. Replace the document feeder.
31.03.31
Description
The document feeder feed motor is not turning.
Recommended action

31.03.32
Description
The document feeder de-skew motor is not turning.
Recommended action
5. Re-seat the ADF to SCB cables.
31.03.34
Description
The removable background for the backside scanner is either missing or not fully snapped into place
Recommended action
1. Remove the white background and clean it.
2. Clean the backside scanner glass.
3. If issue remains replace the Document feeder assembly
31.13.01
Description
ADF Job Error, Pick error.
Paper pick was initiated, but the page didn't did not make it to the pick success sensor.
Recommended action
1. Open the ADF lid, pull sheets back into input tray, and then resume the job.
2. Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width.
4. Check the document feeder page count for roller life.
6. Clean the ADF Pick and feeder rollers and clean Separation pad If worn or damage replace
roller kit.

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Scanner Tests
8. Actuate the Pick-Success Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace
the document feeder.
9. If sensor not available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the Document feeder
Assembly.
31.13.02
Description
ADF job error, Feed jam
The paper passed the pick success sensor, and then jammed in the document feeder paper path.
Recommended action
1. Clear the paper path and try feeding the page again.
3. Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width.
4. Verify that the paper path is clear.
5. Clean the ADF Pick and feeder rollers and clean Separation pad. If worn or damage replace
roller kit.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Scanner Tests
7. Actuate the Paper-Path Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace
the sensor.
8. If sensor not available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the Document feeder
assembly.
31.13.13
Description
The ADF jam access door is open.

Recommended action
1. Verify that the jam access cover is closed.
2. Verify that the flag is not broken off.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Scanner Tests
4. Actuate the ADF Jam Cover Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested,
replace the Sensor.
5. If inot available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the Document feeder
Assembly
31.13.14
Description
ADF job error: over current
This is a feed jam in the document feeder, and the motor is not turning.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that the document feeder input tray is not overloaded.
4. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If there is
no error, then the motor is good.
31.13.15
Description
This is a duplex re-feed jam in the document feeder.
The paper jam occurs on the back-side copy. The duplex re-feed does not make it to the deskew
sensor.
Recommended action
1. Remove the jammed paper.
2. Verify that there is nothing in the paper path of the duplex refeed area.

3. Retry the copy job.
4. Replace the document feeder Assembly.
32.08.XX Error Messages
32.08.A1, 32.08.A2, 32.08.A3
Description
32.08.A1 (event code)
Shutdown event-boot after abnormal shutdown
Boot from normal shutdown event
Regular boot event
Recommended action
32.1C.XX
Description
32.1C.05 (event code)
The restore job ticket was submitted with invalid credentials
The backup job ticket was submitted with invalid credentials
Backup restore permissions error
There was an error during the creation, read, or write of the restore file.
Not enough disk space to perform backup/restore or network share issue
There was an error during the creation, read, or write of the backup file.
Tried to restore a backup file that was not valid for this product
The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of
the data or no loner present.
32.1C.0A (event code)
Backup file is invalid

The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of
the data or no loner present.
32.1C.0D (event code)
Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy
Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the engine
The backup was aborted because the product is busy.
32.1C.13 (event code) and 32.1C.14 (event code)
Not enough space exists to perform the backup
The backup was aborted because the disk is at a critical level or full.
Scheduled backup failure
Restore aborted because the backup file was created by a previous version of firmware no longer
supported by the feature.
32.1C.2E (event code)
The restore was aborted because the product is busy.
32.1C.2F (event code)
Reset failure
The backup operation completed successfully (informational).
The backup operation encountered an error (informational).
The backup operation completed, but with a warning message (informational).
A component in the backup file is not supported by the current version of firmware and will not be
restored (informational).
A component in the backup file is not transferable to another product and will not be restored
(informational).
Some data was not included in the backup file (informational).

An expected component could not be found and was thus not backed up. Because components
should be known on backups, this code is a warning (informational).
Some data was not restored from the backup file (informational).
The backup job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path.
The backup job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption.
An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the backup files in transition
to and from the compressed (ZIP) file.
Reset aborted. Backup/restore in progress (informational).
Reset aborted (informational).
Unknown reset error (informational).
The restore operation completed successfully (informational).
The restore operation encountered an error.
The restore operation completed, but with a warning message.
The restore job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path.
The restore job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption personal identification number (PIN).
An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the restore files in transition
to and from the compressed (ZIP) file.
An unusual error occurred when running the restore.

Recommended action
Verify the credentials that were submitted. Check the domain, user name, and password.
Verify the credentials that were submitted. Check the domain, user name, and password.
Retry the job.
Retry the job.
Remove stored jobs and retry.
Use a larger capacity storage device.
Check the network share.
Remove any stored jobs, and then retry.
If the error persists, try using a larger capacity storage device and check the network share settings.
Use a valid backup file.
Use a valid backup file.
Reboot, and then observe the state of the product.
If the error persists, perform a partition clean from the Preboot menu.
Reboot, and then retry the backup/restore.
Wait until the product is idle, and then try again.
32.1C.13 (event code) and 32.1C.14 (event code)
Free up disk space, and then try again.
- Use the current backup file.
32.1C.2E (event code)
Wait until the product is idle, and then try again.
Turn the product off then on, and then retry.

32.1C.2F (event code)
Turn the product off then on, and then retry.
Check that a share was provided as part of the network path (not blank).
Check that the server and the share exists.
Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server.
Verify that the encryption personal identification number (PIN) meets the restrictions for the product.
Retry the job.
If this does not resolve the issue, turn the product off then on again and retry the job.
If the error persists, perform a Partial Clean using the Preboot menu.

Review the error log to see specific details about the failure.
Review the error log to see specific details about the failure.
Check that a share was provided as part of the network path (not blank).
Check that the server and the share exist.
Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server.
Check that the path includes the compressed (ZIP) file name as part of the path
Verify the encryption personal identification number (PIN) is the same PIN used to encrypt the backup
file.
Retry the job.
Retry the job.
40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch OK
Description
The USB buffer has overflowed.
Recommended action
1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost).
2. Check the host configuration.
40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch OK
Description
The product has experienced a JetDirect buffer overflow.

Recommended action
1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost).
2. Check the host configuration.
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch OK

Description
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An incorrect communications
protocol might be in use.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost).
40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch OK

Description
The connection between the product and the USB device has been broken.
Recommended action
1. Touch the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing.
2. Remove, and then reinstall the USB device.
40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch OK

Description
The USB device has been removed.
Recommended action
1. Touch the OK button to clear the error message (data will be lost).
2. Install the USB device.
40.08.0X USB storage accessory removed

Description
X = 0 or ;1 information code.
Secure file erase is enabled.
Recommended action
40.0X.05 USB storage accessory removed

Description
X = 1, 2, 3, 5, or 6; information code.
The USB storage accessory was removed.

Recommended action
41.01.YZ
Description
Event log error message: 41.01.YZ.
An unknown misprint error occurred on the product.
Y = Type, Z = Tray
Y = 0: Photo Media (1, 2, or 3)
Y = 1: Auto Sense (Normal)
Y = 2: Normal (typed not from Auto Sense)
Y = 3: Light media 1, 2, or 3 mode
Y = 4: Heavy media 1
Y = 7: Glossy media 1
Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label
Y = D: Envelope 1, 2, or 3 mode
Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Z = 0: From unknown tray
Z = 1: From Tray 1
Z = 2: From Tray 2
Z = 3: From Tray 3
Z = 4: From Tray 4
Z = 5: From Tray 5
Z = 6: From Tray 6

Z = 7: From Tray 7
Z = 8: From Tray 8
Z = 9: From Tray 9
Z = D: From duplex
Recommended action
1. Touch OK to clear the error.
2. If the error is not cleared, Turn the product off, and then on again.
3. If the error returns, check the wire harness from the laser scanner to the DC controller.
4. If the error persists, replace the affected laser/scanner.
5. Replace the DC controller.
41.02.00
Description
A beam detected misprint error.
41.02.05 Black station
41.02.06 Cyan station
41.02.07 Magenta station
41.02.08 Yellow station
Recommended action
1. To clear the error message, touch OK.
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then on again.
3. If the error returns, check the wire harness from the laser/scanners to the DC controller.
4. If the error continues, replace the affected laser/scanner
41.03.FZ Unknown Misprint Error

Description
This is a general misprint error. Either media is loaded off-center with the side guides in the tray or a
media width sensor failure occurred from an unknown tray. The error will be one of the following:
41.03.F0
41.03.F1
41.03.F2
41.03.F3
41.03.F4

41.03.F5
41.03.FD
Recommended action
1. Reload the tray, verifying that the guides in the tray are flush with the loaded media in the tray.
2. Try the print job again.
Watch the mechanism to see if it is functioning correctly. If the linkage is broken, replace the
paper tray.
3. If the error persists, print a Configuration Page and note the paper size for the tray in question.
If the size is not reported correctly, run the tray size sensor test in the Diagnostic menu.
If the tray size sensors test as GOOD, replace the paper tray.
If the tray size sensors test as BAD, check the cable connections between the tray size
sensor and the DC Controller.
If the cable connections are plugged in correctly and the cables are not compromised,
replace the correct component that contains the tray size sensing switches.
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another tray, touch "Options "
Description
The product detected a different paper size than expected.
Y = Type, Z = Tray
Y = 0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected.
Y = A Size mismatch. Detected media too long.
Y = B Size mismatch. Detected media too short.
Y = C Size mismatch. Inter-page gap error.
Z = D Source is the duplexer.
Z = E Source is the envelope feeder.
Z = 2 Source is Tray 2.
Recommended action
1. Touch OK to use another tray.
2. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides
are correctly adjusted.

3. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the cassette media switch is correctly
functioning.
4. If the error persists, remove and reinstall the ITB unit.
5. Check all connections from DC Controller to lifting drive assembly.
6. Reconnect the connectors for the media sensor, intermediate-transfer belt, and the DC controller
PCA.
7. If the error persists, replace
Lifting drive assembly
T2 Assembly.
ITB Unit
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in tray <X>

Description
The product detected a different paper size than expected.
Y = Type, Z = Tray
Y = 0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected.
Y = A Size mismatch. Detected media too long.
Y = B Size mismatch. Detected media too short.
Y = C Size mismatch. Inter-page gap error.
Z = E Source is the envelope feeder.
Recommended action
1. Touch OK to use another tray.
2. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides
are correctly adjusted.
3. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the cassette media switch is correctly
functioning.
4. If the error persists, remove and reinstall the ITB unit.
5. Check all connections from DC Controller to lifting drive assembly.

PCA.
7. If the error persists, replace
Lifting drive assembly
T2 Assembly.
ITB Unit
41.04.YZ Printer Error

Description
An unknown misprint error occurred on the product.
Y = Type, Z = Tray
Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label
Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Z = 0 Source is the envelope feeder.

Recommended action
1. Touch OK to clear the error .
2. If error does not clear, Turn the product off, and then on again
3. Swap out or re-seat each toner cartridge to test it.
4. Check the toner cartridges before replacing any other parts (HP original?, connectors, etc.).
5. Re-seat the connections to the laser/scanner and the DC controller.
7. Replace the DC controller.
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in tray <X>

Description
The product can detect the type of paper in the paper path, and it adjusts the print mode accordingly.
The product uses two types of media sensors:
Reflection: Detects the glossiness of the paper
Transmission: Detects the thickness of the paper
Tray X is loaded with a media type (transparencies, envelopes, etc.) that is different than what they
tray is configured to use.
Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type
Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label

Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Z = 0: Photo Media (1, 2, or 3)
Z = 1: Auto Sense (Normal)
Z = 2: Normal (typed not from Auto Sense)
Z = 3: Light media 1, 2, or 3 mode
Z = 4: Heavy media 1
Z = 7: Glossy media 1
Z = A: Glossy film
Z = B: OHT
Z = C: Label
Z = D: Envelope 1, 2, or 3 mode
Z = E: Rough
Z = F: Other mode
Recommended action
1. Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available.
2. If this message displays and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver
settings to make sure they match the tray type settings.
3. Check all application and product settings to make sure that the Type setting is correct.
4. Remove and reinstall the ITB Unit
PCA.
6. Replace the ITB unit.
41.06.YZ Error To continue, touch OK

Description
ITB top detection error
Y= Media Type / Z= Tray

Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label
Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on again.
2. If the error persists, Remove and reinstall the ITB
PCA
4. Replace the ITB unit.
41.07.YZ Error To continue, touch OK

Description
A media transportation error has occurred. Optional input source delay
Y= Media Type / Z= Tray

Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label
Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and then on again.
2. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA.
41.XX.YZ Error To continue, touch OK

Description
This section covers all other errors of the form 41.XX.YZ not covered in the previous sections.
A product error has occurred.
XX = error type
Y = fuser mode

Z = input tray
XX = 02 Beam detect misprint
XX = 08 Media transportation error
XX = 09 Sub thermistor abnormally high
XX = 10 Pickup failure.
XX = 11 Illegal Duplex.
XX = 18 Scan line inclination adjustment
XX = 20 Image drum HV
Y = A: Glossy film
Y = B: OHT
Y = C: Label
Y = E: Rough
Y = F: Other mode
Z = 0 Envelope feeder
Z = 1 Tray 1
Z = 2 Tray 2
Z = 3 Tray 3
Z = 4 Tray 4
Z = 5 Tray 5

Z = 6 Tray 6
D Duplexer
Recommended action
1. To clear the message, touch the OK button.
2. If the message displays again, turn the product off, and then on again.
3. If the error persists, replace the DC Controller PCA.
42.XX.YY Error Messages
42.XX.YY Error Event Log message
Description
Internal system failure.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, then on, and then retry.
2. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean
item in the Preboot menu.
44.XX.XX Error Messages
44.01.XX Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
A digital send error has occurred.
Recommended action
Try to send the job again.
No action necessary. This error message should automatically clear.

Description
Personal address book error has occurred.
Recommended action
Check Digital send configuration and address book
Description
A digital send error has occurred.

Recommended action
Check the Digital Send configuration.

Description
Digital Send Email error has occurred.
Recommended action

Description
Digital Send Folder Job error has occurred.
Recommended action

Description
Digital Send Remote Printer Job Error has occurred.
Recommended action

Description
SharePoint Job Error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and then restart the job.
2. If the error occurs repeatedly Reboot the engine and retry the job
3. If error still persists, Reset to factory settings. Upgrade to newer firmware.

Description
A send to e-mail error has occurred.

Recommended action
44.11.0E Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
The attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on filename collisions
was set. This file will not be sent.
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, use a different filename or verify that the filename is
not already in use
2. If the issue persists, use a unique filename or disable the flag to fail on filename collision.

Description
A Digital Send error has occurred.
Recommended action

Description
Digital Send, The attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on
filename collisions is set. This file will not be sent
Recommended action
not already in use

Description
A Digital Send error has occurred.
Recommended action

44.16.01 Error Event log message (MFP Only)
Description
A Digital Send error has occurred while trying to create File Type.
XX =
01 RTF File
03 CSV File
04 HTML File
05 XML File
06 XPS File
07 PDF File
Recommended action
1. Try to send the job again
2. Check Digital Send configuration.
Description
The destination URL was found to be invalid or unreachable.
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and then restart the job.
2. If the error persists, Power cycle the device and retry the job.
Description
The destination URL is not a SharePoint site
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and then restart
the job.
2. If the error persists,
Check network connection settings
Verify access to the SharePoint site

Description
Credentials associated with the SharePoint destination were found to be invalid or missing.
Recommended action
the job.

Description
Credentials do not have write access to the SharePoint destination.
Recommended action
the job.
Description
Upload of image file failed. Reason unknown
Recommended action
the job.
2. If the error persists, Power cycle the device retry the job
Description
Upload of image file failed.
The file exceeded the maximum form submission length on the Web server.

Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, send fewer pages in the job, lower the DPI of the
scanned pages, or select a file type that splits pages into separate files (for example, jpeg).
2. If the error persists repeatedly, contact the SharePoint site administrator to increase the Web
server's maximum form submission length.

Description
Upload of image file failed. The SharePoint site storage quota limit was exceeded.
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, make space on the SharePoint site by deleting
some files, and then retry the job.
2. If the error occurs repeatedly, contact the SharePoint site administrator to increase the storage
quota limit

Description
Upload of image file failed. A folder or filename length is too long.
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, check the destination URL and filename in the
SharePoint job configuration to verify no folder or filename exceeds the maximum of 128
characters.
2. If the error occurs repeatedly, try sending to a different folder on the SharePoint site or changing
the filename (which could include prefix or suffix).
44.16.0A Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
Upload of the image file failed. The image file already exists on the server and is checked out for
editing by another user
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify that the filename used by the job is not
checked out on the SharePoint site
2. If the error occurs persists, use a different filename for the job.
44.16.0B Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
Upload of the image file failed. The image file already exists on the server and the job was set to not
overwrite files.

Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, set the job to overwrite existing files.
2. If the error occurs persists, use a different filename for the job.
44.16.0D Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
Encountered an unexpected processing error while transferring attachments to the destination

SharePoint
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and restart the
job.
2. If the error persists, Power cycle the device and retry the job. .
3. If error continues, Reset to factory settings. Upgrade to newer firmware

Description
The attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on filename collisions
was set. This file will not be sent
Recommended action
not already in use
44.16.0F Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
Not enough memory to process the current SharePoint Job
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and/or restart the job, breaking it up into
small jobs.
2. Repeat this process if the error persists until job goes through.

Description
SharePoint server is using an invalid certificate.

Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, send the SharePoint job to a non-secure address,
or send the job to a SharePoint server that has a valid certificate.
2. If the error occurs repeatedly, send the job to a different, trusted SharePoint server.
44.16.FF Error Event log message (MFP Only)

Description
Unexpected error occurred in the SharePoint resource device code
Recommended action
1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and restart the
job.
2. If error persists, Power cycle the device and retry the job.
3. If error continues, Reset to factory settings. Upgrade to newer firmware

Description
A fax error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Try to send the job again.
2. Check the FAX configuration
44.90.XX Error Event log message - 44.91.XX Error Event log message - 44.92.XX Error Event log message
(MFP Only)
Description
A fax error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. Try to send the job again.
2. Check the FAX configuration
47.XX.XX Error Messages
47.00.XX
Description
Back channel internal error

Recommended action
2. Resend the print job.
3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot
menu.
47.01.XX
Description
Image transformer internal error
Recommended action
menu.
47.02.XX
Description
Job parser internal error
Recommended action
menu.
47.03.XX
Description
Print job internal error
Recommended action
menu.
47.04.XX
Description
Print spooler 9100 internal error

Recommended action
menu.
47.05.00
Description
Print spooler framework internal error
Recommended action
menu.
47.06.XX
Description
Print App internal error
Recommended action
menu.
47.WX.YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue, touch OK

Description
The device is unable to access or implement one of the image patterns files.
Y = Calibration type, Z = Event
47.FC.00 (event code) Color plane registration (CPR) Image not found at system initialization
47.FC.01 (event code) CPR Store Image failure
47.FC.02 (event code) CPR Image not found
47.FC.03 (event code) CPR Print engine execution failure
47.FC.10 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found at system initialization
47.FC.11 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Store image failure
47.FC.12 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found

47.FC.13 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Print engine execution failure
47.FC.20 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found at system initialization
47.FC.21 (event code) Error Diffusion Store image failure
47.FC.22 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found
47.FC.23 Error Diffusion Print engine execution failure
47.FC.30 0 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found at system initialization
47.FC.31 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Store image failure
47.FC.32 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found
47.FC.33 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Print engine execution failure
47.FC.40 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found at system initialization
47.FC.41 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Store image failure
47.FC.42 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found
47.FC.43 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Print engine execution failure
Recommended action
2. If the error persists over multiple power cycles frequently and consistently on a unit then do the
following.
In the Administration/Troubleshooting/Diagnostics, run the hard disk tests to validate health

of the device. Fix any issue found with the mass storage device
3. If the error persists, reload the firmware.
4. If the error persists, Perform "Partial Clean" and reload the firmware.
48.XX.YY
Description
A job framework internal error has occurred.
Recommended action
1. No action should be necessary.
2. If the error persists, upgrade the product firmware.
3. If the issue persists, continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or
Persistent 49 error troubleshooting (whichever is appropriate) in document c03122817, HP
LaserJet FutureSmart Devices - 49 Error Troubleshooting (Persistent and Intermittent).

49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on

Description
A firmware error occurred. Corrupted print jobs, software application issues, non-product specific print
drivers, poor quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect configurations,
invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories can cause this error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, check the following:
The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface
cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting.
The error might be caused by the print job, due to an invalid print driver, a problem with the
software application, or a problem with the file being printed.
Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error. See the product user guide for
more information.
When a 49 error occurs, the user sees a 49.XXXX message on the control panel (where XXXX is
replaced by a combination of letters and numbers). A 49 error might happen at any time for multiple
reasons. Although some types of 49 errors can be caused by hardware failures, it is more common
for 49 errors to be caused by printing a specific document or performing some task on the product.
49 errors most often occur when a product is asked to perform an action that the product firmware is
not capable of and might not have been designed to comply with, such as:
Printing files with unsupported programming commands
A unique combination of user environment and user interactions with the product
Interfacing with a third-party solution that was not designed to work with the product
Specific timing, network traffic, or concurrent processing of jobs
Each of these interactions could cause the product firmware to initiate an action that the product
cannot accomplish. In situations like this, the product might present the error if it has no other option.
When these errors occur, the only way to recover is to turn the product's power off and back on.
NOTE: LaserJet formatter PCAs are rarely the root cause of 49 service errors. Please do not
replace the formatter or flash unless troubleshooting has identified the formatter as the root cause.
If the error persists, continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or Persistent
49 error troubleshooting (whichever is appropriate) in document c03122817, HP LaserJet
FutureSmart Devices - 49 Error Troubleshooting (Persistent and Intermittent).
50.WX.YZ Error Messages
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on
Description
The fuser has experienced an error.

W = fuser error code, X = fuser mode, Y = previous printer sleep state, and Z = next printer sleep
state.
Fuser modes and sleep states are listed after all 50.WX.YZ troubleshooting.
The specific issues are:
50.1X: Low fuser temperature
50.2X: Fuser warm up service
50.3X: High fuser temperature
50.4X: Drive circuit fault
50.6X: Open fuser circuit (heating element failure)
50.7X: Depressurizing mechanism malfunction
50.8X: Low fuser temperature 2
50.9X: High fuser temperature 2
50.AX: Low fuser temperature 3
50.BX: High fuser temperature 3
Recommended action
2. If the error returns, turn the product off and ensure the printer is directly plugged into a wall outlet
(remove any surge protector or UPS).
3. If the error persists, try a different wall outlet (if possible), one that is preferably on a dedicated or
different circuit.
4. Make sure that the correct fuser model is installed in the product and that it meets the
appropriate voltage requirements.
5. Make sure the fuser is seated properly.
6. If the error persists, continue troubleshooting based on the individual error listed below.
50.1X
Low fuser temperature failure
1. Remove and reinstall the fuser. Make sure that it is seated correctly.
2. Make sure that there is no residual paper in the fuser.
3. Check the product power source. Make sure that the power source meets product requirements.
Make sure that the product is the only device using the circuit.
4. Check the connector (J1901) between the fuser and the printer. If it is damaged, replace the
fuser drive assembly or fuser.
5. Reconnect the connectors (J303 and J305) on the fuser control PCA and connector (J107) on
the DC controller PCA

6. If the issue persists, replace the fuser.
7. If error still remains, replace the Fuser PCA assembly.
50.2X
Fuser warm-up error
50.3X
High fuser temperature
2. Check the paper type setting in the product control panel menus and in the print driver. Make
sure that the settings match and are correct for the type of media being used.
50.4X
Drive circuit fault
NOTE: If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirements of 43 to 67Hz,
the fuser temperature control does not work correctly and causes this error.
2. If possible, connect the product to an outlet where another product is functioning to verify the
power connection.
3. Remove and reinstall the fuser verifying it is correctly seated

6. If the issue persists, replace the Fuser.PCA assembly
7. Replace the Fuser assembly.
8. Replace the DC Controller.
50.6X
Open fuser circuit (heating element failure)
2. Checkthe paper type setting using the product menus and in the printer driver. Make sure that
they match and are correct for the type of media being used.
4. Reconnect the connectors (J302, J303 and J305) on the fuser control PCA and connector (J107)
on the DC controller PCA
5. If the issue persists, replace the Fuser assembly
6. If the issue persists, replace the Fuser PCA assembly.
7. Replace the DC controller
50.7X
Fuser pressure-release mechanism failure
1. Remove and reinstall the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser.
2. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the fuser home position sensor is
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the fuser home position sensor assembly
3. Run the fuser depressurization drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the fuser
depressurization drive is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the fuser motor
4. Reconnect the connector (J1711) of the fuser motor, intermediate connector (J1964) of the fuser
home position sensor and connectors (J105 and J121) on the DC controller PCA
5. Check the fuser home position sensor flag. If the flag is damaged, replace the fuser
6. Replace the fuser motor
7. Replace the Fuser.
50.8X
Low fuser temperature 2

fuser drive assembly or fuser
7. If the issue persists, replace the Fuser PCA assembly.
50.9X
High fuser temperature 2
3. Check the connector (J1901) between the fuser and printer. If the connector is damaged,
replace the fuser drive assembly or the fuser
6. If the issue persists, replace theFuser PCA assembly.
50.AX
Low fuser temperature 3
50.BX
High fuser temperature 3

Fuser Modes
0 = Photo Media 1, 2, 3
1 = NormalAuto Sense
2 = Normal
3 = Light 1
4 = Heavy 1
5 = Heavy 2
6 = Heavy 3
7 = Glossy 1
8 = Glossy 2
9 = Glossy 3
A = Glossy Film
B = Transparency
C = Label
D = Envelope 1
E = Rough
Sleep States
0 = Printing
1 = Standby level 1 (no temperature control)
2 = Standby level 2 (high temperature control)
3 = Standby level 3 (middle temperature control)
4 = Standby level 2 (low temperature control)
5 = Middle sleep
6 = Deep sleep
F = Power off

51.XX.YZ, 52.XX.YZ Error Messages
51.00.YZ
Description
An error with the laser/scanner assembly has occurred in the product.
51.00.10: Beam detect error
51.00.19: Laser malfunction
51.00.20: Black laser scanner error
51.00.21: Cyan laser scanner error
51.00.22: Magenta laser scanner error
51.00.23: Yellow laser scanner error
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, and then on
2. Check the connections to the laser scanners from the DC controller PCA
Laser malfunction of yellow or magenta:
Reconnect the connector (J1701) of the scanner motor (Y/M), intermediate connector
(J1927) and connector (J130B) on the DC controller PCA
Laser malfunction of cyan or black:
Reconnect the connector (J1702) of the scanner motor (C/K), intermediate connector
52.00.00/52.00.20 Scanner Startup/Rotation error

Description
A printer laser scanner startup (52.00.00) or rotation (52.00.20) error occurred.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off, and then on
2. Check the connections to the laser scanners from the DC controller PCA

54.00.01 (EVENT LOG ONLY)

Description
Environment sensor abnormality warning
Recommended action
1. Turn the printer off and then on
2. Reconnect the connector (J9986) of the environment sensor and connector (J115) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the environment sensor
54.00.18
Description
The ITB top sensor malfunctioned
Recommended action
2. Reconnect the connector (J116) on the DC controller PCA
3. Replace the CPR/Density sensor assembly.
54.00.19
Description
The ITB top sensor abnormality
Recommended action

Description
Media sensor Component 1 Abnormality
Recommended action
1. Clean the LED emission part of the T2 assembly with a lint-free cloth. Turn the printer off and
then on
2. Reconnect the connector (J1955) of the T2 assembly and connector (J121) on the DC controller
PCA
3. If the error persists, Replace the T2 assembly

Description
Recommended action
1. Clean the media sensor assembly of the ITB assembly with a lint-free cloth. Turn the printer off
and then on
2. Reinstall the ITB assembly. Check the connector (J1904) between the ITB assembly and printer.
If the connector is damaged, replace the connector or the ITB assembly
4. If the error persists, Replace the ITB assembly

Description
Recommended action
1. Clean the media sensor assembly of the ITB assembly with a lint-free cloth. Turn the printer off
and then on
2. Reinstall the ITB assembly. Check the connector (J1904) between the ITB assembly and printer.
If the connector is damaged, replace the connector or the ITB assembly
4. If the error persists, Replace the ITB assembly
54.06.21 or 54.07.21 (EVENT LOG ONLY)
Description
Primary laser/scanner beam detect abnormality
Secondary laser/scanner beam detect abnormality
Recommended action
2. Check the following:
3. Replace the laser scanner assembly (Y/M) or the laser scanner assembly (C/K)

54.0X.0B or 54.0X.0C or 54.0X.0B or 54.0X.0C: (EVENT LOG ONLY)
Description
Density sensor out of range error or Dhalf calibration failure
54.00.0B, 54.00.0C 54.00.0D, 54.00.0E Black
54.01.0B, 54.01.0C 54.01.0D, 54.01.0E Cyan
54.02.0B, 54.02.0C 54.02.0D, 54.02.0E Magenta
54.03.0B, 54.03.0C 54.03.0D, 54.03.0E Yellow
Recommended action
1. Check the supplies status page to make sure the toner cartridges are not past their useful life
2. Check the ITB for damage
3. Make sure the CPR sensor is not contaminated with toner or paper dust. Clean the sensor with
compressed air and soft brush
4. Reconnect the connectors (J1824 and J1931) of the CPR/Density sensor assembly and
connectors (J119 and J118) on the DC controller PCA
5. Replace the CPR/Density Sensor assembly
Description
CPR sensor abnormality warning
Recommended action
2. Reconnect the connectors (J1824 and J1931) of the CPR/Density sensor ass'y and connectors
(J119 and J118) on the DC controller PCA
55.XX.YZ, 56.XX.YZ Error Messages
55.00.01, 55.00.03, 55.00.04 DC controller error

Description
DC controller PCA error occurred.
55.00.01 (event code)
DC controller memory error
DC controller no engine response

DC controller communications timeout
Recommended action
55.01.06, 55.02.06 DC controller error

Description
DC controller PCA error occurred.
The engine is not communicating with the formatter. The communication link between the formatter
and the DC controller was lost. This can occur due to a timing error or intermittent connection loss
between the formatter and the DC controller.
NVRAM memory data error warning
NVRAM memory access error warning
Recommended action
2. Check the life remaining on the maintenance kit.
3. Reseat the formatter, DIMMs, and EIO cards.
56.00.YY Error
Description
Optional paper trays communication error occurred.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, reseat the optional paper trays (HCO and HCI)..
3. Check the input connectors for damage. If a connector is damaged, replace the connector.
57.00.01 Error To continue turn off then on

Description
Laser scanner fan (FM-1) malfunction

Recommended action
2. Reconnect the connector (J1916) of the laser scanner fan and connector (J134) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Measure the voltage between the connectors (J134-1 and J134-3) on the DC controller PCA
immediately after the printer is turned on. If the voltage changes from 0V to approximately 24V,
replace the laser scanner fan

Description
Fuser fan (FM-2) malfunction
Recommended action
2. Reconnect the connector (J1917) of the fuser fan and connector (J132) on the DC controller
PCA
replace the fuser fan
4. If the error continues, replace the fuser cooling fan.

Description
Cartridge fan (Y/M) (FM-3) malfunction Turn the product off, and then on.
Recommended action
replace the cartridge fan (Y/M).
3. If the error persists, replace the Cartridge fan

Description
Cartridge fan (C/K) (FM-4) malfunction
Recommended action
2. Reconnect the connector (J9919) of the cartridge fan (Y/M) and connector (J132) on the DC
controller PCA

replace the cartridge fan (C/K).
4. If the error persists, replace the Cartridge fan.

Description
VOC fan (FM-5) malfunction.
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J1921) of the VOC fan and connector (J103) on the DC controller
PCA
replace the VOC fan
3. If the error persists, replace the VOC Fan

Description
Low-voltage power supply fan (FM-6) malfunction.
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J2) of the low voltage power supply fan
replace the low voltage power supply assembly
3. Replace the low voltage power supply assembly

Description
Cartridge front area cooling fan (FM-7) malfunction
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J1934) of the cartridge front area cooling fan and connector (J103) on
replace the cartridge front area cooling fan
NOTE: The cooling assembly is deep inside the product and will be difficult to hear.
3. If the error persists, replace the cartridge front area cooling fan.

Description
Delivery fan (FM-8) malfunction
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J1910) of the delivery fan and connector (J103) on the DC controller
PCA
replace the delivery fan.
3. If the error persists, replace the delivery fan
Description
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear) (FM-9) malfunction
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J9905) of the fuser edge area cooling fan (rear), intermediate
connector (J9961) and connector (J125) on the DC controller PCA
replace the fuser edge area cooling fan (rear)
3. If the error persists, replace the Rear fuser edge area cooling fan .
Description
FM10 Fuser edge area cooling fan (front)
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J9906) of the fuser edge area cooling fan (front), intermediate
replace the fuser edge area cooling fan (front)
3. If the error persists, replace the Front fuser edge area cooling fan
57.00.11
Description
FM11 Fuser edge area cooling fan (front) FM301/ FM302 Duplex fan

Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connectors (J1902 and J9946) of the duplex switch back assembly and
connectors (J133 and J128) on the DC controller PCA
2. Replace the duplex switch back assembly
57.00.12
Description
FM 12 (FM201) malfunction Feed Area Fan
Inside of the intermediate paper transportation unit
Recommended action
1. Remove and reinstall the IPTU
2. Reconnect the connector (J7008) on the IPTU driver PCA
3. Measure the voltage between the connectors (J7008-1 and J7008-3) on the IPTU driver PCA
replace the IPTU feed area fan
4. Replace the IPTU
59.00.90 or 59.00.A0
Description
ITB motor (M1) start up error or ITB motor (M1) abnormal rotational error
Recommended action
1. Use the ITB motor (M1) drive test in the component test to verify that the ITB motor is properly
functioning. If it is not, replace the ITB motor assembly
2. If the product has been serviced, check the connector (J1710) on the ITB motor and the
connector (J105) on the DC controller PCA
3. Replace the ITB motor
59.00.C0
Description
Developer alienation motor (M18 C/K - M19 Y/M) error
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the developer home position
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly
2. Run the developer alienation drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the developer
alienation drive is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the toner cartridge drive assembly

3. Reconnect the intermediate connector (J1929) of the developer home position sensor and
connector (J131) on the DC controller PCA. Also reconnect the connectors (J1718 and J1719) of
the developer alienation motor, connectors (J422 and J425) on the cartridge driver PCA and
connector (J142) on the DC controller PCA
4. Replace the toner cartridge drive assembly
5. Replace the main drive assembly
59.00.F0
Description
T1 alienation mechanism failure
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the ITB home position sensor is
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly
2. Reconnect the connector (J2010) of the ITB home position sensor, connectors (J423 and J412)
on the cartridge driver PCA and connector (J142) on the DC controller PCA
3. Run the T1 roller alienation drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the T1 roller
alienation drive is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the ITB alienation drive assembly
4. Reconnect the connector (J1716) of the T1 roller alienation motor, connectors (J421 and J411)
on the cartridge driver PCA and connector (J141) on the DC controller PCA
5. Replace the ITB alienation drive assembly
59.0X.50
Description
Drum Motor startup error
59.05.50 Black
59.06.50 Cyan
59.07.50 Magenta
59.08.50 Yellow
Recommended action
59.05.50
1. Run the drum motor drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the drum motor is
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the black drum motor
2. Reconnect the connector (J1715) of the black drum motor and connector (J138B) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the Black drum motor
59.06.50

functioning properly. If it is not, replace the cyan drum motor
2. Reconnect the connector (J1714) of the cyan drum motor and connector (J138B) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the Cyan drum motor
59.07.50
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the Magenta drum motor
2. Reconnect the connector (J1713) of the yellow drum motor and connector (J138A) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the Magenta drum motor
59.08.50
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the Yellow drum motor
controller PCA
3. Replace the Yellow drum motor
59.0X.60
Description
Drum Motor startup error
59.05.60 Black
59.06.60 Cyan
59.07.60 Magenta
59.08.60 Yellow
Recommended action
59.05.60
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the black drum motor
2. Reconnect the connector (J1715) of the black drum motor and connector (J138B) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the Black drum motor
59.06.60

functioning properly. If it is not, replace the cyan drum motor
2. Reconnect the connector (J1714) of the cyan drum motor and connector (J138B) on the DC
controller PCA
3. Replace the Cyan drum motor
59.07.60
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the Magenta drum motor
controller PCA
3. Replace the Magenta drum motor
59.08.60
functioning properly. If it is not, replace the Yellow drum motor
controller PCA
3. Replace the Yellow drum motor
59.0X.70
Description
Developer Motor abnormal rotation
59.05.70 Black
59.06.70 Cyan
59.07.70 Magenta
59.08.70 Yellow
Recommended action
59.05.70 or 59.06.70
1. Reconnect the connector (J2024) of the toner-replenish motor rotation sensor (C/K),
intermediate connector (J1930) and connector (J135) on the DC controller PCA
2. Reconnect the connectors (J426 and J411) on the cartridge driver PCA, connector (J141) on the
DC controller PCA and connector (J1721) of the toner-replenish motor (C/K)
3. Replace the toner-replenish motor (C/K)
4. Replace the cyan or Black toner cartridge
59.07.70 or 59.08.70

1. Reconnect the connector (J2023) of the toner-replenish motor rotation sensor (Y/M),
DC controller PCA and connector (J1720) of the toner-replenish motor (Y/M)
3. Replace the toner-replenish motor (Y/M)
4. Replace the Yellow or Magenta toner cartridge
59.0X.80
Description
Developer motor failure
59.05.80 Black
59.06.80 Cyan
59.07.80 Magenta
59.08.80 Yellow
Recommended action
59.05.80 or 59.06.80
1. Reconnect the connector (J2024) of the toner-replenish motor rotation sensor (C/K),
DC controller PCA and connector (J1721) of the toner-replenish motor (C/K)
3. Replace the toner-replenish motor (C/K)
4. Replace the Cyan or Black toner cartridge
59.07.80 or 59.08.80
1. Reconnect the connector (J2023) of the toner-replenish motor rotation sensor (Y/M),
DC controller PCA and connector (J1720) of the toner-replenish motor (Y/M)
3. Replace the toner-replenish motor (Y/M)
4. Replace the Yellow or Magenta toner cartridge
59.A2.02
Description
Media input source 2 lifter motor malfunction

Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media surface sensor
is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the cassette pickup assembly
2. Reconnect the intermediate connector (J1920) and connector (J112) on the DC controller PCA
3. Replace the cassette lifter drive assembly
59.A3.03
Description
Recommended action
Use the following to troubleshoot the error:
1x500-sheet/3x500-sheet paper deck:
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette 1 media surface
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the cassette 1 pickup assembly
2. Reconnect the connector (J8122) on the PD controller PCA
3. Replace the cassette 1 lifter drive assembly
3,500-sheet paper deck:
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the right cassette lift-up media-
surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the right cassette pickup assembly
2. Reconnect the connector (J3003) on the HCI controller PCA
3. Replace the right cassette lifter drive assembly
59.A4.04
Description
Recommended action
Use the following to troubleshoot the error:

1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the right cassette lift-up media-
surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the left cassette pickup assembly
3. Replace the left cassette lifter drive assembly
59.A5.05
Description
3x500-sheet paper deck only.
Recommended action
60.00.0Y, 62.00.00 Error Messages
60.00.02 Tray 2 lifting error
Description
Tray 2 lifter motor error
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media surface sensor
in Tray 2 is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the cassette pickup assembly
2. Reconnect the intermediate connector (J1920) and connector (J112) on the DC controller PCA
3. Replace the cassette lifter drive assembly
Description
Recommended action
Use the following to troubleshoot the error
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the HCI cassette 1 media surface
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the HCI cassette 1 pickup assembly
3. Replace the HCI cassette 1 lifter drive assembly

1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the HCI right cassette lift-up media-
surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the right cassette pickup assembly
3. Replace the right cassette lifter drive assembly

Description
Recommended action
Use the following to troubleshoot the error
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the HCI cassette 2 pickup assembly
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the HCI left cassette lift-up media-
surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the left cassette pickup assembly
3. Replace the left cassette lifter drive assembly

Description
Recommended action
3x500-sheet paper deck:
62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on

Description
Internal system failure

Recommended action
2. Reload the firmware.
3. Perform a firmware upgrade.
4. If the error persists, replace the hard disk.
65.X0.AZ Error Messages
65.X0.AZ Output accessory Failure

Description
Output accessory disconnected
An external paper handling accessory connection has been interrupted.
65.40.A0: Punch Unit disconnected
65.50.A0: Folding Unit disconnected
65.80.A0: Stapler/Stacker disconnected
65.80.A1: Stapler/Stacker Unit connection interrupted
65.90.A0: Booklet Make disconnected
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the latest firmware updates are installed for the engine and finisher.
2. Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly.
Make sure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the
thumbscrew inside the front door.
Make sure that the grounding-frame assembly (the bar with the wheel located between the
engine and the finisher) is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that
the grounding plate is not damaged.
NOTE: The grounding-frame assembly is in the up position when the finisher is shipped. It
must be lowered when the finisher is installed.
3. Make sure that the communication cable from the finisher to the engine is installed correctly.
4. Make sure that all packing materials have been removed from the paper handling accessory.
5. Make sure that the connectors on the PCA's for the device are fully seated and not damaged.
controller PCA in question.

66.WX.YZ Error Messages
66.00.20
Description
Over Current Error
This is an output device failure related message.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly
3. If the error persists, replace the stacker controller PCA.
66.00.40
Description
NVRAM Error
This is a finisher control board NVRAM error. The checksum for the finisher stacker controller PCA
has an error when the power is turned on.
Recommended action
3. Turn the engine power off, and then on to try to clear the error.
66.00.50
Description
This is a CAN-CPU sequence error.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that the finisher is grounded correctly

66.00.77
Description
This is a device communication error.
The communication between the print engine and the finisher has been interrupted or lost.
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the latest firmware updates are installed for the engine and the finisher.
3. Make sure that the communication cable from the finisher to the engine is installed correctly.
4. Make sure that the connectors on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged.
controller PCA.
66.00.79
Description
This is a JetLink communication error.
The product has lost JetLink communication with the output device.
Recommended action
1. Turn off the product, and then disconnect the finisher.
2. Make sure that the grounding-frame assembly (the bar with the wheel located between the
engine and the finisher) is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor and that the
grounding plate is not damaged.
3. Reconnect the finisher to the product.
4. Inspect and reconnect the JetLink cable (power and communication cable) from the finisher to
the product.
If the error was caused by exchanging finishers while the product was still on, perform the following
steps:

1. Turn the product off, and then disconnect the finisher.
2. Make sure that the finisher is designed to be used with the product.
3. Reconnect the finisher to the product.
66.00.8Z
Description
There is an issue with paper delivery. The specific message varies depending on the cause, but the
solution for each message is the same.
66.00.80: Delivery Notice with PageID = 0x00
66.00.81: Delivery Notice with proper PageInfo
66.00.82: Paper delivered with unexpected timing
66.00.83: PAGE_INFO (Change) without PAGE_INFO (New)
Recommended action
1. Follow the instructions in the online help.
3. If the error persists, see the output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions.
66.12.46
Description
Finisher - Communication Lost with Stitcher Controller PCA
This error occurs when communication between the stacker-controller board and the saddle-stitcher-
controller board is lost or interrupted.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that the connector J730 on the stacker controller PCA and the wiring between
connector J22 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged.
3. Replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.

66.40.YZ
Description
Punch Unit Failure
The specific message varies depending on the cause, but the solution for each message is the same.
66.40.40: Punch NVRAM error
66.40.46: Punch Slide motor error
66.40.50: Punch unit CPU sequence error Punch unit micro controller unable to start punch unit
66.40.83: Punch motor failure
Recommended action
66.50.00
Description
Folding Unit Failure
An error has occurred in the folding unit.
Recommended action
66.60.16
Description
Stacker Gear Change Motor Error
Finisher error - speed-change motor (M110)
The speed-change motor M110 and sensor PI117 are associated with this error
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off and turn it on.
2. If the error continues, Verify J3 on Stacker controller PCA is seated properly.
3. Replace Speed Change Motor (M110) or corresponding assembly.

66.60.25
Description
Stacker Shutter Motor Error
When the shutter clutch (CL101) and stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL102) are on, the shutter
moves up (closed) when the stack-ejection motor (M102) turns forward and moves down (open,
delivery enabled) when the motor turns backwards.
This error occurs when the shutter home-position sensor (PI113) indicates no change when the
stack-ejection motor (M102) is activated for 3 seconds, indicating the shutter is not moving.
Recommended action
1. Inspect the shutter for damage. If the shutter cannot move freely, replace the shutter assembly.
2. Remove the lower guide (grate-shaped) and check sensor PI113 for damage.
4. Check for proper alignment of the shutter mounted on the back of the grate-shaped lower guide
and the left mechanism on the finisher chassis.
5. Make sure that connector J6 and J19 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not
damaged.
6. Check CL101 during operation, and make sure that it is functioning correctly by activating prior
to the error. Replace CL102 if necessary.
66.60.27
Description
Stacker Align Motor Error (Front) M103
In order to neatly align the paper stack for either stapling or offsetting to take place, the front and rear
aligning plats move to align each sheet of paper when it enters the processing tray.
This error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the
aligning-plate front-home-position sensor.
Recommended action
2. Make sure that there is no paper stuck in the jogger assembly.
3. Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 to the
motor (M103).
4. Run the test on alignment motors.
5. If the error persists, replace the required assembly.

66.60.28
Description
Stacker Align Motor Error (Rear) M104
aligning plats move to align each sheet of paper when it enters the processing tray.
This error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the
Recommended action
3. Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032 to the
motor (M104).
66.60.31
Description
BIN1 Tray Motor Error/Safety switch on Finisher error - 1st-tray lift/lower motor (M107)
This error occurs when the output bin 1 does not active the home-position sensor (PI116) when the
output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) is drive for 20 seconds.
NOTE: M107 moves both output bin 1 and the upper output bin that is attached to output bin 1 on
the Stapler/Stacker finisher, but only output bin 1 on the Booklet Maker finisher.
It also occurs when output bin 1 does not move when output-bin-1-shift motor (M107) is driven for 4
seconds.
It also occurs when output-bin-1-switch (MSW103) is activated while output bin 1 is operating.
NOTE: Output-bin-1 home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper
is present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin.
Recommended action
1. Manually release output bin 1, and then position it at the midpoint of its travel area.
2. On the product control panel, open the following menus:
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Component Test

3. Test the output-bin-1shift motor M107 using the finisher component test.
4. If output bin 1 moves during the test, continue with these steps.
5. If the paper-surface sensor flag was recently removed or replaced, make sure that it is installed
correctly.
NOTE: The four tabs under the clips must be inserted into the slots behind the roller shaft of
the lower stack ejection roller.
6. Make sure that the paper-surface sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the PI114 sensor body. Also, make sure that when the top edge of the output bin
engages the sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor PI114
and debris.
9. Make sure that intermediate connector J1040 and J7 on the stacker controller PCA are fully
seated and not damaged. Check the wiring at the sensor.
10. If the error persists, replace sensor PI114.
11. If the error persists, replace the output-bin-1 assembly.
NOTE: The output-bin-1 assembly includes the output-bin-1-shift motor (M1070), output-bin-1
switch (MSW103), output-bin-1 area sensors, and the output-bin-1 Area Sensor PCA.
If output bin 1 does not move during the test, perform the following steps.
1. Check the output-bin tracks for damage.
2. Replace the output-bin-1 assembly.
NOTE: NOTE: The output-bin-1 assembly includes the output-bin-1-shift motor (M1070), output-
bin-1 switch (MSW103), output-bin-1 area sensors, and the output-bin-1 Area Sensor PCA.
Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the stacker
controller PCA.
66.60.32
Description
BIN2 Tray Motor Error
Finisher error 2nd-tray lift/lower motor (M108)
Occurs when the output-bin 2 does not activate the home-position sensor (PI115) when the output-
bin-1-shift motor (M108) is driven for 20 seconds.
Also occurs when bin-2 upper limit is detected by PS983, PS982, PS981 on the Tray-2-Area Sensor
PCA when no paper has been sensed by the output-bin-2 paper sensor (PI112).
NOTE: Output-bin-2 home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper
is present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin.
Control-panel diagnostics: M108 tray 2 (output-bin 2 motor) and PI115 output-bin-2 paper-surface
sensor

Recommended action
1. Manually release output bin 2, and position it at the midpoint of its travel area.
2. Test the output-bin-2-shift motor M108 by using the finisher component test from the control-
panel display.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Component Test
3. IF output bin 2 moves during the test, perform the following steps.
4. Verify that the paper-surface sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly aligned
with the PI115 sensor body. Also verify that when the top edge of the output bin engages the
sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor PI114.
5. Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis
and debris
7. Verify that intermediate connector J1040 and J8 on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated
and not damaged. Check the wiring at the sensor.
8. If the error persist, replace sensor PI115
9. If the error persist, replace the output-bin-2 assembly..
area sensors, and the output-bin-2 Area Sensor PCA.
10. If output bin 2 does not move during the test, perform the following steps.
11. Check the output-bin tracks for damage.
12. Replace the output-bin-2 assembly.
area sensors, and the output-bin-2 Area Sensor PCA.
13. ONLYl if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the
stacker controller PCA.
66.60.33
Description
Stacker roller Lift Motor Error
Finisher error - lift/lower motor (M107 or M108)
This error occurs when the output-bin 1 or 2 does not activate the Trays home-position sensor when
the output-bin--shift motor (M107) is driven.

NOTE: Output-bin home position is detected using the top sheet of paper on the bin when paper is
present and the edge of the bin itself when there is no paper on the bin.
Recommended action
1. Manually release the failing output bin, and position it at the midpoint of its travel area.
Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Component Test
3. Test the output-bin shift motor M107 or M108 by using the finisher component test from the
4. If the output bin moves during the test, perform the following steps.
5. If the paper-surface sensor flag was recently removed or replaced, make sure that it is installed
correctly.
NOTE: The four tabs under the clips must be inserted into the slots behind the roller shaft of
the lower stack ejection roller.
6. Make sure that the paper-surface sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the sensor body. Also, make sure that when the top edge of the output bin engages
the sensor arm that the sensor flag moves into sensor
and debris.
9. Verify that the connectors on the stacker controller PCA are fully seated and not damaged.
Check the wiring at the sensor
10. If the error persist, replace the output-bin assembly.
66.60.34
Description
Stacker Assist Motor Error
In order to improve stacking performance when ejecting copies, a trailing-edge assist guide is used in
addition to the stack-ejection roller to support the rear end of the stack during stack ejection.
Error occurs when the stacker trailing-edge guide does not leave its home position (PI109) after the
stack trailing-edge motor (M109) has been turned on for 3 seconds.
Recommended action

Administration
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Tests
Component Test
2. Test trailing edge motor M109 (stack trailing-edge assist motor)
3. If the trailing-edge assist guide does not move, perform the following steps:
4. Make sure that connector J4 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not damaged also
check the wiring at motor M109 and sensor PI109.
5. Replace the operation-tray assembly (processing tray).
6. Only if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the Stacker
66.60.48
Description
Stacker-CPU Communication error
Occurs when the finisher's stacker-controller board has had an internal communication problem
between the two processors on the board.
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the finisher is properly grounded.
2. Ensure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside
the front door.
3. Ensure that the grounding-frame assembly (the bar with the wheel located between the engine
and the finisher) is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor
66.60.50
Description
Stacker-CPU sequence error
Occurs when the finisher's stacker-controller board has had an internal sequence problem
Recommended action
1. Make sure that the finisher is properly grounded.
2. Ensure that the finisher is latched and locked to the engine by tightening the thumbscrew inside
the front door.
3. Ensure that the grounding-frame assembly (the bar with the wheel located between the engine
and the finisher) is in the down position with the wheel touching the floor
66.80.01
Description
Y-align malfunction

aligning plates move to align each sheet when it enters the processing tray.
The error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the
Recommended action
3. Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032.
66.80.02
Description
Jogger malfunction
aligning plates move to align each sheet when it enters the processing tray.
The error occurs when the aligning plate either does not leave or when it does not return to the
Recommended action
3. Check connections J4 on the stacker controller PCA and intermediate connector J1032.
66.80.03
Description
Stapler malfunction
M105 Stapler mobility motor
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: M105-Staple Motor (Staple-Shift Motor) and PI110-Stapler Home Sensor
(Stapler Home Position Sensor).
1. Test the upper stapler-shift motor M105 by using the finisher component test from the control-
panel display.

If the stapler unit moves correctly, proceed to the next step.
If the stapler unit does not move correctly or moves erratically, perform the following steps:
a. Check the flat-flexible cable (FFC) for damage (dents, folds, and/or tears). Replace the
FFC if necessary.
b. Check the FFC connectors and cable mounting areas.
c. If the error persists, replace the stapler assembly.
2. Test the stapler-shift home-position sensor PI110 using the finisher component test from the
product control panel.
If the sensor does not change state when the stapler unit is moved from the home position,
a. Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the chassis.
b. Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensor to
remove dust band debris.
c. Make sure that connector J5 and J6 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and
not damaged. Check the wiring at the sensor.
d. If the error persists, replace the stapler assembly.
NOTE: The stapler assembly includes the stapler-shift home position sensor PI110,
stapler unit, shift-position-plate assembly, and the flat-flexible cable (FFC).
66.80.21
Description
Lift up malfunction
Recommended action
Turn the product off, and then on.
66.80.22
Description
Lift down malfunction
Recommended action
66.80.23
Description
Lift sensor malfunction
Recommended action

66.80.33
Description
Output roller malfunction
Recommended action
66.80.35
Description
Self priming malfunction
Recommended action
66.80.36
Description
Stapler Stacker motor error
Finisher upper-stapler motor failure (M41)
Error occurs either when the stapler does not leave stapler home position (PI120) after staple motor
(M41) is driven for 0.4 seconds or when it does not return to stapler home position after the staple
motor has detected a motor-lock condition and the motor is driven backwards for 0.4 seconds,
attempting to reach home position.
NOTE: PI120 and M41 are located on the stapler assembly and can only be replaced by replacing
the entire stapler assembly. M41 (Staple Motor) drives the insertion and crimping of the staple only
(not the location of the staple on the paper). PI120 senses the home position of the stapler as it is
inserting and crimping a staple only (not the location of the staple on the paper).
The stapler-safety switch (MS103) assures that the stapler motor (M41) is disabled when it senses a
finger might be in the stapler.
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: M41 Staple Motor (Staple-Shift Motor) and PI120 Stapler Home Sensor
1. Test the upper stapler-shift motor M41 using the finisher component test from the product control
panel.

FFC if necessary.
c. Make sure that connector J5 on the stacker controller PCA is fully seated and not
damaged. Check the wiring at the sensor.
NOTE: The stapler assembly includes the stapler-shift home position sensor PI120,
66.80.38
Description
Stacker Stapler Mechanism Failed
Occurs when stapler-alignment-interference sensor (PI116) is activated, signaling that the stapler unit
is not in its proper position for stapling to occur. This is to prevent damage to stapler from occurring
when stapler is positioned over one of the three stoppers when the signal to staple has been sent.
Recommended action
1. If the stapler unite does not move correctly or moves erratically, check the flat-flexible cable
(FFC) for damage (dents, folds, and/or tears). Replace the FFC if necessary.
2. If the stacker controller PCA was recently replaced, adjust the staple alignment and staple
position.
3. If the stapler is not positioned over a stopper when this error occurs, perform the following steps:
a. Make sure that the stapler unit is correctly mounted and securely fastened to the base.
b. Make sure that the sensor is not obstructed or damaged. Make sure that the sensor flag is
not damaged, moves freely, and is aligned correctly with the sensor body.
c. If the error persists, replace the stapler subassembly.
NOTE: The stapler subassembly includes the stapler unit and base.

66.80.46
Description
Stacker Staple Slide motor error
Finisher upper stapler shift motor failure (M105).
This error occurs when the stapler does not leave the stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI110) after
the stapler-shift motor (M105) has driven for 5 seconds.
This error also occurs when the stapler fails to return to the stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI110)
after the stapler-shift motor (M105) has driven for 20 seconds.
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: M105 Staple Motor (Staple-Shift Motor) and PI110 Stapler Home Sensor
1. Test the upper stapler-shift motor M105 using the finisher component test from the product
control panel.
FFC if necessary.
c. Make sure that connector J6 and interconnect J1040 on the stacker controller PCA is
fully seated and not damaged. Check the wiring at the sensor.
NOTE: The stapler assembly includes the stapler-shift home position sensor PI110
66.80.51
Description
System error (FW error)
Recommended action

66.80.55
Description
System error 5 (FW error)
Recommended action
66.80.56
Description
Recommended action
66.80.57
Description
Recommended action
66.80.58
Description
Recommended action
66.80.59
Description
Recommended action
66.80.60
Description
System error 10 (inter-page delay mismatch)
Recommended action

66.80.61
Description
System error 11 (lifter task trouble)
Recommended action
66.80.62
Description
System error 12 (inter-page delay mismatch)
Recommended action
66.80.63
Description
Recommended action
66.80.64
Description
Recommended action
66.80.65
Description
Recommended action
66.80.70
Description
Page-info in flush
Recommended action

66.80.71
Description
Flush request in PDLV
Recommended action
66.80.72
Description
Delivery notice error
Recommended action
66.80.73
Description
Flush request in checking paper path
Recommended action
66.80.74
Description
Checking paper path start in PDLV
Recommended action
66.80.75
Description
Flush request in flush
Recommended action
66.80.76
Description
Non-flush complete

Recommended action
1. Follow the instructions in online help.
2. Turn he product off and turn it on.
3. If the error continues, see the Output finishing device service manual for detailed instructions.
66.90.10
Description
Booklet Interlock Switch Error
There are three switches in the Booklet Maker finisher: SW1 (the saddle-guide switch also known as
the inlet-door switch), SW3 (the booklet-ejection-door switch), and MS31 (the front-door switch). The
Stapler/Stacker finisher only has one switch, MS31 for the front door of the finisher. All three switches
detect if the associated door or guide plate is open or closed. Each one of the switches also has a
sensor (SW1/PI9, SW3/PI3, and MS31/PI32) that acts as a backup and detects the same information
as the switches.
The error occurs when all the doors and guides are closed and there is a mismatch in readings
between the sensors and the switches. For example, the front door finisher door is closed, PI32
senses the door is closed, but MS31 senses the door is still open.
Associated finisher door and guide switches and sensors are as follows:
Saddle-guide switch SW1 and saddle-guide sensor PI9
Booklet-ejection-door switch SW3 and booklet-ejection-door sensor PI3
Front-door switch MS31 and front-door sensor PI32
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: PI32 (front-door-1 sensor), PI3 (booklet door-1 sensor, also known as
booklet-delivery-door sensor), PI9 (front-door-2 sensor, also known as the saddle-guide-door sensor
or inlet-door sensor), SW3 (booklet-door 2).
1. Using the diagnostic tests from the product control panel, try to isolate which door or guide and
sensor is causing the error.
2. Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis.
3. Check the switches and sensors for damage and clean the sensors by gently blowing clean air
into the sensor to remove dust and debris.
4. Check the wiring at the switches and sensors.
5. Check the tabs that activate the switches and sensors on the doors and guides for damage.
Make sure that the tabs are aligned with the switches and sensors. Replace the doors and
guides as necessary.
6. Make sure that the following connectors are fully seated and not damaged:
Stack controller PCA

J719 (MS31)
J707 (PI32)
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA
J4 (SW1)
J10 (PI9)
J4 (SW3)
J11 (PI3)
7. If the error persists, replace the PCA (stacker controller PCA or saddle-stitcher controller PCA)
that is associated with the failed switch/sensor.
66.90.29
Description
Booklet Staple Motor Error (Rear)
The Booklet Maker stitch staplers do not move to different locations in relation to the paper like the
main stapler. The only movement is through the movement of the rotary cam located on the stapler
unit itself, during the actual stapling of the booklet. The stitch-home-position switch (SW5) is part of
the rear-stitch stapler unit and senses the stapler opening and closing during stapling by the motion of
the rotary drive cam. Like SW5, the stitch motor (M6) is also part of the overall stitch stapler unit and
replacement requires the replacement of the saddle-stapler assembly.
This error occurs when the rear booklet-maker-stapler stitching-home-position sensor (SW5) does not
turn on when the stitch motor (rear) (M6) has driven forward for 0.5 seconds.
This error also occurs when the rear booklet-maker-stapler stitching-home-position sensor (SW5)
does not turn off when the stitch motor (rear) (M6) has driven forward for 0.5 seconds.
Recommended action
1. Check the rear-stitch stapler for jammed staples.
2. Clear jammed staples, and then check the staple unit for damage. Retest the stapler.
If the error continues, check the following items:
a. Make sure that HP-approved staples are used.
b. Replace the staple cartridge with one containing HP-approved staples.
c. If the error continues, replace the saddle-stapler assembly.
If the error persists, but no damage is found, proceed to the next step.
3. Make sure that connector J8 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and not
damaged.
4. Check the wiring at the rear-saddle-stitch stapler and the saddle-stapler assembly for damage
and correct seating.

5. Check the connector that the saddle-stitch-stapler assembly engages inside the finisher for
damage and foreign material, as well as for correct seating with the saddle-stitch-stapler
assembly.
6. If the error persists, replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
66.90.30
Description
Booklet Staple Motor Error (Front)
The Booklet Maker stitch staplers do not move to different locations in relation to the paper like the
main stapler. The only movement is through the movement of the rotary cam located on the stapler
unit itself, during the actual stapling of the booklet. The stitch-home-position switch (SW7) is part of
the front-stitch stapler unit and senses the stapler opening and closing during stapling by the motion
of the rotary drive cam. Like SW7, the stitch motor (M7) is also part of the overall stitch stapler unit
and replacement requires the replacement of the saddle-stapler assembly.
This error occurs when the front booklet-maker-stapler stitching-home-position sensor (SW7) does
not turn on when the stitch motor (front) (M7) has driven forward for 0.5 seconds.
This error also occurs when the front booklet-maker-stapler stitching-home-position sensor (SW7)
does not turn off when the stitch motor (front) (M7) has driven forward for 0.5 seconds.
Recommended action
1. Check the front-stitch stapler for jammed staples.
2. Clear jammed staples, and then check the staple unit for damage. Retest the stapler.
If the error continues, check the following items:
a. Make sure that HP-approved staples are used.
b. Replace the staple cartridge with one containing HP-approved staples.
c. If the error continues, replace the saddle-stapler assembly.
If the error persists, but no damage is found, proceed to the next step.
damaged.
4. Check the wiring at the front-saddle-stitch stapler and the saddle-stapler assembly for damage
and correct seating.
5. Check the connector that the saddle-stitch-stapler assembly engages inside the finisher for
damage and foreign material, as well as for correct seating with the saddle-stitch-stapler
assembly.
6. If the error persists, replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
66.90.41
Description
Booklet Nip Motor Error

The paper-fold motor (M2), which is located in the booklet making area of the finisher, drives the
rotation of the folding rollers to create desired fold in the paper.
The error occurs when the number of pulses by the paper-fold-motor clock sensor (PI4) is less than
the expected standard value.
This error also occurs when the status of the paper-fold home-position sensor (PI21) does not change
when the paper-fold motor (M2) has driven for 3 seconds.
Recommended action
1. Check the area around the folding rollers for a jam.
2. Test the paper-fold motor M2 using the finisher component test from the product control panel.
If the folding rollers rotate correctly, perform the following steps:
a. Check sensor PI4 and sensor PI21 for damage.
b. Make sure that the sensor flags are not damaged, move freely, and are correctly
aligned with the PI48 and PI21 sensor bodies.
c. Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis.
d. Carefully clean each sensor body with a clean, lint-free cloth, or gently blow clean air
across each sensor to remove dust and debris.
e. Make sure that connector J3 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and
not damaged. Check the wiring at the PI4 sensor.
f. Make sure that connector J18 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA is fully seated and
not damaged. Check the wiring at the PI21 sensor.
g. If the error persists, replace sensor PI4 or PI21.
h. If the error persists, replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
If the folding rollers do not rotate correctly, perform the following steps:
a. Check the folding-roller gears and connecting gears between the paper-fold motor M2
and the folding rollers for damage. Replace components as necessary.
b. Check the folding rollers for wear and damage. Replace components as necessary.
c. If the error persists, replace the motor-mount assembly.
NOTE: The motor-mount assembly includes the paper-fold motor M2 and the paper-
fold motor-clock sensor PI4.
d. If the error persists, replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
66.90.42
Description
Booklet Paper Position Select Motor Error
The paper-positioning-plate motor (M4), located in the booklet making area of the finisher, controls
the up and down positioning of the stacked paper for stitch stapling and folding.

The error occurs when the paper-positioning-plate home-position sensor (PI7) does not turn on when
the paper-positioning-plate motor (M4) has driven for 1500 pulses.
This error also occurs when the paper-positioning-plate home-position sensor (PI7) does not turn off
when the paper-positioning-plate motor (M4) has driven for 300 pulses.
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: M4-guide plate motor (paper-positioning-plate motor).
1. Test the paper-positioning-plate motor M4 using the finisher component test from the product
control panel.
During the test, observe the movement of the booklet-maker-guide plate, and make sure it is not
obstructed or damaged.
2. Remove the booklet maker output bin to gain access to the paper-position-plate home-position
sensor PI7 and delivery door.
3. Remove the plate that holds PI7, and then carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing
clean air across the sensor to remove dust and debris.
4. Make sure that the sensor is securely fastened to the plate.
5. Check the wiring at the sensor.
6. If the error persists, replace sensor PI7 and the positioning-plate assembly together.
66.90.43
Description
Booklet Paper Guide Motor Error
The guide motor (M3), located in the booklet-making area of the finisher, controls the position of the
guide plate. The guide plate is positioned in front of the folding rollers as the paper stack is being
stapled, allowing the bottom edge of the paper to smoothly pass by the folding rollers. When the
stacked paper is lowered to the folding position, the guide motor (M3) lowers the guide plate out of
the way to allow the paper stack to be pushed into the folding rollers.
This error occurs when the guide-home-position sensor (PI13) does not turn on when the guide motor
(M3) has driven for 700 pulses.
This error also occurs when the guide-home-position sensor (PI13) does not turn off when the guide
motor (M3) has driven for 50 pulses.
Recommended action
Control panel diagnostics: M3 guide motor.
and debris.
3. Check the wiring at the sensor.

5. Check the guide, gears, and gear tracks on the front and rear frame for damage. Replace
components as necessary.
6. If the error persists, replace the guide motor M3 and the guide-home-position sensor PI13
together.
66.90.44
Description
Booklet Align Motor Error
The alignment motor (M5), located in the booklet making area of the finisher, drives the two alignment
plates that adjust the side edges of the stacked paper so that the sheets of paper in the stack is
perfectly aligned with one another.
This error occurs when the aligning-plate home-position sensor (PI5) does not turn on when the
aligning-plate motor (M5) has driven for 500 pulses.
This error also occurs when the aligning-plate home-position sensor (PI5) does not turn off when the
aligning-plate motor (M5) has driven for 50 pulses.
Recommended action
Observe the alignment plates during a Booklet Maker stacking operation.
If the alignment plates move during the operation, perform the following steps:
2. Make sure that the sensor flag is not damaged, moves freely, and is correctly aligned with the
sensor body.
4. Carefully clean the sensor body by gently blowing clean air across the sensors to remove dust
and debris.
5. If the alignment plates or the alignment-plates drive gear has been removed or replaced, make
sure that the plates are correctly aligned with each other on the drive gear.
If the alignment plates do not move during the operation, perform the following steps:
1. Remove motor M5 and check the gears between the motor and alignment plates for damage.
Replace components as necessary.
damaged.
3. Check the wiring at the M5 motor.
4. If the error persists, replace the alignment motor M5.
5. If the alignment plates or the alignment-plates drive gear has been removed or replaced, make
sure that the plates are correctly aligned with each other on the drive gear.

66.90.45
Description
Booklet Push Motor Error
This error occurs when the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14) does not turn on when
the paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) has driven for 0.3 seconds.
This error can also occur under one of the these conditions:
When the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14) does not turn off when the paper-
pushing-plate motor (M8) has driven for 80 ms
When the paper-pushing-plate leading-edge-position sensor (PI15) does not turn off when the
paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) has driven for 80 ms
When the number of pulses detected by the paper-pushing-plate-motor clock sensor (PI1) is less
than the expected standard value
When the paper-pushing-plate leading-edge-position sensor (PI15) does not turn on when the
paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) has driven for 0.3 seconds
Recommended action
1. Open the front finishing door, and then activate the front-door switch (MSW31) and front-door
sensor (PI32) so that the finisher will operate with the front door open
2. Turn the engine and finisher power off to clear the error, and then turn the power on.
WARNING! Operating the finisher with the front door open exposes moving parts that can
cause serious injury. Be very careful operating the finisher with the front door open.
3. Observe the paper-pushing plate motor M8 (located in the lower-right front corner of the
finisher), associated gears, and the paper-pushing plate for proper motion.
If motor M8 does not rotate, replace the motor-mount assembly.
NOTE: The motor-mount assembly includes the paper-pushing-plate motor M8.
If motor M8 does rotate, but the paper-pushing plate does not move or moves erratically,
check the drive gears and paper-pushing plate for wear or damage. Replace components
as necessary.
If motor M8 does rotate and the paper-pushing plate moves correctly, the plate movement
sensors might have failed.
a. Inspect the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor PI14, pushing-plate leading-

edge-position sensor PI15, and paper-pushing-motor clock sensor PI1.
b. Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis.
c. Check sensor PI4, sensor PI15, and sensor PI1 for damage.
d. Make sure that connectors J6, J9, and J23 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA are
fully seated and not damaged.
e. Check the wiring at the sensors.
f. If the error persists, replace the saddle-stitcher controller PCA.

66.90.49
Description
Booklet Nip Motor Error or Booklet Push Motor Error
Finisher - paper-pushing-plate motor (M8).
Error occurs when the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14 or PI 15) does not turn on
when the paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) has been driven for 0.3 seconds.
Also occurs when the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14 or PI15) does not turn off
when the paper-pushing-plate motor (M8) has been driven for 80 ms.
Also occurs when the number of pulses detected by the paper-pushing-plate-motor clock sensor
(PI14 or PI15) is less than expected standard value
Recommended action
1. Open the front finishing door, and activate the front-door switch (MSW31) and front-door sensor
(PI32) so that the finisher will operate with the front door open. .
2. Turn the engine and finisher power off to clear the error, and then turn the power on.
WARNING! Operating the finisher with the front door open exposes moving parts that can
cause serious injury. Be very careful operating the finisher with the front door open.
3. Use the control-panel menus to begin a booklet making operation. Observe the paper-pushing
plate motor M8 (located in the lower-right front corner of the finisher), associated gears, and the
paper-pushing plate for proper motion.
NOTE: The motor-mount assembly includes the paper-pushing-plate motor M8.
4. If motor M8 does rotate but the paper-pushing plate does not move or moves erratically, check
the drive gears and paper-pushing plate for wear or damage. Replace components as
necessary.
5. If motor M8 does rotate and the paper-pushing plate moves properly, the plate movement
sensors might have failed.
6. Inspect the paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor PI14, pushing plate leading-edge-position

sensor PI15, and paper-pushing-motor clock sensor PI1.
7. Make sure that the sensors are securely fastened to the chassis.
Check sensor PI4, sensor PI15, and sensor PI1 for damage.
8. Verify that connectors J6, J9, and J23 on the saddle-stitcher controller PCA are fully seated and
not damaged. Check the wiring at the sensors
9. ONLY if the error persists and none of the previous steps correct the problem, replace the
saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
66.90.50
Description
Booklet-CPU sequence error

Recommended action
69.11.YZ
Description
There is a duplexer error.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, replace the duplexer.

Description
The product experienced a DC controller failure.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, replace the DC controller.
80.XX.YY, 82.XX.YY Error Messages
80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error

Description
An Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error has occurred.
80.01.80: (event log) No heartbeat
80.01.81: (event log) Reclaim timeout
80.01.82: (event log) Invalid data length
80.01.8B: (event log) Invalid max outstanding packet header field
80.01.8C: (event log) Invalid channel mapping response
80.03.01: (event log) No PGP buffers
80.03.02: (event log) Channel table full
80.03.03: (event log) Producer index not reset
80.03.04: (event log) Consumer index not reset

80.03.05: (event log) Queue position size too small
80.03.06: (event log) Transport overflow
80.03.07: (event log) No overflow packets
80.03.08: (event log) Invalid identify response
80.03.09: (event log) Invalid channel map return status
80.03.10: (event log) Invalid reclaim return status
80.03.12: (event log) Datagram invalid buffer
80.03.13: (event log) Max stream channels
80.03.14: (event log) Max datagram channels
80.03.15: (event log) Card reset failed
80.03.16: (event log) Self-test failure
80.03.17: (event log) Unknown PGP packet
80.03.18: (event log) Duplicate I/O channel
Recommended action
2. Remove the RJ45 cable.
4. Reconnect the RJ45 cable.
82.73.46, 82.73.47
Description
A hard disk or compact flash disk cleaning failed. This error is usually caused by a failure of the disk
hardware.
Recommended action
2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu.
98.0X.0Y Error Messages
98.00.01 or 98.01.00 Corrupt data in firmware volume
Description
Data corrupt has occurred in the firmware volume.

Recommended action
98.00.02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume

Description
Data corrupt has occurred in the solutions volume.
Recommended action
98.00.03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume

Description
Data corrupt has occurred in the configuration volume.
Recommended action
2. Download the firmware again, and then attempt the upgrade again.
98.00.04 Corrupt data in the job data volume

Description
Data corrupt has occurred in the job data volume.
Recommended action
2. Rerun the file erase function.
99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt

Description
A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed.
This is a CRC error in the firmware image (bad image).

Recommended action
Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again.
99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive

Description
The issue is an I/O timeout when reading the header number and size. It indicates a problem with the
network environment, not the product.
Recommended action
The most common cause is an issue with the network environment.
Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product, and then attempt the firmware
upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port.
99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk

Description
This is a disk error. It might indicate a problem or a hard disk failure. It might be necessary to check
the connection to the hard disk or replace the hard disk.
Recommended action
1. Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again.
2. If the error persists, run the Clean Disk process from the Preboot menu.
You will need to download the firmware from the Preboot menu.

Description
The issue is an I/O timeout when reading the header.
Recommended action

Description
The issue is an I/O timeout when reading image data.

Recommended action
99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade

Description
The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the header number and size.
Recommended action

Description
The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the rest of the header.
Recommended action

Description
The issue is an unexpected read error when reading image data.
Recommended action
99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user

Description
The RFU was canceled by the user.
Recommended action
Resend the RFU.

Description
The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the header number and size.
Recommended action
Resend the RFU.

Description
The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the rest of the header.
Recommended action
Resend the RFU.
99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid
Description
The header number is 1, but the header size does not match version 1 size.
Recommended action
Download the RFU file again.
Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model, and then resend the RFU.
Description
The header number is 2, but the header size does not match version 2 size.
Recommended action

Description
The file is invalid.

Recommended action
99.00.2X
Description
There is a compatibility issue with the firmware. The specific message varies depending on the
cause, but the solution for each message is the same.
99.00.20 (event log)
The bundle is not for this product.
The bundle is not signed with the correct signature, or the signature is invalid.
The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware.
The package header version is not supported by this firmware.
The format of the bundle is invalid.
The format of the package is invalid.
A CRC32 check did not pass.
An I/O error occurred while downloading the bundle.
Recommended action
Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com, and then resend the firmware upgrade.
99.00.27 only:
2. Resend the firmware upgrade.
3. If the error persists, try installing the upgrade by another method (USB or Embedded Web
Server).

99.01.XX
Description
A firmware install error has occurred. The specific message varies depending on the cause, but the
solution for each message is the same.
99.01.00
99.01.10
99.01.20
99.01.21
Recommended action
Reload the firmware.
99.02.01
Description
Firmware installation was successful.
Recommended action
99.02.09
Description
Firmware upgrade cancelled by user.
Recommended action
99.09.60 Unsupported disk
Description
This is a Preboot menu error.
The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product.
Recommended action
Install the correct hard disk for this product.
99.09.61 Unsupported disk
Description
This is a Preboot menu error.
The installed disk is installed in a product configured for an encrypted hard disk..

Recommended action
Access the Preboot menu, and then select Lock Disk to lock the disk.
99.09.62 Unknown disk

Description
This error indicates that there is an encryption mismatch between the HDD and the formatter. This
typically happens because an HDD was swapped into a device from another device.
Recommended action
Install a new disk or use the Preboot menu unlock the disk.
If a disk is to be reused in a different product, execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot,
and then reload the firmware and lock the disk.
99.09.63 Incorrect disk

Description
This error indicates that the expected encrypted HDD is not present.
This is expected behavior when installing a new HDD in a device where the previous HDD was
encrypted.
Recommended action
Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk, and then lock the disk to this product.
99.09.64 Disk malfunction

Description
A fatal hard disk failure has occurred.
Recommended action
Replace the hard disk.
99.09.65 Disk data error

Description
Disk data corruption has occurred.
Recommended action
Use the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, and then resend the RFU.
99.09.66 No disk installed

Description
A disk drive is not installed in the product.

Recommended action
1. Install a compatible hard disk drive.
2. If a compatible hard disk is installed, reseat the hard disk to make sure that it is connected
correctly.
3. If the error persists, replace the hard disk drive.
99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware

Description
This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk. This is usually the result of
installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu.
Recommended action
1. Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu.
2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error.
3. Select the Administration menu.
NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the product
displays. Enter the password to proceed.
4. Select the Download item, and then download the latest firmware.
The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product.
99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware
Description
This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk. This is usually the result of
installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu.
Recommended action
1. Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu.
2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error.
3. Select the Administration menu.
NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the product
displays. Enter the password to proceed.
4. Select the Download item, and then download the latest firmware.
The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product.
99.XX.YY
Description
A message of this form indicates a firmware installation error.

Recommended action
Reload the firmware.
Alpha Error Messages
<binname> full Remove all paper from bin
Description
The specified output bin is full.
Recommended action
Empty the bin to continue printing.
<Supply> almost full
Description
Toner Collection bottle is almost full.
Toner collection unit
Recommended action
Replace the toner collection unit
<Supply> low OR Supplies low

Description
The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual toner cartridge life
might vary. You do not need to replace the toner cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer
acceptable.
When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded.
10.00.60 (event code) Black print cartridge
10.01.60 (event code) Cyan print cartridge
10.02.60 (event code) Magenta print cartridge
10.03.60 (event code) Yellow print cartridge
10.22.60 : (event code) Transfer kit
10.23.60 : (event code) Fuser Kit
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply.
HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is
no longer acceptable.

NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warrant ends.
<Supply> very low OR Supplies very low
Description
The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual toner cartridge life
might vary. You do not need to replace the toner cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer
acceptable.
When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded.
10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge
10.01.70 (event code) Cyan print cartridge
10.02.70 (event code) Magenta print cartridge
10.03.70 (event code) Yellow print cartridge
10.22.70 : (event code) Transfer kit
Recommended action
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply.
HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is
no longer acceptable.
NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life, the HP Premium Protection
Warrant ends.
<Tray X> lifting
Description
The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray.
X = 2: Tray 2
X = 3: Tray 3
X = 4: Tray 4
X = 5: Tray 5
Recommended action
[File System] device failure To clear touch OK

Description
The specified device has failed.

Recommended action
Touch the OK button to clear the error.
[File System] file operation failure To clear touch OK

Description
A PJL file system command attempted to perform an invalid operation.
Recommended action
[File System] file system is full To clear touch OK

Description
A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system is
full.
Recommended action
[File System] is not initialized

Description
This file-storage component must be initialized before use.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system.
[File System] is write protected

Description
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Accept bad signature

Description
The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade and the code signature is invalid.
Recommended action
Download the correct firmware upgrade file for the product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the
product user guide for more information.

ADF not detected
Description
The ADF was not detected when the product initialized.
Recommended action
Make sure that the document feeder cables are connected and fully seated.
Bad duplexer connection

Description
This message indicates that the duplexer is not connected properly or has been pulled out and must
be reinserted before printing can continue.
Recommended action
2. Reconnect the duplexer.
3. If the error persists, replace the duplexer.
Bad optional tray connection

Description
The optional tray is not connected, not connected correctly, or a connection is not working correctly.
Recommended action
1. Turn the product off.
2. Remove and then reinstall the optional tray.
3. Reconnect the connectors for the tray.
5. If the error persists, replace the connector for the tray.
Calibration reset pending
Description
A calibration reset occurs when all jobs are processed.
Recommended action
To begin the reset sooner, cancel all jobs by pressing the Stop button
Canceling
Description
The product is canceling the current job.

Recommended action
Canceling...<jobname>
Description
The product is canceling the current job <jobname>.
Recommended action
Cartridge Low
Description
This message displays even though the toner cartridge is new.
Recommended action
1. Remove, and then reinstall the toner cartridge.
2. Make sure a genuine HP supply is used.
3. If the error persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Cartridge Memory Abnormal

Description
Recommended action
2. Reconnect connector (J305) on the DC controller PCA.
Cartridge Out
Description
Recommended action
2. Make sure a genuine HP supply is used.
Checking engine
Description
The product is conducting an internal test.

Recommended action
Checking paper path

Description
The product is checking for possible paper jams.
Recommended action
Chosen personality not available To continue, touch OK

Description
A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job
will not print and will be cleared from memory.
Recommended action
Print the job by using a print driver for a different language, or add the requested language to the
product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page.
Clearing event log

Description
This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The product exits the menus when the
event log has been cleared.
Recommended action
Clearing paper path

Description
The product is attempting to eject jammed paper.
Media is detected in the paper path. The product will attempt to eject it.
Recommended action
No action necessary. Check the progress at the bottom of the control panel display.
If a jam is not cleared, remove the media.
Close Front door

Description
The front door of the product is open.

Recommended action
1. Close the door.
2. Run the switch test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the front door open detection switch
is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the front door open detection switch
3. Reconnect the connector (J9939) of the front door open detection switch and connector (J119)
on the DC controller PCA.
4. Check the sensor flag on the front door open detection sensor. If the flag is damaged, replace
the front door assembly.
Close Fuser cover door

Description
The fuser cover door is open or message appears even though the door is closed.
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the fuser cover open detection
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the fuser cover open detection sensor
2. Reconnect the connector (J2034) of the fuser cover open detection sensor, intermediate
3. Check the sensor flag on the fuser cover. If the flag is damaged, replace the fuser
Close Left door Close Output Accessory Bridge

Description
The left door of the product is open.
The output accessory bridge is open.
Recommended action
1. Close the door. Close the output bridge
2. Reconnect the connector (J2204) of the IPTU door open detection sensor and connector
(J7006) on the IPTU controller PCA.
3. Reconnect the connector (J2204) of the left door open detection switch and connector (J7006)
4. Check the sensor flag on the left door or the IPTU top cover. If the flag is damaged, replace the
left door assembly or replace the IPTU top cover assembly.
Close Lower Right door

Description
The optional paper feeder right door is open.
Recommended action
3x500-sheet paper deck:

1. Reconnect the connector (J8313) of the right door open detection switch and connector (J8102)
on the PD controller PCA
2. Check the sensor flag on the PD right door assembly. If the flag is damaged, replace the PD
right door assembly.
on the HCI controller PCA.
2. Check the sensor flag on the Paper deck right door assembly. If the flag is damaged, replace the
PD right door assembly
Close output accessory bridge

Description
The output accessory bridge is open.
Recommended action
1. Close the output accessory bridge.
2. Use sensor test to check functionality of sensor for bridge open.
Close Secondary Registration assembly cover

Description
The T2 Secondary Registration assembly cover is open or message appears even though the cover
is closed
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the T2 assembly cover open
detection sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the T2 ass'y cover open detection
sensor
2. Reconnect the connector (J2033) of the T2 assembly cover open detection sensor, intermediate
3. Check the sensor flag on the T2 assembly cover. If the flag is damaged, replace the ITB duct
Close stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door

Description
This message displays even though the stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door is closed.
Recommended action
1. Reconnect the connector (J465) on the stapler/stacker controller PCA.
2. Check the stapler/stacker door sensor flag. If the flag is damaged, replace the sensor flag.

Close Upper Right Door
Description
The upper right door is open or the message displays even though the upper right door is closed.
Recommended action
1. Close the door.
2. Run the switch test in the sensor monitor mode to make sure that the right door open detection
switch is functioning correctly. If it is not, replace the interlock switch assembly.
4. Check the sensor flag on the right door open detection sensor. If the flag is damaged, replace
the right door assembly.
Cooling device
Description
The product is cooling.
Recommended action
Data received To print last page press OK
Description
The product is waiting for the command to print the last page.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to print the last page of the job.
Different paper sizes in job
Description
A job being sent to the HCO with a command for stapling or booklet making contains multiple sizes of
media.
Recommended action
Send the job in Stacker mode.
Change the media size of the pages.
EIO <X> disk initializing
Description
The specified EIO disk device is initializing.
Recommended action

EIO <X> disk not functional
Description
The specified EIO disk device is initializing. For example, if X = 1, the disk in slot 1 is not functional.
Recommended action
2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then remove and reinstall the disk.
EIO <X> disk spinning up

Description
The EIO disk in slot <X> is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait.
For example, if X = 1, the disk in slot 1 is spinning up.
Recommended action
Event log is empty
Description
No product events are in the log.
Recommended action
Expected drive missing
Description
The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive.
Recommended action
Install the encrypted hard drive.
External device initializing
Description
An external device is initializing.
Recommended action
Fax is disabled ignoring call
Description
The product received a call, but the fax feature was not configured with the required settings (country/
region, date/time, company name, fax number, etc.).

Recommended action
Use the Administration menu to configure the required fax settings.
FIM Load Error Send full FIM on <X> port

Description
The product displays this message before the firmware is loaded at startup if an error has occurred
during a firmware upgrade.
Recommended action
Resend the firmware upgrade.
Flatbed cover open or Close Flatbed cover

Description
The platen glass cover is open or the open/closed sensor is not functioning correctly.
Recommended action
1. Close the flatbed cover.
2. If the error persists, perform a Sensors diagnostic in the Diagnostics menu on the product
control panel to test the flatbed open/closed sensor.
3. Clean, adjust, or replace the sensor as needed.
Fuser Kit low

Description
The product indicates when a supply is low.
Recommended action
Replace the fuser.
After replacing the fuser, reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset
Supplies sub-menu.
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch OK

Description
The product indicates when a supply is very low.
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that
supply has ended.
Recommended action
Replace the fuser.

After replacing the fuser, reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset
Supplies sub-menu.
Gateways failed
Description
There is an incorrect gateways configuration.
Recommended action
Use the EIO <X> Jetdirect menu to configure the default gateway.
Gateways OK
Description
The gateways are configured correctly.
Recommended action
Genuine HP cartridge installed

Description
A new HP toner cartridge has been installed. The message appears for about 6 seconds before the
product returns to the Ready state.
Recommended action
Genuine HP supply installed

Description
10.XX.40 (event code)
A new genuine HP toner cartridge has been installed.
Recommended action
Touch the Hide button to remove this message.
HP Secure hard drive disabled

Description
The drive has been encrypted for another product.
Recommended action
Remove the drive or use the HP Embedded Web Server for more information.

Incompatible <Supply>
Description
10.00.35: (event code) Black toner cartridge
10.01.35: (event code) Cyan toner cartridge
10.02.35: (event code) Magenta toner cartridge
10.03.35: (event code) Yellow toner cartridge
10.23.35: (event code) Fuser kit
Recommended action
Replace the supply with one that is designed for this product.
Incompatible supplies
Description
Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The
product cannot print with these supplies installed.
Event codes are supply specific.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies.
Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this product.
Initializing...
Description
The product is starting.
Recommended action
Install fuser unit

Description
The fuser has been removed or installed incorrectly.
Recommended action
WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Turn the product off, and then wait for
the fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Remove the output bin or stapler/stacker.
2. Remove the fuser.
3. Reinstall the fuser.

Install supply
Description
A supply item is either not installed or installed incorrectly.
10.00.15: (event code) Black toner cartridge
10.01.15: (event code) Cyan toner cartridge
10.02.15: (event code) Magenta toner cartridge
10.03.15: (event code) Yellow toner cartridge
10.23.15: (event code) Fuser Kit
10.31.15: (event code) Toner collection kit
Recommended action
Install the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated.
Install Transfer Unit

Description
The ITB is either not installed or not installed correctly.
Recommended action
1. Open the right door
2. Install the ITB
NOTE: If the ITB is already installed, remove it, and then reinstall the ITB.
4. If the error persists, use the ITB alienation sensor switch in the manual sensor test to verify that
the switch is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the main drive assembly
5. If the error persists, use the T1 roller engagement and disengagement drive test in the
component test to verify that the ITB alienation mechanism is properly functioning. If it is not,
replace the fuser drive assembly
6. If the product was recently serviced, check the connectors on the DC controller PCA
Internal disk device failure To clear touch OK
Description
82.0X.YY (event code)
The internal disk failed.
Recommended action
1. Touch the OK button to clear the error.
2. If the error persists, turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the hard drive.

3. Turn on the product.
4. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive.
Internal disk file operation failed

Description
A PJL system command attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a file to a
nonexistent directory.
Recommended action
Internal disk file system is full

Description
A PJL system command attempted to write data to the internal disk, but failed because the disk is full.
Recommended action
Internal disk is write protected

Description
The internal disk is write protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
Internal disk not found

Description
The internal disk was not found at start up.
Recommended action
Internal disk not functional

Description
82.0X.YY (event code)
The internal hard drive is not functioning correctly
Recommended action
1. Turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the hard drive.
2. Turn on the product.
3. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive.

Internal disk not initialized
Description
The file system on the internal disk must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Initialize the file system on the internal disk.
Internal disk spinning up

Description
The internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait.
Recommended action
No action is necessary.
Jam in document feeder

Description
A document feeder jam has occurred.
Recommended action
Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual.
Job not stapled due to mixed sizes

Description
This message displays when the job to staple has more than one paper size (paper width).
Recommended action
Paper with different widths cannot be stapled. Use the same width paper for the entire print job.
Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, press OK

Description
This message displays when the indicated tray is selected, but is not loaded, and other paper trays
are available for use.
It also displays when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job
requires.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper in the tray.
2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.
3. Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray.

4. If error persists, use the cassette media present sensor test in the Tray/bin manual sensor test to
verify that the sensor is functioning correctly.
5. Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely.
Loading program <XX>

Description
Programs and fonts can be stored on the products file system and are loaded into RAM when the
product is turned on. The number <XX> specifies a sequence number indicating the current program
being loaded.
Recommended action
NOTE: Do not turn the product off.
Lower left booklet bin full
Description
The booklet bin is full.
Recommended action
Remove media from the bin to continue.
Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second side
Description
The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the
output stack to print the second side.
Recommended action
1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the pages from the output bin.
2. Flip the document printed side up.
3. Load the document in Tray 1.
4. Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job.
Manually feed: <Type><Size> To use another tray, press OK
Description
This message displays when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is loaded, and other trays are available.

Recommended action
1. Load tray with the requested paper.
2. If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message, and then press the OK
button to print.
3. To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message, and
then press the OK button.
Moving solenoid
Description
The solenoid is moving as part of a component test.
Recommended action
To exit, press the Stop button
Moving solenoid and motor

Description
The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test.
Recommended action
To exit, press the Stop button .
No job to cancel
Description
The user pressed the Stop button , but the product is not actively processing any jobs.
Recommended action
Non HP Supply Installed

Description
A non-HP supply is detected.
This message displays for 30 seconds, and then the product returns to a Ready state.
The product does not provide supply status messages for non-HP supplies.
Recommended action
Press OK to continue.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit.

Output Bin Full
Description
This message displays even though the output bin is not full.
Recommended action
1. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the face-down tray media-full
sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the face-down delivery assembly
2. Reconnect the connector (J1905) of the face-down delivery assembly and connector (J108) on
3. Set the face-down tray media-full sensor flag to move smoothly. If the flag is damaged, replace
the face-down delivery assembly
Output Device detached
Description
An output device is recognized on the product, but not fully attached.
Recommended action
Realign and reattach the output device.
Paused...
Description
The product is paused and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues
receiving data until memory is full.
Recommended action
Press the Stop button
Performing Paper Path Test

Description
The product is performing a paper-path test.
Recommended action
Please Wait...
Description
The product is in the process of clearing data.
Recommended action

Printing Configuration...
Description
The product is printing the Configuration page.
Recommended action
Printing Event Log...

Description
The product is printing the Event Log page.
Recommended action
Printing File Directory...

Description
The product is printing the File Directory pages.
Recommended action
Printing Font List...

Description
The product is printing the Font List pages.
Recommended action
Printing Fuser Test Page...

Description
The product is printing the Fuser Test page.
Recommended action
Printing Help Page...

Description
The product is printing the Help page.
Recommended action

Printing Menu Map...
Description
The product is printing the Menu Map pages.
Recommended action
Printing stopped
Description
Time expired on the Print/Stop test.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to continue.
Printing Supplies Status Page...

Description
The product is printing the Supplies Status page.
Recommended action
Printing Usage Page...

Description
The product is printing the Usage page.
Recommended action
Printingengine test
Description
The product is printing an engine test page.
Recommended action
Processing job from tray <X>...Do not grab paper until job completes
Description
The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray.
Recommended action

Processing...
Description
The product is currently processing a job, but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins,
this message is replaced by a message that indicates the tray the job is using.
Recommended action
Processing...copy <X> of <Y>
Description
The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy
number <X> of total copies <Y> is currently being processed.
Recommended action
RAM disk device failure To clear touch OK
Description
The specified device failed.
Recommended action
RAM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK
Description
A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a
file to a nonexistent directory.
Recommended action
RAM disk file system is full To clear touch OK

Description
The hard disk is full.
Recommended action
RAM disk is write protected To clear touch OK

Description
The RAM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it.

Recommended action
RAM disk not initialized

Description
The file system on the RAM disk must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Initialize the file system on the RAM disk.
Ready
Description
The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at
the display.
Recommended action
Ready <IP Address>

Description
The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at
the display. The product IP address displays.
Recommended action
Receiving Upgrade
Description
The product is receiving a firmware upgrade.
Recommended action
Do not turn the product off until it reaches the Ready state.
Remove one print cartridge

Description
The product is testing the print-cartridge motor.
Recommended action
To perform the test, remove the print cartridge from the product.
To cancel, press the Stop button .

Remove USB accessory
Description
This message displays when an unsupported USB device is inserted into a host USB port on the
product.
Recommended action
Remove the unsupported USB device.
Replace <Supply>
Description
This alert displays only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low
threshold. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life
remaining might be different than estimated.
The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP
recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no
longer acceptable.
The product can be configured to stop when the supply level is very low. The supply might still be
able to produce acceptable print quality.
When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty
on that supply ends.
10.00.70 : (event code) Black toner cartridge
10.31.70 : (event code) Toner Collection kit
Recommended action
Replace the specified supply.
Or, configure the product to continue printing using the Manage Supplies menu on the product control
panel.
Resend external accessory firmware

Description
An external accessory requires a firmware upgrade. Printing can continue, but jams might occur if the
job uses the external accessory.
Recommended action
Perform a firmware upgrade.

Resend Upgrade
Description
A firmware upgrade did not complete successfully.
Recommended action
Upgrade the firmware again.
Restore Factory Settings

Description
The product is restoring factory settings.
Recommended action
ROM disk device failed To clear touch OK

Description
Recommended action
ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch OK

Description
A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a
file to a nonexistent directory.
Recommended action
ROM disk file system is full To clear touch OK
Description
The hard disk is full.
Recommended action
ROM disk is write protected To clear touch OK
Description
The ROM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action

ROM disk not initialized To clear touch OK
Description
The file system on the ROM disk must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Initialize the file system on the ROM disk.
Rotating Motor
Description
The product is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor.
Recommended action
Press the Stop button, when ready to stop this test or exit.
Size mismatch in Tray <X>

Description
The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray.
Recommended action
1. Load the correct paper.
2. Make sure that the paper is positioned correctly.
3. Close the tray, and then make sure that the control panel lists the correct size and type for the
specified tray.
4. If necessary, use the control panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the
specified tray.
5. If error persists, use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to test the switch.
Sleep mode on
Description
The product is in sleep mode. Pressing a control panel button, receiving of a print job, or an error
condition clears this message.
Recommended action
Staple Cartridge 2 and 3 very low (warning)
Description
The specified staple cartridge is at end of life.
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends.

Recommended action
Replace the staple cartridge.
Staple Cartridge <X> low (warning)

Description
The specified staple cartridge is at end of life.
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends.
Recommended action
Staple Cartridge low

Description
The product indicates when a supply level is low. 20 to 50 staples remain in the cartridge.
Recommended action
Stapler/Stacker staple jam

Description
There is a stapler/stacker jam.
Recommended action
Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual.
Supplies low
Description
Multiple supplies on the product have reached the user defined low threshold.
Recommended action
Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable.
Supply Memory Warning

Description
The product cannot read or write to the e-label or the e-label is missing.
Recommended action
The unit has corrupt data

Description
Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume.

98.00.01: Corrupt data in the firmware volume
98.00.02: Corrupt data in the solutions volume
98.00.03: Corrupt data in the configuration volume
98.00.04: Corrupt data in the job data volume
Recommended action
For 98.00.01, 98.00.02, and 98.00.03, perform the following steps:
For 98.00.04, perform the following steps:
2. Run the file erase function.
Too many pages in job to staple

Description
The job contains more pages than can be stapled.
Recommended action
Send the job to the stacker bin or make the job page count smaller.
Too many pages to make booklet

Description
The job contains more pages than can be assembled in the booklet bin.
Recommended action
Send the job to the stacker bin or make the job page count smaller.
Tray <X> [type] [size]

Description
The media in the specified tray is detected as the specified size and type.
The custom switch was not changed.
Recommended action
If the media is a custom size or type, change the custom switch accordingly.
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size]

Description
The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print.

X = 1: Tray 1
X = 2: Tray 2
X = 3: Tray 3
X = 4: Tray 4
X = 5: Tray 5
Recommended action
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product
does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray.
Tray <X> lifting

Description
The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray.
X = 2: Tray 2
X = 3: Tray 3
X = 4: Tray 4
X = 5: Tray 5
Recommended action
Tray <X> open

Description
The specified tray is open or not closed completely.
X = 2: Tray 2
X = 3: Tray 3
X = 4: Tray 4
X = 5: Tray 5
Recommended action
1. Close the tray.
2. If this message displays after the lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that
the connector of the assembly is connected correctly and fully seated.
3. If the error persists, use the media size switches in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to test the
switches.
4. If the switches do not respond, replace the associated lifter drive assembly.

Tray <X> overfilled
Description
The tray is filled above the stack-height mark.
X = 2: Tray 2
X = 3: Tray 3
X = 4: Tray 4
X = 5: Tray 5
The overfilled condition is sensed by the stack surface sensor when the tray is first closed. If the stack
surface sensor does not move down (because the tray is too full), the overfilled message will be
displayed and the tray will not be available for printing.
Recommended action
1. Open the tray and remove media until the tray filled indicators can be seen.
2. Close the tray.
3. Make sure that all connections from the DCC to the paper pickup assembly and lifter drive
assembly are fully seated and connected.
4. If the lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the
assembly is connected correctly and fully seated.
5. If the error persists, perform a tray bin sensor test for the paper stack sensor of the specified
tray. Replace sensors if necessary.
NOTE:
Type mismatch Tray <X>
Description
The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type.
Recommended action
The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other
trays.
1. Load the correct paper in the specified tray.
2. On the product control, make sure that the type loaded in the tray matches the specified setting
for the tray.
Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch OK

Description
A non-supported hard drive has been installed. The drive is unusable by this product.

Recommended action
2. Remove the hard drive.
Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch OK

Description
A non-supported supply has been installed or the toner cartridge is for a different product.
Recommended action
Install the correct supplies for this product. See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part
numbers.
Unsupported tray configuration

Description
The product has too many optional trays installed.
Recommended action
Turn the product off, remove the unsupported trays, and then turn the product on.
Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory

Description
A non-supported USB accessory has been connected.
Recommended action
Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on.
Upgrade Error
Description
There was a SCB upgrade error.
Recommended action
2. Resend the upgrade.
Upper left bin full

Description
The booklet bin is full.

Recommended action
Remove media from the bin to continue.
USB accessory not functional

Description
A parameter in the USB accessory is not functioning correctly.
Recommended action
2. Remove the USB accessory.
3. Insert a replacement USB accessory.
USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly
Description
Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available.
Recommended action
Remove the USB hub.
USB is write protected To clear touch OK

Description
The USB device is write protected and no new files can be written to it.
Recommended action
USB needs too much power

Description
Power requirements for the USB device attached to the product are beyond supported limits.
Recommended action
1. Remove the USB device.
3. Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power.
USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off then On
Description
A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue.

Recommended action
2. Remove the USB accessory.
4. Try a similar USB accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power.
USB not initialized

Description
The file system on the USB device must be initialized before it can be used.
Recommended action
Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the USB device.
USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data

Description
This message displays for about 6 seconds after a USB device is removed.
Recommended action
Touch the Hide button to remove this message.
USB storage device failure To clear touch OK

Description
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to clear this error.
USB storage file operation failed To clear touch OK

Description
A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as
downloading a file to a nonexistent directory.
Recommended action
USB storage file system is full To clear touch OK

Description
The file system on the installed USB device is full.
Recommended action

Used supply installed To continue, touch OK OR Used supply in use Description
Description
One of the toner cartridges or supplies has been previously used.
Recommended action
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit.
Verifying, Please Wait

Description
This message displays when the product is retrieving a print job from device memory, but can cause
the product control panel to lock up.
The user enter the Retrieve from Device Memory menu to print a job. After selecting the desired print
jobs, Verifying, Please Wait displays on the control panel. The status bar will move for a moment, and
then lock up. Typically, if the user waits a few minutes, the error will clear and the job will print.
In rare cases, the message will lock up permanently and force the user to power cycle the product.
The event log might show the following errors as a result of power cycling the product during lockup:
48.05.05
98.03.11
Recommended action
Review online support document c03249783, HP Color LaserJet CM4540MFP and LaserJet
M4555MFP Series Printer - Message "Verifying, Please Wait" Locks Up Printer When Retrieving Print
Job from Device Memory.
Waiting for Tray <X> to lift

Description
The specified tray is in the process of lifting paper to the top of the tray (so it can feed correctly).
Recommended action
No action necessary
Windows Login Required to Use this Feature

Description
Windows login is required for the selected feature or job.
Recommended action
Enter the necessary Windows login information.
Wrong cartridge in <color> slot

Description
The indicated slot for a print cartridge contains a cartridge that is not the correct color

From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in the following order:
Yellow 10.03.25 (Event Code)
Magenta 10.02.25 (Event Code)
Cyan 10.01.25 (Event Code)
Black 10.00.25 (Event Code)
Recommended action
Remove the print cartridge from that slot, and install a cartridge that is the correct color.
Event log messages

See the control-panel message and event-log entries section of the product reoubleshooting manual
for eventl-log entry descriptions and solutions.
Print or view an event log

NOTE: The event log in the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete
event log, use the Service menu.
Print or view the event log from the Administration menu
button.
Troubleshooting
Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print or view the event log from the Service menu
button.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
4. Enter one of the following service access code for your product:
M855: 11085513
M880: 11088013
5. Touch the Print Event Log or View Event Log item.

Clear an event log
button.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
M855: 11085513
M880: 11088013
5. Select the Clear Event Log item, and then touch the OK button.

Clear jams
Auto-navigation for clearing jams
The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the
control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you
have completed all steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray,
straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and
feed sheets one at a time.
8. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Trays button. Verify
that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
Jam sensor locations

If you are experiencing frequent jams, use the figures in this section to locate the product and
accessories jam sensors to help isolate the problem.
ENWW Clear jams 651

Product base
TOP sensor (SR2501)
Output bin full sensor (SR33)
Duplex swichback sensor (SR301)
Developer delivery sensor (SR302)
Duplex refeed sensor (SR304)
Registration sensor (MS)
Figure 2-82 Product base

Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
SR301
SR33
SR45
SR35
SR302
SR29, SR30
SR2501 SR304
SR22 MS
SR24

Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)
Figure 2-83 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)
SR201 SR202 SR203
ENWW Clear jams 653

1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only)
Figure 2-84 1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only)
SR112

3x500-sheet paper feeder
Figure 2-85 3x500-sheet paper feeder
SR112
SR122
SR132
ENWW Clear jams 655

3x500-sheet High-capacity input (HCI) feeder
HCI feed sensor (PS3301)
Figure 2-86 3x500-sheet High-capacity input (HCI) feeder
PS3305 PS3301
PS3302

Trailing edge detection sensor (LED5 and PTR5)
NOTE: Stapler/stacker with hole punch only.
Inlet sensor (PI301)
Media-feed sensor (PI104)
Figure 2-87 Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch

PI104
PI103 Trailing edge detection sensor

(LED5, PTR5)
ENWW Clear jams 657

NOTE: The following sensors are found on booklet maker accessories only. For sensors located in
the stapler/stacker or hole punch portion of the accessory, see Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker
with hole punch on page 657.
Saddle inlet sensor (PI22)
Feed sensor 1 (PI18)
Vertical paper path feed sensor (PI17)
Paper positioning plate media-presence sensor (PI18)
Delivery sensor (PI11)
Figure 2-88 Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch
PI22
PI17 PI18
PI19
PI11 PI20
PI8

Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser
Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser by opening the right door of the product. Use the
following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a jam
occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
1. Open the right door.
2. If paper is jammed in Tray 1, gently pull the

paper from the bottom of the right door.
ENWW Clear jams 659

3. Check for paper in the duplex-printing path
inside the right door. If paper is near the top
of the duplex-printing path, gently pull it out to
remove it.
4. Lift the jam-access cover at the bottom of the

duplex printing path, and remove any jammed
paper.
5. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access

panel and open the panel.

6. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
7. Close the transfer-access panel.
ENWW Clear jams 661

8. If paper is jammed in the fuser, lift the jam-
access cover on top of the fuser, and gently
pull out the paper.
WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use.

Clear jams in Tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
1. Open the right door.
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access

panel and open the panel.
ENWW Clear jams 663

4. Close the transfer-access panel.
6. Pull the tray completely out of the product by

pulling and lifting it up slightly.

7. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of
paper.
8. Remove any paper from the feed rollers

inside the product.
9. Reinsert and close the tray.
ENWW Clear jams 665

Clear jams in the 3x500-sheet feeder and the lower-right door
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 3x500-sheet
feeder. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
1. Open the lower-right door.

3. Close the lower-right door.
4. Open the tray.

NOTE: The message on the product control
panel indicates which tray has the jam. The
following steps show removing a jam from the
top tray, but the procedure is the same for all
three trays.
ENWW Clear jams 667

5. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of
paper.
6. Close the tray.

Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity input tray and the lower-right door
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 3,500-sheet
high-capacity tray. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
1. Open the right and left trays.

NOTE: You do not need to open both trays
at the same time.
2. Remove the paper from the trays and discard

any damaged sheets.
ENWW Clear jams 669

3. Above the right-side tray, press the green
button to release the jam-access plate.
4. If jammed paper is in the feed area, pull it

down to remove it.
5. Push up on the jam-access plate to close it.

6. Load full reams of paper into each side of the
tray. The right side holds 1,500 sheets of
paper. The left side holds 2,000 sheets of
paper.
NOTE: For best results, load full reams of
paper. Avoid dividing reams into smaller
sections.
7. Close the right and left trays.
8. Open the jam-access door on the right side of

the high-capacity tray cabinet.
ENWW Clear jams 671

9. Remove any jammed paper.
10. Close the jam-access door on the right side of

the high-capacity tray cabinet.
NOTE: If after clearing the jam the product
control panel displays a message that there is
no paper in the tray or the tray is over filled,
remove the tray and look behind it for any
remaining paper.

Clear jams in the document feeder (M880)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the document
feeder. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
1. Lift the latch to release the document-feeder

cover.
2. Open the document-feeder cover.
3. Lift the jam-access door, and remove any

jammed paper.
If necessary, rotate the green wheel at the
front of the document feeder to remove
jammed paper.
ENWW Clear jams 673

4. Press on the door next to the document-
feeder rollers to make sure it is closed
completely.
5. Lift the document feeder input tray.
6. Squeeze inward on the two slots at each end

of the backside-background selector
assembly.

7. Remove the backside-background selector
assembly by pulling it out.
8. Remove any jammed paper.
9. Reinstall the backside-background selector

assembly by sliding it in until it locks into
place.
ENWW Clear jams 675

10. Lower the document-feeder input tray.
11. Close the document-feeder cover.
NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document feeder input tray are adjusted tightly
against the document. Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.

Clear output jams in the output-accessory bridge
The output-accessory bridge is installed on products with an optional finishing accessory. The output-
accessory bridge transfers paper from the output slot near the control panel, across the top of the
product, and into the finishing accessory. Use the following procedure to clear jams in this area.
1. Lift the latch on the top cover of the output-

accessory bridge and open the top cover.
ENWW Clear jams 677

2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
3. Close the top cover of the output-accessory

bridge.

Clear jams in the stapler/stacker accessory or the stapler/stacker with hole
punch accessory
The procedures to clear paper jams and staple jams in the stapler/stacker accessory and the stapler/
stacker with hole punch accessory are similar. Use the following procedures to check for jams in all
possible locations inside the finishing accessory. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam. Only the stapler/stacker with hole punch accessory is
shown in the following tasks. Steps that apply only to the hole-punch model are clearly indicated.
Clear top left door jams in the stapler/stacker
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the stapler/stacker
Clear stapler/stacker connection jams (hole-punch models only)
Clear top left door jams in the stapler/stacker
1. Open the top left door.
2. Hole punch models only: Open the hole-

punch door.
ENWW Clear jams 679

3. Hole punch models only: Turn the knob to
align the arrows.
4. Hole punch models only: Lift the hole-punch

unit.
5. Hole punch models only: If paper is jammed

in the bottom of the hole-punch unit, carefully
remove it.
NOTE: Do not close the hole-punch unit yet.

6. Lift the jam access cover for the output slot,
and gently remove any jammed paper.
7. Remove all paper from the top left door area.
8. Hole punch models only: Close the hole-

punch unit.
NOTE: Ensure the arrows on the hole punch
are positioned as shown in the graphic.
ENWW Clear jams 681

punch door.
10. Close the top left door.
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the stapler/stacker


2. Wait three seconds, and then open the front
left door.
3. Pull the staple cartridge up and out to remove

it.
4. Lift up the metal handle on the front of the

staple cartridge.
ENWW Clear jams 683

5. Remove any jammed staples from the staple
cartridge.
6. Push down the metal handle on the front of

the staple cartridge.

7. Insert the staple cartridge. Press down on the
top of the staple cartridge until it clicks into
place.
8. Close the front left door.
Clear stapler/stacker connection jams (hole-punch models only)
ENWW Clear jams 685

2. Open the hole-punch door.
3. Turn the knob to align the arrows.
4. Lift the hole-punch unit.

5. If paper is jammed in the bottom of the hole-
punch unit, carefully remove it.
7. Close the hole-punch unit.

ENWW Clear jams 687

8. Close the hole-punch door.

Clear jams in the booklet maker accessory or the booklet maker with hole
punch accessory
The procedures to clear paper jams and staple jams in the booklet maker accessory and the booklet
maker with hole punch accessory are similar. Use the following procedures to check for jams in all
possible locations inside the finishing accessory. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam. Only the booklet maker with hole punch accessory is
shown in the following tasks. Steps that apply only to the hole-punch model are clearly indicated.
Clear top left door jams in the booklet maker
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the booklet maker
Clear front left door jams in the booklet maker
Clear stapler 2 or 3 jams in the booklet maker
Clear top left door jams in the booklet maker

punch door.
ENWW Clear jams 689

align the arrows.

unit.

remove it.


punch unit.
ENWW Clear jams 691

punch door.
Clear Stapler 1 jams in the booklet maker


2. Wait three seconds, and then open the front
left door.
3. Pull the staple cartridge up and out to remove

it.
4. Lift up the metal handle on the front of the

staple cartridge.
ENWW Clear jams 693

5. Remove any jammed staples from the staple
cartridge.
6. Push down the metal handle on the front of

the staple cartridge.

7. Insert the staple cartridge. Press down on the
top of the staple cartridge until it clicks into
place.
Clear front left door jams in the booklet maker
1. Open the front left door.
ENWW Clear jams 695

2. Hole punch models only: Open the top left
door.

punch door.

align the arrows.

unit.

remove it.

punch unit.
ENWW Clear jams 697

punch door.
9. Hole punch models only: Close the top left

door.
10. Move the lower jam-release lever to the right,

and then remove any paper. Move the lower
jam-release handle to the left.

11. Move the upper jam-release lever to the right,
and then remove any paper. Move the upper
12. Open the lower booklet door.
13. Turn the small jam-release knob

counterclockwise.
ENWW Clear jams 699

14. Press the large jam-release knob, and then
turn it clockwise.
15. Remove all paper from the lower booklet door

area.

16. Close the lower booklet door.
Clear stapler 2 or 3 jams in the booklet maker
1. Open the front left door.
ENWW Clear jams 701

2. Move the lower jam-release lever to the right,
and then remove any paper. Move the lower
3. Grasp the green handle and pull the staple

carriage out.
4. Pull the green handle of the stapler unit

toward you and rotate it upward. Push the
handle in to lock it in the open position.
2

5. Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and
firmly pull up to remove the staple cartridges
from the staple cartridge unit.
6. Press down on the jam-release at the back of

the saddle-staple cartridge, push up on the
plate at the front of the cartridge, and then
remove any jammed staples.
3
2
7. Press down on the front of the saddle-staple

cartridge close it.
ENWW Clear jams 703

8. Insert the staple cartridges.
9. Pull the handle of the staple cartridge unit

toward you and rotate it downward to its
original position. Lock it into position by
pushing in the handle. 2

10. Push the saddle-stitch carriage in.
NOTE: If the saddle-stitch carriage does not
easily slide into the finisher, the staple unit is
not closed properly. Pull the saddle-stitch
carriage out of the finisher and reseat the
stapler unit.
ENWW Clear jams 705

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
The product does not pick up paper
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (M880)
Prevent paper jams
The product does not pick up paper

If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1. Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the product control panel.
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
5. Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt
to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue.
6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth
dampened with warm water.
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not
fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
package.
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (M880)
The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be
removed.
Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is
closed.
Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.

The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to
center the stack.
The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure
that the paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack.
The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of
pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from
the output bin.
Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.
Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-
free cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.
M880 product: From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the
Supplies button. Check the status of the document-feeder kit, and replace it if necessary.
Prevent paper jams

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and
feed sheets one at a time.
8. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Trays button. Verify
that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size.
ENWW Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed 707

Use manual print modes
Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems.
Select a manual print mode

button.
General Settings
Print Quality
Adjust Paper Types
3. Select a paper type, and then select the mode to adjust.
4. Select a value for the mode, and then touch the Save button.

Table 2-75 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types submenu
Print Mode
Plain
HP EcoSMART 90g
HP EcoSMART 120g
HP EcoSMART 150g
HP EcoSMART 200g
HP Soft Gloss 120g
HP Glossy 120g
HP Glossy 150g
HP Glossy 200g
Lite 60-74g
Intermediate 85-95g
Mid-Weight 96-110g
Heavy 111-130g
Extra Heavy 131-175g
Card Stock 176-220g
MidWtGlossy 96-110g
Heavy Glossy 111-130g
XHvyGlossy 131-175g
Card Glossy 176-220g
Color Transparency
Labels
Letterhead
Envelope
Heavy Envelope
Pre Printed
Pre Punched
Colored
Bond
Recycled
Rough
Heavy Rough
Opaque Film
Restore Modes
NOTE: Not all print modes are available for all paper types.
ENWW Use manual print modes 709

Table 2-76 MP modes under the Optimize submenu
Normal Use Normal when the product prints on smoother media with
Normal Media mode is used.
Normal changes the second transfer bias and the fuser

temperature.
Light Media This is designated when fuser wrap jams are observed with
light media, most likely in high humidity.
The product reduces the fuser fixing temperature (which can

result in loss of fixing performance).
NOTE: Applies to all print modes, however, only the

following modes might actually require this mode: Normal,
Light 2, Light Rough, and Gloss 1.
Heavy Paper Use Heavy Paper when the product prints on smoother
media when Heavy Media 2 or , Heavy Media 3 mode is
used.
Heavy Paper changes the second transfer bias and the fuser
temperature.
Envelope Control Use Envelope Control when envelope sticking occurs.
Envelope Control changes the fuser temperature.
Talc Paper Use Talc Paper when cleaning failure due to paper dust
occurs.
Talc Paper changes the control of when the ITB stops.
Environment Set to Normal if the product is operating in a low-temperature

environment and you are having problems with print quality
such as blisters in the printed image.
Line Voltage Use Line Voltage when the product is operating in a region
where the power voltage is 100 Vac.
This mode optimizes fuser conditions to accommodate the

lighter media that is usually printed on in a 100 Vac region
(for example, Japan).
This mode reduces the potential of the product to slow down

because cannot fully heat the fuser in a low voltage
operating environment.
Line Voltage improves fuser temperature performance. The

Normal mode operates at a lower fuser temperature when
the product is at full throughput.
Tray 1 Alternate 1 compares length of image designated by EC-M0

and the length of detected media for the page designated as
Universal size, and when this determines that the image is
shorter than the media, it executes T2 cleaning after job is
completed. Conducts T2 cleaning when job is completed, in
cases where the Universal size is designated and the
designated image length and actual media size are different.
Alternate 2 causes T2 cleaning to be performed every time a

job is completed when Universal Size is selected.

Table 2-76 MP modes under the Optimize submenu (continued)
Background Set to Alternate 1 when a background occurs all over the

page. This changes the D blade bias and charging bias.
Set to Alternate 2 when a background of thin vertical lines

occur on the page. This changes the D blade bias and
charging bias. This turns off the pre-exposure LED.
Uniformity Control Set to Alternate 1 when mottle occurs with all modes
(Transfer Mottle). This changes the first transfer bias.
Set to Alternate 2 when mottle occurs with Normal Media

mode or Light Media 1 mode is selected. This changes the
print speed (slower) and adjusts the fuser temperature.
Tracking Control Use Tracking Control to disable tracking control.
Transfer control Set to Alternate 1 when re-transfer occurs. This changes the
first transfer bias.
Set to Alternate 2 when developer ghosting occurs. This

changes the RS roller bias.
Restore Optimize Use Restore Optimize to reset the menu defaults.
ENWW Use manual print modes 711

Solve image quality problems
Often print-quality problems can be resolved easily by making sure that the product is well-
maintained, using paper that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.
Image defects table

The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge first.
These examples illustrate problems that would affect all the pages that you print, whether you print in
color or in black only.
Table 2-77 Image defects table
Problem Sample Cause Solution
Print is light or faded on entire Poor contacts exist on the Clean the grounding contacts. If the
page. ITB unit and the product problem remains after cleaning,
grounding unit. check the contacts for damage.
Replace any deformed or damaged
parts.
Poor secondary transfer Clean the contacts. If the problem

contacts exist on the remains after cleaning, check the
secondary transfer roller and contacts for damage. Replace any
the ITB. deformed or damaged parts.
Print is light or faded in a Poor primary transfer bias Clean the contacts of the color that
particular color. contacts on the ITB unit and produces the light print. If the
product. problem remains after cleaning,
check the contacts for damage.
Poor primary charging bias Replace any deformed or damaged
contacts with the toner parts.
cartridge and product.
Poor developing bias

contacts with the toner
cartridge and product.
Print is too dark. The CPR/density (RD) sensor Replace the CPR/density sensor.
is defective.
Page is blank. The high-voltage power- Replace the high-voltage power

supply lower is defective (no supply.
developing bias output).

Table 2-77 Image defects table (continued)
The page is solid black or a Poor contact exists in the Clean each contact of the color that
solid color. primary charging bias or produces the all black or solid color.
developing bias contacts If the problem remains after
between the toner cartridge cleaning, check the contacts for
and the product. damage. Replace any deformed or
damaged parts. Replace the
affected toner cartridge.
White spots appear in the The primary transfer roller is Replace the ITB.
image. deformed or has deteriorated
The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer

is deformed or has roller assembly.
deteriorated.
The back of the page is dirty. The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer
is dirty. roller.
The fuser inlet guide or Clean the dirty parts. If the dirt does
separation guide is dirty. not come off, replace the guide.
The pressure roller is dirty. Run the cleaning page several

times. If the issue persists, replace
the fuser.
Vertical streaks or bands Scratches are present on the Replace the toner cartridge of the
appear on the page. circumference of the color that matches the defect.
developing cylinder or
photosensitive drum.
Scratches are present on the Replace the fuser.

circumference of the fuser
roller.
Scratches are present on the Replace the ITB.

circumference of the ITB.
The ITB drive roller is

deformed or has deteriorated.
The ITB cleaning mechanism

is malfunctioning.
ENWW Solve image quality problems 713

Vertical white lines appear in a A unknown substance has Remove any unknown substances.
particular color. adhered to the laser beam
window
Scratches are present on the Remove the affected toner

circumference of the cartridge and re-install it. The PGCs
developing roller or will clean the glass.
If the problem persists, replace the
affected toner cartridge.
M880 product only: White Clean the glass.

scratch down the page could
mean the scanner glass
needs to be cleaned.
The laser/scanner-unit mirror Replace the laser/scanner

is dirty. assembly.
Vertical white lines appear in all Horizontal scratches on the Replace the fuser.
colors. fuser roller.
Scratches are present on the Remove the affected toner

circumference of the ITB. cartridge and re-install it. The PGCs
will clean the glass.
White scratch down the page
could mean the scanner glass Replace the ITB.
needs to be cleaned.
Horizontal lines appear on the Repetitive horizontal lines Use the repetitive defects ruler to
page. appear. identify the dirty roller. Clean the
roller. If the roller cannot be
cleaned, replace the fuser.
Horizontal scratches are Replace the toner cartridge of the

present on the photosensitive color that matches the defect.
drum.
Horizontal scratches are Replace the fuser.

present on the fuser roller.
A horizontal white line displays Repetitive horizontal white Use the repetitive defects ruler to
on the page. lines appear. identify the dirty roller. Clean the
roller. If the roller cannot be
cleaned, replace the roller.
Horizontal scratches are Replace the toner cartridge of the

present on the photosensitive color that matches the defect.
drum.
Scratches are present on the Replace the ITB.

circumference of the ITB.

Image in a particular color does Poor contact exists in the Clean each contact of the color that
not print in the correct color. primary charging bias or produces the missing color. If the
developing bias contacts problem remains after cleaning,
between the toner cartridge check the contacts for damage.
and the product. Replace any deformed or damaged
parts.
The toner cartridge (primary Replace the toner cartridge of the

charging roller, developing color that matches the defect.
roller, or photosensitive drum)
is defective.
The high-voltage power- Replace the high-voltage power

supply lower is defective (no supply.
primary charging bias or
developing bias output).
The laser/scanner unit is Replace the laser/scanner

defective. assembly.
Dropouts appear. The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary-transfer-

is deformed or has roller.
deteriorated.
The primary charging roller, Replace the toner cartridge.

developing roller, or
photosensitive drum is
deformed or has deteriorated.
The fuser roller is deformed Replace the fuser.

or has deteriorated.
The high-voltage power- Replace the high-voltage power-

supply PCA is defective (no supply.
transfer bias output).
The toner is not fully fused to The fuser roller or pressure Replace the fuser.
the paper. roller is scarred or deformed.
The fuser control circuit is Replace the fuser PCA.

defective.
The thermistor is defective. Replace the fuser.
The fuser heater is defective.

Some color is misregistered. The product is incorrectly Calibrate the product.

calibrated.
The ITB unit is defective. If the ITB does not rotate smoothly
or a cleaning malfunction occurs
(ITB is dirty), replace the ITB.
The drive gear of the ITB Check each drive gear between the
motor is worn or chipped. ITB drive roller and the ITB motor. If
the gear is worn or chipped, replace
the main drive assembly.
The CPR/density (RD) sensor Open and close the front door
is defective. several times to clean the CPR/
density (RD) sensor. If the problem
persists, replace the CPR/density
(RD) sensor.

The toner cartridge is Replace the toner cartridge of the

defective. affected color.
Toner smears appear on the The product has residual Remove the residual paper.
paper. paper.
The fuser inlet guide is dirty. Clean the fuser inlet guide.
The printed page contains The product is experiencing See the Text or graphics are
misformed characters. page skew. skewed on the printed page row in
this table.

Text or graphics are skewed on The registration shutter spring Check the spring and place it in the
the printed page. is unhooked. correct position.
The registration shutter spring Replace the secondary transfer

is deformed. assembly.
The printed page contains The roller or paper feed guide Clean any dirty components.
wrinkles or creases. is dirty.
A feed roller is deformed or Replace any deformed or

has deteriorated. deteriorated rollers.
The paper feed guide is Replace the paper-feed-guide unit.

damaged.

The front of the page is dirty. The photosensitive drum is Replace the toner cartridges.
dirty.
The fuser roller or pressure Execute a Pressure roller clean

roller is dirty. mode procedure. If the dirt does not
come off, replace the fuser.
NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP

tough paper provides better results
than with plain paper. You might
need to execute the cleaning
process several times to remove all
contaminants on the fuser.
Repetitive horizontal lines See repetitive image defect ruler.

appear. Clean the indicated roller. If the
contaminant does not come off,
replace appropriate roller or
assembly.
Pages have flecks of toner on Execute a cleaning page to clean

them. the contaminant off the fuser. The
cleaning page might need to be run
several time to clean the fuser. Do
not replace the fuser.
NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP

tough paper provides better results
than with plain paper. You might
need to execute the cleaning
process several times to remove all
contaminants on the fuser.
Pages have one or more Remove, and then reinstall the

skewed color planes (can toner cartridge associated with the
appear on the right or left side defect.
of the page).
Vertical density variations The surface of the Replace the toner cartridge
appear in a particular color. photosensitive drum has associated with the defect.
deteriorated.
The laser/scanner is Replace the laser/scanner

defective. assembly
Repetitive white spots appear in Repetitive white spots appear See the repetitive image defect
the image. in the image. ruler. Clean the indicated roller. If
the contaminant does not come off,
replace appropriate roller or
assembly.

The secondary transfer roller Replace the secondary transfer

is deformed or has roller assembly.
deteriorated.
An unknown substance has Replace the toner cartridge

adhered to the primary associated with the defect.
charging roller or
The ITB is dirty. Print approximately 20 pages with a

solid colored image.
The ITB is damaged. Replace the ITB.

Clean the product
Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality
problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems.
Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or
whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the product free from dust and
debris.
To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.
Print a cleaning page

Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the fuser if you are having any of the
following problems:
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.
Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.
Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.
button.
Cleaning Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the page.
4. The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges (M880)

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing which can
affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.
1. Press the power button to turn off the product,

and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
ENWW Clean the product 719

2. Open the scanner lid. Align paper that has
copy defects with the scanner glass to identify
the locations of dirt or smudges.
3. Clean the main scanner glass (callout 1), the

document-feeder glass (the small strip of
glass on the left side of the scanner, callout
2), and the white backing (callout 3). Use a
soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened 3
with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass
and white plastic backing by using a chamois
or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these 1
can damage the product. Do not place liquids
directly on the glass or platen. They might
seep and damage the product.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks
on copies when you are using the document
feeder, be sure to clean the small strip of
glass on the left side of the scanner.
2
NOTE: See this English-language video for
a demonstration of how to identify and clean
debris that causes streaks on copies:
www.youtube.com/watch?v=CGn7FJvH8sE.
4. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and
then press the power button to turn on the
product.

Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (M880)
1. Lift the document-feeder latch.
2. Open the document-feeder cover.

3. Remove any visible lint or dust from each of
the feed rollers and the separation pad using
compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water.
NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly so you
can clean the second roller.
4. Close the document-feeder cover.

If the error persists, install a document feeder
roller kit (C1P70A).

Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the 1X500-sheet paper feeder
Remove the tray and locate the rollers in the feeder.
Pickup roller (callout 1)
Feed roller (callout 2)
Separation roller (callout 3)
Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the rollers using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth
2
1

Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the 3X500-sheet paper feeder
Remove the trays and locate the rollers in the feeder.
TIP: There is one set of rollers for each tray.
Pickup rollers (callout 1)
Feed rollers (callout 2)
Separation rollers (callout 3)
1 2

Clean the pickup, feed, and separation rollers in the HCI feeder
Remove the trays and locate the rollers in the feeder.
TIP: There is one set of rollers for each tray.
Pickup rollers (callout 1)
Separation rollers (callout 3)
1 2 3

Clean the rollers in the stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch
Locate the rollers in the stapler/stacker accessory.
Stack ejection rollers (callout 1)
Inlet roller (callout 2)
Inlet roller 1 (callout 3)
Registration roller 1 (callout 4)
1 2 3 4

Clean the rollers in the booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch
Locate the rollers in the booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch accessory.
Stack ejection rollers (callout 1)
Inlet roller (callout 2)
Registration roller 1 (callout 4)
Saddle delivery roller 1 (callout 6)
Paper folding rollers (callout 7)
1 2 3 4
7
6

Clean the rollers in the IPTU
Locate the rollers in the IPTU.

Solve performance problems
Table 2-78 Solve performance problems
Problem Cause Solution
Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank Check the document that you are
pages. printing to see if content displays on all
of the pages.
The product might be malfunctioning. To check the product, print a

Configuration page.
Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow the print Print on a different type of paper.
job.
Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing might require a slower
print speed to ensure the best print
quality.
Large batches, narrow paper, and Print in smaller batches, on a different

special paper such as gloss, type of paper, or on a different size of
transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough paper.
Paper can slow the print job.
Pages did not print. The product might not be pulling paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly. correctly.
The paper is jamming in the product. Clear the jam.
The USB cable might be defective or Disconnect the USB cable at both
incorrectly connected. ends and reconnect it.
Try printing a job that has printed

in the past.
Try using a different USB cable.
Other devices are running on your The product cannot share a USB port. If
computer. you have an external hard drive or
network switchbox that is connected to
the same port as the product, the other
device might be interfering. To connect
and use the product, you must
disconnect the other device or you must
use two USB ports on the computer.
ENWW Solve performance problems 729

Solve connectivity problems
Solve USB connection problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.
Solve wired network problems

Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before
beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP
address that is listed on this page.
Poor physical connection
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
The computer is unable to communicate with the product
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
NOTE: HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft
operating systems and not of the HP print drivers. For more information, go to Microsoft at
www.microsoft.com.
Poor physical connection

1. Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity
light and the green link-status light are lit.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the
product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.
2. If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always
print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.

3. If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of
the IP address.
4. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the product

1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, type
cmd, and then press Enter.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.
For Mac OS X, open the Network Utility, and then supply the IP address in the correct field
in the Ping pane.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you
change these settings, you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print
driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if
necessary.
2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
ENWW Solve connectivity problems 731

Service mode functions
Service menu
The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access
to the Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to
enter an eight-digit personal identification number (PIN).
NOTE: The product automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are
selected or changed.
button.
3. On the sign-in screen, select Service Access Code from the drop-down list.
M855: 11085513
M880: 11088013
The following menu items appear in the Service menu:
Table 2-79 Service menu

First level Second level Value Description
Print Event Log Allows you to print or

view the product event
View Event Log log.
Clear Event Log Use this item to clear

the product event log.

Table 2-79 Service menu (continued)
Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count that
was stored in NVRAM
prior to installing a new
formatter.
Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record

the page count when
the product was
refurbished.
Document Feeder Kit Count (M880 only) Total number of pages

since the document
feeder kit was
replaced.
Document Feeder Kit Interval (M880 only) Use this item to set the
interval that causes the
product to prompt the
customer to replace
document feeder
maintenance kit.
Clean Rollers Count (M880 only) Total number of pages

since the document
feeder rollers were
cleaned.
Clean Rollers Interval (M880 only) Use this item to set the
interval that causes the
product to prompt the
customer to clean the
document feeder rollers
and separation pad.
ADF Count (M880 only) Set the total pages fed

through the document
feeder.
Flatbed Count (M880 only) Set the total pages

scanned from the
flatbed.
ADF Simplex Count (M880 only) Set the total single-

sided pages fed
through the document
feeder.
ADF Duplex Count (M880 only) Set the total two-sided

pages fed through the
document feeder.
Copy Scan Count (M880 only) Set the total copy

pages that have been
scanned.
Send Scan Count (M880 only) Set the number of

scanned pages sent to
email.
Fax Scan Count (M880 only) Set the number of

scanned pages that
have been faxed.
Copy Pages Count (M880 only) Set the number of

scanned pages that
have been printed.
ENWW Duplex Feed Cycle Count ServiceReset

mode thefunctions
number of 733
duplex pages that have
been printed.
Scanner Settings ADF Settings Leading-edge Set the calibration

values.
NOTE: M880 product only. Trailing-edge
WARNING! Do not
Left Side change these values
Front unless instructed to do
so.
Left Side
Back
Glass Settings Leading edge Set the calibration

glass values.
Left Side WARNING! Do not

Glass change these values
unless instructed to do
so.
Serial Number Set the serial number.
Service ID Use this item to show

the date that the
product was first used
on the control panel.
This eliminates the
need for users to keep
paper receipts for proof
of warranty.
Cold Reset Paper When you perform a

cold reset, the paper
size that is stored in
NVRAM is reset to the
default factory setting.
If you replace a
formatter board in a
country/region that
uses A4 as the
standard paper size,
use this menu to reset
the default paper size
to A4. LETTER and A4
are the only available
values.
New Duplex Roller Set this item to Yes if

the duplexing feed
assembly is replaced.
Media Sensor Value Use this item to record

the media sensor value
found on a replacement
paper pickup assembly.

PTT Test Mode Hook Operations Off Hook Test the internal
modem for the analog
NOTE: M880 product only. On Hook fax accessory.
Generate Random Data Select a value

from the list.
Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value

from the list.
Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value

from the list.
Generate Pulse Burst Select a value

from the list.
Generate Tone Dial Number Enter dial

number.
Generate Pulse Dial Number Enter dial

number.
Generate Single Modem Tone Range: 1100

2100 Hz
Default =
2100 Hz
Line Measurements
Fax Transmit Signal Loss
Test Support Continuous Scan 2-sided Service test options.
NOTE: M880 product only. Save to Disk
Continuous Copy 2-sided
Save to Disk
Raw Scan 2-sided
NOTE: M880 product only. Mechanical

Calibration
Continuous Print from USB
Automatic Calibrations Disabled
Enabled*
Runtime Configuration MercStine
Standard
StandardEIC
Workflow
WorkflowEIC
Reconfigure
ENWW Service mode functions 735

Product resets
Restore factory-set defaults
button.
General Settings
Restore Factory Settings
3. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
Touch the Reset button to complete the process.
NOTE: The product restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
Restore the service ID
Restore the service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date
that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the
dates:
1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used
in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.
2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.
Convert the service ID to an actual date
You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty.
Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:
1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed.
2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get
10, which represents October.
3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.
4. The complete date is 17-October-2002.
NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.

Product cold reset
Cold reset using the Preboot menu

2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When an underscore displays below the HP
logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
5. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button.
6. Touch the Home button to highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The product will initialize.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions
Active and repository firmware locations
The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating
System and the product/peripheral firmware files.
There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:
The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.
The Repository, the recovery location.
If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the product automatically copies
over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the product recovers.
If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both
locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user
must upload the firmware to the product in order for it to function again.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action.
Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware
repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be
reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the product to a bootable
state.
Characteristics of a Partial Clean
Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.
Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not
restore any customer-defined settings.
For previous HP products, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean
function for this product.
CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a Partial Clean
if you need to retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device
Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Partial Clean
The product continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.
The product will not respond to commands from the control panel.
Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
The product default settings are not properly working.
Execute a Partial Clean

3. Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight Partial Clean, and then touch the OK button.
5. Touch the OK button again.
6. Touch the Home button to highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The product initializes.
Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.
CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the product is not bootable.
Characteristics of a Format Disk
Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.
NOTE: Rebooting the product does not restore the firmware files.
Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not
restore any customer-defined settings.
After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.
After executing the Format Disk function, the product firmware must be reloaded.
CAUTION: HP recommends that you do not use the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and
the solution in the product service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk
function, the product is unusable.
HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a Format Disk if you need to
retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Format Disk
The product continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.
The product will not respond to commands from the control panel.

Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
Execute a Format Disk

3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight Format Disk, and then touch the OK button.
5. Touch the OK button again.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, you will need to reload the product
firmware.

Solve fax problems (M880)
Checklist for solving fax problems
General fax problems
Checklist for solving fax problems

Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter:
Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested
with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specifications. Do not substitute another
fax cable; the analog-fax accessory requires an analog-fax cable. It also requires an analog
phone connection.
Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory? Make sure that the
phone jack is correctly seated in the outlet. Insert the connector into the outlet until it "clicks."
NOTE: Verify that the phone jack is connected to the fax port rather than to the network port.
The ports are similar.
Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the
wall jack. Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make or receive a phone call?
What type of phone line are you using?

Dedicated line: A standard analog fax/phone line assigned to receive or send faxes.
NOTE: The phone line should be for product fax use only and not shared with other types of
telephone devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notifications to a
monitoring company.
PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax
accessory use an analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be
compatible with the fax accessory. You might need an interfacing Analog Telephone Adapter
(ATA) to connect the fax machine to digital PBX systems.
Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line
when the first incoming line is busy. Try attaching the product to the first incoming phone line.
The fax accessory answers the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-to-
answer setting.
Are you using a surge-protection device?

A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax
accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some
fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal. If you are having problems
sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the product directly to the
phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection device.
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?

If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for
the fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive
faxes. If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service,
the fax accessory answers all calls.
ENWW Solve fax problems (M880) 741

Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax
call in progress, which causes a communication error. Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active
on the fax telephone line.
Check fax accessory status

If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Configuration Page report to
check the status.
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
Reports
Configuration Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the
screen. The report consists of several pages.
NOTE: The product IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.
On the Fax Accessory Page of the Configuration Page, under the Hardware Information heading,
check the Modem Status. The following table identifies the status conditions and possible solutions.
NOTE: If the Fax Accessory Page does not print, there might be a problem with the analog fax
accessory. If you are using LAN fax or Internet fax, those configurations could be disabling the
feature.
Operational / Enabled1 The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.
Operational / Disabled1 The fax accessory is installed, but you have not configured
the required fax settings yet.
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the

HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax
feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled,
the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature,
either LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: If LAN fax is enabled, the Fax feature is unavailable

on the product control panel.
Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled1 The product has detected a firmware failure. Upgrade the
firmware.
Damaged / Enabled/Disabled1 The fax accessory has failed. Reseat the fax accessory card
and check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED,
replace the analog-fax accessory card.
1 ENABLED indicates that the analog-fax accessory is enabled and turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled
(analog fax is turned off).

General fax problems
The following are some common fax problems.
The fax failed to send

JBIG is enabled, and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability.
Turn off the JBIG setting.
An Out of Memory status message displays on the product control panel

The product storage disk is full.
Delete some stored jobs from the disk. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the
Retrieve from Device Memory button. Open the list of stored jobs or stored faxes. Select a job to
delete, and then touch the Delete button.
Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box

You are using the wrong page-content setting or the wrong resolution setting.
Try setting the Optimize Text/Picture option to Photograph setting.
You touched the Stop button to cancel a fax, but the fax was still sent
If the job is too far along in the sending process, you cannot cancel the job.
This is normal operation.
No fax address book button displays

The fax address book feature has not been enabled.
Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book
feature.
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin

Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.
Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
For all forwarded faxes, the product appends the overlay header to the top of a page.
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box

Names and numbers can both display, depending on where they are from. The fax address book lists
names, and all other databases list numbers.
ENWW Solve fax problems (M880) 743

A one-page fax prints as two pages
The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.
To print a one page fax on one page, set the overlay header to overlay mode, or adjust the fit-to-page
setting.
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing

A jam is in the document feeder.
Clear the jam, and send the fax again.
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
The volume setting needs to be adjusted.
Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu.

Product upgrades
To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to:
In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 or www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880 .

Click Drivers & Software.
Outside the US, follow these steps:
1. Go to www.hp.com/support.
2. Select your country/region.
3. Click Drivers & Software.
4. Enter the product name (HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and/or HP Color LaserJet
Enterprise flow MFP M880), and then select Search.
Determine the installed revision of firmware

Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.
On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode
and firmware revision.
Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples
20100831 (firmware datecode)
103067_104746 (firmware revision)
Perform a firmware upgrade

The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx.bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. You
cannot upgrade the product using the traditional FTP, LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading. Use
one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product.
HP Embedded Web Server

1. Open an browser window.
2. Enter the product IP address in the URL line.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab.
NOTE: If you get a warning screen, follow the instructions for setting an administrator
password from the Security tab.
4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the
firmware file. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.
NOTE: Do not close the browser window until the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays
the confirmation page.
5. Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page, or turn the product off, and then on again
using the power switch.
ENWW Product upgrades 745

USB flash drive (Preboot menu)
NOTE: Make sure that the USB port is enabled.
1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
4. Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
5. Touch the down arrow button to highlight Download, and then touch the OK button.
6. Insert the USB flash drive with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it.
NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control-panel
display, you might need to connect the storage device to the external USB connection on the
formatter or try using a different portable storage device.
7. Touch the down arrow button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.
8. Touch the down arrow button to highlight the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then touch the OK
button.
NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete.
TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you
select the correct file for this product.
9. When the message Complete displays on the control-panel display, touch the back arrow
button 3 times.
10. When the message Continue displays on the control-panel display, touch the OK button. The
product will initialize.
11. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive (control-panel menu)
1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.
button.
4. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.
5. Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it into the USB port on the
front of the product, and then touch the OK button.
6. Touch the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.
TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you
select the correct file for this product.
7. When the product prompts you to confirm the upgrade, touch the Upgrade button.
When the upgrade is complete, the product will initialize.
NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete.
8. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.
ENWW Product upgrades 747

A Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement
HP policy on non-HP supplies
HP anticounterfeit Web site
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement
Data stored on the toner cartridge
End User License Agreement
OpenSSL
Customer self-repair warranty service
Customer support
ENWW 749
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and/or HP Color One-year on-site warranty

LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or
replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent
in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date
of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when
properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will
replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is
unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will
be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been
subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or
calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the
product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND
NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied
warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state
to state, or province to province.
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for
this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may
vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it
operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT
ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT
WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE,
WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or
provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT

LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION
750 Appendix A Service and support ENWW

TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT
TO YOU.
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 751

HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge
limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit
wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description
of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either
replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.

TO YOU.

HP policy on non-HP supplies
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP toner cartridges, either new or
remanufactured.
NOTE: For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge
does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer.
However, if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or refilled
toner cartridge, HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the
particular failure or damage.
ENWW HP policy on non-HP supplies 753

HP anticounterfeit Web site
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP toner cartridge and the control-panel
message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take
steps to resolve the problem.
Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following:
The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge.
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from
HP packaging).

Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited
Warranty Statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer
provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered
with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from
ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description
of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HPs option, HP will either replace products that
prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.

TO YOU.
ENWW Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement 755
Data stored on the toner cartridge
The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of
the product.
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product,
which might include the following: the date when the toner cartridge was first installed, the date when
the toner cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge, the page
coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product
model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.
The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be
used to identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product.
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP's free return and
recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle). The memory chips from this sampling
are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this
toner cartridge might have access to this data, as well.
Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on
the memory chip.

End User License Agreement
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User
License Agreement (EULA) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you
represent) and (b) Hewlett-Packard Company (HP) that governs your use of the software product
(Software). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP
or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term
Software may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii)
online or electronic documentation (collectively User Documentation).
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO
ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING,
OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE
SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA,
PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN
DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR
MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED
PRODUCT.
1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software
(HP Software), software under licenses from third parties (Third Party Software and Third
Party License). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions
of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as
license.txt or a readme file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party
License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source
code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not
included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to
learn how to obtain such source code.
2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and
conditions of this EULA:
a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. Use means installing,
copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You
may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the
HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product
(for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may
only be used with such product (HP Product). Additional restrictions on Use may appear
in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for
Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software.
b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the
HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Softwares proprietary notices
and is used only for back-up purposes.
3. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement

(collectively Upgrade), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP
as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you
may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides
other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the
other terms will prevail.
ENWW End User License Agreement 757

4. TRANSFER.
a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer
of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts,
media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer,
the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of
the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated.
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for
commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise
transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA.
5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User
Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable
copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product
identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software.
6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or

disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed
under applicable law.
7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information
you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of
support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to
HPs privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you
except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services.
8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire
liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will
be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN
ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY
SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF
THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other
jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All
Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition
regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use,
duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government
subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License
Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws.
10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i)
applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software,
including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to
you in this EULA.
2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Rev. 04/09
ENWW End User License Agreement 759

OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Customer self-repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and
allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,
HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part
directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer
self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel
and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are
also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this
may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day
delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography
permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will
help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether
a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to
HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5)
business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the
provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the
replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine
the courier/carrier to be used.
ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 761

Customer support
Get telephone support for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in
the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/.
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase,
and problem description ready.
Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 or www.hp.com/support/

colorljflowMFPM880
Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 or www.hp.com/support/

information colorljflowMFPM880
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack
Register your product www.register.hp.com

B Product specifications
Physical specifications
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
Environmental specifications
Certificate of Volatility
ENWW 763
Physical specifications
HP LaserJet Enterprise M855
Table B-1 Physical specifications, with toner cartridge
Product Height Depth Width Weight
M855dn 613 mm (24.1 in) 703 mm (27.7 in) 714 mm (28.1 in) 85.2 kg (187.8 lb)
M855xh 1000 mm (39.4 in) 703 mm (27.7 in) 714 mm (28.1 in) 121.3 kg (267.4 lb)
M855x+ 1000 mm (39.4 in) 703 mm (27.7 in) 714 mm (28.1 in) 124.2 kg (273.8 lb)
Table B-2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened
Product Height Depth Width
M855dn 673 mm (26.5 in) 1168 mm (46 in) 1219 mm (48 in)
M855xh 1067 mm (42 in) 1168 mm (46 in) 1219 mm (48 in)
M855x+ 1067 mm (42 in) 1168 mm (46 in) 1219 mm (48 in)
HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow M880

Table B-3 Physical specifications, with toner cartridges and imaging drums
M880z 1208 mm (47.6 in) 754 mm (29.7 in) 714 mm (28.1 in) 149.6 kg (329.8 lb)
M880z+ 1208 mm (47.6 in) 754 mm (29.7 in) 714 mm (28.1 in) 152.6 kg (336.4 lb)
Table B-4 Product dimensions with all doors, trays, and document feeder fully opened
Product Height Depth Width
M880z 1593 mm (62.7 in) 1168 mm (46 in) 1219 mm (48 in)
M880z+ 1593 mm (62.7 in) 1168 mm (46 in) 1219 mm (48 in)
764 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW

Accessories
Table B-5 Accessory dimensions
1x500 sheet 422 mm (16.6 in) 716 mm (28.2 in) 704 mm (27.7 in) 25.1 kg (55.3 lb)
feeder
3x500 sheet 422 mm (16.6 in) 716 mm (28.2 in) 704 mm (27.7 in) 36.1 kg (79.6 lb)
feeder
3,500-sheet high- 424 mm (16.7 in) 699 mm (27.5 in) 704 mm (27.7 in) 39 kg (85.9 lb)
capacity input tray
Stapler/stacker 1095 mm (43 in) 671 mm (26 in) 686 mm (27 in) 54.6 kg (120.4 lb)
Stapler/stacker 1095 mm (43 in) 671 mm (26 in) 812 mm (32 in) 61.7 kg (136.0 lb)
with hole punch
Booklet maker 1095 mm (43 in) 671 mm (26 in) 686 mm (27 in) 76.3 kg (168.2 lb)
Booklet maker 1095 mm (43 in) 671 mm (26 in) 812 mm (32 in) 83.4 kg (183.9 lb)
with hole punch
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic

emissions
SSee www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 and or www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880 for current
information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
ENWW Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions 765

Environmental specifications
Table B-6 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended Allowed
Temperature 17 to 25C (62.6 to 77F) 15 to 30C (59 to 86F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH
Altitude Not applicable 0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)

Certificate of Volatility
Figure B-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP LaserJet Enterprise M855dn= A2W77A, M855xh= A2W78A, Hewlett Packard Company
M855 M855x+= A2W79A/D7P73A 11311 Chinden Blvd
HP LaserJet Enterprise M880z= A2W75A, Boise, ID 83714
Flow MFP M880 M855x+= A2W76A/D7P71A
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DDR2 - DRAM 2.5 GB Yes No Used for temporary storage When the printer is powered
during the process of jobs, and off, the memory is erased.
for applications that are
running on the OS. (Note:
Total memory on formatter
consists of 512MB on board
and an additional 1GB DIMM,
on scanner control board there
are 512MB on board and
512MB of DIMM)
Yes No
Yes No
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI Flash 4 MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data.
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
ICB EEPROM 32KB Yes No Backup device for critical There are no steps to clear this
system counters and product data.
configuration information.
None Yes No
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Self encrypting Hard 320 GB Yes No Stores customer data, OS, There are several ways to erase this:
drive, SATA2 applications, digitally signed 1. Secure Storage Erase - Erases
firmware images, persistent temporary files and job data by
data, and temporary data overwriting information one or three
used for processing and times
system functions 3. Secure Disk Erase - Industry
standard ATA Secure Erase.
Overwrites all data on the hard drive.
4. Secure File Erase - Erases files
when jobs finish processing by
overwriting them one or three times.
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 767

Figure B-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. Restore encrypted backed-up system
settings. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose: Product contains an integrated WiFi/NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802.11n and Near
Filed Communication (NFC) radio. The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection
capability. NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data (WiFi SSID, WPA configuration data). The latter is used to enable
wireless direct print for mobile devices.
Frequency: 2.4Ghz to 2.5Ghz ISM band (WiFi); Bandwidth: 1Mhz Bandwidth (WiFi);
13.56mhz ISO/IEC 18000-3 (NFC) 14Khz bandwidth (+-7Khz off center 13.56Mhz) (NFC)
Modulation: DSSS / OFDM modulation (WiFi) Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Power output max is
20dBm for WiFi; (Note: Power out max for WiFi can be
different in some regions and controlled by FW).
Power output is 23dBm, into an 50 ohm transformer, for
NFC; (Note: There will be some loss in the antenna and
therefore this is not all radiated in to the air.)
Specifications: WiFi has 13 Channel support (@ a spacing of 20MHz) for B, G, & N modes; NFC is cable of reading /
writing via the following speeds: 424 kbit/s Manchester / 10% ASK Manchester, 10% ASK; 212 kbit/s Manchester / 10%
ASK Manchester, 10% ASK; 106 kbit/s Modified Miller / 100% ASK Manchester, 10% ASK
Integrated module utilizes a USB 2.0 backplane interface.
Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Product contains an integrated WiFi/NFC accessory module consisting of an HP Umber WiFi 802.11n and Near
Filed Communication (NFC) radio. The WiFi portion acts in Access Point mode ONLY and provides AP client connection
capability. NFC is used to pass NDEF tag data (WiFi SSID, WPA configuration data). The latter is used to enable
wireless direct print for mobile devices.
Frequency: 2.4Ghz to 2.5Ghz ISM band (WiFi); 13.56mhz Bandwidth: 1Mhz Bandwidth (WiFi);
ISO/IEC 18000-3 (NFC) 14Khz bandwidth (+-7Khz off center 13.56Mhz) (NFC)
Modulation: DSSS / OFDM modulation (WiFi) Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Power output max. 20dBm
(WiFi); Power output is 23dBm into an 50 ohm transformer
(NFC) which translates to a lower. Note: Power out max for
WiFi can be different in some regions and controlled by
FW.
Specifications: WiFi has 13 Channel support (@ a spacing of 20MHz) for B, G, & N modes; NFC is cable of reading /
writing via the following speeds: 424 kbit/s Manchester / 10% ASK Manchester, 10% ASK; 212 kbit/s Manchester / 10%
ASK Manchester, 10% ASK; 106 kbit/s Modified Miller / 100% ASK Manchester, 10% ASK
Integrated module utilizes a USB 2.0 backplane interface.
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications
Author Information
Name: Title: Email: Business Unit:
Security Technical IPG
Marketing Engineer
Date Prepared: 09-03-13

Index
Symbols/Numerics acoustic specifications 765 saddle stitcher controller

1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet ADF (automatic document feeder). PCA 168
paper feeder controller PCA See document feeder sensors and paper sizes 178
connectors 309 Administration menu, control solenoids and paper sizes
1X500-sheet paper feeder rollers panel 361 179
cleaning 723 anticounterfeit supplies 754 stacker control system 169
3,500-sheet high-capacity input stacker operation 130, 165,
(HCI) B 201
cassette media-size back of page dirty, staple jams 692, 701
detection 107 troubleshooting 713 staple operation 194, 196
cassette-presence detection Backup/Restore menu, control stitcher unit 200
107 panel 438 booklet maker and booklet maker
door open jam 108 basic product operation 2 with hole punch rollers
electrical components 102 bins cleaning 727
jam detection 108 stapler/stacker 126, 130, 201
motor control 103 black page, troubleshooting 713 C
motor failure 104 blank pages cables
no pick jam 2 108 troubleshooting 729 USB, troubleshooting 729
no pick jam 3 108 blank pages, troubleshooting 712 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M855),
pickup/feed operation 105 booklet maker control panel 441
residual paper jam 1 108 crescent roller 186 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M880),
3,500-sheet high-capacity input electrical components 160 control panel 438
tray feed and delivery operation cartridges
clear jams 669 165 non-HP 753
3x500-sheet feeder feed drive system 168 warranty 752
jams 666 folding mechanism 187 cassette
3X500-sheet paper feeder rollers friction prevention 186 paper-size detection 71
cleaning 724 inlet flappers control 178 paper-size detection switches
jam detection 206 72
A jams 689 pickup operation 71
accessories motors 164 presence detection 71
3,500-sheet high-capacity input operation 175 cautions iii
feeder 101 over-current or over-voltage certificate of volatility 767
booklet maker 156 protection 159 characters, troubleshooting 716
stapler/stacker 114 paper delivery path 127 checklist
stapler/stacker with hole paper movement control 181 problems 208
punch 114 PCAs 168 circuit diagrams
accessories installed, power supply 158 general 335
information 358 circuitry. See PCAs
clean the paper path Scan/Digital Send Settings defeating
cleaning page printing 353 menu (M880) 384 interlocks 238
cleaning Service menu 442 defects, repeating 360
paper path 719 Troubleshooting menu 434 delivery system 65
product 719 troubleshooting tests 250 demo page 233
rollers 721, 723, 724, 725, USB Firmware Upgrade determine problem source 220
726, 727, 728 menu 442 determine the installed revision of
scanner glass (M880) 719 control panel diagnostic firmware 745
cleaning page 438, 441 flowcharts 226 diagnostics
clock 4 control-panel menus 361 component 250
clutches conventions, document iii control panel 250
list of product 8 copy engine 238
cold reset 734 improve quality 719 LED 233
color is misregistered, Copy Settings menu (M880 only), networks 428
troubleshooting 716 control panel 378 diagrams
component test copying block diagrams 289
special mode test 250 quality, troubleshooting 712 Display Settings menu, control
components counterfeit supplies 754 panel 413
booklet maker stacker control counts 732 document conventions iii
system 169 copy scan 733 document feeder
DC controller 8 document feeder 733 deskew 57
diagnostic tests 250 document feeder duplex 733 duplex paper path 55
diagrams of 289 document feeder simplex 733 duplex selector 61
stapler/stacker 124 flatbed cycle 733 fins 59
configuration page 233 page, reset 732 hinge 63
configuration pages refurbish cycle 733 operations 50, 51
information 358 reset after replacing formatter paper control 57
printing 354 732 paper pick 58
connectivity LED 237 send scan 733 paper stop 59
connectors See also pages counts sensors 52
DC controller PCA 303 creases, troubleshooting 716 separation 58
control panel crooked pages simplex paper path 53
Administration menu 361 troubleshooting 716 simplex selector 60
Backup/Restore menu 438 current settings pages 219 document feeder (M880)
Calibrate/Cleaning menu customer support jams 673
(M855) 441 online 762 paper-feeding problems 706
Calibrate/Cleaning menu document feeder count
(M880) 438 D document feeder pages 733
Copy Settings menu (M880 dark print, troubleshooting 712 document feeder interval 733
only) 378 date document feeder rollers (M880)
Display Settings menu 413 codes for firmware 358 cleaning 721
Fax Settings menu (M880) manufacture 356 dropouts, troubleshooting 715
395 product first used 734
General Settings menu 363 DC controller E
Manage Supplies menu 415 components 8 EIO interface 4
Manage Trays menu 420 PCA, connectors 303 electrical components 8
Network Settings menu 422 DC controller PCA connectors electrical specifications 765
Print Options menu 411 303 embedded web server 745
Print Settings menu 408 DC voltages 15
Reports menu 361
engine G HVPS (high-voltage power
diagnostics 238 General Settings menu, control supply) 19
test page 240 panel 363
engine-control system 7 I
event log 233 H image in a particular color does not
clear 650, 732 hardware integration pocket (HIP) print in the correct color,
information 358 is not functionin 232 troubleshooting 715
print 649 HCI (3,500-sheet high-capacity image quality issues
view 649 input) examples and solutions 712
event-log messages 649 cassette media-size image-formation
detection 107 system 27
F cassette-presence detection imaging drums
faded print 712 107 diagnostic test 239
fans 14 door open jam 108 individual component
fax electrical components 102 disagnostics 233
feeding problems 743 jam detection 108 initial rotation (INTR) state 3
Fax Settings menu (M880), control motor control 103 installation
panel 395 motor failure 104 date calculation 734
feed and delivery operation no pick jam 2 108 verify for optional
booklet maker 165 no pick jam 3 108 accessories 354
feed system 65 pickup/feed operation 105 interlocks
feed-and-delivery operation residual paper jam 1 108 defeating 238
hole punch 122 HCI feeder controller PCA intermediate paper transportation
puncher assembly 145 connectors 307 unit (IPTU)
stapler/stacker 122 HCI feeder rollers electrical components 110
feeding problems 743 cleaning 725 fan failure detection 112
finishing accessoriesPCA heaters 21 feed operation 111
connectors 311 high-voltage power supply jam detection 113
firmware (HVPS) 19 jam sensors 113
date codes 358 hole punch motor control 111
version information 356 feed-and-delivery operation motor failure detection 112
firmware, downloading new 745 122 motors 111
flash memory card 4 jam detection 152 sensorsl 111
flecks on page, troubleshooting motor failure detection 121 INTR (initial rotation) state 3
717 motors 121 IPTU (intermediate paper
flowcharts hole puncher assembly transportation unit)
troubleshooting 220 feed-and-delivery operation electrical components 110
folding, booklet maker 187 145 fan failure detection 112
in stacker unit 188 jam detection 153 feed operation 111
formatter home button is unresponsive 231 jam detection 113
resets after replacing 732 horizontal white lines, jam sensors 113
formatter control system 4 troubleshooting 714 motor control 111
formatter lights 233 HP Customer Care 762 motor failure detection 112
fraud Web site 754 HP embedded Jetdirect page motors 111
front of page dirty, 356 sensors 111
troubleshooting 717 HP fraud Web site 754 IPTU rollers
fuser HP Jetdirect Inside (JDI) 4 cleaning 728
jams 659 HP Jetdirect print server IPv4 information 357
fuser heater protection 23 configuration page 356 IPv6 information 357
fuser-control circuit 21 lights 233
J LSTR (last rotation) state 3 model number 356
jack locations 316 LVPS (low-voltage power motor control
jam detection supply) 15 HCI 103
booklet maker 206 motor failure detection
puncher assembly 153 M HCI 104
stapler/stacker 152 major components, base product motors
stapler/stacker assembly 154 318 booklet maker 164
jams major components, finishing failure detection in hole
3,500-sheet high-capacity input accessories 327 punch 121
tray 669 major components, high-capacity failure detection in stapler/
3x500-sheet feeder 666 input (HCI) 321 stacker 121
auto-navigation 651 Manage Supplies menu, control folding mechanism 187
booklet maker 689 panel 415 hole punch 121
causes of 651, 707 Manage Trays menu, control overview of product 12
detection theory 89 panel 420 paper path 68
diagnostic test for 240 manual print modes 708 stack job offset 136
document feeder (M880) 673 manual sensor test 243 stapler/stacker 121
fuser 659 mechanism for booklet maker stapling 197
output-accessory bridge 677 folding overview 187
right door 659 memory N
staple in hole punch flash card 4 Network Settings menu, control
accessory 682 information 354 panel 422
stapler/stacker 679, 685, 695 RAM 4 networks
staples in booklet maker 701 ROM 4 diagnostics 428
Tray 1 659 memory chip, toner cartridge HP embedded Jetdirect
Tray 2 663 description 756 configuration page 356
JDI (HP Jetdirect Inside) 4 menu map 211 link speed settings 433
Jetdirect Inside (JDI) 4 menus, control panel no control panel sound 230
Jetdirect print server Administration 361 non-HP supplies 753
lights 233 Backup/Restore 438 non-volatile memory (NVRAM) 4
Calibrate/Cleaning (M855) notes iii
L 441 NVRAM (non-volatile memory) 4
laser/scanner Calibrate/Cleaning (M880)
operations 26 438 O
system 26 Copy Settings (M880 only) offset printing. See stack job offset
last rotation (LSTR) state 3 378 online support 762
LCD control panel 6 Display Settings 413 ontrol-panel messages and event-
LEDs Fax Settings (M880) 395 log log entries 442
list of product 8 General Settings 363 operations
license, software 757 Manage Supplies 415 basic product 2
light print, troubleshooting 712 Manage Trays 420 document feeder 51
lights Network Settings 422 engine-control system 7
formatter 233 Print Options 411 laser/scanner 26
troubleshooting with 233 Print Settings 408 scanner 50
link speed settings 433 Reports 361 sequence of 3
locations of major components Scan/Digital Send Settings optional input trays and trays 92
318 (M880) 384 output-accessory bridge
loose toner, troubleshooting 715 Service 442 jams 677
low-voltage power supply Troubleshooting 434 over-current protection
(LVPS) 15 USB Firmware Upgrade 442 booklet maker 159
product 17 stapling 197 stop for testing 250
stacker unit 158 stop movement for testing troubleshooting 729
over-voltage protection 250 problem-solving
booklet maker 159 paper pickup problems control-panel messages and
product 17 solving 706 event-log log entries 442
stacker unit 158 paper-path event-log messages 649
test, sensors 241 networks 428
P password Process Cleaning Page 438
pages Service menu PIN 732 product cold reset 737
blank 729 PCAs (printed circuit assemblies) product resets 736
not printing 729 booklet maker 165, 168
printing slowly 729 stapler/stacker 124 Q
skewed 716 photo sensors 65 quality. See print quality
pages count 732 photointerrupters
from product copy scan count list of product 8 R
733 physical specifications 764 RAM (random access memory)
from product document pickup, feed, and delivery product 4
feeder 733 booklet maker 168, 181 random access memory (RAM)
from product flatbed 733 product 65 product 4
from product refurbish date stapler/stacker 126 read only memory (ROM) 4
733 pickup-and-feed system 70 repeating defects,
reset 732 plug/jack locations 316 troubleshooting 360
See also counts port configuration information repetitive defects ruler 360
paper 356 repetitive horizontal lines,
default size reset 734 port locations 316 troubleshooting 717
jams 651, 707 power repetitive white spots,
movement operation 65 consumption 765 troubleshooting 717
movement through booklet power subsystem 221 Reports menu, control panel 361
maker 181 power supply resolution
offset stacking 136, 192 booklet maker 158 troubleshooting quality 712
stop in path for testing 250 troubleshooting 221 restore factory settings 736
wrinkled 716 power-on troubleshooting restore the service ID 736
paper jams overview 221 right door
3,500-sheet high-capacity input preboot menu options 212 jams 659
tray 669 Print Options menu, control rollers
3x500-sheet feeder 666 panel 411 crescent, booklet maker 186
booklet maker 689 print quality stapling 198
document feeder (M880) 673 built-in troubleshooting pages ROM (read only memory) 4
fuser 659 349 ruler, repetitive defect 360
output-accessory bridge 677 manual print modes 708
right door 659 test pages 349 S
stapler/stacker 679, 685, 695 troubleshooting 712 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu
Tray 1 659 print quality troubleshooting 360 (M880), control panel 384
Tray 2 663 Print Settings menu, control scanner
paper path panel 408 operations 50
booklet maker 174 PRINT state 3 tests M880 287
diagnostic test 240 Print Test Page 366 scanner glass
stapler/stacker 127 printing cleaning 719
modes, manual 708 scanner settings 734
security settings information 356
sensors SS (stapler/stacker) staple operation 196
and paper sizes, booklet feed-and-delivery operation staple unit operation 199
maker 178 122 stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker
diagnostic tests 241 jam detection 152 with hole punch rollers
folding mechanism 187 motor failure detection 121 cleaning 726
list of product 8 motors 121 stapler/stacker assembly
stack job offset 136 stack job offset, components and jam detection 154
stacker control system, booklet operation 136, 192 status page 233
maker 169 stacker status, fax accessory page 742
stapling 196, 198 staple jams 682 STBY (standby) state 3
tests, manual 243 stacker unit, booklet maker stitcher unit, booklet maker 200
tests, manual tray/bin 247 feed drive system 168 stop printing for test 250
sensors and switches folding of stack 188 supplies
paper path 65 operation 165 counterfeit 754
separation of paper. See stack job over-current protection 158 non-HP 753
offset PCAs 165 support
sequence of operation 3 power supply 158 online 762
serial number 734 staple operation 194 switches
Service ID standby (STBY) state 3 fuser 21
convert to date 734 staple jams list of product 8
restore 734 booklet maker 692, 701 paper path 65
Service menu options 732 stapler/stacker 682
Service menu, control panel 442 stapler 200 T
service mode functions 732 booklet maker 200 TCP/IP information 357
settings See also stitcher unit; stapler/ technical support
restore factory 736 stacker online 762
shutter, stapler/stacker 133, 204 stapler/stacker temperatures
size specifications, product 764 jams 679, 685, 695 abnormal 23
skewed color planes, staple jams 682 tests
troubleshooting 717 stapler/stacker (BM) component tests list and
skewed pages stack job offset 192 descriptions 251
troubleshooting 716 stapler/stacker (SS) disable cartridge check 239
smeared toner, troubleshooting components 124 engine 240
716 feed drive system 126 manual sensor 243
software feed-and-delivery operation networks 428
software license agreement 122 paper path 240
757 jam detection 152 paper-path sensors 241
solenoids motor failure detection 121 print/stop 250
and paper sizes, booklet motors 121 scanner M880 287
maker 179 operation, basic 124 scanner tests 287
list of product 8 output bin operation 130, 201 tray/bin manual sensor 247
paper path 68 output bins 126 text, troubleshooting 716
solve connectivity problems 730 paper delivery path 127 thermistors 21
solve performance problems 729 paper path for stapling 197 thermoswitch 21
solve problems 207 PCAs 124 timing chart 333
solving shift process, stapler 199 tips iii
direct-connect problems 730 shutter operation 133, 204 toner
specifications stack job offset 136 loose, troubleshooting 715
electrical and acoustic 765 stacker operation 130, 201 smeared, troubleshooting 716
physical 764
toner cartridges wired network 730 Web sites
diagnostic test 239 wrinkles 716 customer support 762
memory chips 756 Troubleshooting menu, control fraud reports 754
non-HP 753 panel 434 white spots, troubleshooting 713
warranty 752 wrinkles, troubleshooting 716
touchscreen blank, white, or dim U
(no image) 227 understand lights on the formatter
touchscreen control panel 6 formatter lights 233
touchscreen has an unresponsive understand the lights on the
zone 229 formatter
touchscreen is slow to respond connectivity LED 234
228 connectivity LED, product 234
Tray 1 heartbeat LED 237
jams 659 heartbeat LED, product
Tray 2 operating 237
jams 663 HP Jetdirect LEDs 237
tray selection - use requested upgrade firmware 745
tray 420 upgrades, downloading product
troubleshooting 207 745
blank pages 729 USB Firmware Upgrade menu,
checklist 208 control panel 442
clean the paper path 353 USB flash drive 746, 747
configuration page 233 USB interface 4
configuration pages for 354 USB port
control panel 250 troubleshooting 729
control panel checks 222 Use Requested Tray 420
demo page 233
direct-connect problems 730 V
event log 233 version, hardware firmware 356
flowchart 220 vertical density variation,
jams 651, 707 troubleshooting 717
lights, using 233 vertical streaks or bands,
network problems 730 troubleshooting 713
pages not printing 729 vertical white lines all colors,
pages printing slowly 729 troubleshooting 714
paper feed problems 706 vertical white lines,
power 221 troubleshooting 714
print quality issues 712 voltages
process 220 DC 15
repeating defects 360 over-current protection 17
reports and tools 233
scanner calibration 222 W
scanning subsystem (M880) WAIT state 3
222 warnings iii
skewed pages 716 warranty
status page 233 customer self repair 761
text 716 license 757
toner smear 716 product 750
USB cables 729 toner cartridges 752
warranty date information 734
2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*A2W77-90998*
*A2W77-90998*
A2W77-90998

HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationHP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LASERJET ENTERPRISE M855

LASERJET ENTERPRISE FLOW MFP M880

M855dn M855xh M855x+

2013 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Adobe, Adobe Photoshop, Acrobat, and

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

1 Theory of operation ........................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Solve problems ............................................................................................................................................. 207

Appendix A Service and support ..................................................................................................................... 749

Appendix B Product specifications .................................................................................................................. 763

Table 1-1Sequence of operation (product base) ............................................................................................... 3

Figure 1-1Relationship between the main product systems ............................................................................. 2

Scanning/image capture system

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder

3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder

Intermediate paper transportation unit

Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch

Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch

The basic product operation comprises the following systems:

Scanner and document feeder functions and operations

Figure 1-1 Relationship between the main product systems

ENGINE CONTROL PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM

SCANNER (M855 only)

2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW

Normal sequence of operation

Table 1-1 Sequence of operation (product base)

Name Timing Purpose

Detects the home position for the intermediate-transfer

Cleans waste toner from the ITB

Calibrates if it is time for an automatic calibration

Warms the fuser to the appropriate temperature

Fuses the toner image onto the paper

Performs calibration after a specified number of pages

Discharges the bias from the high-voltage power supply

ENWW Basic operation 3

Controlling sleep mode

Storing font information

Table 1-2 Formatter hardware components

Microprocessor Stores fonts and microprocessor control programs.

4 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW

A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received

A control panel button is pressed

A paper tray is opened

The engine-test switch is pressed

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)

ENWW Formatter-control system 5

6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW

Low-voltage power supply

High-voltage power supply

Figure 1-2 Engine-control system

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Low-voltage power suppl y

High-voltage power suppl y

ENWW Engine-control system 7

Figure 1-3 DC controller block diagram

Formatter Connector PCA Laser scanner assy